S210 S-1FK2 S-1FT2 Op Instr 0323 en-US

Valid for converters with Article No. 6SL5310-1B...
Edition 03/2023
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SINAMICS/SIMOTICS
SINAMICS S210 servo drive system
SINAMICS S210 converter from FW V6.1
SIMOTICS S-1FK2 and S-1FT2 servomotors
www.siemens.com/drives
Introduction 1
Fundamental safety
instructions 2
Overview 3
SINAMICS/SIMOTICS Configuring 4
Safety Integrated Functions 5
SINAMICS S210 servo drive Installing 6
system with SIMOTICS S-1FK2 and Commissioning (web
7
server)
S-1FT2
Operating Instructions Commissioning (Startdrive) 8
Series commissioning 9
Diagnostics 10
Service and maintenance 11
Technical specifications 12
Dimension drawings 13
Decommissioning and
disposal 14
Accessories and spare parts 15
Ordering data 16
Parameters 17
Faults and alarms 18
Appendix A
Valid for converters with Article No. 6SL5310-1B...
Translation of the original instructions

03/2023, FW V6.1
A5E52380168B AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E52380168B AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2023.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 03/2023 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 17
1.1 About SINAMICS ................................................................................................................ 17
1.2 About this manual ............................................................................................................. 17
1.2.1 Content ............................................................................................................................. 17
1.2.2 Target group ...................................................................................................................... 18
1.2.3 Standard scope .................................................................................................................. 18
1.2.4 Websites of third-party companies...................................................................................... 18
1.3 SINAMICS documentation .................................................................................................. 19
1.4 Service and Support........................................................................................................... 20
1.4.1 Siemens Industry Online Support on the Web..................................................................... 20
1.4.2 Siemens Industry Online Support on the road..................................................................... 20
1.4.3 Getting information about the product............................................................................... 21
1.4.4 Feedback on the technical documentation ......................................................................... 22
1.4.5 mySupport documentation ................................................................................................ 22
1.4.6 Technical support............................................................................................................... 23
1.4.7 Training ............................................................................................................................. 24
1.4.8 Spare parts services ........................................................................................................... 24
1.5 Important product information .......................................................................................... 24
1.5.1 Proper and intended use .................................................................................................... 24
1.5.2 Updates and constraints..................................................................................................... 26
1.5.3 Open-source software (OSS) .............................................................................................. 26
1.5.4 Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation.................................................... 26
2 Fundamental safety instructions......................................................................................................... 29
2.1 General safety instructions................................................................................................. 29
2.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ..................................... 36
2.3 Warranty and liability for application examples ................................................................... 36
2.4 Security information .......................................................................................................... 37
2.5 Residual risks of power drive systems ................................................................................. 38
3 Overview.............................................................................................................................................. 41
3.1 System overview................................................................................................................ 41
3.2 Commissioning tools.......................................................................................................... 45
3.3 The scope of supply for the system components ................................................................. 46
3.4 Motor ................................................................................................................................ 47
3.5 Motor-converter combinations for 1FK2 ............................................................................. 50
3.5.1 Motor-converter combinations for 1 AC 200 ... 240 V.......................................................... 50
SINAMICS S210 servo drive system with SIMOTICS S-1FK2 and S-1FT2
Operating Instructions, 03/2023, FW V6.1, A5E52380168B AA 3
Table of contents
3.6 Motor-converter combinations for 1FT2.............................................................................. 53

3.7 Converter .......................................................................................................................... 58
3.8 Connection system ............................................................................................................ 63
4 Configuring .......................................................................................................................................... 65
4.1 Permissible line supplies and connection options................................................................ 65
4.1.1 Converters with 1 AC line connection ................................................................................. 65
4.1.2 Converters with 3 AC line connection ................................................................................. 66
4.1.3 Permissible line system configurations for motors ............................................................... 66
4.1.4 Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor ............................................................ 67
4.1.5 Connection options for converters with 1 AC line connection.............................................. 68
4.1.6 Connection options for converters with 3 AC line connection.............................................. 72
4.1.7 Line connection via protection and monitoring equipment ................................................. 76
4.1.7.1 Overcurrent protective devices (mandatory) ....................................................................... 76
4.1.7.2 Residual current devices (optional) ..................................................................................... 77
4.2 Configuring the motor........................................................................................................ 79
4.2.1 Configuration sequence ..................................................................................................... 79
4.2.2 Clarify the drive type .......................................................................................................... 80
4.2.3 Define the boundary conditions and incorporate them into the automation system............. 81
4.2.4 Define the load case, calculate the maximum load torque and determine the motor ............ 82
4.3 Configuring the braking resistor ......................................................................................... 86
4.3.1 Calculating the braking energy........................................................................................... 87
4.3.2 Requirements placed on the external braking resistor ........................................................ 89
4.3.3 Connecting an external braking resistor.............................................................................. 92
4.4 DC link coupling (for converters with 3 AC line connection) ................................................ 93
4.5 Vertical axis ....................................................................................................................... 94
4.5.1 Setting SS1 in conjunction with vertical axes ...................................................................... 94
4.5.2 Setting the electronic counterweight for a vertical axis ....................................................... 96
4.6 Application examples ......................................................................................................... 96
4.7 Establishing communication of the converter with the controller ........................................ 97
4.8 Functions that require licensing.......................................................................................... 98
4.8.1 Fundamentals.................................................................................................................... 98
4.8.2 System responses to under-licensing (ramp-up).................................................................. 99
4.8.3 System responses to under-licensing (operation) .............................................................. 100
4.8.4 Creating and downloading the license file ........................................................................ 100
4.8.5 Downloading the license file at a later time ...................................................................... 101
4.8.6 Transferring the license file to the converter and activating it ............................................ 102
4.8.7 Restoring licensing after the memory card is removed ...................................................... 103
4.8.8 Loading certificates of license (eCoL) into the file directory of the operating unit ............... 103
5 Safety Integrated Functions .............................................................................................................. 105
5.1 Safety Integrated Functions.............................................................................................. 105
5.2 Certification ..................................................................................................................... 106
4 Operating Instructions, 03/2023, FW V6.1, A5E52380168B AA
Table of contents
5.3 PFH values ....................................................................................................................... 108

5.4 Usage time ...................................................................................................................... 108
5.5 Stop functions ................................................................................................................. 109
5.5.1 Safe Torque Off (STO)....................................................................................................... 109
5.5.2 Safe Stop 1 (SS1) ............................................................................................................. 111
5.5.2.1 Safe Stop 1 with time control (SS1-t) ................................................................................ 112
5.5.2.2 Safe Stop 1 with acceleration monitoring (SS1-a).............................................................. 114
5.5.2.3 Safe Stop 1 with braking ramp monitoring (SS1-r) ............................................................ 115
5.6 Safe Brake Management .................................................................................................. 117
5.6.1 Safe Brake Control (SBC) .................................................................................................. 117
5.7 Motion monitoring........................................................................................................... 119
5.7.1 Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) ............................................................................................... 119
5.7.1.1 SLS with one limit value only............................................................................................ 120
5.7.1.2 SLS with multiple limit values........................................................................................... 121
5.7.1.3 SLS with variable speed limit value ................................................................................... 123
5.7.1.4 Limitation of the speed setpoint for SLS............................................................................ 123
5.7.2 Safe Speed Monitor (SSM)................................................................................................ 124
5.7.3 Safe Direction (SDI).......................................................................................................... 126
5.7.3.1 Limitation of the speed setpoint for SDI ............................................................................ 128
5.8 Safety Integrated commissioning and configuration.......................................................... 128
5.8.1 Selection of the Safety Integrated Functions ..................................................................... 129
5.8.2 Safety Integrated parameterization................................................................................... 130
5.8.3 Safety Integrated control.................................................................................................. 131
5.8.3.1 PROFIsafe configuration ................................................................................................... 131
5.8.3.2 Transferring the F-DI status via PROFIsafe ......................................................................... 132
5.8.3.3 EMERGENCY STOP via terminals of the failsafe digital input (F-DI) ..................................... 133
5.8.3.4 F-DI configuration ............................................................................................................ 133
5.8.3.5 Discrepancy time ............................................................................................................. 134
5.8.3.6 Input filter........................................................................................................................ 135
5.8.3.7 Self-test of the failsafe digital input (F-DI)......................................................................... 135
5.8.4 Acceptance - completion of commissioning ...................................................................... 137
5.8.4.1 Acceptance test requirements .......................................................................................... 137
5.8.4.2 Acceptance test for the converter ..................................................................................... 138
5.8.4.3 Examples of acceptance tests ........................................................................................... 139
5.8.4.4 Test of brake output ......................................................................................................... 141
5.8.4.5 Information about series acceptance ................................................................................ 142
5.8.4.6 Information pertaining to component replacements ......................................................... 142
5.9 Status and diagnostics of the Safety Integrated Functions ................................................. 144
5.10 Responses to safety faults and alarms............................................................................... 146
5.10.1 Stop responses................................................................................................................. 146
5.10.2 Fail-safe acknowledgment of safety messages .................................................................. 146
5.11 Priority of stop responses and stop functions .................................................................... 147
5.12 Response times................................................................................................................ 148
5.12.1 Monitoring cycle and PROFIsafe cycle ............................................................................... 148
5.12.2 Response times when controlling via PROFIsafe ................................................................ 149
5.12.3 Response times when controlling via terminals................................................................. 150
5.12.4 Response times - independent of the control type ............................................................ 150
Table of contents
5.13 Functional safety ............................................................................................................. 151

5.14 Machinery Directive ......................................................................................................... 152
6 Installing ............................................................................................................................................ 153
6.1 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system .......................................................... 153
6.2 Installing the motor ......................................................................................................... 153
6.2.1 Mounting instructions for the motor ................................................................................ 155
6.2.2 Attaching the output elements......................................................................................... 156
6.3 Installing the converter .................................................................................................... 157
6.3.1 Installation conditions...................................................................................................... 157
6.3.2 Dimensions and drilling dimensions ................................................................................. 160
6.4 Connecting the converter and the motor .......................................................................... 161
6.4.1 Cable lengths................................................................................................................... 162
6.4.2 Connecting a MOTION-CONNECT cable at the motor......................................................... 163
6.4.3 Connecting the power cable to the motor......................................................................... 165
6.4.4 Connecting the converter................................................................................................. 168
6.4.5 Converters with 1 AC line connection ............................................................................... 172
6.4.5.1 Connecting the MOTION-CONNECT cable to the converter ................................................ 172
6.4.5.2 Connecting the converter to the line supply...................................................................... 174
6.4.5.3 Using several single-phase converters in machines and plants........................................... 174
6.4.5.4 Connecting a braking resistor........................................................................................... 176
6.4.6 Converter with 3 AC line connection................................................................................. 177
6.4.6.1 Connecting the MOTION-CONNECT cable to the converter ................................................ 177
6.4.6.2 Connecting the converter to the line supply...................................................................... 179
6.4.6.3 DC link coupling............................................................................................................... 182
6.4.6.4 Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling ...................................................... 183
6.4.6.5 Connecting a braking resistor........................................................................................... 185
6.4.7 Additional connections at 1 AC / 3 AC converters .............................................................. 186
6.4.7.1 Connecting digital inputs and the external 24 V supply..................................................... 186
6.4.7.2 Connecting service interface and PROFINET...................................................................... 188
6.4.8 Connection examples....................................................................................................... 189
6.4.9 Connection examples of the fail-safe digital input............................................................. 191
7 Commissioning (web server) ............................................................................................................. 193
7.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 193
7.2 Requirements for commissioning ..................................................................................... 193
7.3 Fundamentals.................................................................................................................. 194
7.3.1 Supported operating units ............................................................................................... 194
7.3.2 Supported browsers ......................................................................................................... 194
7.3.3 Communication interfaces ............................................................................................... 195
7.3.4 Making the operating instructions available for the web server information system........... 195
7.3.5 Using the web server information system ......................................................................... 197
7.3.6 Reloading pages .............................................................................................................. 201
7.4 Getting Started ................................................................................................................ 201
7.4.1 Calling the web server...................................................................................................... 201
7.4.2 Settings for brand-new converters.................................................................................... 202
7.4.3 Basic settings .................................................................................................................. 202
7.4.4 Security settings .............................................................................................................. 203
Table of contents
7.5 Functions and menus....................................................................................................... 205

7.5.1 Home page...................................................................................................................... 205
7.5.2 Commissioning ................................................................................................................ 206
7.5.2.1 Complete commissioning workflow.................................................................................. 206
7.5.2.2 Quick setup ..................................................................................................................... 208
7.5.2.3 Testing the converter configuration .................................................................................. 212
7.5.2.4 Optimization.................................................................................................................... 213
7.5.2.5 Safety Integrated commissioning ..................................................................................... 215
7.5.3 Operator control and monitoring...................................................................................... 218
7.5.3.1 Drive status ..................................................................................................................... 218
7.5.3.2 Inputs/outputs ................................................................................................................. 220
7.5.4 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................... 220
7.5.4.1 Messages......................................................................................................................... 220
7.5.4.2 Diagnostics buffer ............................................................................................................ 222
7.5.4.3 Safety Integrated ............................................................................................................. 223
7.5.4.4 Connection overview ....................................................................................................... 225
7.5.4.5 Communication ............................................................................................................... 226
7.5.4.6 Status word and control word .......................................................................................... 228
7.5.5 Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 229
7.5.5.1 Parameter list................................................................................................................... 229
7.5.5.2 User-defined parameter list .............................................................................................. 231
7.5.6 Backup and restore .......................................................................................................... 232
7.5.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 232
7.5.6.2 Save drive data to backup file ........................................................................................... 234
7.5.6.3 Status after backing up .................................................................................................... 234
7.5.6.4 Restore drive data from backup file................................................................................... 235
7.5.6.5 Restore factory settings.................................................................................................... 236
7.5.6.6 Restore Safety Integrated to factory settings ..................................................................... 237
7.5.7 System ............................................................................................................................ 237
7.5.7.1 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 237
7.5.7.2 User management ........................................................................................................... 239
7.5.7.3 Protection & Security........................................................................................................ 240
7.5.7.4 Licenses........................................................................................................................... 242
7.5.7.5 Firmware update.............................................................................................................. 243
7.5.7.6 About web server............................................................................................................. 244
7.5.8 Support ........................................................................................................................... 244
7.5.9 Control panel................................................................................................................... 245
8 Commissioning (Startdrive)............................................................................................................... 247
8.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 247
8.2 Requirements for commissioning ..................................................................................... 247
8.3 Basics .............................................................................................................................. 248
8.3.1 Communication interfaces ............................................................................................... 248
8.3.2 Loading data from the drive into the project ..................................................................... 249
8.3.3 Loading project data into the drive ................................................................................... 249
8.3.4 Saving changes in the project........................................................................................... 250
8.3.5 Retentively saving changes............................................................................................... 251
8.3.6 Using parameter lists and user-defined lists ...................................................................... 252
8.4 Procedures for device configuration and commissioning ................................................... 253
8.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 253
Table of contents
8.4.2 Simple basic parameterization (offline) ............................................................................. 254

8.4.3 Simple basic parameterization (online)............................................................................. 255
8.4.4 Basic parameterization together with a SIMATIC controller ................................................ 256
8.5 Combining and configuring devices in the project............................................................. 257
8.5.1 Converter ........................................................................................................................ 257
8.5.1.1 Inserting a converter into the project................................................................................ 257
8.5.1.2 Optional: Replacing a converter........................................................................................ 259
8.5.1.3 Making detailed converter settings................................................................................... 262
8.5.1.4 Specifying a motor........................................................................................................... 264
8.5.1.5 Optional: Replacing the motor.......................................................................................... 265
8.5.2 Control and technology object ......................................................................................... 269
8.5.2.1 Inserting a SIMATIC S7 controller into the project.............................................................. 269
8.5.2.2 Networking the SIMATIC S7 controller and converter ........................................................ 271
8.5.2.3 Inserting a technology object into the SIMATIC S7 controller ............................................. 273
8.5.2.4 Interconnecting the technology object and drive .............................................................. 275
8.6 Carrying out guided quick startup .................................................................................... 277
8.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 277
8.6.2 User interface .................................................................................................................. 278
8.6.3 Editing mode (only online)............................................................................................... 280
8.6.4 Connection to PLC............................................................................................................ 282
8.6.5 Limits .............................................................................................................................. 283
8.6.6 I/O configuration.............................................................................................................. 284
8.6.7 Telegrams (only offline).................................................................................................... 285
8.6.8 Rotating & optimizing ...................................................................................................... 286
8.6.9 Overview (offline) ............................................................................................................ 288
8.6.10 (Online) overview ............................................................................................................ 289
8.7 Configuring the converter ................................................................................................ 289
8.7.1 Fundamentals.................................................................................................................. 289
8.7.2 Carry out the basic parameterization ................................................................................ 290
8.7.3 Configuring digital inputs via technology object................................................................ 291
8.7.3.1 Configuring a measuring probe using the technology object ............................................. 292
8.7.4 Safety Integrated ............................................................................................................. 294
8.7.4.1 Fundamentals for Safety Integrated commissioning ......................................................... 294
8.7.4.2 Starting/exiting Safety Integrated editing mode ................................................................ 296
8.7.4.3 Permanently saving Safety Integrated parameterization .................................................... 297
8.7.4.4 Security for Safety Integrated ........................................................................................... 298
8.7.4.5 Carrying out an acceptance test. ...................................................................................... 298
8.7.5 Configuring telegrams...................................................................................................... 307
8.7.5.1 Calling the telegram configuration ................................................................................... 307
8.7.5.2 Telegram settings............................................................................................................. 308
8.7.5.3 Adding telegrams............................................................................................................. 309
8.8 Optimizing commissioning............................................................................................... 310
8.8.1 Establishing online connection......................................................................................... 310
8.8.2 Traversing the drive from the control panel with speed setpoint........................................ 311
8.8.3 Perform One Button Tuning.............................................................................................. 312
8.8.4 Terminating the online connection................................................................................... 314
8.9 Using online diagnostic functions..................................................................................... 314
8.9.1 Diagnostics icons ............................................................................................................. 314
8.9.2 Display messages ............................................................................................................. 315
8.9.3 Calling Online & Diagnostics ............................................................................................ 316
Table of contents
8.9.4 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................... 317

8.9.5 Security ........................................................................................................................... 318
8.9.6 Communication ............................................................................................................... 319
8.9.6.1 Receive direction.............................................................................................................. 319
8.9.6.2 Send direction ................................................................................................................. 320
8.9.7 Functions......................................................................................................................... 321
8.9.7.1 Resetting PROFINET interfaces.......................................................................................... 321
8.9.7.2 Setting the time with synchronization (NTP server)........................................................... 323
8.9.7.3 Setting the time with synchronization (PLC as NTP server) ................................................ 323
8.9.7.4 Setting the time without synchronization ......................................................................... 324
8.9.8 Backup and restore .......................................................................................................... 325
8.9.8.1 Restart the drive now....................................................................................................... 325
8.9.8.2 Retentively saving the drive data ...................................................................................... 326
8.9.8.3 Restore factory settings.................................................................................................... 326
8.9.8.4 Restoring the Safety Integrated factory settings ................................................................ 327
8.9.9 Overview of licenses ........................................................................................................ 328
8.9.10 Updating the firmware in the Startdrive project................................................................. 330
8.10 Checking using the trace function .................................................................................... 332
8.10.1 Example: Selecting signal bits and setting the trigger event .............................................. 334
9 Series commissioning ........................................................................................................................ 337
9.1 Series commissioning with memory card ......................................................................... 338
9.2 Series commissioning using the web server ...................................................................... 338
10 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................ 341
10.1 Status displays and operating elements on the converter .................................................. 341
10.1.1 Overview of display and operating elements on the converter .......................................... 341
10.1.2 Status display via LEDs ..................................................................................................... 342
10.2 Message classes in accordance with PROFIdrive ................................................................ 344
10.3 Alarms............................................................................................................................. 348
10.4 Faults .............................................................................................................................. 348
11 Service and maintenance .................................................................................................................. 351
11.1 Service and maintenance for the motor............................................................................ 351
11.1.1 Replacing the motor bearings........................................................................................... 353
11.1.2 Replacing the motor......................................................................................................... 354
11.2 Service and maintenance for the converter....................................................................... 356
11.2.1 Restoring the converter to factory settings ....................................................................... 356
11.2.1.1 Restoring factory settings via a commissioning tool .......................................................... 356
11.2.1.2 Manual reset to factory settings with memory card........................................................... 356
11.2.2 Converter firmware update............................................................................................... 358
11.2.3 Firmware update via memory card ................................................................................... 358
11.2.4 Replacing fans - only for converters with 3 AC line connection .......................................... 359
11.2.5 Forming the DC link capacitors ......................................................................................... 361
11.2.6 Replacing the converter in a spare part scenario ............................................................... 365
11.2.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 365
11.2.6.2 Replacing a converter using a memory card with firmware................................................ 365
11.2.6.3 Replacing a converter using a memory card without firmware........................................... 366
11.2.6.4 Replacing a converter using a backup file (no memory card) ............................................. 368
Table of contents
11.2.6.5 Replacing a converter without data backup (no memory card, no backup file) ................... 371
12 Technical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 373
12.1 Line connection conditions for the S210 converter system with the motors 1FK2/1FT2 ..... 373
12.2 Technical data and properties of the motor....................................................................... 374
12.2.1 Technical features ............................................................................................................ 374
12.2.2 Permissible environmental conditions for the motor ......................................................... 375
12.2.3 Protection against electromagnetic fields (motor) ............................................................. 377
12.2.4 Cooling............................................................................................................................ 377
12.2.5 Derating factors ............................................................................................................... 378
12.2.6 Degree of protection ........................................................................................................ 381
12.2.7 Balancing......................................................................................................................... 383
12.2.8 Vibration response........................................................................................................... 383
12.2.9 Shaft extension................................................................................................................ 384
12.2.10 Radial eccentricity, concentricity and axial eccentricity...................................................... 385
12.2.11 Axial and radial forces ...................................................................................................... 387
12.2.12 Available encoders ........................................................................................................... 392
12.2.13 Holding brake data........................................................................................................... 394
12.2.14 Options ........................................................................................................................... 397
12.2.14.1 Option: Planetary gearbox (Axx, Bxx or Cxx) ..................................................................... 397
12.2.14.2 Option: Motors with increased chemical resistance (N16) ................................................. 400
12.2.14.3 Option: Pressure compensation (Q20) .............................................................................. 401
12.2.14.4 Option: Metal rating plate on the motor (Q31) ................................................................. 402
12.2.14.5 Option: Special paint finish (X0x + K23)............................................................................ 403
12.2.14.6 Option: Customer data on the rating plate (Y84) .............................................................. 404
12.2.15 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V ......... 405
12.2.15.1 1FK2102-0AG connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V ........................................................ 405
12.2.15.5 1FK2104-4AF connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V......................................................... 409
12.2.15.6 1FK2104-4AK connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC ........................................................ 410
12.2.15.8 1FK2104-5AK connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V ........................................................ 412
12.2.15.10 1FK2105-4AF connected to 3 AC 240 V ............................................................................ 414
12.2.15.12 1FK2106-3AF connected to 240 V 3 AC ............................................................................ 416
12.2.15.24 1FK2208-3AC connected to 3 AC 240 V ............................................................................ 428
Table of contents
12.2.15.27 1FK2210-3AB connected to 240 V 3 AC ............................................................................ 431

12.2.15.28 1FK2210-3AC connected to 240 V 3 AC ............................................................................ 432
12.2.15.29 1FK2210-4AB connected to 240 V 3 AC ............................................................................ 433
12.2.15.30 1FK2210-4AC connected to 240 V 3 AC ............................................................................ 434
12.2.16 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V ......... 435
12.2.16.1 1FK2103-2AH connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V ........................................................ 435
12.2.16.2 1FK2103-4AH connected to 3 AC 400V / 3 AC 480 V ......................................................... 436
12.2.16.10 1FK2106-3AF connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC......................................................... 444
12.2.16.11 1FK2106-4AF connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC......................................................... 445
12.2.16.12 1FK2106-6AF connected 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC............................................................. 446
12.2.16.22 1FK2208-3AC connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V ........................................................ 456
12.2.16.25 1FK2210-3AB connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC......................................................... 459
12.2.16.27 1FK2210-4AB connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC......................................................... 461
12.2.17 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V ......... 463
12.2.17.1 1FT2102-0AG connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC ........................................................ 463
12.2.17.5 1FT2104-4AF connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC ......................................................... 467
12.2.17.6 1FT2104-4AK connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC......................................................... 468
12.2.17.11 1FT2105-4AH connected to 3 AC 240 V............................................................................ 473
12.2.17.12 1FT2105-6AF connected to 3 AC 240 V ............................................................................ 474
Table of contents

12.2.17.21 1FT2205-2AC connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V......................................................... 483
12.2.17.23 1FT2205-2AH connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC ........................................................ 485
12.2.17.27 1FT2206-3AB connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V......................................................... 489
12.2.17.28 1FT2206-3AF connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V ......................................................... 490
12.2.17.31 1FT2208-3AC connected to 3 AC 240 V ............................................................................ 493
12.2.17.35 1FT2208-5AB connected to 3 AC 240 V ............................................................................ 497
12.2.18 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V ......... 504
12.2.18.1 1FT2103-2AH connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V ........................................................ 504
12.2.18.2 1FT2103-4AH connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V ........................................................ 505
12.2.18.4 1FT2104-4AK connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V......................................................... 507
Table of contents

12.2.18.32 1FT2208-3AC connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC......................................................... 535
12.2.18.37 1FT2208-5AB connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V ........................................................ 540
12.2.18.41 1FT2210-4AB connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC......................................................... 544
12.3 Technical specifications of the converter........................................................................... 547
12.3.1 Overload capability .......................................................................................................... 547
12.3.2 Electromagnetic compatibility according to IEC 61800-3................................................... 550
12.3.3 Protection from electromagnetic fields.............................................................................. 551
12.3.4 Permissible environmental conditions for the converter .................................................... 553
12.3.5 General data .................................................................................................................... 555
12.3.6 Specific data of the converter with 1 AC line connection ................................................... 558
12.3.7 Specific data of the converter with 3 AC line connection ................................................... 560
12.4 Technical data and properties of the connection system ................................................... 562
13 Dimension drawings .......................................................................................................................... 565
13.1 Dimension drawings of 1FK2 motors ................................................................................ 565
13.1.1 Dimension drawings of 1FK2, frame size 20 ..................................................................... 565
13.1.6 Dimension drawings 1FK2, frame size 63 ......................................................................... 570
13.1.8 Dimension drawings of 1FK2, frame size 100 ................................................................... 572
13.2 Dimension drawings of 1FT2 motors ................................................................................ 573
13.2.1 Dimension drawings of 1FT2, frame size 20 ..................................................................... 573
13.2.6 Dimension drawings 1FT2, frame size 63 ......................................................................... 578
13.2.8 Dimension drawings of 1FT2, frame size 100 ................................................................... 580
13.3 Dimension drawings, converter........................................................................................ 581
13.3.1 FSA with 1 AC line connection.......................................................................................... 581
13.3.2 FSB with 1 AC line connection .......................................................................................... 582
13.3.3 FSC with 1 AC line connection.......................................................................................... 583
13.3.4 FSA with 3 AC line connection.......................................................................................... 584
13.3.5 FSB with 3 AC line connection .......................................................................................... 585
Table of contents
13.3.6 FSC with 3 AC line connection.......................................................................................... 586

14 Decommissioning and disposal ......................................................................................................... 587
14.1 Device disposal ................................................................................................................ 587
15 Accessories and spare parts............................................................................................................... 589
15.1 Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 589
15.1.1 Memory cards.................................................................................................................. 589
15.1.2 SINAMICS Smart Adapter.................................................................................................. 590
15.1.2.1 SINAMICS Smart Adapter.................................................................................................. 590
15.1.2.2 SINAMICS Smart Adapter ordering data ............................................................................ 590
15.1.3 Connectors and cables for the AC coupling and DC link coupling....................................... 591
15.1.4 PROFINET patch cable ...................................................................................................... 592
15.1.5 External line filters ........................................................................................................... 592
15.1.5.1 Safety instructions ........................................................................................................... 593
15.1.5.2 Interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 595
15.1.5.3 Dimension drawings ........................................................................................................ 597
15.1.5.4 Mounting ........................................................................................................................ 600
15.1.5.5 Technical data.................................................................................................................. 603
15.1.6 External braking resistors for 1/3 AC 200 ... 240 V............................................................. 604
15.1.7 Cabinet bushing via mounting flange ............................................................................... 606
15.1.8 Degree of protection kit IP65 for the motor....................................................................... 607
15.1.9 Extensions for connecting cables between the motor and the converter............................ 607
15.2 Spare parts ...................................................................................................................... 610
15.2.1 Connector set for converters with 1 AC line connection - 6SL3260-2DB00-0AA0 ............... 610
15.2.2 Connector set for converters with 3 AC line connection - 6SL3260-2DB10-0AA0 ............... 614
16 Ordering data .................................................................................................................................... 619
16.1 Ordering data of the motor .............................................................................................. 619
16.2 Ordering data of the converter ......................................................................................... 621
16.2.1 Order data for converters with 1 AC line connection ......................................................... 621
16.2.2 Order data for converters with 3 AC line connection ......................................................... 622
16.3 Ordering data of the connection system ........................................................................... 622
16.3.1 Order data for OCC MOTION-CONNECT cables .................................................................. 622
16.3.2 Determining the article number of a prefabricated OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable ............. 624
17 Parameters......................................................................................................................................... 627
17.1 Explanation of the list of parameters ................................................................................ 627
17.2 List of parameters ............................................................................................................ 632
18 Faults and alarms............................................................................................................................... 747
18.1 Overview of faults and alarms .......................................................................................... 747
18.1.1 Display of faults/alarms (messages) .................................................................................. 747
18.1.2 Differences between faults and alarms ............................................................................. 747
18.1.3 Explanation of the list of faults and alarms ....................................................................... 748
18.2 List of faults and alarms ................................................................................................... 755
A Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 869
A.1 Communication telegrams ............................................................................................... 869
A.1.1 Standard telegrams.......................................................................................................... 869
Table of contents
A.1.1.1 Telegram 3 ...................................................................................................................... 869

A.1.1.2 Telegram 5 ...................................................................................................................... 869
A.1.1.3 Telegram 102 .................................................................................................................. 870
A.1.1.4 Telegram 105 .................................................................................................................. 871
A.1.2 Supplementary telegrams ................................................................................................ 871
A.1.2.1 Telegram 700 .................................................................................................................. 871
A.1.2.2 Telegram 750 .................................................................................................................. 872
A.1.3 PROFIsafe telegrams ........................................................................................................ 872
A.1.3.1 Telegram 30 .................................................................................................................... 872
A.1.3.2 Telegram 901 .................................................................................................................. 873
A.1.4 Control words, status words and message word................................................................ 873
A.1.4.1 Control word 1 and status word 1..................................................................................... 873
A.1.4.2 Control word 2 and status word 2..................................................................................... 877
A.1.4.3 Encoder-1 control word and encoder-1 status word .......................................................... 878
A.1.4.4 Safety control word 1 and safety status word 1 ................................................................. 879
A.1.4.5 Safety control word 2 and safety status word 2 ................................................................. 880
A.1.4.6 Safety status word 1B ...................................................................................................... 883
A.1.4.7 Message word ................................................................................................................. 883
A.2 Directives and standards .................................................................................................. 884
A.2.1 Directives, standards and certificates for the converter...................................................... 884
A.2.2 Directives, standards and certificates for the motor ........................................................... 885
A.3 UL Markings..................................................................................................................... 889
A.4 EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP .......................................................................... 890
A.5 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... 892
Table of contents
Introduction 1
1.1 About SINAMICS
Description
With the SINAMICS converter series you can solve drive tasks in the low, medium and DC voltage
range. All Siemens drive components, such as converters, motors, and controls, are matched to
each other and can be integrated into your existing automation systems.
You can find more information via the SINAMICS YouTube playlist (https://www.youtube.com/
playlist?list=PLw7lLwXw4H53rtHeTeifKtVMr2aXTYt0X).
1.2 About this manual
1.2.1 Content
Description
These operating instructions provide a summary of all of the information required to safely and
reliably operate the converter-motor combination.
The operating instructions enable the target groups being addressed to mount, install,
connect, and commission the converter and motor safely and in the correct manner.
To illustrate possible application areas for our products, typical use cases are listed in this product
documentation and in the online help. These are purely exemplary and do not constitute a
statement on the suitability of the respective product for applications in specific individual cases.
Unless explicitly contractually agreed, Siemens assumes no liability for such suitability.
Suitability for a particular application in specific individual cases must be assessed by the user,
taking into account all technical, legal, and other requirements on a case-by-case basis. Always
observe the descriptions of the technical properties and the relevant constraints of the
respective product contained in the product documentation.
Introduction
1.2 About this manual
1.2.2 Target group
Description
These operating instructions are intended for persons who perform different tasks in the drive
environment, e.g. for:
• Planning engineers
• Project engineers
• Machine manufacturers
• Commissioning engineers
• Electricians
• Installation personnel
• Service technician
• Warehouse personnel
1.2.3 Standard scope
Description
This documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. This scope may differ
from the scope of the functionality of the system that is actually supplied. Please refer to the
ordering documentation only for the functionality of the supplied drive system.
Further functions may be executable in the system, which are not explained in this
documentation. However, there is no entitlement to these functions in the case of a new
delivery or service.
This documentation does not contain all detailed information on all types of the product.
Furthermore, this documentation cannot take into consideration every conceivable type of
installation, operation and service/maintenance.
The machine manufacturer must document any additions or modifications they make to the
product themselves.
1.2.4 Websites of third-party companies
Description
This document may contain hyperlinks to third-party websites. Siemens is not responsible for
and shall not be liable for these websites and their content. Siemens has no control over the
information which appears on these websites and is not responsible for the content and
information provided there. The user bears the risk for their use.
Introduction
1.3 SINAMICS documentation
1.3 SINAMICS documentation
Description
Comprehensive documentation on the SINAMICS converter series can be found at Siemens
Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13205/man).
Figure 1-1 The SINAMICS converter family
You have the option of either displaying the documents or downloading them in the PDF and
multimedia format.
The converter documentation essentially comprises the following manuals:
Table 1-1 SINAMICS documentation
Information Documentation class Content

Basic information Operating instructions Comprehensive collection of all information
necessary for the safe operation of products,
plant units, and complete plants (IEC/
IEEE 82079-1)
Product Information Information that only becomes known shortly
before or even after start of delivery and is
therefore not included in the associated user
documentation
General information Industrial Security Config‐ Information on the security functions and safe
uration Manual converter operation
Introduction
1.4 Service and Support
1.4.1 Siemens Industry Online Support on the Web
Description
The following is available via Siemens Industry Online Support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/), among others:
• Product support
• Global forum for information and best practice sharing between users and specialists
• Local contact persons via the contact person database (→ Contact)
• Information about field services, repairs, spare parts, and much more (→ Services)
• Search for product info
• Important topics at a glance
• FAQs (frequently asked questions)
• Application examples
• Manuals
• Downloads
• Compatibility tool
• Newsletters with information about your products
• Catalogs/brochures
1.4.2 Siemens Industry Online Support on the road
Description
Figure 1-2 "Siemens Industry Online Support" app
Introduction
The "Industry Online Support" app supports you in the following areas, for example:
• Resolving problems when executing a project
• Troubleshooting when faults develop
• Expanding a system or planning a new system
Furthermore, you have access to the Technical Forum and other articles that our experts have
drawn up:
• FAQs
• Application examples
• Manuals
• Certificates
• Product announcements and much more
There is a data matrix code or QR code on the nameplate of your product. Scan the code
using the "Industry Online Support" app (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/
2067) to obtain technical information about the device.
The app is available for Apple iOS and Android.
1.4.3 Getting information about the product
Overview
You can use the ID link to get information about your product.
The ID link is a globally unique identifier according to IEC 61406-1.
Requirement
There is a QR code on the product and on the product packaging.
*%-JOL
Figure 1-3 QR code with ID link included
You can recognize the ID link by the frame with a black frame corner at the bottom right.
Procedure
Scan the QR code using either a standard code scanner or the "Industry Online Support" app.
Introduction
When using a standard code scanner, you open the scanned ID link in an Internet browser
that is provided on your device.
Result
You can use the ID link to get product data, manuals, declarations of conformity, certificates and
other information about your product.
1.4.4 Feedback on the technical documentation
Description
We welcome your questions, suggestions, and corrections for this technical documentation.
Please use the "Provide feedback" link at the end of the entries in Siemens Industry Online
Support.
Figure 1-4 Requests and feedback
1.4.5 mySupport documentation
Description
With the "mySupport documentation" web-based system, you can compile your own individual
documentation based on Siemens content and adapt this for your own machine documentation.
To start the application, click the "My Documentation" tile on the mySupport homepage
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/my):
Introduction
Figure 1-5 mySupport
The configured manual can be exported in the PDF or XML format.

Siemens content that supports the mySupport documentation can be identified by the
"Configure" link.
1.4.6 Technical support
Description
Your routes to technical support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4868):
• Support Request (https://www.siemens.com/SupportRequest)
• Contact person database (https://www.automation.siemens.com/aspa_app)
• "Industry Online Support" mobile app
The Support Request is the most important input channel for questions relating to products
from Siemens Industry. This will assign your request a unique ticket number for tracking
purposes. The Support Request offers you:
• Direct access to technical experts
• Recommended solutions for various questions (e.g. FAQs)
• Status tracking of your requests
Technical support also assists you in some cases via remote support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/106665159) to resolve your requests. A
Support representative will assist you in diagnosing or resolving the problem through screen
transfer.
More information on the Support service packages is available on the Internet via the
following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4869).
Introduction
1.5 Important product information
1.4.7 Training
Description
SITRAIN – Digital Industry Academy offers a comprehensive range of training courses on
Siemens industrial products – directly from the manufacturer, for all industries and use cases, for
all knowledge levels from beginner to expert.
More information can be found on the Internet via the following address (https://
www.siemens.com/sitrain).
1.4.8 Spare parts services
Description
By using the online spare parts service "Spares on Web", you ensure the smooth operation of
your product. The spare parts service is aimed at the following:
• Improved spare parts inventories by balancing stock and spare parts on call
• Minimized downtimes during a plant standstill
• Reduced costs
More information can be found on the Internet via the following address (https://
www.sow.siemens.com/).
1.5.1 Proper and intended use
Requirement
WARNING
Death or serious injury if not used as intended
Not using as intended can result in hazardous states.
• Carefully observe the description of proper and intended use
Introduction
WARNING
Incorrect use of the motor
Incorrect use of the motor may cause death, serious injury (crushing) and/or property damage.
• Carefully observe the description of proper and intended use
• Do not use the motors in hazardous areas (where there is a risk of explosion), if the motors
have not been expressly released and authorized for these types of applications. Carefully
observe any special supplementary notes that may be attached.
• Make sure that the conditions at the location of use comply with all the rating plate data.
• Make sure that the conditions at the location of use comply with the conditions specified in
this documentation. When necessary, take into account deviations regarding approvals or
country-specific regulations.
Note
It cannot be guaranteed that EMC emission limits are complied with if the products are
connected to an isolated line supply grounded through a high ohmic connection or a line supply
with grounded line conductor.
• Draw-up an EMC plan to comply with the EMC requirements of the intended application.
Description
The products described in this document, together with software, accessories and options, form
an electric drive to supply low-voltage, three-phase motors.
The products are professional devices for stationary indoor use in industrial, light-industrial
and commercial applications and are intended for supply from a non-public (industrial)
low-voltage network. The products are not intended for use in residential areas and are not
intended for supply from a public low-voltage network.
The products must be correctly transported and stored and must be installed, commissioned
and maintained by professionals who have adequate knowledge to implement the safety,
security and EMC measures in accordance with the specifications described in this manual
and recognized state-of-the-art engineering practice.
You may only use the products when the following requirements are complied with:
• All regulations and directives that are applicable at the place of final use, especially with
regard to electrical safety, functional safety and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
• All instructions, notes, technical specifications, safety information and security information
contained in this document and other supporting documentation.
The products are part of a machine or system. They must guarantee the safety of persons
and material assets as well as electromagnetic compatibility by applying suitable measures
when designing the system.
Perform a risk assessment of the complete application including third-party products and
implement adequate safety and security measures before using the product.
Products without protective enclosure (IP00 or IP20) are intended for installation in control
panels or control cabinets that provide the required level of protection.
Introduction
Any other use that is not expressly permitted can result in malfunctions and unpredictable
hazards.
The motor is only approved for converter operation.
1.5.2 Updates and constraints
Description
Updates and constraints for the converters with the current firmware are available in SIOS:
Updates and constraints for SINAMICS S210 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109812303)
1.5.3 Open-source software (OSS)
Description
The license conditions and copyright information of the open-source software components
used by the device are saved on the device itself. You can download license and copyright
information onto your PC via the support page of the integrated web server.
1.5.4 Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation
Description
Siemens complies with the principles of the General Data Protection Regulation (EU), in
particular the principle of data minimization (privacy by design). For this SINAMICS product, this
means:
• User management and access control (UMAC)
The product processes or stores the following personal data:
– Login data for user management and access control:
User name, group, password, role, rights.
The data for user management and access control are stored in the converter and optionally
on a memory card.
• Support data (optional)
For optimal support in service cases, the end user or machine manufacturer (OEM) can
optionally store contact data (header, email address, telephone number, homepage) in the
converter.
If these data are created, the author must give thought to data protection consent for these
optional data. Siemens takes no responsibility for these data.
These support contact data can be read and are freely accessible in, for example, the user
interface as well as in the diagnostics report. These data are not encrypted.
Introduction
These data are used for user management and access control (UMAC) and for the support
function. The storage of these data is appropriate and limited to what is necessary, as it is
essential to identify the authorized operators and service contact.
The personal data are also available as part of the backup system to ensure fast recovery of
use cases.
The above-mentioned personal data cannot be stored anonymously or pseudonymized,
as they serve the purpose of identifying the operating personnel. The anonymization or
pseudonymization, e.g. of the login data, must be performed using suitable login names and
contact data by the plant/machine operator.
Our product does not provide any functions for automatically deleting personal data.
Individual UMAC data can be deleted manually by authorized personnel as soon as this is
deemed recommended/required.
Introduction
Fundamental safety instructions 2
2.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or tripping
too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire.
• In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the converter is connected to the line supply at least
meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.
• You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short circuit
does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to respond. The
required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT supply systems.
Fundamental safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock or a
fire.
• Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the converter does
not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.
WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched,
can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may carry
a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV- (Protective
Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the electronics
modules.
WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged motors or devices
Improper handling of motors or devices can damage them.
Hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components on damaged
motors or devices.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged motors or devices.
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the cores of cables that are not used at one end
at the grounded housing potential.
WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is operation can result in arcing that may cause
serious injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.
WARNING
Electric shock due to residual charges in power components
Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the power
supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and start
work.
NOTICE
Damage to equipment due to unsuitable tightening tools.
Unsuitable tightening tools or fastening methods can damage the screws of the equipment.
• Only use screw inserts that exactly match the screw head.
• Tighten the screws with the torque specified in the technical documentation.
• Use a torque wrench or a mechanical precision nut runner with a dynamic torque sensor and
speed limitation system.
• Adjust the tools used regularly.
WARNING
Electromagnetic interference due to inadequate shield support
A lack of adequate shield support for the power cables can cause malfunctions and
impermissibly high levels of interference.
• Use the shield connection plates supplied or recommended.
• Use the shield connection clips recommended.
WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
Built-in devices can cause a fire and a pressure wave in the event of a fault. Fire and smoke can
escape from the control cabinet and cause serious personal injury and property damage.
• Install built-in appliances in a robust metal control cabinet that is suitable for protecting
people from fire and smoke.
• Only operate built-in devices with the control cabinet doors closed.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.
WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Converters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) in operation. Electromagnetic fields may
interfere with active implants, e.g. pacemakers. People with active implants in the immediate
vicinity of an converter are at risk.
• As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons with
active implants.
• Observe the data on EMF emission provided in the product documentation.
WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to permanent-magnet fields
Even when switched off, electric motors with permanent magnets represent a potential risk for
persons with heart pacemakers or implants if they are close to converters/motors.
• If you have a heart pacemaker or implant, maintain the minimum distance specified in the
Chapter "Technical data".
• When transporting or storing permanent-magnet motors always use the original packing
materials with the warning labels attached.
• Clearly mark the storage locations with the appropriate warning labels.
• IATA regulations must be observed when transported by air.
CAUTION
Symptomatic respiratory and skin reaction to chemicals
A newly purchased product might contain traces of substances that are identified as sensitizers.
Sensitizers are substances which can cause sensitization in the lungs and skin after exposure
to them.
Once sensitized, individuals can have severe reactions to further exposure, even in small
amounts. In the most extreme cases, individuals might develop asthma or dermatitis
respectively.
• If the product has a strong smell, keep it in a well-ventilated area for 14 days.
WARNING
Unexpected machine movement caused by radio devices or mobile phones
Using radio devices, cellphones, or mobile WLAN devices in the immediate vicinity of the
components can result in equipment malfunction. Malfunctions may impair the functional
safety of machines and can therefore put people in danger or lead to property damage.
• Therefore, if you move closer than 20 cm to the components, be sure to switch off radio
devices, cellphones or WLAN devices.
• Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support app" only on equipment that has already been
switched off.
NOTICE
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
When operated on systems with grounded line conductors or in the event of a ground fault in
the IT system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage against ground. If
you use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line
conductors, you must perform the following measures:
• IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
• TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.
WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire
and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased
downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the
respective component.
NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position.
• Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.
WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
• Replace illegible warning labels.
NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system, including
all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and
activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.
Note
Important Safety instructions for Safety Integrated
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the Safety instructions in the
Safety Integrated documentation.
WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
• Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.
WARNING
Injury caused by moving or ejected parts
Contact with moving motor parts or drive output elements and the ejection of loose motor
parts (e.g. feather keys) out of the motor enclosure can result in severe injury or death.
• Remove any loose parts or secure them so that they cannot be flung out.
• Do not touch any moving parts.
• Safeguard all moving parts using the appropriate safety guards.
WARNING
Fire due to incorrect operation of the motor
When incorrectly operated and in the case of a fault, the motor can overheat resulting in fire
and smoke. This can result in severe injury or death. Further, excessively high temperatures
destroy motor components and result in increased failures as well as shorter service lives of
motors.
• Operate the motor according to the relevant specifications.
• Only operate the motors in conjunction with effective temperature monitoring.
• Immediately switch off the motor if excessively high temperatures occur.
2.3 Warranty and liability for application examples
CAUTION
Burns and thermal damage caused by hot surfaces
Temperatures above 100 °C may occur on the surfaces of motors, converters, and other drive
components.
Touching hot surfaces may result in burns. Hot surfaces may damage or destroy temperature
sensitive parts.
• Ensure that temperature-sensitive parts do not come into contact with hot surfaces.
• Mount drive components so that they are not accessible during operation.
Measures when maintenance is required:
• Allow drive components to cool off before starting any work.
• Use appropriate personnel protection equipment, e.g. gloves.
2.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic

discharge
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules or
devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum
foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with
ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).
2.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding configuration,
equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not represent specific
customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical tasks.
2.4 Security information
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are
operated correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe
handling when using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.
2.4 Security information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/cert.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109810578)
WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states in
your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with suitable
protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.
2.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

When assessing the machine or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g. EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system integrator must
take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components
of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware faults and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and
connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic components
– External influences/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures, including open flames, as well as emissions of light, noise,
particles, gases, etc., can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions
caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Software errors
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Condensation/conductive contamination
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to
people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters or

data communication via the network
7. Motors for use in potentially explosive areas:
When moving components such as bearings become worn, this can cause enclosure
components to exhibit unexpectedly high temperatures during operation, creating a hazard
in areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere.
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.
Overview 3
3.1 System overview
The drive system comprises the following system components tailored to one another:
• SINAMICS S210 converter with firmware V6.1 or higher
• SIMOTICS S-1FK2 or S-1FT2 motor
• OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable (OCC = "One Cable Connection")
SIMOTICS S-1FK2 and SIMOTICS S-1FT2 servomotors with mounted planetary gearbox are
optionally available. More information is provided in the relevant Configuration Manual.
The converter and the motor are intended for use with a higher-level controller (PLC).
Connection to the controller is via PROFINET.
Prefabricated MOTION-CONNECT cables in various lengths are available to simply connect the
motor to the converter and to ensure safe and reliable operation.
Overview
3.1 System overview

① Controller (PLC), e.g. SIMATICS S7-1500

② Communication between the converter and the controller via PROFINET
③ SINAMICS S210 converter
④ Operating unit, e.g. a PC with a LAN connection to the web server in the converter
⑤ OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable for the power connection, the motor holding brake, and the encoder
⑥ SIMOTICS S-1FK2 or 1FT2 motor
Figure 3-1 System
Overview
3.1 System overview
"$7

9 9

9 9
91
130'*/&5130'*TBGF

9
91
9
9 130'*/&5130'*TBGF

1&

① Fuse or circuit breaker ⑨ OCC connection cable for motor, motor hold‐
ing brake and encoder
② Line contactor (optional) ⑩ Shield clamp
③ Line filter (optional) ⑪ Shield plate
④ External braking resistor (optional) ⑫ 24 V power supply
⑤ Shaft sealing ring for IP65 (optional) ⑬ SD card (optional)
⑥ 1FK2 or 1FT2 servomotor ⑭ Operating unit, e.g. PC with a LAN connection
to the web server in the converter
⑦ OCC extension cable (optional) ⑮ Controller, e.g. SIMATIC S7-1500
⑧ Mounting flange for control cabinet bushing ⑯
PROFINET/PROFIsafe to the next participant
(optional)
Figure 3-2 System components and accessories for converters with 1 AC line connection
Overview
3.1 System overview
$&
;
RSWLRQ
9

9

9
9

9
91

;
2SWLRQ 130'*/&5130'*TBGF
91

9 9
130'*/&5130'*TBGF
9

1&
① ... ⑯ Same as in the previous figure

⑰ X1: Connector for AC coupling (optional)
X3: Connector for DC link coupling (optional)
Figure 3-3 System components and accessories for converters with 3 AC line connection
Overview
3.2 Commissioning tools
3.2 Commissioning tools
Overview
The web server and Startdrive commissioning tools are available for commissioning and
configuring the converter.
Description
Web server
The web server commissioning tool is an online tool for the complete life cycle of a drive
application. The web server is integrated in the SINAMICS converter.
The web server offers functions for online commissioning, for diagnostics, for local operation
and monitoring as well as for carrying out service and maintenance work. This means that
the web server is suitable as universal tool for SINAMICS drives locally and directly online.
Startdrive
The Startdrive commissioning tool is an offline and online tool to support all usage phases
of a drive application. Startdrive is installed on an external system (e.g. PC with Windows 11
Professional) and is integrated in the TIA Portal.
Startdrive provides all functions that are required for editing drive applications both
offline and online. As a consequence, the entire engineering process for configuring,
commissioning, optimizing and maintaining & updating drive solutions while operational
is addressed both offline and online.
Overview
3.3 The scope of supply for the system components
3.3 The scope of supply for the system components

You must order the following components individually.
Motor
Included in the scope of supply:
• A "Safety instructions" sheet
• A sheet referencing links to product information
• A second rating plate
Converter
The components listed below are included in the scope of delivery:
For all converters

• A "Safety instructions" sheet
• A warning label for affixing in the control cabinet
• X2: Connector for motor connection
• X107: Connector for motor holding brake
• X124: Connector for 24 V DC supply voltage
• X130: Connector for digital inputs
For converters with 1 AC line connection

• Shield plate
• X1: Connector for line connection and external braking resistor (jumper for internal braking
resistor is included)
For converters with 3 AC line connection

• The shield plate for frame size FSA
For frame sizes FSB and FSC, the shield connection is integrated in the converter itself.
• X1: Connector for line connection
• X4: Connector for external braking resistor (jumper for internal braking resistor is included)
• X3: Cover for DC link connection
Note
All connectors are designed so that they cannot be inadvertently interchanged.
Overview
3.4 Motor
MOTION-CONNECT cable (OCC cable)

The scope of supply for the prefabricated MOTION-CONNECT cables includes:
• MOTION-CONNECT cable with assembled connectors for connecting motors and encoders
• A shield clamp for the connection of the shield to the shield plate of the converter
• A safety data sheet
Details of the MOTION-CONNECT OCC cables can be found in Chapter "Determining the
article number of a prefabricated OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable (Page 624)".
Optional accessories
The optional accessories are listed in Chapter "Accessories (Page 589)".
3.4 Motor
The SIMOTICS S-1FK2 and SIMOTICS S-1FT2 motors, called "1FK2" or "1FT2" in the following, are
permanent-magnet excited compact synchronous motors with an integrated encoder and a
high degree of protection.
Both motor series comply with standards EN 60034 and EN 60204-1 and the Low-Voltage
Directive 2014/35/EU.
In this document, "1F☐2" represents the validity for both 1FK2 and 1FT2.
Dynamic versions
• 1F☐21 "High Dynamic" with low moment of inertia for a maximum acceleration capability in
applications involving low load moments of inertia
• 1F☐22 "Compact" with medium moment of inertia and precise positioning and synchronous
operation characteristics for applications with a high and variable load moment of inertia
Torque range
• 0.16 Nm … 3.6 Nm for a 1 AC 230 V line supply
• 0.16 Nm … 50 Nm for a 3 AC 240 V line supply
• 0.64 Nm … 50 Nm for a 400 V 3 AC line supply
Degree of protection
• IP64
• IP65 with radial shaft sealing ring
• IP67 with radial shaft sealing ring only for 1FT2, with the exception of frame size 20.
You can find more information on the degree of protection in Chapter "Degree of protection
(Page 381)".
Overview
3.4 Motor
Cooling
The 1F☐2 is a non-ventilated motor.
The motor thermal losses are dissipated by thermal conduction, thermal radiation and
natural convection.
If the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C (104 °F) or the installation altitude 1000 meters
above sea level, you must reduce torque and power of the motor (derating).
Information on derating can be found in Chapter "Derating factors (Page 378)".
Observe the instructions for mounting the motor in Chapter "Cooling (Page 377)".
Bearing version
The motors have deep groove ball bearings with life-long lubrication.
The average bearing service life is designed for 25000 operating hours.
The motors have spring-loaded bearings in the NDE direction. For version with holding brake,
the NDE bearing is a locating bearing.
The permissible axial and radial forces can be found in the technical specifications in Chapter
"Axial and radial forces (Page 387)".
Shaft extension
The motors are available with two different shaft extensions.
• Cylindrical shaft without feather key
• Cylindrical shaft with feather key (half-key balancing)
You can find more information in Chapter "Shaft extension (Page 384)".
Encoder
The encoder resolution is 22 bit per revolution (single-turn). An optional multiturn encoder is
available that is equipped with an additional 12-bit revolution counter (traversing range of 4096
revolutions).
The encoder designations are as follows:
• AS22DQC: Absolute encoder single-turn, 22 bit
• AM22DQC: Absolute encoder, 22 bit + 12 bit multiturn
• AS26DQC: Absolute encoder, singleturn, 26 bit (only for 1FT2)
• AM26DQC: Absolute encoder 26 bit + 12 bit multiturn (only for 1FT2)
You can find more information in Chapter "Available encoders (Page 392)".
Holding brake
The 1F☐2 servomotor is available with integrated holding brake.
Overview
3.4 Motor
The holding brake closes in the current-free state and locks the motor shaft at a standstill.
When current flows, the holding brake opens and releases the motor shaft.
SINAMICS S210 controls the holding brake without any additional devices.
The holding brake is not a working brake for braking the rotating motor. Limited EMERGENCY
STOP operation is permissible.
Holding brake data are provided in Chapter "Holding brake data (Page 394)".
Rating plate
The rating plate contains the article number and the technical data of the motor.

SIMOTICS 1P 1FK2206-2AF10-1MB0
3 ~ Mot. S YF K9662 3157 01 003
Z:
M0 6 Nm I0 4,5 A nmax6000 r/min
MN 5,4 Nm IN 4,15 A nn 3000 r/min
UiN260 V Th.Cl.155 (F)

EN6003
m: 8 kg IP 64 IC410
Encoder AM22DQC G02 +
Brake 24 VDC 17W 13Nm
RN 000
Siemens AG, DE-97616 Bad Neustadt Made in Germany

Figure 3-4 Rating plate 1FK2/1FT2 for S120 (example illustration)
Position Description / technical specifications Position Description / technical specifications

1 Article number 12 Degree of protection
2 ID No., serial number 13 Rated current IN
3 Order codes as a supplement to the 14 Cooling method according to
article number. EN 60034-6
4 Static torque M0 15 Temperature class of the insulation
system
5 Rated torque MN 16 Revision
6 Induced voltage at rated speed UIN 17 Type of balancing (only for motors
with feather key)
7 Motor weight m 18 Rated speed nN
8 Marking of encoder type 19 Maximum permissible mechanical
speed of the motor nmax
9 Data of the holding brake 20 Certifications
10 Manufacturer's address 21 Standard for all rotating electrical ma‐
chines
11 Stall current I0 22 Data matrix code
Overview
3.5 Motor-converter combinations for 1FK2
3.5.1 Motor-converter combinations for 1 AC 200 ... 240 V

The following table lists recommended combinations of converters with a 1 AC 200 V ... 240 V
line connection and motors with the associated connecting cables.
Motor Converter OCC cable

Article number Torque M0 / Nm Rated power PN / kW Article number Connector size Article number
(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BB10-... 6FX☐002-8Q...
High Dynamic
1FK2102-0AG 0.16 0.1 …1CF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FK2102-1AG 0.32 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
1FK2103-2AG 0.64 0.2 …2CF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2103-4AG 1.27 0.4 …4CF0
1FK2104-4AF 0.2 …2CF0 M17 ...N08...
1FK2104-4AK 0.4 …4CF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2104-5AF 2.4
1FK2104-5AK 0.75 …8CF0
1FK2104-6AF 3.2
Compact
1FK2203-2AG 0.64 0.2 …2CF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FK2203-4AG 1.27 0.4 …4CF0 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
(0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2204-5AF 2.4 M17 ...N08...
1FK2204-5AK 0.75 …8CF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2204-6AF 3.2
1FK2205-2AC 0.4 …4CF0
1FK2205-2AF 3.6 0.75 …8CF0
1)
For IEC applications
2)
For UL applications
Overview


(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BE1... 6FX☐002-8Q...
High Dynamic
1FK2102-0AG 0.16 0.4 ...0-4DF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FK2102-1AG 0.32 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
1FK2103-2AG 0.64 0.75 ...0-8DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2103-4AG 1.27 1.0 ...1-0DF0
1FK2104-4AF 0.4 ...0-4DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FK2104-4AK 1.0 ...1-0DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2104-5AF 2.4 0.75 ...0-8DF0
1FK2104-5AK 1.5 ...1-5DF0
1FK2104-6AF 3.2 1.0 ...1-0DF0
1FK2105-4AF 5 1.5 ...1-5DF0
1FK2105-6AF 8 2.0 ...2-0DF0
1FK2106-3AF 9 5.0 ...5-0DF0 M23 ...N11...
1FK2106-4AF 12 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
1FK2106-6AF 16 7.0 ...7-0DF0
Compact
1FK2203-2AG 0.64 0.75 ...0-8DF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FK2203-4AG 1.27 1.0 ...1-0DF0 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
(0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2204-5AF 2.4 0.75 ...0-8DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FK2204-5AK 1.5 ...1-5DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2204-6AF 3.2 1.0 ...1-0DF0
1FK2205-2AF 3.6
1FK2205-4AF 6 1.5 ...1-5DF0
1FK2206-2AF 6.5 M23 ...N11...
1FK2206-4AF 12 3.5 ...3-5DF0 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
1FK2208-3AC 18
1FK2208-4AC 22 5.0 ...5-0DF0
1FK2208-5AC 27 7.0 ...7-0DF0
1FK2210-3AB 30 3.5 ...3-5DF0
1FK2210-3AC 7.0 ...7-0DF0
1FK2210-4AB 40 5.0 ...5-0DF0
1FK2210-4AC 7.0 ...7-0DF0
1)
2)
For UL applications
Overview

The following table lists recommended combinations of converters connected to a 3 AC
380 V ... 480 V line supply and motors with the associated connecting cables.

(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BE1... 6FX☐002-8Q...
High Dynamic
1FK2103-2AH 0.64 0.4 …0-4DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FK2103-4AH 1.27 0.75 …0-8DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2104-4AF 0.4 …0-4DF0
1FK2104-4AK 1.0 …1-0DF0
1FK2104-5AF 2.4 0.75 …0-8DF0
1FK2104-5AK 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FK2104-6AF 3.2 1.0 …1-0DF0
1FK2105-4AF 5 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FK2105-6AF 8 2.0 …2-0DF0
1FK2106-3AF 9 5.0 …5-0DF0 M23 ...N11...
1FK2106-4AF 12 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
...N21...
1FK2106-6AF 16 7.0 …7-0DF0 (2.5 mm² / AWG14)
Compact
1FK2203-2AK 0.64 0.4 …0-4DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FK2203-4AK 1.27 0.75 …0-8DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2204-5AF 2.4 0.75 …0-8DF0
1FK2204-5AK 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FK2204-6AF 3.2 1.0 …1-0DF0
1FK2205-2AF 3.6
1FK2205-4AF 6 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FK2206-2AF 6.5 M23 ...N11...
1FK2206-4AF 12 3.5 …3-5DF0 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
...N21...
1FK2208-3AC 18 (2.5 mm² / AWG14)
1FK2208-4AC 22 5.0 …5-0DF0
1FK2208-5AC 27 7.0 …7-0DF0
1FK2210-3AB 30 3.5 …3-5DF0
1FK2210-3AC 7.0 …7-0DF0
1FK2210-4AB 40 5.0 …5-0DF0
1FK2210-4AC 7.0 …7-0DF0
1)
2)
For UL applications
Overview
3.6 Motor-converter combinations for 1FT2


(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BB10-... 6FX☐002-8Q...
High Dynamic
1FT2102-0AG 0.16 0.1 …1CF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FT2102-1AG 0.32 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
1FT2103-2AG 0.64 0.2 …2CF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2103-4AG 1.27 0.4 …4CF0
1FT2104-4AF 0.2 …2CF0 M17 ...N08...
1FT2104-4AK 0.4 …4CF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2104-5AF 2.4
1FT2104-5AK 0.75 …8CF0
1FT2104-6AF 3.2
Compact
1FT2203-2AG 0.64 0.2 …2CF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FT2203-4AG 1.27 0.4 …4CF0 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
(0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2204-5AF 2.4 M17 ...N08...
1FT2204-5AK 0.75 …8CF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2204-6AF 3.2
1FT2205-2AC 0.4 ...4CF0
1FT2205-2AF 3.6 0.75 …8CF0
1FT2205-2AH 3.6
1)
2)
For UL applications
Overview


(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BE1... 6FX☐002-8Q...
High Dynamic
1FT2102-0AG 0.16 0.4 ...0-4DF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FT2102-1AG 0.32 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
1FT2103-2AG 0.64 0.75 ...0-8DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2103-4AG 1.27 1.0 ...1-0DF0
1FT2104-4AF 0.4 ...0-4DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FT2104-4AK 1.0 ...1-0DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2104-5AF 2.4 0.75 ...0-8DF0
1FT2104-5AK 1.5 ...1-5UF0
1FT2104-6AF 3.2 1.0 ...1-0DF0
1FT2105-4AF 5 1.5 ...1-5DF0
1FT2105-4AH 3.5 ...3-5DF0
1FT2105-6AF 8 2.0 ...2-0DF0
1FT2106-3AF 9 5.0 ...5-0DF0 M23 ...N11...
1FT2106-4AF 12 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
1FT2106-6AF 16 7.0 ...7-0DF0
Compact
1FT2203-2AG 0.64 0.75 ...0-8DF0 M12 ...N04...1)
1FT2203-4AG 1.27 1.0 ...1-0DF0 (0.38 mm² / AWG22)
...N05...2)
(0.82 mm² / AWG18)
Overview

(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BE1... 6FX☐002-8Q...
1FT2204-5AF 2.4 0.75 ...0-8DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FT2204-5AK 1.5 ...1-5DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2204-6AF 3.2 1.0 ...1-0DF0
1FT2205-2AC 0.75 ...0-8DF0
1FT2205-2AF 3.6 1.0 ...1-0DF0
1FT2205-2AH 0.8 ...1-5DF0
1FT2205-4AF 6 1.5
1FT2206-2AC 1.0 ...1-0DF0 M23 ...N11...
1FT2206-2AF 6.5 1.5 ...1-5DF0 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
1FT2206-2AH 2.0 ...2-0DF0
1FT2206-3AB 9 1.5 ...1-5DF0
1FT2206-3AF 2.0 ...2-0DF0
1FT2206-4AC 12 1.5 ...1-5DF0
1FK2206-4AF 3.5 ...3-5DF0
1FT2206-4AH 5.0 ...5-0DF0
1FT2208-3AB 18 2.0 ...2-0DF0
1FT2208-3AC 3.5 ...3-5DF0
1FT2208-3AF 5.0 ...5-0DF0
1FT2208-4AB 22 3.5 ...3-5DF0
1FT2208-4AC 5.0 ...5-0DF0
1FT2208-4AF 7.0 ...7-0DF0
1FT2208-5AB 27 3.5 ...3-5DF0
1FT2208-5AC 7.0 ...7-0DF0
1FT2210-3AB 30 3.5 ...3-5DF0
1FT2210-3AC 7.0 ...7-0DF0
1FT2210-4AB 40 5.0 ...5-0DF0
1FT2210-4AC 7.0 ...7-0DF0
1FT2210-5AB 50
1)
2)
For UL applications
Overview

The following table lists recommended combinations of converters connected to a 3 AC
380 V ... 480 V line supply and motors with the associated connecting cables.

(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BE1... 6FX☐002-8Q...
High Dynamic
1FT2103-2AH 0.64 0.4 …0-4DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FT2103-4AH 1.27 0.75 …0-8DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FK2104-4AF 1.27 0.4 …0-4DF0
1FT2104-4AK 1.27 1 …1-0DF0
1FT2104-5AF 2.4 0.75 …0-8DF0
1FT2104-5AK 2.4 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FT2104-6AF 3.2 1 …1-0DF0
1FT2105-4AF 5 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FT2105-4AH 3.5 …3-5DF0
1FT2105-6AF 8 2 …2-0DF0
1FT2106-3AF 9 5 …5-0DF0 M23 ...N11...
1FT2106-4AF 12 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
1FT2106-6AF 16 7 …7-0DF0
Compact
1FT2203-2AK 0.64 0.4 …0-4DF0 M17 ...N08...
1FT2203-4AK 1.27 0.75 …0-8DF0 (0.82 mm² / AWG18)
1FT2204-5AF 2.4 0.75 …0-8DF0
1FT2204-5AK 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FT2204-6AF 3.2 1.0 …1-0DF0
1FT2205-2AC 0.75 …0-8DF0
1FT2205-2AF 3.6 1.0 …1-0DF0
1FT2205-4AF 6 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FT2205-2AH 3.6 1.1
Overview

(digits 1 … 10) 6SL5310-1BE1... 6FX☐002-8Q...
1FT2206-2AC 6 1.0 …1-0DF0 M23 ...N11...
1FT2206-2AF 6.5 1.5 …1-5DF0 (1.5 mm² / AWG16)
1FT2206-2AH 2.0 …2-0DF0
1FT2206-3AB 9 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FT2206-3AF 2.0 …2-0DF0
1FT2206-4AC 12 1.5 …1-5DF0
1FT2206-4AF 3.5 …3-5DF0
1FT2206-4AH 5.0 …5-0DF0
1FT2208-3AB 18 2.0 …2-0DF0
1FT2208-3AC 3.5 …3-5DF0
1FT2208-3AF 5.0 …5-0DF0
1FT2208-4AB 22 3.5 …3-5DF0
1FT2208-4AC 5.0 …5-0DF0
1FT2208-4AF 7.0 …7-0DF0
1FT2208-5AB 27 3.5 …3-5DF0
1FT2208-5AC 7.0 …7-0DF0
1FT2210-3AB 30 3.5 …3-5DF0
1FT2210-3AC 7.0 …7-0DF0
1FT2210-4AB 40 5.0 …5-0DF0
1FT2210-4AC 7.0 …7-0DF0
1FT2210-5AB 50
1)
2)
For UL applications
Overview
3.7 Converter
3.7 Converter
The converter is a single-axis device (complete converter with integrated infeed). It is
characterized by a compact design, side-by-side installation and high overload capability.
The converter is intended for use with 1FK2 and 1FT2 motors and is available in the following
versions:
• Line supply voltage 1 AC 230 V (200 V … 240 V)
Power range 0.1 kW … 0.75 kW
• Line supply voltage 240 V 3 AC (200 V ... 240 V) and 400 V 3 AC (380 V … 480 V)
Power range when connected to 400 V 3 AC: 0.4 kW … 7 kW
Control mode
Servo control, optimized for 1F☐2 motors
Safety Integrated Functions

The converter offers the following Safety Integrated Functions:
Table 3-1 Safety Integrated Functions
Functions Abbr. Brief description

Safe Torque Off STO Safe Torque Off according to stop Category 0
Safe Stop 1 SS1 Safe stopping process according to category 1
Safe Brake Control SBC Safe brake control
Safe Speed Monitor SSM Safe output signal to monitor speed limits
Safe Direction SDI Safe monitoring of the direction of motion
Safely-Limited Speed SLS Safe speed monitoring
You can find more information in Chapter "Selection of the Safety Integrated Functions
(Page 129)".
Integrated braking resistor

In order to absorb the regenerative load of the motor, converters have an internal braking
resistor (exception: 100 W device)1).
If the internal braking resistor is not sufficient, you have the option of connecting an external
braking resistor.
More information:
• "Configuring the braking resistor (Page 86)"
• "Connecting the converter (Page 168)"
1)
An internal braking resistor is not required for normal operation (as a result of the available
DC link capacitance).
Overview
3.7 Converter
DC link coupling (devices of the 3 AC series only)

For devices of the 3 AC series, the DC links of up to 6 converters can be coupled. This means that
energy balancing between axes is possible, and the braking energy of an axis can be used by
other axes when accelerating. This also reduces the dissipated heat in the control cabinet
because the braking energy no longer has to be converted into heat in the braking resistor.
More information:
• "DC link coupling (for converters with 3 AC line connection) (Page 93)"
Communicating with the controller via PROFINET

The converter supports the following functions:
• RT (real time)
• IRT (isochronous real time) with the telegrams 5 and 105
• MRP (media redundancy) with RT
• MRPD (seamless media redundancy) with IRT
• Shared device
• PROFIsafe
• PROFIenergy
• Automatic telegram selection
Commissioning, operator control and monitoring and data backup

• Web server (integrated in the converter):
"Commissioning (web server) (Page 193)"
• Startdrive (commissioning software):
"Commissioning (Startdrive) (Page 247)"
Overview
3.7 Converter
Nameplate, information plate and date of manufacture - 1 AC

① Manufacturer ⑨ MAC address of the PROFINET interface

② Product designation ⑩ Environmental conditions
③ Article number ⑪ Certificate examples
④ Serial number ⑫ Manufacturer's address
⑤ Material number ⑬ Production location
⑥ Electrical data and degree of protection ⑭ ID link
⑦ Function release/version ⑮ Note on disposal
⑧ MAC address of the service interface
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture of the converter is coded in the serial number:
S ZVP 4Y7M000141
.POUIPGNBOVGBDUVSF
+BOVBSZ 'FCSVBSZ .BSDI "QSJM
.BZ +VOF +VMZ "VHVTU
4FQUFNCFS 0 0DUPCFS / /PWFNCFS % %FDFNCFS
:FBSPGNBOVGBDUVSF
& ' ) + , - .
/ 1 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
Figure 3-5 Date of manufacture (example April 2022)
Overview
3.7 Converter
Nameplate, information plate and date of manufacture - 3 AC

① Manufacturer ⑨ MAC address of the PROFINET interface

② Product designation ⑩ Environmental conditions
③ Article number ⑪ Certificate examples
④ Serial number ⑫ Manufacturer's address
⑤ Material number ⑬ Production location
⑥ Electrical data and degree of protection ⑭ ID link
⑦ Function release/version ⑮ Note on disposal
⑧ MAC address of the service interface
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture of the converter is coded in the serial number:
Overview
3.7 Converter
S T-P 45500113
.POUIPGNBOVGBDUVSF
+BOVBSZ 'FCSVBSZ .BSDI "QSJM
.BZ +VOF +VMZ "VHVTU
4FQUFNCFS 0 0DUPCFS / /PWFNCFS % %FDFNCFS
:FBSPGNBOVGBDUVSF
+ , - . / 1 3
4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 3-6 Date of manufacture (example April 2022)
Overview
3.8 Connection system

The motor is connected to the converter by a MOTION-CONNECT cable.
The cable uses all-in-one cable technology (One Cable Connection, OCC cable). As a result of
its flexibility and low diameter, it permits very tight bending radii.
The OCC cables are available in the following variants:
• MOTION-CONNECT 500
– Cost-effective solution for mainly fixed installation
– Suitable for low mechanical loading
• MOTION-CONNECT 800PLUS
– Fulfills the requirements for use in cable carriers
- Tested for horizontal traversing paths up to 50 m
- Not self-supporting
– Suitable for high mechanical loading
– Oil-resistant
The OCC cables can be supplied in lengths by the decimeter.
Extensions and cabinet bushings are available for the OCC cables.
You will find more information under:
• "Technical data and properties of the connection system (Page 562)"
• "Determining the article number of a prefabricated OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable
(Page 624)"
Overview
Configuring 4
4.1 Permissible line supplies and connection options
4.1.1 Converters with 1 AC line connection

The converter is designed for grounded TN and TT line systems and non-grounded IT line
systems according to IEC 60364‑1 (2005).
You can find more information in Chapter "Line connection conditions for the S210 converter
system with the motors 1FK2/1FT2 (Page 373)".
Connecting a converter to a 1 AC IT line system

You must remove the grounding screw when operating the converter on an IT line system. This
means that you remove the connection of the integrated line filter to ground.
)6$)6% )6&
$&9 $&9
Figure 4-1 Removing the grounding screw
For converters, sizes FSA and FSB, the grounding screw is located behind a plastic cover.
Open the cover, and after removing the grounding screw, close it again.
Configuring
Keep the grounding screw in a safe place in case it must be reinstalled.

Type: M3, tightening torque: 0.8 Nm
WARNING
Electric shock when the grounding screw is removed
As a result of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present at the grounding screw for up to
5 minutes after the line supply has been switched off.
Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• After switching off the supply voltage, wait for 5 minutes before you check that the device
really is in a no-voltage condition and start work.

The converter is designed for grounded TN and TT line systems and non-grounded IT line
systems according to IEC 60364‑1 (2005). Specific measures are required when connecting to
IT line systems.
WARNING
Electric shock when operating the converter without grounding screw
If the converter is operated without a grounding screw, there is a risk of electric shock through
contact with live parts when the cover is open or missing.
• Do not open the cover and do not remove the grounding screw.
NOTICE
Destruction of the converter when operated without grounding screw
Operating the converter with 3 AC line connection without grounding screw will destroy it.
• Do not remove the grounding screw.
4.1.3 Permissible line system configurations for motors

In combination with the drive system, the motors are generally designed for grounded TN and
TT line systems and non-grounded IT line systems.
Configuring
4.1.4 Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor
/
/
/

① The protective conductor (PE) must be dimensioned in accordance with the local installation rules
for equipment with increased discharge currents. As a minimum, one of the following conditions
must be satisfied:
• The protective conductor is routed so that along its complete length it is protected against
mechanical damage.
• The protective conductor has a cross-section ≥ 10 mm² Cu.
For a cross-section < 10 mm2 copper, a 2nd protective conductor with the same cross-section is
provided.
• When establishing the connection using an industrial plug connector according to EN 60309,
the insulated conductor of a multi-conductor cable must have a cross-section ≥ 2.5 mm² Cu.
• As an insulated conductor of a multi-conductor cable, the protective conductor has a cross-
section ≥ 2.5 mm² Cu.
② The protective conductor must be dimensioned in compliance with local installation rules.
• If each converter is individually protected, the protective conductor with the same cross-section
must be routed in the same way as the line connecting cable to the converter.
• If a group of converters is connected via the AC coupling, the protective conductor must be
implemented as follows:
– Group protection according to IEC: as a minimum 6 mm² Cu1)
– Group protection according to NEC/CEC: AWG 8 Cu2)
③ The cable cross-section must be dimensioned in compliance with local installation rules.
④ Same cross-section as the line conductor of the motor cable. The protective conductor is part of the
OCC cable.
1)
According to IEC 60364-5-54, Chap. 543.1.2
2)
According to NEC (NFPA 70) Table 250.122 / CEC (CSA 22.1.18) Rule 10-6149
Figure 4-2 Protective connection concept
Configuring
4.1.5 Connection options for converters with 1 AC line connection
Basic connection options
"$7
-
-
-
/
"$77 "$77
- -
/ -
-
/PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE/PUFUIF 5SBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE 5SBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE

GPMMPXJOHTBGFUZJOTUSVDUJPOT
SFHBSEJOHUIFDVSSFOUTJOUIF
OFVUSBMDPOEVDUPS
"$77 "$77 "$77

- -
7 / -
/
7 7 -
/
/PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE /PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE /PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE
Figure 4-3 Connection options
Configuring
WARNING
Neutral conductor fire caused by high currents
If you connect the converter without an isolating transformer to a supply system with 400 V
3 AC between the N-conductor and a line conductor (L1, L2 or L3), the harmonic currents in the
N-conductor can add up to values that are greater than the currents in the line conductors. This
heats up the N-conductor and can cause a fire.
• Take the harmonic currents into account when dimensioning the line connecting cables,
e.g. according to DIN VDE 100‑520 Insert 3.
Connection examples and cable cross-sections

The protective devices should be provided to protect the cable in the case of a short-circuit or
ground fault. Overload converter protection is integrated in the converter itself.
Configuring
Connecting devices to line voltage 1 AC 230 V
"$77
-
/
'

① Line disconnecting de‐ e.g. load disconnector

vice
② Line contactor optional
③ Protective device for e.g. fuses, circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers (see Product Infor‐
fault protection mation "Protective Devices for SINAMICS S210 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109815356)")
④ Line filter (optional) 6SL3203-0BB21-8VA1 rated current 18 A
In conjunction with the line filter, the sum of the rated input currents
must not exceed 18 A. The rated current of the protective device ③ must
be appropriately adapted.
⑤ Cable to the distribution Depending on the installation conditions (type of cable routing and am‐
block bient temperature) and the local regulations with reference to the total
rated input currents.
The same cross-section should be used for the protective conductor.
⑥ Distribution block
⑦ Line connection 0.75 mm2 … 2.5 mm2 / AWG 18 … AWG 12 in accordance with the in‐
stallation conditions (type of cable routing and ambient temperature)
and the local regulations
⑧ Protective conductor Same cross-section as the line connecting cable ⑦
connection
Figure 4-4 Example for connecting devices to a line voltage of 1 AC 230 V
Configuring
Connecting devices to line voltage 3 AC 400 V
"$7
-
-
-
/
''


vice
③ Protective device for e.g. fuses, circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers (see Product Infor‐
④ Line filter (optional) from third-party manufacturers
⑤ Cable to the distribution Depending on the installation conditions (type of cable routing and am‐
block bient temperature) and the local regulations with reference to the total
The same cross-section should be used for the protective conductor.
⑥ Distribution block
⑦ Line connection 0.75 mm2 … 2.5 mm2 / AWG 18 … AWG 12 in accordance with the in‐
stallation conditions (type of cable routing and ambient temperature)
⑧ Protective conductor Same cross-section as the line connecting cable ⑦
connection
Figure 4-5 Example for connecting devices to a line voltage of 3 AC 400 V
Configuring
4.1.6 Connection options for converters with 3 AC line connection

You can connect each converter individually via the standard terminals and the protective
devices assigned to them in accordance with the local installation regulations or you can
connect a group of converters via the optional AC coupling and a common protective device.
In addition, you can couple the DC links of up to 6 converters to exchange energy within this
drive line-up. To couple the DC links, the line connections of the coupled converters must
also be connected.
Individual connection using standard terminals
$&99$&99
/
/
/
3(


vice
④ Protective device for e.g. fuses, circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers (see Product Infor‐
⑤ Line connection 1.5 mm2 … 6 mm2 / AWG 16 … AWG 10 in accordance with the conditions
in the installation (type of cable installation and ambient temperature)
⑦ Protective conductor Same cross-section as the line connecting cable ⑤
connection
Figure 4-6 Individually connected converters via standard terminals
Configuring
Common connection via an AC coupling

You can connect a group of converters via a common protective device if you order the
connector kit for AC coupling 6SL3260-2DC10-0AA0 (AC link) for each converter. It is not
permissible that the sum of the rated input currents of the converter exceed the continuous
current carrying capacity of the cables and/or the rated current of the optional line filter; see
Section "Connecting DC links via the DC link coupling".
The connector in the connector kit for the AC coupling (16 mm2/AWG 6) replaces the line
connector contained in the scope of delivery of the converter (6 mm2/AWG 10). The single-
core cable is routed through this connector and electrical contact with the cable is made
with a set screw. In this way, the line connections of a phase are connected via a cable
for all converters (see also Chapter "Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling
(Page 183)").
Configuring
$&99$&99 $&99$&99

)) ))

① Line disconnecting device e.g. load disconnector

③ Line filter (optional) 6SL3203-0BE23-5HA0: Rated current 35 A
6SL3203-0BE26-5HA0: Rated current 65 A
④ Protective device for fault protection e.g. fuses, circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers (see Product Information
"Protective Devices for SINAMICS S210 (https://
⑤ Cables for the AC coupling For permissible cables for IEC, UL and CSA applications, see Chapter "Establishing
the AC coupling and the DC link coupling (Page 183)"
⑦ Protective conductor For the cross-section according to ⑨
minimum cross-section, see ⑧
⑧ Protective connection Group protection according to IEC:
• 6 mm2 / AWG 10
Group protection according to NEC/CEC:
• 6 mm2 / AWG 10 for overcurrent protective devices up to 60 A
⑨ Cable to the line filter Depending on the installation conditions (type of cable routing and ambient tem‐
perature) and the local regulations with reference to the total rated input currents.
Figure 4-7 Converter with AC coupling (without/with line filter)
DC links coupled via the DC link coupling

You can couple the DC links of up to 6 converters to exchange energy within this drive line-up.
To couple the DC links, the line connections of the coupled converters must also be connected.
For each converter, order connector kit 6SL3260-2DC00-0AA0 for the AC and DC link coupling
(AC and DC link).
The following figure shows the basic structure of such a system.
Configuring
$&99$&99

))


vice
③ Line filter (optional) 6SL3203-0BE23-5HA0: Rated current 35 A
6SL3203-0BE26-5HA0: Rated current 65 A
④ Protective device for e.g. fuses, circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers (see Product Infor‐
⑤ Cables for the AC cou‐ For permissible cables for IEC, UL and CSA applications, see Chapter
pling "Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling (Page 183)"
⑥ Cables for the DC link same as ⑤
coupling
⑦ Protective conductor For the cross-section according to ⑨
minimum cross-section, see ⑧
⑧ Protective connection Group protection according to IEC:
• 6 mm2 / AWG 10
Group protection according to NEC/CEC:
⑨ Cable to the line filter Depending on the installation conditions (type of cable routing and am‐
bient temperature) and the local regulations with reference to the total
Figure 4-8 Converters with AC coupling and DC link coupling
Note that for the cables for the line connection ⑤ and for coupling the DC links ⑥, only the
specified cable types are permissible to achieve degree of protection IP20 and ensure reliable
contacting.
The cables for the AC coupling ⑤ of a drive line-up must be loaded with no more than
65 A due to the plug-in connector. Calculate the permissible current-carrying capacity of the
cables in accordance with the local installation regulations and make sure that the total of
Configuring
the rated input currents of all devices that are connected to a common AC coupling does not
exceed the calculated current-carrying capacity of the cables or the optional line filter.
Example of a calculation according to IEC 60364-5-52:
• Cross-section: 16 mm2
• Insulating material: PVC
• No. of loaded conductors: 3
• Type of cable installation: E
• Ambient temperature: 50 °C
• Current carrying capacity: 56.8 A
Ambient temperature [°C] Max. current Max. current

at 70 °C cables [A] at 90 °C cables [A]
40 65.0 65.0
45 63.2 65.0
50 56.8 65.0
For end use in the USA or Canada, the relevant national standards that apply there must be
observed in installations.
The common protective device must disconnect the power supply of the drive line-up in the
event of a fault without thermally overloading the AC coupling.
For suitable protective devices, see Product Information "Protective devices for SINAMICS
S210 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109815356)".
The selection of the protective device can be as follows with estimation:
• Calculate the input current of group IL_group as the total of the rated input currents (see Chapter
"Specific data of the converter with 3 AC line connection (Page 560)").
• The input current of group IL_group must be less than the current-carrying capacity IZ of the AC
coupling.
• The rated current IN of the protective device should be 25% greater than the previously
calculated input current of the group. However, the maximum permissible rated current of
the largest protective element according to "Protective devices for SINAMICS S210" must not
be exceeded.
4.1.7 Line connection via protection and monitoring equipment
4.1.7.1 Overcurrent protective devices (mandatory)
Standard fuses for IEC and UL

Examples of suitable fuses are provided in the technical data.
Permissible protective devices are described for 3 connection types (1 AC, 3 AC and 3 AC with
AC coupling) in the subsequent chapters with connection options for converters.
Configuring
More detailed information is provided in the product information "Protective Devices for
SINAMICS S210 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109815356)".
For installation in conformance with UL and cUL, additional information is provided in the
Appendix: UL Markings (Page 889)".
4.1.7.2 Residual current devices (optional)

Residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) can be used in addition to overcurrent protective
devices.
Using residual current circuit breakers for converters with 1 AC line connection
• Only use super-resistant (short time-delayed) type A or type B residual current circuit
breakers.
• Use a residual current circuit breaker with a rated fault current of 300 mA.
• Carefully ensure that the loop impedance is maintained corresponding to local installation
regulations.
• Only operate the system with the internal line filters or recommended external line filters.
• Ensure that the switching elements (disconnector unit, contactors) for connecting and
disconnecting the drive system have a delay time of max. 35 ms between the closing/
opening of the individual main contacts.
Using residual current circuit breakers for converters with 3 AC line connection
• Only use super-resistant (short time-delayed) type B residual current circuit breakers.
• Use a residual current circuit breaker with a rated fault current of 300 mA.
• Carefully ensure that the loop impedance is maintained corresponding to local installation
regulations.
• Only operate the system with the internal line filters or recommended external line filters.
• Ensure that the switching elements (disconnector unit, contactors) for connecting and
disconnecting the drive system have a delay time of max. 35 ms between the closing/
opening of the individual main contacts.
• Install separate residual current circuit breakers for each converter or for a group of
converters when using an AC coupling.
WARNING
Electric shock or fire when using unsuitable residual current devices
In the case of a fault, converters with 3 AC line connection can generate smooth DC fault
currents, which means that type A or AC residual current circuit breakers cannot be used.
• Use the recommended type B residual current circuit breakers to protect converters.
• If higher-level residual current circuit breakers are used, then these must also be type B
devices.
Configuring
Typical converter leakage currents
Note
Nuisance tripping of residual current circuit breakers
For unfavorable line supply conditions, as a result of the inherent system, converters can
generate capacitive discharge currents. These capacitive discharge currents can cause a residual
current circuit breaker to unnecessarily trip (nuisance tripping).
Typical leakage currents for converters with 1 AC line connection
Table 4-1 Decision-making support/guide values for leakage currents of 1 AC devices1)
Device Icm, typical Icm, typical Icm, typical

50 Hz component up to 60 Hz component up to Complete frequency
240 V 240 V spectrum for 50 Hz, up
to 240 V
Frame size FSA 13 mA 15 mA 70 mA (maximum @
8 kHz)
Frame size FSB 13 mA 15 mA 70 mA (maximum @
8 kHz)
Frame size FSC 13 mA 15 mA 70 mA (maximum @
8 kHz)
1 AC line filter (18 A) 7 mA 8 mA A statement is not possi‐
Supplementary filter 40 mA 48 mA ble, as this depends
(for additional load, heavily on the system
three-phase)
1)
Actual values can deviate significantly from the data as a result of the dependency of the leakage
current on the load, cable length, line voltage and frequency, component tolerances as well as the
protective conductor connection.
By removing the grounding screw of the integrated line filter, for an appropriate
configuration, multiples of the leakage currents of the complete frequency spectrum can
occur from the table above.
Typical leakage currents for converters with 3 AC line connection
Table 4-2 Decision-making support/guide values for leakage currents of 3 AC devices1)

to 480 V
Frame size FSA 10 mA 12 mA 85 mA (maximum @
8 kHz)
Frame size FSB 15 mA 17 mA 100 mA (maximum @
750 Hz)
Frame size FSC 24 mA 29 mA 100 mA (maximum @
750 Hz)
Configuring
4.2 Configuring the motor

to 480 V
3 AC line filter (35 A and 9 mA 11 mA A statement is not possi‐
65 A) ble, as this depends
Supplementary filter 40 mA 48 mA heavily on the system
(for additional load,
three-phase)
1)
Actual values can deviate significantly from the data as a result of the dependency of the leakage
current on the load, cable length, line voltage and frequency, component tolerances as well as the
protective conductor connection.
By removing the grounding screw of the integrated line filter, for an appropriate
configuration, multiples of the leakage currents of the complete frequency spectrum can
occur from the table above.
4.2.1 Configuration sequence
Motion Control
Drives are optimized for motion control applications. They execute linear or rotary movements
within a defined travel cycle. All movements should be optimized in terms of time.
As a result, drives must meet the following requirements:
• High dynamic response, i.e. short rise times
• Capable of overload, i.e. a high reserve for accelerating
• Wide control range, i.e. high resolution for precise positioning.
The following table "Configuring procedure" is applicable for synchronous and induction
motors.
Configuring
General configuring procedure

The function description of the machine provides the basis for configuration. The components
are selected according to physical interdependencies and the selection process is usually carried
out in the following sequence of steps:
Table 4-3 Configuration sequence
step Description of the configuring activity

1. Clarify the drive type Refer to the
2. Define the constraints and incorporate them into the automation system next Chapter
3. Define the load case, calculate the maximum load torque and determine the
motor
4. Define the converter required See the Cata‐
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for additional axes log
6. Determine line-side power options (main switch, fuses, line filters, etc.)
7. Define other system components (e.g. braking resistors)
8. Calculate the current demand of the components for the 24 V DC power sup‐
ply - and specify the power supplies (SITOP devices, Control Supply Modules)
9. Determine the connection system components
10. Configure the drive line-up components
11. Calculate the required cable cross sections for power supply and motor con‐
nections
12. Inclusion of mandatory installation clearances
Also observe the recommended combinations of converters and motors with the associated
connecting cables in Chapters "Motor-converter combinations for 1FK2 (Page 50)" and "Motor-
converter combinations for 1FT2 (Page 53)".
More information
We recommend using the "SIZER" configuration software to select the converter.
You can find additional information about SIZER on the Internet:
Download SIZER (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54992004)
4.2.2 Clarify the drive type

Select the motor on the basis of the required torque (load torque), which is defined by the
application, e.g. traveling drives, hoisting drives, test stands, centrifuges, paper and rolling mill
drives, feed drives or main spindle drives.
Gearboxes to convert motion or to adapt the motor speed and motor torque to the load
conditions must also be taken into account when selecting the motor.
You must know the following mechanical data in order to determine the torque to be
supplied by the motor:
• The load torque specified by the application
• Masses to be moved
Configuring
• Diameter of the drive wheel

• Leadscrew pitch, gear ratios
• Frictional resistance data
• Mechanical efficiency
• Traversing distances
• Maximum velocity
• Maximum acceleration and maximum deceleration
• Cycle time
4.2.3 Define the boundary conditions and incorporate them into the automation
system
When configuring, take into account the following:
• The line system configuration when using specific motor types and/or line filters
• Rated values of the motor
• The ambient temperatures and the installation altitude of the motors and drive components
• Heat dissipation from the motors
Other conditions apply when integrating the drives into an automation environment such as
SIMATIC or SIMOTION.
For motion control and technology functions (e.g. positioning), as well as for synchronous
operation functions, the corresponding automation system, e.g. SIMATIC S7-1500 or
SIMOTION D is used.
Configuring
4.2.4 Define the load case, calculate the maximum load torque and determine
the motor
The motors are defined bases on the motor type-specific limiting characteristic curves.
The limiting characteristic curves describe the torque or power curve over the speed.
The limiting characteristic curves take the limits of the motor into account on the basis of the
DC-link voltage. The DC-link voltage is dependent on the line voltage.

0BPD[

7RUTXHLQ1P

6

0RWRUVSHHGLQUPLQ
M_max Curve of the maximum torque

S1 S1 characteristic
Figure 4-9 Limit characteristics for synchronous motors
Procedure
1. Determine the load that is specified by the application itself.
Use different characteristics for the different loads.
The following operating scenarios have been defined:
– Duty cycle with constant ON duration
– Free duty cycle
2. Determine the characteristic torque and speed operating points of the motor for the defined
load.
3. Calculate the acceleration torque of the motor.
Add the load torque and the acceleration torque. to obtain the maximum required torque.
4. Verify the maximum motor torque with the limiting characteristic curves of the motors.
The following criteria must be taken into account when selecting the motor:
– Compliance with the dynamic limits
All torque-speed points of the load must be below the relevant limiting characteristic
curve.
– Compliance with the thermal limits
At average motor speed, the effective motor torque must be below the S1 characteristic
(continuous motion) during the load.
Configuring
Duty cycles with constant ON duration

For duty cycles with constant ON duration, there are specific requirements for the torque
characteristic curve as a function of the speed, for example:
M = constant, M ~ n2, M ~ n or P = constant
39
W
˽
˽ PD[
Figure 4-10 S1 duty (continuous motion)
The drives with this load cycle typically operate at a stationary operating point.
Procedure
1. Configure a base load for the stationary operating point. The base load torque must lie below
the S1 characteristic.
2. In the event of transient overloads (e.g. during acceleration), configure an overload.
Calculate the overload current in relation to the required overload torque. The overload
torque must lie below the M_max characteristic.
In summary, the motor is configured as follows:

.@NBY

.@LPOTU@Ü

5PSRVFJO/N

4

.@LPOTU@(

.PUPSTQFFEJOSNJO
M_max Curve of the maximum torque M_const_ov Curve of the overload torque
er
S1 S1 characteristic M_const_ba Curve of the base load torque
se
Figure 4-11 Motor selection for a duty cycle with constant switch-on duration
3. Select a motor that satisfies the requirements of S1 duty.
Configuring
Free duty cycle

A free duty cycle defines the curve of the motor speed and the torque over time.
7 W
0
WL W
n Speed T Cycle time

M Torque Δti Time interval
t Time
Figure 4-12 Example of free duty cycle
Procedure
Determine the required motor torque as follows:
• Define a load torque for each time slice. Also take the average load moment of inertia and
motor moment of inertia into account for acceleration operations. If required, take a
frictional torque into account that opposes the direction of motion.
• With mounted gearbox:
Determine the load torque and the acceleration torque that must be supplied by the motor.
Take the gear ratio and gear efficiency into account.
Note
A higher gear ratio increases positioning accuracy in terms of encoder resolution. For any
given encoder resolution, as the gear ratio increases, so does the resolution of the machine
position to be detected.
The following formulas can be used for duty cycles outside the field-weakening range.
For the motor torque in a time slice Δt i the following applies:

2 n /D V W L 2 n /D s W L 1
M0RW L = (J 0 + J*) • • • i + (J /D V W • • + M /D V t L + M5 ) •
60 tL 60 tL i• *
The motor speed is: n0RW L = n/D V W L • i

Configuring
The effective torque is obtained as follows: ∑M 2

• Δt L
0 RWL
M0RWHII =
T
The average motor speed is calculated as follows: n0RWL$

+ n0RWL(

• tL
n0RWPLWWHO = 2
T
JM Motor moment of inertia

JG Gearbox moment of inertia
Jload Load moment of inertia
nload Load speed
i Gear ratio
ηG Gearbox efficiency
Mload Load torque
MR Frictional torque
T Cycle time
A; E Initial value, final value in time slice Δt i
te ON duration
∆ti Time interval
The effective torque Meff must lie below the S1 characteristic.
The maximum torque Mmax is produced during the acceleration operation. Mmax must lie
below the voltage limiting characteristic curve. In summary, the motor is configured as
follows:

0BPD[

7RUTXHLQ1P
0BPD[IURPWUDYHOFXUYH

6
0BUPV

QBDYHUDJH

0RWRUVSHHGLQUPLQ

M_max Curve of the maximum torque S1 S1 characteristic = M0

M_eff Effective torque ● Points from the traversing profile
n_mean Mean speed
Figure 4-13 Motor selection for duty cycle
Configuring
4.3 Configuring the braking resistor
Defining the motor

By varying, you can find the motor that satisfies the conditions of the operating mode (duty
cycle).
• Determine the motor current at base load. The calculation depends on the type of motor
(synchronous motor or induction motor) and the operating mode (duty cycle) used.
Note
When configuring according to duty cycle with constant ON duration with overload, the
overload current is calculated in relation to the required overload torque.
• Comply with the thermal limits of the motor.

• Configure the other properties of the motor through the available motor options.

The converters are equipped with a Braking Module that converts the regenerative energy of the
servomotor into heat using an integrated braking resistor. Regenerative energy is produced, for
example, when braking the connected mechanical system.
If the motor feeds back more energy than can be dissipated by the internal braking resistor,
then the converter shuts down with fault F30002 (DC link overvoltage). In this case, you will
require an external braking resistor.
If you know the moment of inertia of your system (referred to the motor shaft), then
calculate the braking energy that occurs according to the information provided in Chapter
"Calculating the braking energy (Page 87)".
Table 4-4 Braking power and braking energy with the internal braking resistor
Article number Rated power in Continuous Peak power Braking energy

kW braking power in kW in kJ
in W
Converter with line connection 200 V ... 240 V 1 AC
6SL5310-1BB10-1CF0 0.1 51) 0.35 0.01
6SL5310-1BB10-2CF0 0.2 10 0.6 0.15
6SL5310-1BB10-4CF0 0.4 20 1.3 0.325
6SL5310-1BB10-8CF0 0.75 40 2.4 0.60
Converters with 3 AC 200 ... 240 V line connection
6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 0.4 50 0.6 0.3
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 0.75 50 0.8 0.3
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 1.0 50 0.8 0.3
6SL5310-1BE11-5DF0 1.5 100 1.6 0.6
6SL5310-1BE12-0DF0 2.0 100 1.6 0.6
6SL5310-1BE13-5DF0 3.5 325 5.0 1.95
6SL5310-1BE15-0DF0 5.0 325 5.0 1.95
6SL5310-1BE17-0DF0 7.0 325 5.0 1.95
Configuring
Article number Rated power in Continuous Peak power Braking energy

kW braking power in kW in kJ
in W
Converter with line connection 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V
6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 0.4 50 1.2 0.30
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 0.75 50 2.4 0.30
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 1.0 50 3.0 0.30
6SL5310-1BE11-5DF0 1.5 100 5.7 0.60
6SL5310-1BE12-0DF0 2.0 100 6.0 0.60
6SL5310-1BE13-5DF0 3.5 325 15.0 1.95
6SL5310-1BE15-0DF0 5.0 325 19.0 1.95
6SL5310-1BE17-0DF0 7.0 325 19.5 1.95
1)
The 1 AC 200 ... 240 V 100 W device is not equipped with an internal braking resistor. An internal
braking resistor is not required for normal operation as a result of the available DC link capacitance.
4.3.1 Calculating the braking energy

To find out whether you require an external braking resistor, calculate the braking energy
according to the following formula:
1 4π2
W = ---- (Jmot + J) ---------- (n12 - n 22)
2 3600
W / J Braking energy

Jmot / kgm2 Moment of inertia of the servo motor
• Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC
240 V (Page 405)
• Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC
480 V (Page 435)
• Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC
240 V (Page 463)
• Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC
480 V (Page 504)
J / kgm2 Moment of inertia of the driven mechanical system in relation to the shaft of the
servomotor
n1 / r/min Initial speed
n2 / r/min Speed after braking
Note
As the friction is not taken into account in the above formula, less energy is fed back to the servo
drive system in practice than that calculated in the formula.
Configuring
Example
An 1FK2104-5AK1… servomotor with low moment of inertia (with integrated holding brake)
with mechanical system is fed from a SINAMICS S210 6SL5310‑BB10‑8CF0. It is to be braked
from 3000 r/min to 600 r/min
Moment of inertia of the servomotor 1FK2104-5AK1… Jmot = 0.65 × 10-4 kgm2

Moment of inertia of the driven mechanical system J = 4 ×10-4 kgm2
n1 = 3000 r/min n2 = 600 r/min
⇒ W = 22.03 J (1 J = 1 Ws)
The braking energy that can be absorbed by the integrated braking resistor (600 J) is higher
than the actual braking energy (22.03 J). In this case, therefore, no external braking resistor
is required.
Configuring
4.3.2 Requirements placed on the external braking resistor
WARNING
Risk of fire caused by continuous overload
An explosion or a fire could occur if the external braking resistor is continuously overloaded (for
example as the result of a defective Braking Module). This can result in severe injury or death
and/or the enclosure could melt.
• Use only braking resistors that are intrinsically safe.
• Use only a braking resistor with temperature monitoring and connect the temperature
monitoring to digital input DI4 of the converter.
NOTICE
Damage to the converter due to its maximum load being exceeded
If the maximum permissible continuous power, peak power or braking energy is exceeded, the
converter may be damaged.
• Only ever operate the converter within its maximum permissible working range.
Load cycles for braking resistors
3 3
3PD[ 3PD[
3%U
3FRQW
W WRQ W
7
Figure 4-14 Peak power, continuous power and duty cycle of the braking resistor
PBr ≤ Pmax Pmax [kW]: Maximum peak power

EBr = PBr · ton Pcont [kW]: Maximum continuous power
EBr ≤ Emax PBr [kW]: Application-specific braking power
T ≥ EBr / Pcont Emax [kJ]: Maximum braking energy
EBr [kJ]: Application-specific braking energy
ton [s]: Braking duration
T [s]: Cycle duration
Configuring
Observe the following points when calculating the braking power:

• The braking power required in the application must not exceed the maximum peak power
(according to the following tables).
• The required braking energy results from the product of the required braking power and the
duty cycle (integral of the braking power over time).
• The required braking energy must not exceed the maximum braking energy (according to
the following tables).
• The average braking power (arithmetic mean of the braking cycle) must not exceed the
maximum continuous power (according to the following tables).
Resistance data for an external braking resistor
Table 4-5 Resistance data for an external braking resistor
Converter Braking resistor

Article number Rated pow‐ Minimum Maximum Maximum Maximum
er resistance continuous peak power braking en‐
in kW in Ω power in W ergy
in W in kJ
Line voltage 200 ... 240 V 1 AC
6SL5310-1BB10-1CF0 0.1 300 50 350 0.7
6SL5310-1BB10-2CF0 0.2 150 100 600 1.3
6SL5310-1BB10-4CF0 0.4 100 200 1300 2.3
6SL5310-1BB10-8CF0 0.75 50 380 2400 3.8
6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 0.4 100 200 600 1
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 0.75 100 380 1200 1
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 1.0 100 500 1700 1
6SL5310-1BE11-5DF0 1.5 50 880 2900 20
6SL5310-1BE12-0DF0 2.0 50 1000 3800 20
6SL5310-1BE13-5DF0 3.5 15 1750 7500 25
6SL5310-1BE15-0DF0 5.0 15 2500 9500 25
6SL5310-1BE17-0DF0 7.0 15 3250 12500 25
6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 0.4 200 200 1200 8
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 0.75 200 380 2400 8
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 1.0 200 500 3400 8
6SL5310-1BE11-5DF0 1.5 100 880 5700 80
6SL5310-1BE12-0DF0 2.0 100 1000 7600 80
6SL5310-1BE13-5DF0 3.5 30 1750 15000 100
6SL5310-1BE15-0DF0 5.0 30 2500 19000 100
6SL5310-1BE17-0DF0 7.0 30 3250 25000 100
Configuring
Examples of suitable intrinsically safe braking resistors from a third-party supplier
Table 4-6 Examples of suitable intrinsically safe braking resistors from a third-party supplier
Converter Braking resistor, Michael Koch GmbH1)

Article number Rated Order designation with Continu‐ Continu‐ Maximum Maximum
power temperature sensor 190 °C ous power ous power peak pow‐ braking en‐
in kW in W in W er ergy
for CE for UL in W in kJ
6SL5310-1BB10-1CF0 0.1 BWG250047TS-1902) 50 50 350 0.7
6SL5310-1BB10-2CF0 0.2 BWG250047TS-1902) 100 100 600 1.1
6SL5310-1BB10-4CF0 0.4 BWG250047TS-1902) 100 100 1300 1.8
6SL5310-1BB10-8CF0 0.75 BWG500027TS-190 200 200 2400 2.7
6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 0.4 BWG500027TS-190 200 200 600 0.9
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 0.75 BWG600014TS-190 3)
380 240 1200 0.8
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 1.0 BWG600014TS-190 3)
400 240 1700 0.8
6SL5310-1BE11-5DF0 1.5 BWD500027K03LIP65IS 600 600 2900 14.5
6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 0.4 BWG500100TS-190 200 200 1200 5.2
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 0.75 BWG600047TS-190 380 240 2400 6.2
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 1.0 BWG600047TS-190 400 240 3400 6.1
1)
Can only be directly sourced from Michael Koch GmbH
2)
This resistor can be directly ordered through Siemens by specifying the following Article number: GXK:BWG250047TS-190
3)
This resistor can be directly ordered through Siemens by specifying the following Article number: GXK:BWG600014TS-190
Remark relating to braking resistors:

• Braking resistors from Michael Koch GmbH
The resistance values of the braking resistors deviate from the listed general values in Table
"Resistance data for an external braking resistor".
The braking resistors have been tested in conjunction with SINAMICS S210 converters and
are approved.
• Braking resistors from other manufacturers
Braking resistors from other manufacturers should be dimensioned according to Table
"Resistance data for an external braking resistor".
Configuring
4.3.3 Connecting an external braking resistor
Connecting an external braking resistor

Use shielded cables to connect power to the external braking resistor.
How you connect an external braking resistor and the temperature monitoring is described in
the following Chapters:
• For converters with 1 AC line connection: "Connecting a 1 AC braking resistor (Page 176)"
• For converters with 3 AC line connection: "Connecting a 3 AC braking resistor (Page 185)"
Setting the temperature monitoring of the external braking resistor

Connect the temperature monitoring of the external braking resistor at digital input DI4:
"Connecting the digital input (Page 186)".
If you have connected an external braking resistor with temperature monitoring, then you
must activate the temperature monitoring.
Activate the DI4 digital input "Temperature monitoring of the external braking resistor".
The converter switches the motor off as soon as the external braking resistor is too hot or
when no external braking resistor is connected (wire break).
F7860 power unit: Thermal overload of external braking resistor

Cause: The external braking resistor is thermally overloaded. Its use is therefore disabled.
Note: The monitoring of the external braking resistor configured via DI4 of X130 has tripped.
Configuring
4.4 DC link coupling (for converters with 3 AC line connection)
4.4 DC link coupling (for converters with 3 AC line connection)

Using connector X3 you can connect the DC links of up to six converters with one another.
With the DC link coupling, energy recovered by drives operating in the generating mode does
not have to be converted into heat via the braking resistor, but is instead used by drives
operating in the motoring mode.
Prerequisites and conditions for the DC link coupling

• It is permissible to couple the DC links of converters with different power ratings.
• The converters must be mounted with decreasing power ratings starting from the line supply
infeed.
-JOFDPOOFDUJPO
%$MJOL
DPVQMJOH
L8
L8
L8
bN:
bN:
L8
• All converters whose DC links are coupled, must also be coupled on the line side (AC
coupling).
• The coupled converters must be housed in the same control cabinet.
• Only a 1-row setup is permissible. It is not possible to distribute the coupled converters over
2 or more rows.
• You are not recommended to create a common DC link coupling for devices with Article No.
6SL5... and devices with Article No. 6SL3....
Note
• For a DC link coupling, line connection via the standard connector is not permissible.
• Feeding in DC power directly at the DC link is not permissible!
Configuring
4.5 Vertical axis
Establishing the DC link coupling

1. Mount the converters, without any lateral intermediate spaces, with decreasing power
ratings starting from the line supply infeed.
If a line filter is used, you must connect the line supply infeed from the left-hand side.
2. Establishing the AC and DC link coupling:
Use the connectors and cables that are described in the following chapters:
– "Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling (Page 183)"
– "Connectors and cables for the AC coupling and DC link coupling (Page 591)"
Additional external braking resistors for the DC link coupling

The entire braking power of all converters coupled in a group is always available for braking.
If you require an external braking resistor for your system in spite of a DC link coupling, then
you must connect this to the converter with the highest power rating. You can find more
information in Chapter:
• "Configuring the braking resistor (Page 86)"
Special features for converters with a 200 V … 240 V 3 AC line connection

• The DC link coupling is only permissible for converters of the same frame size. Otherwise, the
above mentioned points apply.
4.5 Vertical axis
4.5.1 Setting SS1 in conjunction with vertical axes
Requirement
One of the two Safety Integrated Functions "Safe Stop 1 with time control" (SS1-t) or "Safe Stop
1 with acceleration monitoring" (SS1-a) is enabled.
Settings
With a vertical axis, if you use the Safety Integrated Functions "Safe Stop 1 with time control"
(SS1-t) or "Safe Stop 1 with acceleration monitoring" (SS1-a), then you must set p9556 as
follows:
Table 4-7 SS1 setting
Parameter Setting value Description

p9556 p9556 > p1135 + p1228 + r1217 This setting prevents the vertical axis from
sagging after the transition to STO.
Configuring
4.5 Vertical axis
Result
After the correct setting is made, SS1-t and SS1-a behave as follows:
O
44
Q
Q
U
Q 1VMTFDBODFMMBUJPO
Q S
4504#$
Q
Figure 4-15 Correct setting of p9556 for SS1-t and SS1-a
• By immediately specifying n_set = 0, the converter brakes along the OFF3 down ramp
(p1135).
• Once standstill has been detected, the converter closes the motor holding brake.
The converter detects standstill in the following cases:
– If the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold (p1226).
– When the monitoring time (p1227), which was started when the speed setpoint ≤ speed
threshold (p1226), has expired.
• At the end of the holding brake closing time (r1217), the converter cuts off the motor torque
(pulse cancellation).
• The converter is in the "switching on inhibited" state.
Parameters
The following list contains parameters to set SS1-t and SS1-a in conjunction with a vertical axis.
Number Name Unit

p1135[0] OFF3 ramp-down time [s]
r1217[0] Motor holding brake closing time [ms]
p1226[0] Threshold for zero speed detection [rpm]
p1227[0] Zero speed detection monitoring time [s]
p1228[0] Pulse cancellation delay time [s]
p9556 SI transition time SS1 to STO [ms]
Configuring
4.6 Application examples
4.5.2 Setting the electronic counterweight for a vertical axis
Overview
With a vertical axis without mechanical weight compensation, you can set an electronic
counterweight.
Requirement
The axis is at a standstill.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to set the electronic counterweight:
1. Make a note of the necessary offset value when the axis is at standstill:
r0031
2. Set the value from r0031 in p1532.
3. Save the change.
4. To prevent the axis from dropping after the brake is released, specify the torque offset as an
additional torque setpoint (M_ADD) via the supplementary telegram 750.
The supplementary telegram 750 must be configured in the PLC.
As a result, the holding torque is specified when the brake is released.
Note
Due to the specified supplementary torque setpoint via the controller, a switchover of the
supplementary torque is also possible. Thus, when the load is lifted, you can specify a
supplementary torque that is different from the supplementary torque for movement without
a load.
Parameters
The following list contains parameters to set the electronic counterweight for a vertical axis.
Number Name Unit

r0031 Actual torque smoothed [Nm]
p1532[0] Torque limit offset [Nm]
4.6 Application examples

You can find SINAMICS application examples in the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60733299).
Configuring
4.7 Establishing communication of the converter with the controller
4.7 Establishing communication of the converter with the controller

To ensure that communication between the PLC and converter is possible, configure the
converter or converters in the PLC, and activate the topology-based initialization. When
powering up, the converter takes the PROFINET device name as well as the IP address from the
PLC.
The converter also imports the telegram settings from the PLC.
The converter supports a standard telegram with 2 supplementary telegrams and a
PROFIsafe telegram.
The following telegrams are possible:
• Standard telegrams
– Telegram 3
– Telegram 5
– Telegram 102
– Telegram 105
The telegrams are suitable for IRT communication.
Telegrams 3 and 102 are also suitable for RT communication.
IRT communication is mandatory for telegrams 5 and 105.
• Supplementary telegrams
– Telegram 700
– Telegram 750
• PROFIsafe telegrams
– Telegram 30
– Telegram 901
More information
• Acyclic communication
The converter supports reading and writing parameters via acyclic communication.
The converter can simultaneously establish a total of 8 acyclic connections via the integrated
PROFINET interface.
• You can find more information about the telegrams here:
Communication telegrams (Page 869)
Configuring
4.8 Functions that require licensing
4.8.1 Fundamentals
Overview
When it is delivered from the factory, the converter contains the firmware files required for
operation. It can be operated without a memory card. In this case, the converter is used with the
basic functionality without functions that require licensing.
Refer to the ordering documentation (e.g. catalogs) for information on basic functions of the
converter and functions that require licensing.
Using functions that require licensing

If you want to use functions that require licensing, you must purchase the relevant licenses.
In the commissioning tool, load the licenses into the converter in the form of a license file.
The license file is stored retentively on the memory card. The memory card must be inserted
in the converter so that the converter can check during ramp-up that the necessary licenses
are present.
Web License Manager

See Web License Manager (http://www.siemens.com/automation/license) to find out which
licenses are assigned to an existing memory card.
If you need additional licenses, you can assign these licenses to the memory card and create
a new license file in the Web License Manager.
Ordering licenses together with a memory card

When licenses are purchased as Z options together with a memory card, the following
applies:
• The certificates of license (eCoL) are stored with the license file on the memory card during
the ordering process. The certificates of license are in PDF format.
• The license file is permanently assigned to the memory card during the ordering process. The
license file is provided as a ZIP file.
Purchase licenses without memory card

If licenses are purchased and assigned to an existing memory card, the following applies:
• The purchaser receives individual certificates of license (eCoL) in PDF format for purchased
licenses.
If the purchaser wishes to include the certificates of license on the memory card, they must
be copied to the memory card manually.
• The license file is created in the Web License Manager using the certificates of license,
assigned to an existing memory card, and made available to download as a ZIP file.
Configuring
Differences between certificates of license and license files

Certificates of license and license files differ as follows:
Type Description
Certificate of li‐ • Provided as a PDF for each license purchased.
cense (eCoL) • Contains the delivery note number and license number.
• Necessary in order to create the license file in the Web License Manager.
• It is not contained in the license file.
License file • Provided as a ZIP file.
• Contains serial number of the memory card in the file name. Cannot be trans‐
ferred to other memory cards.
• Necessary in order to activate licenses for functions that require licensing in the
commissioning tool.
• Contains a signature file. The converter uses the signature file to verify the
authenticity of the licenses.
Trial License mode

Operation of a converter with one or more functions requiring licensing without sufficient
licensing is only permissible during commissioning and servicing. To do this, activate Trial
License mode in the license overview in the commissioning tool.
Note
Not all functions requiring licensing can be used in Trial License mode.
4.8.2 System responses to under-licensing (ramp-up)
Requirement
• A memory card is present and inserted into the converter.
Licenses for functions requiring licensing must be assigned to a memory card.
You can find more information in Chapter "Creating and downloading the license file
(Page 100)".
Description of function
Licensing is automatically checked during ramp-up of the converter.
Insufficient licensing is indicated as follows on the converter:
• F13000 License not adequate
• READY LED red light flashing at 2 Hz
Configuring
4.8.3 System responses to under-licensing (operation)
Requirement
• A memory card is present and inserted into the converter.
Insufficient licensing is indicated as follows on the converter:
• A13002 licensing not sufficient in operation
Possible cause:
• The memory card is defective or was removed.
• Functions requiring licensing were activated during operation and the licensing is not
sufficient.
Possible consequence:
• If the cause is not eliminated, fault F13000 is output automatically at the next restart. The
function that requires licensing can no longer be used.
4.8.4 Creating and downloading the license file
Requirement
The following information is required to create a license file in the Web License Manager:
• License number and delivery note number of the license
• Product designation
• Serial number of the memory card
The serial number is on the memory card.
Alternative: Copy the serial number from the license overview in the commissioning tool you
are using, and then paste the number in the Web License Manager.
Procedure
1. Call the following link: Web License Manager (http://www.siemens.com/automation/
license).
2. Click on "Direct access".
The progress indicator shows the "Login" step.
3. Enter the license number and delivery note number of your license. Then click "Next".
The progress indicator shows the "Identify product" step.
4. Enter the serial number of the memory card.
Configuring
5. Select the product you are using. Then click "Next".

The progress indicator shows the "Select licenses" step.
In the "Already assigned licenses" column, you can see which licenses of a particular memory
card have already been assigned and how often.
In the "Additional licenses to be assigned" column, activate the licenses you want and specify
how many additional licenses you require.
6. Activate the additionally required licenses. Then click "Next".
The progress indicator shows the "Assign licenses" step.
This page shows a summary of the selected licenses for checking.
7. To start the assignment, click "Assign".
The progress indicator shows the "Generate license key" step.
The licenses are assigned to the specified memory card.
The license file is displayed and is available to download.
8. Download the license file to the file directory of your operating unit.
Result
The license file is stored in the file directory of your operating unit.
4.8.5 Downloading the license file at a later time
Requirement
The license file has already been created in the Web License Manager.
Procedure
To display the license file so you can download it, proceed as follows:
1. Call the following link: Web License Manager (http://www.siemens.com/automation/
license).
2. In the navigation, click the "Display license key" option in the "User menu".
3. Enter the serial number of the memory card you are using in the "Hardware serial number"
field.
OR
In the "License number" field, enter your license number.
4. Click the "Display license key" button.
The license file is displayed and is available to download.
5. Download the license file to the file directory of your operating unit.
Result
The license file is stored in the file directory of your operating unit.
Configuring
4.8.6 Transferring the license file to the converter and activating it
Overview
Check the license status for the converter at the license overview page. All functions that require
licensing for the converter are listed in a table. The table also shows which functions are enabled
and whether licenses are missing for individual functions.
You can call the license overview page from the web server or the Startdrive project of the
converter.
The procedure is described below using Startdrive as an example.
Requirement
• A memory card is plugged into the converter.
• The license file is in the file directory of your operating unit.
• The data in the converter and in the Startdrive project are consistent.
• There is an online connection between the operating unit and the drive.
Procedure
1. Call the license overview page.
2. Click the "Activate the license key file" button.
A corresponding dialog opens.
3. Select the license file in the file system of your operating unit.
4. Close the load dialog.
The licenses are checked.
After a check has been successfully completed, dialog "Licensing" opens.
5. Click on the "Activate " button.
The dialog closes.
Result
The licenses are active. The license status for the converter is updated.
More information
For additional information about the license overview in Startdrive, see Chapter "Overview of
licenses (Page 328)".
For additional information about the license overview in the web server, see Chapter
"Licenses (Page 242)".
Configuring
4.8.7 Restoring licensing after the memory card is removed
Overview
When a license file is loaded into the converter, the license file is stored retentively on the
memory card.
If you remove the memory card from the converter and perform a restart, the function
requiring licensing is blocked after ramp-up.
Requirement
The license file has been loaded into the converter.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to start using blocked functions again:
1. Reinsert the memory card into the converter.
2. Perform a restart.
3. Check the license status on the license overview page.
4.8.8 Loading certificates of license (eCoL) into the file directory of the operating
unit
Overview
Use this function to back up the certificates of license (eCoL) contained on the memory card to
your operating unit.
Requirement
• The memory card contains certificates of license.
Procedure
1. Click on the "Save eCoL archive" button.
2. Select a file directory in your operating unit and then confirm the selection.
Result
The certificates of license are stored in the file directory of your operating unit.
Configuring
Safety Integrated Functions 5
WARNING
Unexpected machine movement caused by inactive Safety Integrated Functions
Inactive Safety Integrated Functions or Safety Integrated Functions that have not been adapted
can trigger unexpected machine movements that may result in serious injury or death.
If a card without Safety Integrated Functions is inserted instead of a memory card with active
Safety Integrated Functions, when the supply voltage is switched on the next time, the Safety
Integrated Functions are deactivated.
• Only insert a memory card with the required settings into the drive.
• Prevent unauthorized persons accessing the drive.
• Protect configurations with active Safety Integrated Functions against changes by assigning
roles using user management (UMAC).
Note
Fault of Safety Integrated Functions in the case of non-EMC-compliant installation
A non-EMC-compliant installation of your machine/system can result in sporadic faults in Safety
Integrated Functions.
• Install the drive so that it is EMC-compliant.
5.1 Safety Integrated Functions
Overview
Safety Integrated Functions are used to reduce risk in safety-related applications.
Description
In comparison to standard converter functions, Safety Integrated Functions have especially high
failsafety. The Performance Level (PL) and Safety Integrity Level (SIL) of the corresponding
standards are a measure of failsafety.
Safety Integrated Functions are accordingly suitable for reducing risk in safety-related
applications. If the risk analysis of the machine or the system indicates a special hazard
potential in the application, an application is safety-related.
5.2 Certification
Safety Integrated means that the functions are integrated into the converter and can be
executed without need of external components.
Note
Protection against manipulation by unauthorized third parties
Safety Integrated Functions protect against hardware faults and software errors, but not against
manipulation by unauthorized third parties.
Protective measures against unauthorized manipulation are described in the Startdrive
Operating Instructions and online help. The measures address the following issues:
• Parameter configuration of the Safety Integrated Functions
• Connection
• Hardware components
More information
There is an overview of Safety Integrated Functions requiring licenses in Chapter "Selection of
the Safety Integrated Functions (Page 129)".
5.2 Certification
Description
The Safety Integrated Functions comply with:
• Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61800‑5‑2
• Performance Level (PL) e to ISO 13849‑1
• Category 3 or 4 to ISO 13849‑1
The Safety Integrated Functions correspond to functions according to IEC 61800‑5‑2 and
IEC 61800‑5‑3.
The individual Safety Integrated components have the following certifications:
Table 5-1 Certifications for the converter Safety Integrated component
Converter SIL PL Category

Control via PROFIsafe SIL3 PL e Category 4
Control via F-DI SIL3 PL e Category 3 or 4 1)
Stop functions STO, SS1 SIL3 PL e Category 4
Safe Brake Control (SBC) SIL3 PL e Category 3 or 4 2)
Motion monitoring functions SLS, SDI, SSM SIL3 PL e Category 3
1)
Depends on the parameterized diagnostic function (online self-test)
2)
Depends on the test stop version
5.2 Certification
Table 5-2 Certification for the motor encoder Safety Integrated component
Motor encoder SIL PL Category

Safe Incremental Position (SIP) SIL3 PL e Category 3
Independent institutes also certify Safety Integrated Functions. A list of currently certified
components is available on request from your sales partner.
5.4 Usage time
5.3 PFH values
Description
The probability of failure for Safety Integrated Functions must be specified in the form of a PFH
value (probability of failure per hour) according to IEC 61800-5-2, IEC 62061 and EN
ISO 13849-1. The PFH value of a Safety Integrated Function depends on the safety concept of the
converter and its hardware configuration, as well as on the PFH values of other components used
for this Safety Integrated Function.
More information
The PFH values can be found under: PFH values (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/76254308)
You can map the PFH values of all Safety Integrated components from Siemens
using the "Safety evaluation" function in the TIA selection tool: Safety evaluation (http://
www.siemens.com/safety-evaluation-tool)
5.4 Usage time
Description
You may not operate converters with Safety Integrated Functions for longer than 20 years. The
20 years starts when the device is delivered. The mission time cannot be extended. This is the
case even if a service department checks the converter – or in the meantime, the converter was
decommissioned.
5.5 Stop functions
5.5 Stop functions
5.5.1 Safe Torque Off (STO)
Overview
450
W
Figure 5-1 Overview STO
The Safe Torque Off (STO) function prevents the torque-generating supply of energy to the
motor and prevents the motor from unexpectedly starting.
Requirement
WARNING
Unexpected motor movement through active Safe Torque Off
There may be unexpected motor movements if the Safe Torque Off (STO) function is active. For
instance, the motor can coast down to a standstill or a hanging load may accelerate the motor.
Unexpected movements can lead to damage to property, risk to persons, severe injury and
death.
• Take account of the way the Safe Torque Off (STO) function works when you perform risk
assessments of the machine or system.
• Prevent movements of the motor, for example by using a holding brake.
STO is enabled in the function selection.
5.5 Stop functions

0/0''
"DUJPO
450EFTFMFDUJPO
W U
SFTQPOTF
.PUPS

450BDUJWF
$POWFSUFS
SFTQPOTF
3FBEZGPS
TXJUDIJOHPO
U
Figure 5-2 Flow diagram STO
Action Motor/converter response

① Selection of STO • The converter detects selection of STO and signals the status
"STO active" (r9722.0).
• The converter interrupts the torque-generating energy feed to
the motor.
• If you use a line contactor, the converter opens the line contac‐
tor.
• The "switching on inhibited" status prevents the motor from
restarting automatically.
② • The motor coasts down to a standstill.
③ Deselection of STO • The converter detects deselection of STO.
④ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The converter is ready to start again.
from 1 to 0
⑤ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The motor starts again.
from 0 to 1
Example
Applications include all machines and systems with moving axes (for example, conveyor
technology, handling).
With STO, maintenance work on the machine with an open protective door is possible, for
example. An EMERGENCY STOP with electromechanical disconnection is not required.
5.5 Stop functions
5.5.2 Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
Overview
Y
672
W
Figure 5-3 Overview SS1
With Safe Stop 1 (SS1), the converter stops dangerous movement of an electrically driven
machine component (e.g. motor). After stopping, the Safe Torque Off (STO) function
prevents the machine component from restarting.
Table 5-3 Versions of the function
Abbreviation Brief description

SS1-t Safe Stop 1 with time control
SS1-a Safe Stop 1 with acceleration monitoring (SAM)
SS1-r Safe Stop 1 with braking ramp monitoring (SBR)
Interruption of SS1
• If SS1 is deselected again within the delay time, after the delay time elapses or after the
shutdown speed is fallen below, the converter selects and deselects STO. This terminates the
SS1 function normally. It cannot be interrupted.
• During the delay time, SS1 cannot be deselected by withdrawing the control command,
therefore fulfilling the requirements of EN 60204‑1 relating to an EMERGENCY STOP function.
SS1 delay time

Select the SS1 delay time so that before the torque is shut down, the motor can completely
ramp down along the OFF3 ramp, and if available, the motor holding brake can be closed.
The OFF3 ramp-down time must be oriented to the actual braking capacity of the system or
machine.
5.5 Stop functions
Use the following procedure to select the SS1 delay time:

• SS1 delay time with parameterized motor holding brake:
SS1 delay time (p9556) ≥ OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) + pulse cancellation delay time
(p1228) + motor holding brake closing time (r1217)
• SS1 delay time without parameterized motor holding brake:
SS1 delay time (p9556) ≥ OFF3 ramp-down time (p1135) + pulse cancellation + delay time
(p1228)
Example
Table 5-4 SS1 application example
Example Possible solution

A converter must brake a motor as quickly as pos‐ Select SS1 via a failsafe digital input or via PROFI‐
sible after the EMERGENCY STOP button has been safe.
actuated. It is not permissible that the stationary
motor undesirably restarts.
5.5.2.1 Safe Stop 1 with time control (SS1-t)
Overview
With SS1‑t, the converter stops the motor along the OFF3 ramp within the set delay time. After
the delay time elapses, irrespective of the current speed, the converter activates the Safe Torque
Off (STO) function.
Requirement
WARNING
Unexpected motor movement through active Safe Torque Off
There may be unexpected motor movements if the Safe Torque Off (STO) function is active. For
instance, the motor can coast down to a standstill or a hanging load may accelerate the motor.
Unexpected movements can lead to damage to property, risk to persons, severe injury and
death.
• Take account of the way the SS1-t function works when you perform risk assessments of the
machine or system.
• Prevent movements of the motor, for example by using a holding brake.
SS1 is enabled in the function selection.
5.5 Stop functions
0/0''
"DUJPO
44EFTFMFDUJPO
U
SFTQPOTF W
.PUPS

.PUPSDPBTUTEPXO
UPTUBOETUJMM

U
Q
44BDUJWF
$POWFSUFS
SFTQPOTF
450BDUJWF
3FBEZGPS
TXJUDIJOHPO
U
Figure 5-4 Flow diagram Safe Stop 1 with time control (SS1-t)

① Selection of SS1 • The converter detects selection of SS1 and signals the status
"SS1 active" (r9722.1).
• The converter starts the transition time SS1 to STO (p9556).
• The converter initiates braking along the OFF3 ramp.
② • The converter brakes the motor along the OFF3 ramp. Braking
along the OFF3 ramp is not monitored.
③ • The transition time from SS1 to STO (p9556) elapses.
• The converter activates STO and signals the status "STO active"
(r9722.0) and the status "SS1 active".
• STO interrupts the torque-generating supply of energy to the
motor and prevents the motor from restarting.
• The motor coasts down to a standstill.
④ Deselection of SS1 • The converter detects deselection of SS1.
• The converter deactivates STO.
⑤ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The converter is ready to start again.
from 1 to 0
⑥ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The motor starts again.
from 0 to 1
5.5 Stop functions
5.5.2.2 Safe Stop 1 with acceleration monitoring (SS1-a)
Overview
SS1-a with Safe Acceleration Monitor (SAM) monitors whether or not the motor inadmissibly
accelerates when braking. After a defined time interval has elapsed or the speed falls below a
defined shutdown speed, Safe Torque Off (STO) becomes active.
Requirement

0/0''
"DUJPO
44EFTFMFDUJPO
U
W
4".

3FTQPOTF
Q
.PUPS
5IFNPUPSDPBTUTEPXOUP
BTUBOETUJMM
Q

Q
U
Q
Q
44BDUJWF
$POWFSUFS
4".BDUJWF
SFTQPOTF
450BDUJWF
3FBEZGPS
TXJUDIJOHPO U
Figure 5-5 Flow diagram Safe Stop 1 with acceleration monitoring (SS1-a)

"SS1 active" (r9722.1).
• The converter starts the transition time SS1 to STO (p9556) and
the SAM delay time (p9582).
• The converter brakes the motor along the OFF3 ramp.
5.5 Stop functions
② • The SAM delay time elapses. With SAM, the converter monitors
whether the motor impermissibly accelerates.
• The SAM limit value follows the falling motor speed:
The converter reduces the SAM monitoring speed in steps when
the absolute value of the motor speed is less than the previous
SAM monitoring speed.
It is not possible to increase the SAM monitoring speed while
braking.
• If the motor speed exceeds the SAM monitoring speed by more
than the speed tolerance (p9548), then the converter signals a
fault and activates STO.
• If the motor speed reaches the SAM limit value (p9568), then
the converter limits the value for the SAM monitoring to p9568.
• As long as the speed decreases, the converter continuously
adds the configurable tolerance p9548 to the current speed and
the monitoring of the speed adjusts accordingly. If the speed
temporarily increases, the monitoring threshold remains at the
last value.
③ • SAM ends when the motor speed falls below the STO shutdown
speed (p9560), or the SS1 to STO (p9556) transition time ex‐
pires. STO is then activated.
• The converter detects selection of STO and signals the status
"STO active" (r9722.0). SS1 remains active.
motor and prevents the motor from unexpectedly restarting.
④ Deselection of SS1 • The converter detects deselection of SS1. STO is deactivated
simultaneously.
⑤ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The converter is ready to start again.
from 1 to 0
⑥ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The motor starts again.
from 0 to 1
5.5.2.3 Safe Stop 1 with braking ramp monitoring (SS1-r)
Overview
With SS1-r, while braking, the converter monitors whether the speed of the motor remains
below a defined ramp using the safe brake ramp monitoring (SBR).
Requirement
5.5 Stop functions
0/0''
"DUJPO
44EFTFMFDUJPO
U
W
Q

4#3
3FTQPOTF
.PUPS

5IFNPUPSDPBTUTEPXOUPB
TUBOETUJMM

Q
U
Q
Q
44BDUJWF
3FTQPOTF
$POWFSUFS
4#3BDUJWF
450BDUJWF
3FBEZGPS
TXJUDIJOHPO
U
Figure 5-6 Flow diagram Safe Stop 1 with braking ramp monitoring (SS1-r)

"SS1 active" (r9722.1).
• The converter brakes the motor along the OFF3 ramp.
• The converter starts the SBR delay time (p9582).
② • The SBR delay time elapses.
• The converter starts the Safe Brake Ramp SBR.
③ • The converter monitors whether the motor exceeds the set safe
brake ramp when braking.
• If the motor speed fails to follow the braking ramp, the con‐
verter signals a fault and activates STO.
④ • SBR ends as soon as the actual speed value is below the STO
switch-off speed (p9560).
• The converter detects selection of STO and signals the status
"STO active" (r9722.0). SS1 remains active.
motor and prevents the motor from unexpectedly restarting.
⑤ Deselection of SS1 • The converter detects deselection of SS1. STO is deactivated
simultaneously.
5.6 Safe Brake Management
⑥ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The converter is ready to start again.

from 1 to 0
⑦ Signal change at ON/OFF1 • The motor starts again.
from 0 to 1
5.6.1 Safe Brake Control (SBC)
Overview
W 450
4#$
Figure 5-7 Overview SBC
Safe Brake Control (SBC) is used to safely control a holding brake integrated in the motor. The
holding brake operates according to the closed-circuit principle.
SBC cannot be selected as an autonomous function: SBC is activated immediately when STO
is selected.
For SBC, the converter assumes a controlling function, and ensures the following response:
• The converter interrupts the brake current if it detects a fault or failure of the brake.
• The brake closes and a safe state is reached.
Requirement
WARNING
Unexpected movement due to a defective, worn or soiled holding brake
SBC does not detect mechanical defects, wear or soiling of the holding brake. SBC only detects
a broken cable or short-circuit in the brake winding when the holding brake is opened.
Undetected defects, wear or soiling can trigger unexpected movements. Unexpected motor
movements can result in severe injury or death.
• Test the function of the holding brake regularly.
• Replace a defective, worn or soiled holding brake.
STO/SS1 and SBC are enabled in the function selection.
0/0''
"DUJPO
0QFONPUPSIPMEJOHCSBLF
450EFTFMFDUJPO
W U
.PUPSSFTQPOTF
.PUPSCSBLFTEPXOUP
TUBOETUJMM
U
450BDUJWF
$POWFSUFSSFTQPOTF
4#$SFRVFTUFE
5JNF DMPTFCSBLF 5JNF PQFOCSBLF
. . .
.PUPSIPMEJOHCSBLFPQFO
3FBEZGPSTXJUDIJOHPO
U
Figure 5-8 Flow diagram SBC

① Selection of STO • The converter detects selection of STO and signals the status
"STO active" (r9722.0).
The converter interrupts the torque-generating energy feed to
the motor.
The "switching on inhibited" status prevents the motor from
restarting automatically.
• The converter requests SBC at the same time as STO. The hold‐
ing brake is safely controlled using SBC.
The converter immediately closes the holding brake.
② • The motor brakes down to standstill.
• With SBC, the converter ensures that the brake current is inter‐
rupted and the holding brake remains closed.
③ Deselection of STO • The converter detects deselection of STO. SBC is also deactiva‐
ted when STO is deselected.
• The holding brake remains (unsafely) closed, until the standard
program issues a command to open the brake.
④ Command to open the brake • The converter opens the brake taking into account the brake
opening time.
Example
SBC is suitable for applications where the converter must maintain a safe position, even when
the motor is in a no-current condition.
5.7 Motion monitoring
SBC prevents that hanging or pulling loads sag. Hanging or pulling loads include e.g. hoisting
gear, elevators and windings. External logic or switching elements not required, as the
functionality is integrated in the converter.
5.7.1 Safely-Limited Speed (SLS)
Overview
W
4-4
Figure 5-9 Overview SLS
With Safely-Limited Speed (SLS), the converter monitors the motor speed. The converter
executes the set stop response if the motor exceeds the permitted speed.
SLS can be used in various ways:
• SLS with 4 independent speed levels that can be toggled between during the runtime
• SLS with a variable speed limit value
SLS is controlled via PROFIsafe.
On selection of SLS or switchover to a lower SLS level, the SLS delay time (p9551) starts. The
active SLS level remains active during the delay time. The selected SLS level only becomes
effective afterwards.
Changing the variable speed limit value via PROFIsafe should also be considered as SLS level
switchover.
Example
SLS is suitable for machines where hazards due to excessive speeds are possible. In the following
work steps, the use of SLS is particularly useful for direct contact between man and machine:
• During commissioning
• During setup
• For maintenance work
Table 5-5 Application examples SLS
Example Solution
Setup mode: The machine operator must enter the With SLS, the converter monitors the speed of the
dangerous area of a machine and manually intro‐ machine component.
duce material into a machine part.
To protect the drill chuck from destruction, a turn‐
ing machine must not exceed a certain maximum
speed of the machine part.
5.7.1.1 SLS with one limit value only
Overview
Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) monitors the motor speed. If the motor speed violates the SLS limit
value, the converter initiates the set stop response.
"DUJPO
4-4EFTFMFDUJPO
U
W

Q<>
SFTQPOTF
.PUPS

$
4-4NPOJUPSJOH
Q<>
S<>

Q U
$POWFSUFS
SFTQPOTF
4-4BDUJWF
U
Figure 5-10 Flow diagram SLS with a speed level

① Selection of SLS • The converter detects the selection of SLS.
• The converter starts the SLS delay time (p9551).
② • The motor follows the external setpoint and brakes.
• The motor speed must remain below the SLS limit value until
the SLS delay time has elapsed.
③ • Monitoring of the SLS limit value p9531[0] is effective once the
SLS delay time (p9551) has elapsed.
• The converter reports the status "SLS active" (r9722.4).
④ • If the SLS limit value is violated, the converter executes the set
stop response p9563[0].
⑤ Deselection of SLS • The converter detects deselection of SLS.
• The motor follows the external setpoint and accelerates, e.g.
following the change to an "Automatic" mode.
5.7.1.2 SLS with multiple limit values
Overview
Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) has 4 independent SLS limit values that can be switched between
during operation. If the motor speed violates the currently selected SLS limit value, the converter
initiates a set stop response.
Requirement
SLS is enabled in the function selection.
The SLS limit values are parameterized as follows:
SLS1 limit value < SLS2 limit value < … < SLS3 limit value.
WARNING
Unexpectedly high speed due to incorrect parameterization
If you parameterize the SLS limit values incorrectly, the motor can accelerate beyond the
selected SLS limit value. Unexpectedly high speeds can result in serious injury and death.
• Parameterize the SLS limit values as specified.
This figure illustrates the change from a higher SLS limit value to a lower SLS limit value. For the
change from a lower SLS limit value to a higher SLS limit value, there is no SLS delay time. The
new SLS limit value is active immediately.
4-4EFTFMFDUJPO
"DUJPO
4-4MJNJUCJU
4-4MJNJUCJU
U
W
Q<>

4-4NPOJUPSJOH
Q<>
SFTQPOTF
S<>
.PUPS
Q<>

4-4NPOJUPSJOH
Q<>
S<>
Q Q U
4-4BDUJWF
$POWFSUFS
SFTQPOTF
4-4MFWFMCJU
4-4MFWFMCJU
U
Figure 5-11 SLS with change between two SLS limit values

① Selection of SLS • The converter detects when the SLS2 limit value is selected.
• The converter starts the SLS delay time (p9551).
② • The motor follows the external setpoint and brakes.
• The actual speed must remain below the SLS2 limit value until
③ • Monitoring of the SLS2 limit value (p9531[1)] is effective once
the SLS delay time (p9551) has elapsed.
• The converter signals the status "SLS active" (r9722.4) and the
active SLS level (r9722.9 = 1, r9722.10 = 0).
④ • If the motor speed violates the SLS2 limit value, the converter
initiates the set stop response p9563[1].
⑤ Change to SLS1 limit value • The converter detects when the SLS1 limit value is selected.
• The converter starts the SLS delay time (p9551). The SLS2 limit
value remains while the SLS delay time is active.
⑥ • The motor follows the external setpoint and brakes.

• The actual speed must remain below the SLS1 limit value until
⑦ • Monitoring of the SLS1 limit value (p9531[0]) is effective once
the SLS delay time (p9551) has elapsed.
• The converter signals the active SLS level (r9722.9 = 0,
r9722.10 = 0).
⑧ • If the motor speed violates the SLS1 limit value, the converter
initiates the set stop response p9563[0].
⑨ Deselection of SLS • The converter detects deselection of SLS.
• The motor follows the external setpoint and accelerates, e.g.
following the change to an "Automatic" mode.
5.7.1.3 SLS with variable speed limit value
Overview
The SLS1 limit value is scalable during operation with the PROFIsafe telegram 901.
Requirement
The SLS1 limit value is selected with the PROFIsafe telegram.
p9604.9 is set: Transfer of the SLS limit value via PROFIsafe is enabled.
The signal S_SLS_LIMIT_A in PROFIsafe telegram 901 scales the SLS1 limit value.
The S_SLS_LIMIT_A scaling has the value range 1 … 32767.
The scaled SLS1 limit value is calculated as follows: Scaled SLS1 limit value = S_SLS_LIMIT_A /
32767 · p9531[0]
Before the higher-level control (F-CPU) selects an SLS limit value or changes the SLS1 limit
value, the control must reduce the motor speed according to the changed SLS limit value.
With the scaled SLS1 limit value, too, the SLS2, SLS3 and SLS4 limit values can be selected
with r9720.9 and r9720.10.
An invalid value in S_SLS_LIMIT_A results in the stop response parameterized in p9563[0].
5.7.1.4 Limitation of the speed setpoint for SLS
Overview
For Safely-Limited Speed (SLS), it is useful to limit the speed setpoint with the higher-level
control.
The higher-level control receives the value for the required limitation of the speed setpoint from
the Safety Info Channel (SIC) in telegram 700.
With SLS active, the converter sends the required setpoint limit r9733 in the S_V_LIMIT_B
signal of telegram 700.
The converter calculates r9733 as follows:
• r9733[0] = p9531[x] · p9533 (converted from the load to the motor side)
• r9733[1] = -p9531[x] · p9533 (converted from the load to the motor side)
[x] = selected SLS limit value
p9533 is the weighting factor to determine the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed
limit in percent.
Conversion factor from the motor to the load side:
• Motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522/(p9521 · p9520)
• Otherwise: p9522/p9521
5.7.2 Safe Speed Monitor (SSM)
Overview
W

W
Figure 5-12 Overview SSM
Safe Speed Monitor (SSM) safely detects when the speed falls below a speed limit in
both directions of motion. SSM is a pure signaling function. The converter provides a safety-
related signal for further processing.
If the speed of the motor exceeds the SSM limit value, no stop response is initiated, contrary
to other Safety Integrated Functions.
Requirement
SSM is enabled in the function selection.
"DUJPO
44.EFTFMFDUJPO
U
W
4QFFEMJNJU 44.
)ZTUFSFTJT

SFTQPOTF
.PUPS
)ZTUFSFTJT
/FHBUJWF
44.
4QFFEMJNJU
$POWFSUFS
SFTQPOTF
4QFFE
CFMPXMJNJUWBMVF
U
W
4QFFEMJNJU 8JUIPVU꫼MUFS 44. 8JUI꫼MUFS

SFTQPOTF
.PUPS

$POWFSUFS
U
SFTQPOTF
4QFFE
CFMPXMJNJUWBMVF
U
Figure 5-13 Representation of SSM

① Selection of SSM • The converter detects when SSM is selected.
• SSM checks the speed actual value.
② • If the speed of the motor falls below the speed limit, then signal
"Speed below limit value" (p9722.15 = 1) is set.
• If the speed is greater than the limit, the "Speed below limit
value" signal is not set.
• The speed limit (p9546) is effective in both directions of motion.
③ • Speed hysteresis (p9547) stabilizes signal "Speed below limit
value".
• As a result of the hysteresis, in the vicinity of the monitoring
threshold, the "Speed below limit value" signal does not jump
between values "0" and "1".
• When "hysteresis and filtering" is activated with output signal
SSM, a time-delayed SSM feedback signal occurs for the axes.
This is a property of the filtering.
④ • The signal filter smooths the speed measured by the converter.
• The filter is suitable for monitoring speeds that lie just below the
speed limit.
• The response can be set using filter time (p9545).
Example
SSM is suitable for enabling access to the machine by way of safe SSM feedback. For example,
it is possible to unlock safety doors only when the speed falls below critical levels.
5.7.3 Safe Direction (SDI)
Overview
6',
Figure 5-14 Overview SDI
With Safe Direction (SDI), the converter monitors the direction of motion of the motor. If
the motor moves in the inhibited direction, then the converter stops the motor with an
SDI-specific stop response.
The following SDI variants are available, depending on the direction of motion:
• SDI positive (SDI+)
• SDI negative (SDI‑)
Requirement
SDI is enabled in the function selection.
"DUJPO
4%*EFTFMFDU
W
U
W

SFTQPOTF
U
.PUPS
1PTJUJPO
%JSFDUJPO U
Q 4%*
NPOJUPSJOH
Q

$POWFSUFS
SFTQPOTF
Q
4%*BDUJWF
U
U
Figure 5-15 SDI+ with tolerance violation and direction of movement monitoring

① Selection of SDI+ • The converter detects the selection of SDI+.
• The converter starts the SDI delay time (p9565).
② • After the SDI delay time has expired, the converter monitors the
direction of motion of the motor.
• The converter reports the status "SDI positive active"
(r9722.12).
• The converter continuously calculates the position of the motor.
• As soon as the motor moves in the inhibited direction, the con‐
verter stores the current position and monitors the discrepancy
between the current position and the stored position.
③ • If the discrepancy between the current position and the stored
position is greater than the SDI tolerance p9564, the converter
brakes the motor with the set stop response (p9566) and out‐
puts a safety message 1).
④ Deselection of SDI+ • The converter detects deselection of SDI+.
• The converter stops monitoring the motion direction.
• The motor can now be moved in both directions.
1)
The following steps are required to acknowledge the safety message:
- Deselect and reselect SDI
- Safe acknowledgement
Note
No detection of a change in direction using p1821
If the direction of motion is reversed using p1821, then safe monitoring is still possible.
However, in this case, the setpoint limitation r9733 is calculated with the wrong direction of
rotation. p9539 can be used to set the direction of motion for safety monitoring.
5.8 Safety Integrated commissioning and configuration
5.7.3.1 Limitation of the speed setpoint for SDI
Overview
For Safe Direction (SDI) it makes sense to limit the speed setpoint with the higher-level control.
The higher-level control receives the value for the required limitation of the speed setpoint from
the Safety Info Channel (SIC) in telegram 700.
With SDI active, the converter sends the required setpoint limit r9733 in the S_V_LIMIT_B
signal of telegram 700.
The converter calculates r9733 as follows:
• For SDI negative (SDI-): r9733[0] = 0
• For SDI positive (SDI+): r9733[1] = 0
Overview
The following commissioning tools are available for commissioning and configuring the
converter:
• Web server integrated in the converter as web application
• Startdrive in the TIA Portal
Commissioning Safety Integrated involves the steps:
• Function selection
• Parameter assignment
• Control
• Completing commissioning with acceptance test
Once Safety Integrated has been commissioned, the converter adopts the modified
commissioning settings. The converter is then automatically restarted.
Commissioning of Safety Integrated has been completed after the restart.
Specific information about the tools is provided in the Commissioning chapters.
5.8.1 Selection of the Safety Integrated Functions
Overview
In the function selection, the available Safety Integrated Functions are available depending on
the control type.
The function selection offers the following setting options:
• Selection of each individual function
• Axis type
The converter must be restarted after making changes to the configuration.
Safety Integrated Functions requiring a license are marked in the function selection using the
symbol. You require the Safety Extended license for the corresponding functions. Safety
Integrated is available in the Trial License mode for test purposes.
The functions available for selection depend on the selected control type:
Table 5-6 Safety Integrated Functions for every control type (p9603)
Control type STO SS11) SBC SLS SSM SDI

PROFIsafe x x x x x x
PROFIsafe and EMER‐ x x x x x x
GENCY STOP via termi‐
nals 2)
Terminals 2) x x x - - -
1)
SS1-t does not require a license. SS1-a and SS1-r require a license.
2)
SLS, SSM, SDI cannot be controlled via terminals. When switching over to this control type, the system
automatically deactivates these functions.
Safety Integrated Functions are enabled with default settings after function selection
(p9604). The default settings can be parameterized.
The stop responses STO and SS1 shown in the function selection must always be
parameterized because the stop responses stop the motor in the case of a fault and for a
limit value violation. If the STO and SS1 functions are also to be controlled via PROFIsafe
and/or F-DI, then STO and SS1 must additionally be enabled in the function selection.
The function selection displays the actual value acquisition cycle and the monitoring cycle.
The actual value acquisition cycle (p9511) and the monitoring cycle (p9500) cannot be
changed.
Selecting the axis type (p9502) influences the display in the function view for the actual
value acquisition/mechanical system and changes the units.
5.8.2 Safety Integrated parameterization
Overview
All of the Safety Integrated Functions enabled in the function selected are listed in the
parameterization and can be changed. If a monitoring function is enabled, then "Actual value
acquisition/mechanical system" is also displayed.
For Safety Integrated Functions that have been enabled, the function view shows the
interconnection diagram and the setting options.
The following settings can be edited in the function view of the parameterization:
Table 5-7 Possible settings the Safety Integrated Functions
Function Possible settings

Safe Torque Off (STO) Settings not required
Safe Brake Control (SBC) SBC is always used together with STO or SS1
Safe Stop 1 (SS1) • Monitoring mode:
– SS1-t: time-controlled
– SS1-a: with acceleration monitoring (SAM)
– SS1-r: with braking ramp monitoring (SBR)
Detail settings for SAM or SBR
• Delay time for SS1
• Optional with SAM active: STO shutdown speed
Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) • Delay time for SLS
• Speed limits for max. 4 levels
• Stop responses (STO or SS1) for each level
• Activate/inhibit PROFIsafe override für SLS of level 1
With this, you transfer variable SLS limits via PROFIsafe to the converter.
Safe Speed Monitor (SSM) • Speed hysteresis
• Speed limit
• Filter time
Safe Direction (SDI) • Delay time for SDI
• Monitoring tolerance
• Stop response (STO or SS1)
The following settings can be changed in the function view of the actual value acquisition/
mechanical system:
Table 5-8 Explanation of actual value acquisition/mechanical system - can be changed
Possible settings Explanation

Load revolutions (p9521) and The two setting options are required when using a gear ratio.
encoder revolutions (p9522) A gear ratio is the ratio of encoder revolutions to revolutions of the drive shaft (load revolu‐
tions).
Reverse direction of the load This setting is required if the gearbox used is associated with a "Reverse direction".
(p9539)
Leadscrew pitch (p9520) for The transmission ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution (linear axis with rotary
type "Linear axis" encoder) is set using the leadscrew pitch.
5.8.3 Safety Integrated control
Overview
The Safety Integrated Functions can be controlled centrally via PROFIsafe or locally via terminals.
The fundamental control type for Safety Integrated Functions is "via PROFIsafe".
The following options are also supported:
• When required, a local EMERGENCY STOP concept as well as PROFIsafe: Control of STO or SS1
via terminals (F-DI 0)
• For applications without PROFIsafe: subsequent control of EMERGENCY STOP via terminals
(F-DI 0)
5.8.3.1 PROFIsafe configuration
Overview
After PROFIsafe has been configured, Safety Integrated Functions can be selected and
deselected, and safety faults can be safely acknowledged using PROFIsafe telegrams.
The PROFIsafe configuration encompasses the following settings:
Table 5-9 PROFIsafe settings
Settings Explanation
PROFIsafe telegram number Selection of the PROFIsafe telegram
(p9611) PROFIsafe telegrams can be used in various ways:
• Telegram 30:
Control of the functions
• Telegram 901:
Control of the functions + transfer of the F-DI status via PROFIsafe (c10050) + trans‐
fer of the SLS limit value via PROFIsafe (p9064.9)
The Safety Info Channel in the supplementary telegram 700 is available for non-safety-
related diagnostics of the Safety Integrated Functions on the higher-level controller.
F-source address (p9613) When using PROFIsafe address type 1, the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address is only
F-destination address (9610) guaranteed as a result of the F-destination address.
F-monitoring time (p9614) When using PROFIsafe address type 2, the uniqueness of the PROFIsafe address is guar‐
anteed as a result of the combination of F-source address and F-destination address.
The PROFIsafe address must be unique throughout the network and the CPU. The PRO‐
FIsafe address is unique if these conditions are satisfied:
• The F-source address of the F-CPU is unique throughout the network.
• The F-destination address of the converter is unique throughout the complete CPU.
Within the monitoring time, a valid and current PROFIsafe telegram must be received
from the F-CPU. This therefore secures the following:
• Detection of faults and failures
• Initiation of responses, which keep the F-system in a safe state or transition it into a
safe state
Response to a PROFIsafe failure Selection options for communication failure between STO and SS1
(p9612)
More information
More information about telegrams and how to assign control and status words is provided in the
Appendix under Communication telegrams (Page 869).
5.8.3.2 Transferring the F-DI status via PROFIsafe
Overview
The configuration of the transfer of the F-DI status defines the input mode of an F-DI, and
activates the transfer of an F-DI state to the F-control.
Requirement
A PROFIsafe telegram with transfer of the F-DI status is set.
The configuration of the transfer of the F-DI status includes the following settings:
• p10040 defines whether the F-DI should operate as NC contact/NC contact (default setting)
or as NC contact/NO contact.
• c10050 contains the F-DI state to be transferred to the F-control.
5.8.3.3 EMERGENCY STOP via terminals of the failsafe digital input (F-DI)
Overview
After the configuration, a stop function for EMERGENCY STOP via terminals is defined.
EMERGENCY STOP is permanently assigned to F-DI 0. The following functions can be selected:
• Safe Torque Off (STO)
• Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
5.8.3.4 F-DI configuration
Overview
The F-DI configuration includes the following steps:
• Assignment of Safety Integrated Functions to a failsafe digital input (F-DI)
• Defining the input modes of an F-DI
The F-DI configuration allows the assignment of Safety Integrated Functions to the F-DI. After
configuring the F-DI, the interconnected Safety Integrated Function can be selected and
deselected.
In the F-DI configuration, it is also possible to set the input modes of an F-DI (p10040). The
setting defines whether the F-DI should operate as NC contact/NC contact (default setting) or
as NC contact/NO contact.
At the F-DI, the following components can be used:
• Non-self-monitoring sensors (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP button)
• Self-monitoring components (OSSD)
5.8.3.5 Discrepancy time
Overview
During the discrepancy time, the converter tolerates inconsistent input signals.
The converter monitors at the two input terminals of the F-DI whether the input signals attain
the same logical signal state within the discrepancy time. With electromechanical sensors, e.g.
EMERGENCY STOP buttons or position switches, the two sensor contacts never switch at exactly
the same time. The input signals of the F-DI are inconsistent (discrepancy).
During the discrepancy time, the converter tolerates inconsistent input signals. The
discrepancy time does not extend the converter response time.
A permanent discrepancy signifies an error in the F-DI interconnection. In this case, the
converter responds with a safety message
'LVFUHSDQF\
',$7HUPLQDO
',%7HUPLQDO
'LVFUHSDQF\WLPH W
6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ
DFWLYH
W
6DIHW\PHVVDJH
W
Figure 5-16 Permanent discrepancy
The discrepancy time must be set so that it is less than the smallest expected switching
interval of the signal at the F-DI, see the illustration below.
5% 5%
53 53
4XJUDIJOHJOUFSWBM54
5PCFNBJOUBJOFE 545%53 U
TS Switching interval
TD Discrepancy time
TR Response time
Figure 5-17 Discrepancy time when a relay is switched
5.8.3.6 Input filter
Overview
The input filter suppresses unwanted brief signal changes at a fail-safe digital input (F-DI).
Requirement
WARNING
Unexpected movements due to long connecting cables
If a cable at a fail-safe digital input is too long, the fail-safe digital input might not reliably detect
a short-circuit of the connecting cable to 24 V or to ground. An undetected short-circuit may
mean that the connected sensor is no longer working. This may impair the functional safety of
the machine or the system and therefore endanger people or lead to material damage.
• Only connect cables with a length of ≤ 30 m to a fail-safe digital input.
If a fail-safe digital input (F-DI) is connected to an electromechanical sensor, for example, then
contact bounce leads to brief signal changes. In this case, an immediate response of the
converter to signal changes is not desirable. Too many signal changes within a specific time
result in a converter fault.
During the filter time (p10017) of the input filter, the converter ignores signal changes.
The input filter lengthens the response time of the Safety Integrated Function connected to
the F-DI.
5.8.3.7 Self-test of the failsafe digital input (F-DI)
Overview
To detect faults at an early stage, the converter continuously tests its shutdown paths, functions
and interfaces.
Various modes are available to test a failsafe digital input (F-DI):
• Self-test with internal test signals
• Self-test using entered dark pulses
• Self-test using externally entered dark pulses
The self-test checks with test signals at the input terminals of the F-DI whether the F-DI can be
switched to the failsafe state (to "low"). If the converter does not detect a feedback signal, then
it triggers a fault response.
The debounce time (p10017) prevents a converter response to the dark pulse. If the
debounce time is shorter than the test signal or dark pulse length, then the converter
interprets the dark pulse as a switching operation.
Self-test with internal test signals

The converter internally generates test signals for the input circuit of the F-DI (p10041 = 0).
The test signal length and the test cycle cannot be changed.
The self-test using internal test signals meets the following requirements:
• Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61800‑5‑2
• Category 3 to ISO 13849‑1
Self-test using entered dark pulses

The converter provides the switchable voltage source VS+ at terminal block X130. VS+
generates dark pulses, to diagnose the control circuit, for example.
The self-test using specified dark pulses with VS+ (p10041 = 1) offers additional short-circuit
detection between ground and 24 V.
The dark pulse length of the switchable power supply (p10018) can be parameterized. The
test cycle has a fixed value of 5 seconds.
Q
%*"5FSNJOBM
U
Q
%*#5FSNJOBM
T U
'%*TUBUVT
S
Figure 5-18 Dark pulses through switchable power supply
For the debounce time:

• p10017 > dark pulse length (p10018) + 2 ms
The self-test using entered dark pulses meets the following requirements:
• Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61800-5-2
Self-test using externally entered dark pulses

An electronic control, e.g. F-PLC, generates dark pulses at the input terminals of the F-DI
(p10041 = 3).
The dark pulse length is determined by the control. The maximum wait time for dark pulses
(p10019) can be parameterized.
%BSLQVMTF
%*"UFSNJOBM
U
%BSLQVMTF
%*#UFSNJOBM
&\FOHS U
'%*TUBUVT
S
Figure 5-19 Dark pulses through control
For the debounce time:

• p10017 > dark pulse length (p10018) + 2 ms
The test pulse length of the external control must be checked and the debounce time must
be adapted.
The self-test using externally entered dark pulses meets the following requirements:
• Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61800-5-2
5.8.4 Acceptance - completion of commissioning
5.8.4.1 Acceptance test requirements
Overview
The machine manufacturer is responsible in ensuring that the plant or machine functions
perfectly. As a consequence, after commissioning, the machine manufacturer must check those
functions which represent an increased risk of injury or material damage, or have them checked
by specialist personnel. This acceptance or validation is specified in the European Machinery
Directive and comprises 2 parts:
• Acceptance test: Check the safety-relevant functions and machine parts after
commissioning.
• Documentation: Generate an "Acceptance report" that describes the test results.
ISO 13849‑1 provides additional information relating to validation, for example. The
acceptance test requirements (configuration check) for the safety functions of electric drives
are based on IEC 61800-5-2.
Acceptance test of the machine or plant

The acceptance test checks whether the safety-relevant functions in the plant or machine
function correctly. The documentation of the components used in the Safety Integrated
Functions can also provide information about the tests required. Testing the safety-relevant
functions includes, e.g. the following:
• Is all safety equipment, such as protective door monitoring devices, light barriers or
EMERGENCY STOP buttons, connected and ready for operation?
• Does the higher-level control respond as expected to the safety-relevant feedback signals of
the drive?
• Do the drive settings match the configured safety-relevant function in the machine?
Acceptance test of the converter

The acceptance test of the converter is a part of the acceptance test of the entire machine or
plant.
The acceptance test of the converter tests whether Safety Integrated Functions have been set
to match the configured Safety Functions of the machine. The acceptance test documents
the settings with which the real function fulfills the intended functionality.
Documentation
The documentation encompasses the following:
• Result of the acceptance tests
• Settings of the Safety Integrated Functions
This documentation must be countersigned.
Persons authorized to perform the acceptance test

Personnel from the machine manufacturer, who, on account of their technical qualifications
and knowledge of the safety functions, are in a position to perform the acceptance test in the
correct manner are authorized to perform the acceptance testing of the converter and the
motor.
5.8.4.2 Acceptance test for the converter
Overview
An acceptance test must be performed in the following cases:
• After commissioning
• After importing a new firmware version into the converter
• After changing the parameterization
• After a component is replaced
The converter acceptance test comprises the following steps:
• Documentation
– Supplement/change the hardware data
– Supplement/change the software data (specify version)
• Function test of the Safety Integrated Functions:
Each function that is used and every configured control must be individually tested.
Acceptance tests should be performed at the maximum speeds and acceleration rates that
are possible for the machine. The maximum braking distances and braking times that can be
expected can be determined based on the maximum speeds and acceleration rates.
5.8.4.3 Examples of acceptance tests
Overview
The following examples show the principal steps for performing an acceptance test for a Safety
Integrated Function. The examples are not suitable for every converter setting.
The Startdrive commissioning tool offers functions for the converter acceptance test (Safety
Acceptance Test), as well as the system interfaces (Safety Activation Test).
Requirement
The converter is ready for operation.
The converter signals neither faults nor alarms of the Safety Integrated Functions (r0945[0…
7], r2122[0…7], r60047[0...7]).
The function to be tested is not active.
The acceptance test for the individual functions encompasses the steps:
• Switch on the motor
• Selection of the Safety Integrated Function
• Deselection of the Safety Integrated Function
Examples
STO acceptance test

• Switch on the motor:
Enter speed setpoints ≠ 0 + switch on the motor + test whether the motor runs as required
• Selection of STO while the motor is running
Test whether each configured control, e.g. via F-DI and via PROFIsafe, functions
Test whether the following points apply:
– If a mechanical brake is not available, the motor coasts to a standstill.
A mechanical brake brakes the motor and holds it to ensure that it remains at a standstill.
– The motor signals neither faults nor alarms of the Safety Integrated Functions (r0945[0…
7], r2122[0…7], r60047[0...7]).
– The converter signals: "STO is active" (r9722.0 = 1).
• Deselection of STO
– STO is not active (r9722.0 = 0).
– The converter signals neither faults nor alarms of the Safety Integrated Functions
(r0945[0…7], r2122[0…7], r60047[0...7]).
– The motor runs as required.
SS1-t acceptance test

• Selection of SS1-t while the motor is running
Test whether each configured control, e.g. via F-DI and via PROFIsafe, functions
– The motor brakes on the OFF3 ramp.
– The converter signals: "SS1 is active" (r9722.1 = 1).
– STO becomes active after time p9556 elapses. The converter signals: "STO is active"
(r9722.0 = 1).
• Deselection of SS1-t
– SS1 is not active (r9722.1 = 0).
(r0945[0…7], r2122[0…7], r60047[0...7]).
– The motor runs as required.
SBC acceptance test

+ then enter a speed setpoint = 0
• Selection of STO or SS1 while the motor is switched on
Test whether the following point applies:
– The converter signals: "SBC is active" (r9722.0 = 1 and r0899.12 = 0).
• Deselection of STO or SS1
– The converter signals: "SBC is not active" (r9722.0 = 0 and r0899.12 = 1).
(r0945[0…7], r2122[0…7], r60047[0...7]).
More information
More information is provided in the chapter on commissioning (Startdrive) under "Performing
the acceptance test (Page 298)".
5.8.4.4 Test of brake output
Overview
To meet the requirements of the ISO 13849‑1 and IEC 61800-5-2 standards in terms of timely
fault detection, the converter must test its brake output regularly - at least once a year - for
correct functioning.
To test the brake output of the converter, the SBC (Safe Brake Control) function must be activated
within a defined time interval. The time interval depends on the required Safety Integrity Level
(SIL) and on the desired Performance Level (PL) category:
• SIL2 / PL d / Category 3: 1 year
• SIL3 / PL e / Category 3: 3 months
• SIL3 / PL e / Category 4: 1 day
A timer is available to test the brake output for the safe brake control using SBC. In the
standard, this is preset to 2160 h ≙ 3 months (p9659). The remaining time is shown in
r9660. Message "Test brake output required" is output after the timer elapses. After the next
time that the brake is either closed or opened, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring
time is reset. In operation, the monitoring time is reset each time the brake is actuated.
5.8.4.5 Information about series acceptance
Overview
When the project is transferred to other machines (series commissioning) a reduced acceptance
test of the Safety Integrated Functions is necessary.
In series commissioning, the reduced acceptance test involves the following steps:
• Test of the EMERGENCY STOP function (STO or SS1) and the SBC function that is potentially
used
• A general test of the actual value acquisition by switching on and operating briefly with
traversing in both directions
• Only for motion monitoring functions - testing the safe actual value acquisition:
Brief movement of the motor with the motion monitoring functions active (e.g. SLS) in both
directions.
• Countersigned acceptance report with the following content:
– New converter data (HW/SW version)
– Changed checksum
– Time stamp
5.8.4.6 Information pertaining to component replacements
Overview
After making changes to the machine, a new acceptance test must be performed with
documentation.
Requirement
WARNING
Unexpected movement due to incorrect component replacement
After a component has been replaced, connections or functions may be defective. This can lead
to unexpected movements of motors that may result in death or serious injury.
• After component replacement, run a simplified function test.
The faulty component was replaced.
The following table shows the converter response after a component replacement and the
resulting action required:
Table 5-10 Response after a component has been replaced
Replaced component Control type Converter response User action Diagnostic param‐
(alarm) Save by copying from eters
RAM to ROM
(p0977 = 1) 1)
Motor All A01641.5 = 1 Yes r9776.2 = 1
1)
The condition for saving is: There is no firmware update active on the converter.
Without saving, the converter signals the fault again after the next POWER ON.
Acceptance test and acceptance report

Alarm A01641 reports which component was replaced.
Each time a component is replaced, a function test must always be carried out so that
incorrect connections or wiring can be ruled out.
Replacing a motor
The converter reports motor replacement with the alarm A01641. If the replaced motor is of
the same type with the same integrated encoder and sensor, the converter does not trigger
a stop response. Motor operation is not restricted. The message is deleted after saving by
copying from RAM to ROM and restarting the converter.
A reduced acceptance test of the Safety Integrated Functions is required:
traversing in both directions after a component has been released.
• Only for motion monitoring functions - testing the safe actual value acquisition:
With the motion monitoring functions active (e.g. SLS), briefly move the motor in both
directions.
• Only for motion monitoring functions and after the encoder has been replaced:
Test the encoder parameterization (a trace recording is not required)
– New converter data (HW/FW version)
– Time stamp
Converter replacement
A message is not issued after the converter is replaced. The converter is ready for use after
the project data have been transferred to it. Project data are transferred by inserting the SD
card, backing up and restoring the data using the web server, or downloading the data from
the commissioning tool.
5.9 Status and diagnostics of the Safety Integrated Functions
A reduced acceptance test of the Safety Integrated Functions is required:

• Test of the EMERGENCY STOP function (STO or SS1) and the SBC function that is potentially
used
traversing in both directions
– New converter data (HW/FW version)
– Time stamp
Overview
Function status/diagnostics shows information about the Safety Integrated settings and states
of the converter.
If no Safety Integrated Function is enabled, then a function status cannot be viewed.
Function status/diagnostics shows the status of the enabled Safety Integrated Functions. If a
function is active, then the status indicates "active" (r9722). When STO and SS1 are active, then
EMERGENCY STOP is initiated. The brake is safely controlled if SBC is active. When SLS, SDI and
SSM are active, then the monitoring of the particular function is also active.
In addition to the function status, the following data can be viewed:
• Supplementary information (depending on the function)
– Example of SLS: Displays the active level, the active SLS limit value and the speed actual
value (r9714).
• Status of the converter:
Provides information as to whether internal events (e.g. software errors in the converter or
a discrepancy in the monitoring channels) have been signaled and whether the
communication functions.
• Overview of the checksums:

– Functional checksum (r9780) and time stamp (r9781)
The checksum displays the functional checksum of the converter and is used to track
changes (safety logbook). The functional checksum corresponds to a fingerprint of the
parameterized Safety Integrated Functions on the converter. The checksum is updated
after completing the Safety Integrated commissioning. The time stamp displays the
update time.
– Functions (offline: p9799 and online: r9798) and PROFIsafe (offline: p9797 and online:
r9796)
The checksum is displayed using the checksum-checked parameters for the converter
configuration. Based on these data, it can be identified whether the parameterization of
the Safety Integrated Functions was changed. The checksum of the PROFIsafe
parameterization is displayed next to it.
The checksums are calculated and displayed once offline and online commissioning have
been completed.
• Version:
The version shows the software versions of the corresponding components relevant for
Safety Integrated. These data are predominantly provided as information for service and
update.
– SINAMICS Safety firmware version
– I/O processor firmware version
– Encoder firmware version
Checksums
Using the checksums, it can be identified as to whether the configuration and/or
parameterization of Safety Integrated was changed.
An acceptance test is required after changing the checksums. The system outputs the
appropriate messages to indicate that an acceptance test is required. The checksums are
used for documentation purposes within the scope of an acceptance test.
The parameterization can be transferred to several devices by separating the checksums for
function and communication. When transferring the parameterization to several devices, you
must check whether the device is correctly assigned in the communication group.
More information
Further information about the checksums is provided in the parameter list.
5.10 Responses to safety faults and alarms
5.10 Responses to safety faults and alarms
5.10.1 Stop responses
The converter triggers a fault reaction in response to certain events:
• Stop response SCF
The converter detects a discrepancy in the Safety Integrated monitoring channels, e.g. an
error in the result and data comparison.
The time p9555 delays the transition to the stop response SS1.
• Stop response STO or SS1
The converter detects a limit violation, for example involving the Safely-Limited Speed (SLS)
function. The stop response is settable.
If stop response SS1 is set, stop response STO automatically follows when the motor comes
to a standstill.
It is not possible to select a stop response externally, for example via PROFIsafe.
All stop responses bring the motor to a standstill.
4UPQDBUFHPSZBDDPSEJOHUP*&$

4UPQSFTQPOTF 4UPQSFTQPOTF 4UPQSFTQPOTF

450 44 4$'
OTFU
4BGF5PSRVF0꫻
4BGFMZTIVUEPXOUPSRVF
STO Safe Torque Off

SS1 Safe Stop 1
SCF Safety Channel Failure
Figure 5-20 Stop responses
5.10.2 Fail-safe acknowledgment of safety messages
Overview
In the event of safety messages, e.g. due to limit value violations of the motor with active Safety
Integrated Functions, the converter detects an internal event.
5.11 Priority of stop responses and stop functions
A safety message requires a failsafe acknowledgement.
Requirement
You checked and eliminated the cause of the internal event.
Procedure
You must acknowledge safety messages with a failsafe signal. You have the following options for
failsafe acknowledgement:
Via PROFIsafe
Acknowledge the fault with bit 7 of safety control words 1 or 2:
• Bit 7 = 0 → 1 → 0
Via selection and deselection of STO/SS1

Select the Safety Integrated Function STO or SS1 and then deselect again:
• Via F-DI = 1 → 0 → 1
or
• With bit 0 or 1 of the PROFIsafe safety control word 1 or 2: Bit 0 or 1 = 1 → 0 → 1
By switching the supply voltage on and off

Temporarily switch the power supply of the converter off and on again.
Note
Additional acknowledgement via the "standard" acknowledgement signal
Safety Integrated uses its own message type (C) by default. With p3117 you have the option of
reparameterizing safety messages as Alarm (A) or Fault (F). In this case, you must additionally
acknowledge the internal event with the "Standard" acknowledgement signal.
5.11 Priority of stop responses and stop functions
Overview
If multiple Safety Integrated Functions or stop responses are active at the same time, the priority
of each function determines the behavior of the motor.
The priority determines whether a stop response or a stop function influences another active
Safety Integrated Function.
The stop responses and stop functions have a higher priority than all other Safety Integrated
Functions.
5.12 Response times
Amongst themselves, the stop responses and stop functions have different priorities.
Table 5-11 Priority of stop responses and stop functions
Priority Stop response or stop function

High Safe Torque Off (STO)
Low Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
A stop response or stop function with a higher priority influences an active stop response or
stop function with a lower priority.
A stop response or stop function with a lower priority has no influence on an active stop
response or stop function with a higher priority.
Example
Examples of the behavior of the motor if a stop response is active or if a stop function is selected:
• Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) is active and Safe Stop 1 (SS1) is selected.
Result: The converter brakes the motor because the stop function Safe Stop 1 (SS1) has a
higher priority than Safely-Limited Speed (SLS).
• Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) is active and the converter detects a limit value violation.
Safe Torque Off (STO) is set as the stop response to a limit value valuation.
During the stop response, the stop function Safe Stop 1 (SS1) is selected.
Result: The selection of Safe Stop 1 (SS1) has no influence on the behavior of the motor. The
motor coasts down because Safe Torque Off (STO) has a higher priority than Safe Stop 1 (SS1).
5.12 Response times
5.12.1 Monitoring cycle and PROFIsafe cycle
Description
The Safety Integrated Functions are executed in the monitoring cycle (p9500).
The PROFIsafe telegrams are evaluated in the monitoring cycle.
5.12 Response times
5.12.2 Response times when controlling via PROFIsafe
Technical data
The response times are converter-internal response times. Program runtimes in the F‑host and
the transmission time via PROFINET are not taken into account. Consider the following with
regard to the calculation of the response times between F-CPU and converter: Safety Integrated
Functions are only selected after the PROFIsafe monitoring time (F_WD_Time) has elapsed, e.g.
due to communication faults. The PROFIsafe monitoring time (F_WD_Time) must therefore also
be included as a relevant component in the calculation when an error occurs.
Notes regarding understanding the following table

The specified response times are applicable for a fault-free drive system as well as when a
fault is active in the system.
• Worst Case Delay Time (WCDT): Maximum response time between a PROFIsafe telegram
being received and a stop function being initiated when there is no fault
• One Fault Delay Time (OFDT): Maximum response time between a PROFIsafe telegram being
received and a stop function being initiated when a fault is active
• Watchdog Time (WDTime): Time between receiving the last valid PROFIsafe telegram and the
initiation of a stop function after the PROFIsafe monitoring time elapses
• Device Acknowledgement Time (DAT): Time between receiving a PROFIsafe telegram and
sending a response to this telegram
• State change at the failsafe digital input (F-DI): Response time when switching an F-DI up to
sending the F-DI state in the PROFIsafe telegram to the F-PLC
Table 5-12 Technical specifications - Response times
Property Function Unit Value

WCDT / OFDT STO / SS1 / SBC ms (2 · p9500) + t_K1
WDTime STO / SS1 / SBC ms F_WD_Time + (2 · p9500) + t_K1
DAT ms (2 · p9500) + t_K1 + t_K2
State change F-DI ms p10017 + (2 · p9500) + 3.5 ms + t_K2
p9500: Monitoring cycle (factory setting: 4 ms)

If an isochronous PROFIsafe telegram is used, and synchronism with the F-CPU is
optimally set, then p9500 can be reduced from 2 cycles to one cycle. Optimally
matched: bus clock cycle = p9500. The F-PLC receives one PROFIsafe telegram per
cycle from the converter, and the converter receives one PROFIsafe telegram per
cycle from the F-PLC.
p10017: Debounce time of the F-DI (factory setting: 4 ms)
F_WD_Time: PROFIsafe monitoring time
Take the F_WD_Time from your PROFIsafe configuration.
5.12 Response times
t_K1: Time for the internal converter communication when receiving a PROFIsafe tele‐
gram
• For isochronous communication: t_K1 = To. Determine To from the bus config‐
uration on the control side.
• For non-isochronous communication: t_K1 = 4 ms
t_K2: Time for the internal converter communication when sending a PROFIsafe tele‐
gram
• For isochronous communication: t_K2 = bus cycle time.
The bus cycle time is the send clock of the PROFINET controller.
5.12.3 Response times when controlling via terminals
Technical data
The following response times are applicable for stop functions for control via terminals of the
failsafe digital input (F-DI). The response time of a stop function is the time between the
selection of the stop function and the initiation of a stop response.
The specified response times are applicable for a fault-free drive system as well as when a
fault is active in the system.
Function Unit Worst case delay time

STO / SS1 / SBC ms p10017 + (2 · p9500) + 3.5 ms
p10017: Debounce time des F-DI (factory setting: 4 ms)

5.12.4 Response times - independent of the control type
Technical data
The following response times of the monitoring functions are independent of the control type.
The response times of Safety Integrated Functions are defined as follows:
• Safe Direction (SDI) and Safely-Limited Speed (SLS): The response time is the time between
a limit value being violated and initiating the respective stop function.
• Safe Speed Monitor (SSM): The response time is the time between a limit value being violated
up to sending the information via PROFIsafe.
5.13 Functional safety
The specified response times are applicable for a fault-free drive as well as when there is a
fault.
Function Unit Worst case delay time

SDI ms (3 · p9500) + t_R
SLS ms (3 · p9500) + t_R
SSM (output to the bus) ms (3 · p9500) + p9545 + t_K2

t_R: t_R depends on the relevant stop response initiated after the limit is breached:
• STO: 0.5 ms
• SS1: 2 ms
p9545: SSM filter time
t_K2: Time for the internal converter communication when sending a PROFIsafe telegram
• For isochronous communication: t_K2 =Tdp. Determine Tdp from the bus configu‐
ration on the control side.
5.13 Functional safety
Overview
A system or machine is considered functionally safe if the safety-relevant parts of the protection
and control equipment function correctly.
Description
Safety, from the perspective of the object to be protected, cannot be split-up. The causes of
danger and therefore also the technical measures to prevent them can vary widely. This is why a
differentiation is made between different types of safety (e.g. by specifying the cause of possible
hazards). "Functional safety" is involved if safety depends on the correct function.
To ensure the functional safety of a system or machine, the safety-related parts of the
protection and control devices must function correctly. In the case of a fault, systems must
respond in such a way that either the plant remains in a safe state or it is brought into
a safe state. In this case, it is necessary to use specially qualified technology that fulfills
the requirements described in the associated Standards. The requirements to implement
functional safety are based on the following basic objectives:
• Avoiding systematic faults
• Controlling random faults or failures
Benchmarks for establishing whether or not a sufficient level of functional safety has
been achieved include the probability of hazardous failures, the fault tolerance and the
5.14 Machinery Directive
quality that is to be guaranteed by avoiding systematic faults. This is expressed in the

standards using specific classification. In IEC 61800‑5‑2, IEC 62061 "Safety Integrity Level"
(SIL) and ISO 13849‑1 "Category" and "Performance Level" (PL).
5.14 Machinery Directive
Overview
The basic safety and health requirements specified in Annex I of the Directive must be fulfilled
for the safety of machines.
Description
The protective goals must be implemented responsibly to ensure compliance with the Directive.
Manufacturers of a machine must verify that their machine complies with the basic
requirements. This verification is facilitated by means of harmonized standards.
IEC 61800‑5‑2 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-2 is relevant for the
Machinery Directive: Safety requirements - Functional safety.
Within the context of EN 61508, IEC 61800‑5‑2 considers adjustable-speed electrical power
drive systems (PDS), which are suitable for use in safety-related applications (PDS(SR)).
IEC 61800‑5‑2 places requirements on PDS(SR) as subsystems of a safety-related system. This
therefore permits the implementation of the electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
elements of a PDS(SR) taking into account the safety-relevant performance of the safety
function(s) of a PDS.
Manufacturers and suppliers of PDS(SR) can prove to users (e.g. integrators of control
systems, developers of machines and plants etc.) the safety-relevant performance of their
equipment by implementing the specifications stipulated in standard IEC 61800‑5‑2.
Installing 6
6.1 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system
The converter is designed for operation in industrial environments.
Reliable and disturbance-free operation is only guaranteed for EMC-compliant installation.
More information
More information about EMC-compliant installation is available in the Internet:
• EMC installation guideline (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
60612658)
6.2 Installing the motor
WARNING
Fire due to inadequate cooling
Inadequate cooling can cause the motor to overheat, resulting in smoke and fire. Possible
consequences can be serious injury or death. This can also result in increased failures and
reduced service lives of motors.
• Comply with the specified cooling requirements for the motor.
Note
Required checks
The checklists below do not purport to be complete. It may be necessary to perform additional
checks and tests in accordance with the situation specific to the particular installation site.
• Install the motor as described in the following chapters of the operating instructions.
• Thoroughly familiarize yourself with the safety instructions and observe the checklists below
before starting any work.
Table 6-1 Checklist prior to installation
Check OK
General checks
Are all necessary components of the configured drive available?
Are the ambient conditions in the permissible range?
• Section "Permissible environmental conditions for the motor (Page 375)"
Installing
Table 6-2 Checklist to check the mechanical system
Check OK
Checking the mechanical system
Is the motor free of visible damage?
Have the mounting surfaces (e.g. flange, shaft) on the customer machine and on the
motor been cleaned?
Are the mounting surfaces free of corrosion?
Do the mounting dimensions (e.g. shaft diameter, shaft length, true run) on the cus‐
tomer machine meet the specification?
Installing
6.2.1 Mounting instructions for the motor
NOTICE
Damage to shaft sealing rings caused by solvent
If shaft sealing rings come into contact with solvents when preservation coating is removed,
the shaft sealing rings can be damaged.
• Avoid contact between solvents and shaft sealing rings.
NOTICE
Damage to the motor due to radial eccentricity at the shaft extension
Radial eccentricity and axial forces at the shaft extension can damage the motor.
• Mount the motor in such as way that no radial eccentricity and axial forces occur at the shaft
extension.
• Adhere to the specifications on the rating plate.

• Observe the warning and information plates on the motor.
• Check the permissible ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, installation altitude) at the
installation location.
• Thoroughly remove any anti-corrosion agents from the shaft extension. Use commercially
available solvents.
• Ensure that power losses are adequately dissipated. See Chapter "Cooling (Page 377)".
• If the motor is installed vertically with the shaft extension facing up, ensure that no liquid can
enter the upper bearing.
• Carefully ensure that the flange is in even contact with the mounting surface.
• Use hexagon socket head cap screws with a property class of at least 8.8.
• When tightening the fastening bolts avoid any uneven stressing.
• Observe the tightening torques for the fixing screws (see table below).
Tightening torques for fastening bolts

The general tolerance for the tightening torque is 10%. The tightening torque is based on a
friction coefficient of μ = 0.14.
Table 6-3 The data apply to 1FK2 and 1FT2 motors.
Motor Bolt DIN 7984 Washer ISO 7092 Tightening torque for bolts (not for elec‐
in mm trical connections)
1F☐2102 M4 4 (d2 = 8) 2.2 Nm
1F☐2☐03 M5 5 (d2 = 9) 4 Nm
1F☐2☐04 M6 6 (d2 = 11) 8 Nm
1F☐2205
Installing
Motor Bolt DIN 7984 Washer ISO 7092 Tightening torque for bolts (not for elec‐
in mm trical connections)
1F☐2105 M8 8 (d2 = 15) 20 Nm
1F☐2☐06
1F☐2☐08 M10 10 (d2 = 18) 35 Nm
1F☐2☐10 M12 12 (d2 = 20) 60 Nm
6.2.2 Attaching the output elements

Reduce the bending torque load applied to the shaft and the bearing by appropriately arranging
the output elements.
Mount the output elements as close as possible to the motor bearing.
optimum unfavorable
D D
)
)
low stress on shafts and bearings high stress on shafts and bearings
Mount or remove the power output elements (e.g. couplings, gear wheels, belt pulleys)
using suitable devices only (see figure).
• Use the threaded hole in the shaft extension.
• If required, heat up the output elements before mounting or removing.
Installing
6.3 Installing the converter
• When removing the output elements, use an intermediate disk to protect the centering in the
shaft extension.
1 Intermediate washer/disk (to protect the centering in the shaft extension)

Figure 6-1 Mounting and removing output elements
• If necessary, completely balance the motor together with the output elements according to
ISO 1940.
Note
Motors with feather key are half-key balanced. The motors have been balanced with half a
feather key.
The motor dimensions can be found in section "Dimension drawings (Page 565)".
6.3.1 Installation conditions

When installing the converter carefully observe the conditions listed below in order to guarantee
reliable, continuous and trouble-free operation.
• The converter is designed for installation in a control cabinet.
• The converter is certified for use in environments with degree of pollution 2 without
condensation; i.e. in environments where no conductive pollution/dirt occurs. Condensation
is not permissible.
• The converter fulfills degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529.
• EMC-compliant installation
Chapter: EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system (Page 153)
Note
Keep the cover of the operator panel closed to protect the operator controls and the SD card.
Additional requirements for plants and systems in the United States / Canada (UL/cUL)
A label with the following number is provided with the device: A5E36790112.
Installing
Note the instructions on the label and attach the label in a clearly visible location close to the
converter in the control cabinet.
Installation notes
• Install the converter vertically with the flap for the LED display facing upwards.
Figure 6-2 Mounting position of the converter
• Maintain the minimum clearances to other components.

• Use the recommended fastening elements and comply with the specified torques.
Clearances to cabinet panels and other components

Leave a minimum 100 mm clearance to other devices at the top and bottom. A lateral clearance
between several SINAMICS S210 converters is not mandatory.
Observe a lateral clearance of at least 10 mm to other devices.
ࣨ
ࣨ
ࣨ
ࣨ ࣨ
ࣨ
ࣨ
Figure 6-3 Clearances to cabinet panels and other components for converters with 1 AC line
connection
Installing
ࣨ
ࣨ
ࣨ
ࣨ ࣨ
ࣨ
ࣨ
Figure 6-4 Clearances to cabinet panels and other components for converters with 3 AC line
connection
Installing
6.3.2 Dimensions and drilling dimensions
Dimension drawings and drilling dimensions for converters with 1 AC line connection
8JEUI
UI
%FQ

)FJHIU

Figure 6-5 Dimension drawing and drilling dimensions
Table 6-4 Dimensions and mounting
Frame size Width Height Depth Weight Fixing

FSA 45 mm 170 mm 172.4 mm 1.1 kg 2 x M5 / 4 Nm
FSB 55 mm 170 mm 172.4 mm 1.2 kg 2 x M5 / 4 Nm
FSC 74.5 mm 170 mm 197.4 mm 1.9 kg 3 x M5 / 4 Nm
Installing
6.4 Connecting the converter and the motor
Dimension drawings and drilling dimensions for converters with 3 AC line connection
8JEUI
I
QU

%F
)FJHIU
)FJHIU

Figure 6-6 Dimension drawing and drilling dimensions
Table 6-5 Dimensions and mounting
Frame size Width Height 1 Height 2 Depth Weight Fixing

FSA 50 mm 272.9 mm 231 mm 223.3 mm 2.1 kg 3 x M5 / 4 Nm
FSB 70 mm 322 mm 280 mm 223.3 mm 3.3 kg 4 x M5 / 4 Nm
FSC 105 mm 322 mm 280 mm 223.3 mm 5.0 kg 4 x M5 / 4 Nm

You can find general information in chapter "Permissible line supplies and connection options
(Page 65)".
Installing
6.4.1 Cable lengths
Cable lengths for the converter connections
Type of connection Connection via Permissible cable length

Control voltage 24 V DC X124 30 m
External braking resistor for converters with 1 AC X1 (R1, DCP) 10 m
line connection
External braking resistor for converters with 3 AC X4 (R1, DCP) 10 m
line connection
Service interface X127 10 m
Digital inputs X130 30 m
Connection to the control system via PROFINET X150 P1 100 m
X150 P2
Motor power connections X2 50 m
Encoder X100 50 m
Motor holding brake X107 50 m
Cable lengths for connecting the motor to the converter

The motor is connected to the converter using a one cable system (OCC - one cable connection)
via the MOTION-CONNECT cable. The MOTION-CONNECT cable includes the power connections
for the motor, the encoder connection and the connections for the motor holding brake.
The permissible cable lengths for the various EMC categories are given in Chapter:
• "Electromagnetic compatibility according to IEC 61800-3 (Page 550)"
Ordering information for MOTION-CONNECT cables is provided in Chapter:
• "Determining the article number of a prefabricated OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable
(Page 624)"
Ordering information for external line filters is provided in Chapter:
• "Technical data (Page 603)"
Installing
6.4.2 Connecting a MOTION-CONNECT cable at the motor
NOTICE
Destruction of the motor if it is directly connected to the three-phase line supply
The motor will be destroyed if it is directly connected to the three-phase line supply.
• Only operate motors with the permitted converters.
The manufacturer of the system/machine is responsible for ensuring that installation is

performed correctly.
Ensure that the associated warning labels in the appropriate national language are attached.
The motors have SPEED-CONNECT M12, M17 or M23 connectors that can be rotated.
You connect the motor to the converter using a MOTION-CONNECT OCC cable. The cables for
the power, the holding brake, the encoder and the shielding are integrated in the OCC cable.
• Use the prefabricated MOTION-CONNECT OCC cables from SIEMENS. This reduces the
installation time and costs, and increases the operational reliability of the drive.
$
%
8
9
:
① Round connector M12, M17 or M23, 10-pole ④ Cables for a holding brake,
A (WT) = "-", B (BK) = "+"
② MOTION-CONNECT OCC cable ⑤ Power cables
③ Shielding ⑥ SIEMENS IX connector for signal line
Figure 6-7 MOTION-CONNECT OCC (example)
• Check that the sealing surfaces of the connectors have not been damaged.
Clearance required when connecting the motor
O
O
Figure 6-8 Example
Installing
Table 6-6 Clearance required when connecting the motor
Motor Connec‐ Distance, point of rotation to Length of the plug Minimum bending radius, static
tor size NDE connection
Without brake With brake MC500 MC800 PLUS
l1 / mm l / mm R static / mm
1F☐2☐02 M12 33 61 23.5 27.2
1F☐2☐03-☐☐G 23
1F☐2☐03-☐☐H M17 70 25.5 30.6
1F☐2☐03-☐☐K
1F☐2☐04 26
1F☐2205 28 34
1F☐2105 34
1F☐2☐06 M23 41 53 99 30.7 36.9
1F☐2☐08 39
1F☐2☐10 43
Rotation range of the OCC connector on the motor

The data apply to 1FK2 and 1FT2 motors.
You can rotate the motor connector. Use a suitable socket connector as lever to rotate the
connector.
Note
A maximum of 10 rotations are permitted so as not to impair the degree of protection of the
motor.
Table 6-7 Rotational range of the connector
Motor Angle α Angle α' Connector Drawing

size
1F☐2☐02 261° 45° M12 ˞
1F☐2☐03-☐☐G
˞
Installing
Table 6-8 Rotational range of the connector
Motor Angle α Angle α' Connector Drawing

size
1F☐2☐03-☐☐H 205° 80° M17 ˞
1F☐2☐03-☐☐K
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05 255° 35°
˞
1F☐2☐06 312° 13° M23
1F☐2☐08
1F☐2☐10
6.4.3 Connecting the power cable to the motor

The chapter describes how you connect a power cable to the motor.
Overview
The motors are equipped with SPEED-CONNECT connectors.
You can connect quick-connection cables with SPEED-CONNECT as well as conventional
cables with screw locks (fully threaded) to the motor connector.
Note
We recommend cables with SPEED-CONNECT because they are easier to use.
Establishing a SPEED-CONNECT connection
Procedure
Note
• Only tighten the connector by hand.
• Do not use any wrenches or similar tools.
Installing
1. Ensure that the union nut of the SPEED-CONNECT connector is rotated to the end stop in the
direction of the "open" arrow.
2. Align the SPEED-CONNECT connector so that the triangles on the top of the connectors are
opposite one another.
࣪p
3. Push the power connector onto the motor connecting socket as far as it will go.
4. Turn the union nut by hand in the direction of "close" by at least 45° (position A) or up to the
end stop (position B)
" #
NJO
NBY
A Minimum locking
B Maximum locking up to the end stop
Note
A secure connection is only guaranteed from position A onward.
Releasing a SPEED-CONNECT connection
Procedure
1. Turn the union nut of the SPEED-CONNECT connector in the direction of "open" to the end
stop. The triangles on the top of the connectors must be opposite one another.
2. Withdraw the connector.
Note
Pull out the connector at the connector itself, do not pull on the cable.
Installing
Routing cables in damp environments

If you are operating the motor in environments in which moisture can arise, follow the
subsequent instructions for routing the connecting cables.
6,(0(16
6,(0(16
6,(0(16 6,(0(16
6,(0(16 6,(0(16
Figure 6-9 Permissible and impermissible cable routing when connecting in a damp environment
Installing
6.4.4 Connecting the converter

Install the converter so that you are compliant with local regulations for erecting and installing
low-voltage systems.
Carefully observe the following product memorandum about protection against electric
shock:
Ensure protection against electric shock in the motor circuit of a converter according
to IEC/EN 61800-5-1 through automatic shut down in the case of a fault according
to IEC/EN 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100-410) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
103474993)
Notes for connecting up the converter
Operating displays for converter operation

If, when switching over a function from ON to OFF, an LED or other similar display is not lit or
not active; this does not indicate that the device is switched-off or in a no-current condition.
Shield plate
For converters, frame sizes FSB and FSC with 3 AC line connection, the shield plate is
integrated in the converter itself. For the other converters, the shield plate is included in the
accessories pack of the converter.
Fixing connecting cables

Fix all of the connecting cables using shield clamps or suitable cable ties to the converter
shield plate.
Power connections
NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects, or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections to the specified torque.
• Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.
Connection of motor holding brake, connector X107

Also connect the insulated conductors for the motor holding brake to the connector at X107,
even when you are using a motor without holding brake.
Shielded cables
Shielded cables are required for connecting the OCC cable, the external braking resistor and
the digital inputs to ensure that the drive functions perfectly.
Use the converter shield support to connect the shield at the converter. We recommend
connecting the shield using the shield clamp that is provided with the prefabricated OCC
cable used to connect the motor (see the following diagram).
Installing
Use shielded cables to establish the following connections:

• Cable between the converter line filter (only for 1 AC 230 V)
• Cable between the converter and motor
• Cable between the converter and external braking resistor
• Signal cables if they are routed next to cables with high levels of noise and interference
NOTICE
Damage/fault caused by connecting several loads to the same line infeed point
For loads not belonging to the SINAMICS S210 drive system, make sure that a sufficient EMC
interference suppression is provided. If several such loads are connected to the same line infeed
point, this may result in damage or faults.
• Provide interference suppression for such loads using appropriate line filters. To prevent
mutual interference, it is not permissible that this line filter is equipped with capacitors with
respect to ground on the line side. A series B84144A*R120 filter from EPCOS is
recommended for a 24 V power supply with a 3-phase connection.
Cable routing and shielding must be compliant with the EMC zone concept.
• Connect the shield at the converter. We recommend that the shield of the preassembled OCC
connecting cable is connected with the shield terminal on the shield connection plate of the
converter (see ① in the diagram).
• Use cables with finely-stranded, braided shields.
• Carefully ensure that the shield is not interrupted or broken.

① OCC connection cable to the motor

② Connecting cable for external braking resistor
③ Connecting cable for the digital inputs
Figure 6-10 Shield support with shield plate and shield clamps for prefabricated OCC cable shown
using an example of a converter with 1 AC line connection
Installing
Connections and operating elements of the converter with 1 AC line connection
6WDWXV/('V
)DXOWGLVSOD\ 6ORWIRU6'FDUG
$FNQRZOHGJHHUURUV
;
6HUYLFHLQWHUIDFH
(WKHUQHW
;
9H[WHUQDO ;
WRORRSWKURXJKIRU 0HDVXULQJSUREHDQGIDLOVDIH
DGGLWLRQDOFRQYHUWHUV GLJLWDOLQSXW
;3
; 352),1(7SRUW
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQDQG
H[WHUQDOEUDNLQJUHVLVWRU
;3
352),1(7SRUW
; ;
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ (QFRGHUFRQQHFWLRQ
;
6KLHOGVXSSRUWIRUVKLHOGHG 1RIXQFWLRQIRUIXWXUHXVH
FDEOHVVWUDLQUHOLHIXVLQJ
FDEOHWLHVIRURWKHUFDEOHV
;
0RWRUKROGLQJEUDNH
37&KDVQRIXQFWLRQIRUIXWXUH
XVH
(SPVOEDPOOFDUJPO
.Y

/N
Figure 6-11 Connections and operating elements of the converter with 1 AC line connection
Connectors X1, X2, X107, X124 and X130 are included in the scope of delivery of the
converter.
Encoder connector X100 is included with the OCC cable.
You require Ethernet cables with RJ45 connectors to connect service interface X127, as well
as for PROFINET ports X150 P1 and X150 P2.
Installing
Connections and operating elements of the converter with 3 AC line connection
; *URXQGLQJFRQQHFWLRQRI
([WHUQDOEUDNLQJUHVLVWRU H[WHUQDOEUDNLQJUHVLVWRU
;
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
6WDWXV/('V
)DXOWGLVSOD\
6ORWIRU6'FDUG
&RQQHFWRUIRU$&FRXSOLQJRSWLRQ $FNQRZOHGJHHUURUV
;
6HUYLFHLQWHUIDFH(WKHUQHW
;
9H[WHUQDO
WRORRSWKURXJKIRUDGGLWLRQDO
FRQYHUWHUV
;
0HDVXULQJSUREHDQGIDLOVDIH
GLJLWDOLQSXW
'&OLQNFRYHU
;3
352),1(7SRUW
;3
352),1(7SRUW
;
&RQQHFWRUIRU'&OLQNFRXSOLQJ
RSWLRQ
;
(QFRGHUFRQQHFWLRQ
;
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ ;
1RIXQFWLRQIRUIXWXUHXVH
6KLHOGVXSSRUWIRUVKLHOGHGFDEOHV
VWUDLQUHOLHIXVLQJFDEOHWLHVIRURWKHU
;
0RWRUKROGLQJEUDNH
FDEOHV
37&KDVQRIXQFWLRQIRUIXWXUH
XVH
(SPVOEDPOOFDUJPO
GPSGSBNFTJ[F'4$.YXJUI/N
Figure 6-12 Connections and operating elements of the converter with 3 AC line connection
Connectors X1 standard, X2, X4, X107, X124 and X130 are included in the scope of delivery
of the converter.
Encoder connector X100 is included with the OCC cable.
Installing
You require Ethernet cables with RJ45 connectors to connect service interface X127, as well
as for PROFINET ports X150 P1 and X150 P2.
You must order the connectors for AC coupling X1 and for DC link coupling X3 separately as
required:
see Chapter "Connectors and cables for the AC coupling and DC link coupling (Page 591)".
6.4.5.1 Connecting the MOTION-CONNECT cable to the converter

In addition to the motor connections, the MOTION-CONNECT cable from the motor to the
converter also includes the conductors for the encoder and the motor holding brake.
NOTICE
Damage to the device by connecting other motors or devices
Connecting other devices (motors, encoders) can destroy the converter or the connected
device.
• Only connect 1FK2 and 1FT2 motors to the converter.
• Use only MOTION-CONNECT cables from Siemens or cables that you have fabricated
yourself with the correct pin assignment.
Connecting the motor cable to the converter

Connect conductors U, V, W of the MOTION-CONNECT cable to connector X2 of the converter as
shown below.
Connect the shield of the MOTION-CONNECT cable to the shield plate through a large surface
area. Use commercially available clamps, the clamps supplied with the prefabricated cable or
the shield connection clamps supplied as accessories.
The terminals are spring-loaded terminals.
Color coding for MOTION-CONNECT cables:
• Phase U = brown
• Phase V = black
• Phase W = gray
8
9
:
1P
Figure 6-13 X2 - motor connection
Installing
Permissible conductor cross-sections for single-conductor connection or for connecting

flexible cables with end sleeves:
• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 26 … 12
• Insulation stripping length: 10 mm
Connecting the encoder to the converter

The cables and the connector for the encoder connection are part of the MOTION-CONNECT
cable from the motor to the converter.
Insert the Siemens IX plug-in plug socket X100 as shown below.
Figure 6-14 X100 - encoder connection
Connecting the motor holding brake

The cables for the motor holding brake are part of the MOTION-CONNECT cable from the motor
to the converter.
Connect the cables as shown below to the connector X107 of the converter.
#3 15$
#3 15$
1) no function, for future use

Figure 6-15 X107 - Motor holding brake connection
Permissible conductor cross-sections:

• For single-conductor cables or for flexible cable conductors with end sleeves without
protective collars or long end sleeves with protective collars:
– 0.25 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
• For flexible cables with end sleeves with protective collars:
– 0.25 mm2 … 0.75 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 19
Installing
Note
Connect the conductors for the motor holding brake to connector X107 even if you are using a
motor without holding brake.
6.4.5.2 Connecting the converter to the line supply

Connect the line feeder cable as shown below to the connector X1 of the converter. Connect the
protective conductor with a cable lug and an M4 screw to the shield plate of the converter.
/
1
1P
Figure 6-16 X1 - line connection 1 AC
The shield plate is fixed with two M4x10 screws with a tightening torque of 1.8 Nm.
• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 26 … 12
6.4.5.3 Using several single-phase converters in machines and plants
Overview
Evaluate the input currents of single-phase converters in your machine or plant in terms of
harmonics and unbalance.
Installing
Description
In unfavorable cases, the harmonic currents of several converters in the neutral conductor (N)
add up to a value greater than the currents of the line conductors (L1, L2, L3). The current-
carrying capacity of the neutral conductor must be sufficient for this. IEC 60364‑5‑52:2019,
Section 524, provides recommendations for dimensioning the neutral conductor. If no more
precise information is available, the standard recommends dimensioning the neutral conductor
for 1.45 times the current-carrying capacity of the line conductors.
WARNING
Fire caused by neutral conductor (N) overload
The neutral conductor can heat up due to the load from harmonic currents and cause a fire.
• Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the neutral conductor.
WARNING
Electric shock caused by PEN conductor overload
In TN-C supply networks, the protective function of the PEN conductor can be adversely
affected by exposure to harmonic currents.
• Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the PEN conductor.
Installing
6.4.5.4 Connecting a braking resistor

You can either use the internal braking resistor or connect an external braking resistor.
Using the internal braking resistor

If you are using the internal braking resistor, terminals DCP and R2 must be jumpered at
connector X1.
The jumper is included in the scope of delivery of the converter.
'&3
1P
5
5
Figure 6-17 X1 - connection for using the internal braking resistor
Using an external braking resistor

If you are using an external braking resistor, terminals DCP and R2 must not be jumpered at
connector X1. Connect the braking resistor via the DCP and R1 terminals.
The converter shield plate is used for the protective conductor connection and the shield
support.
The permissible cable length is 10 m.
'&3
1P
5
5

① Shield
Figure 6-18 X1 - connection for using an external braking resistor

• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 26 … 12
Installing
6.4.6 Converter with 3 AC line connection
6.4.6.1 Connecting the MOTION-CONNECT cable to the converter

In addition to the motor connections, the MOTION-CONNECT cable from the motor to the
converter also includes the conductors for the encoder and the motor holding brake.
NOTICE
Damage to the device by connecting other motors or devices
Connecting other devices (motors, encoders) can destroy the converter or the connected
device.
• Only connect 1FK2 and 1FT2 motors to the converter.
• Use only MOTION-CONNECT cables from Siemens or cables that you have fabricated
yourself with the correct pin assignment.
Connecting the motor cable to the converter

Connect conductors U, V, W of the MOTION-CONNECT cable to connector X2 of the converter as
shown below.
Connect the shield of the MOTION-CONNECT cable to the shield plate through a large surface
area. Use commercially available clamps, the clamps supplied with the prefabricated cable or
the shield connection clamps supplied as accessories.
Color coding for MOTION-CONNECT cables:
• Phase U = brown
• Phase V = black
• Phase W = gray
Installing
:
9
8
Figure 6-19 X2 - motor connection

flexible cables with or without end sleeves:
• 0.75 mm2 … 6 mm2
• AWG: 18 … 10
Connecting the encoder to the converter

The cables and the connector for the encoder connection are part of the MOTION-CONNECT
cable from the motor to the converter.
Insert the Siemens IX plug-in plug socket X100 as shown below.
Figure 6-20 X100 - encoder connection
Connecting the motor holding brake

The cables for the motor holding brake are part of the MOTION-CONNECT cable from the motor
to the converter.
Connect the cables as shown below to the connector X107 of the converter.
Installing
#3 15$
#3 15$
1) no function, for future use

Figure 6-21 X107 - Motor holding brake connection

• For single-conductor cables or for flexible cable conductors with end sleeves without
protective collars or long end sleeves with protective collars:
– 0.25 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 0.75 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 19
Note
Connect the conductors for the motor holding brake to connector X107 even if you are using a
motor without holding brake.
6.4.6.2 Connecting the converter to the line supply

The converter is supplied with connectors for connecting it to the line supply.
If you connect several converters in parallel, the optional connectors for the AC coupling are
available to connect to the line supply. This significantly reduces the wiring costs.
Both connection options are shown below.
Installing
Connecting a converter with standard terminals

/
/
/

L1, L2, L3 Cores of the line connecting cable

① M4x10 screw to fasten the protective conductor and the shield plate
② Shield plate
Figure 6-22 X1 - line connection with standard terminals (example for frame size FSA)
The shield plate for frame size FSA is fixed with two M4x10 screws with a tightening torque
of 1.8 Nm.
For frame sizes FSB and FSC, the shield connection is integrated in the converter itself.
The protective conductor for frame size FSC is fixed with one M5x12 screw with a tightening
torque of 4 Nm.
• 0.75 mm2 … 6 mm2
• AWG: 18 … 10
Note
Connector X4 for braking resistor
Insert connector X4 even if you are not using an external braking resistor. In this case, you need
to bridge the terminals DCP and R2 to use the internal resistor with the supplied jumper.
Otherwise, pre-charging of the converter will not take place.
You can find more detailed information in the section "Connecting a braking resistor (Page 185)".
Connecting a converter with terminals for the AC coupling

The connectors for the AC coupling are not included in the scope of delivery of the converter.
Ordering data:
• "Connectors and cables for the AC coupling and DC link coupling (Page 591)"
Installing
The permissible cables for the AC coupling as well as the installation instructions are provided
in section:
• "Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling (Page 183)"
1&

① M4 for frame sizes FSA and FSB

M5 for frame size FSC
Figure 6-23 X1 - line connection with AC coupling
Installing
6.4.6.3 DC link coupling

The connectors for the DC link coupling are not included in the scope of delivery of the converter.
Ordering data:
• "Connectors and cables for the AC coupling and DC link coupling (Page 591)"
The permissible cables for the DC link coupling as well as the installation instructions are
provided in Chapter:
• "Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling (Page 183)"
You can find the prerequisites for the DC link coupling in Chapter:
• "DC link coupling (for converters with 3 AC line connection) (Page 93)"
Figure 6-24 X3 - connection of the coupling
If no DC link coupling is used, seal the socket in the device with a DC link
cover.
Installing
6.4.6.4 Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling

The connection of the individual converters for the AC coupling and the DC link coupling are
established by inserting the cables, together with their insulation through the openings of the
connector one after the other. The electrical contact is established when tightening the screw
connections of the individual connectors with the specified torque.
Permissible cables for the AC coupling and DC link coupling

The cables required for the AC coupling and DC link coupling are standard cables, and therefore
not included in the scope of delivery.
Permissible cables for IEC applications:

Use the following cables for the AC coupling and for the DC link coupling:
• 16 mm², Class 5 (finely stranded, PVC-insulated), H07V-K + H07V2-K according to
DIN EN 50525‑2‑31
• HELUTHERM® 145 [helukabel.com]: 16 mm², Class 5 (finely-stranded, crosslinked polyolefin-
copolymer, halogen-free)
• Outer diameter 6.7 mm … 8.1 mm
Permissible cables for UL and cUL applications:

Only use copper cables for 60/75 °C with the following properties for the AC coupling and the
DC link coupling:
• AWG 6, copper conductor with PVC insulation, with or without nylon jacket, 19 strands
• Types: MTW, THHW, THW, THW-2, THHN, THWN-2, TW, TWN
• CSA types: TW, TWU, TWN75, TW75, TWU75, T90. It is not permissible that other cables are
used.
You can also use cables with a higher rated temperature value. It is not permissible to reduce
the conductor cross-section.
Installing
Establishing the coupling

1. Thread the insulated cables through the connector, allow the cables to protrude by
3 mm … 5 mm at the end connectors.
Markings are provided on the end caps showing the permissible amount of protrusion. To do
this, place the end cap on the connector as shown in the diagram and then shorten the
conductors appropriately.
2. Tighten the screws with a torque of 3 Nm to establish an electrical contact. Please note that
you must tighten the screws so that the red marking on the connector is no longer visible. The
electrical contact has not been reliably established if the red marking is still visible.
3. For the AC coupling, close and seal the connector of the last converter using an end cap.
For the DC link coupling, close and seal the connectors of the first and last converters using
end caps.
.BSLJOHOPMPOHFSWJTJCMF
&OEDBQ
1P
*OTVMBUFEDPOEVDUPS
&OEDBQ
.BSLJOHOPMPOHFSWJTJCMF
Figure 6-25 Establish a coupling - example for a DC link coupling
Note
The cables for the AC coupling and the DC link coupling may only be used once to establish a
connection.
Further, comply with the notes provided in the documentation supplied with the contactors.
Installing
6.4.6.5 Connecting a braking resistor

You can either use the internal braking resistor or connect an external braking resistor.
Using the internal braking resistor

If you are using the internal braking resistor, terminals DCP and R2 must be jumpered at
connector X4.
The jumper is included in the scope of delivery of the converter.
3 3
%$1
Figure 6-26 X4 - connection for using the internal braking resistor
Using an external braking resistor

If you are using an external braking resistor, terminals DCP and R2 must not be jumpered at
connector X4. Connect the braking resistor via the DCP and R1 terminals. Pre-charging of the
converter then takes place via the external braking resistor.
The protective conductor is connected at the upper grounding connection of the device.
The shield support is realized at the rear panel of the electrical cabinet; the shield must be
connected through a large surface area.
The permissible cable length is 10 m.
3
3
%$1
① Shield
Figure 6-27 X4 - connection for an external braking resistor
Installing

• 0.75 mm2 … 6 mm2
• AWG: 18 … 10
6.4.7 Additional connections at 1 AC / 3 AC converters
6.4.7.1 Connecting digital inputs and the external 24 V supply
Connecting the external 24 V supply

Connect a 24 V power supply to the converter.
Permissible cable length: 30 m
9
9
9
9
① 24 V external
② Loop-through for additional converters
Figure 6-28 X124 - 24 V external (connection at converters with 1 AC line connection)
Note
Connecting converters with 3 AC line connection
For converters with 3 AC line connection, the mounting position of the connector is rotated 180°.
Maximum current for looping through via the internal jumper (blue-blue, red-red): 24 A.
• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 24 … 12
Connecting digital inputs

Digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 are high-speed digital inputs and can be used as measuring probes.
Digital inputs DI 2 and DI 3 form a failsafe digital input.
Installing
You can connect the temperature monitoring for an external braking resistor to DI 4.
When you use the temperature monitoring function, the converter shuts down the motor if
the external braking resistor temperature becomes too high.
Permissible cable length: 30 m
+ DI2+
DI0 DI0 DI2- F-DI
M DI3+
+ DI3-
DI1 DI1 VS+
M DI4 DI4
Figure 6-29 X130 - connector for digital inputs
Note
Switchable voltage source VS+
A switchable voltage source is available at the terminal marked with "VS+".
Via this terminal, adjustable dark pulses can be generated that can be used to diagnose the
control circuits for the failsafe digital inputs. For additional information, see Chapter "Self-test of
the failsafe digital input (F-DI) (Page 135)."
When using dark pulses via terminal "VS+", the power supply for the temperature monitoring of
an external braking resistor must be realized via a terminal marked "+", or must be externally
provided.

• For single-conductor connection:
– 0.2 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
• For flexible cables with end sleeves:
– 0.25 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 ... 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 0.75 mm2
– AWG: 24 ... 19
The three terminals marked with "+" and "VS+" are provided as power supply for external
sensors. They are short-circuit-proof and provide a max. of 50 mA per sensor. A sensor
short-circuit interrupts the power supply for all three sensors.
Installing
6.4.7.2 Connecting service interface and PROFINET

Connect your operating unit, for example a PC, via an Ethernet cable to the service interface
(socket X127).
The transmission rates are 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s.
Connect the converter with PROFINET cables with RJ45 FastConnect connectors or with
PROFINET patch cables (see accessories) via the sockets X150 P1 and X150 P2 to the
PROFINET network.
Figure 6-30 RJ45 FastConnect connector
Table 6-9 Pin assignment for X127, X150 P1 and X150 P2
Pin Pin assignment Explanation

1 RXP Receiving data +
2 RXN Receiving data -
3 TXP Sending data +
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 TXN Sending data -
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -
Permissible cable length for the service interface (terminal X127): 10 m
Permissible cable length for PROFINET (terminals X150 P1 and X150 P2): 100 m
LED states
For diagnostic purposes, the PROFINET interface X150 P1/P2 features a green and a yellow
LED.
The following status information is displayed:
Table 6-10 LED states of PROFINET interface X150 P1/P2
LED Color Status Description

Link port - Off Missing or faulty link
Green Continuous light 10 or 100 Mbit link is available
Activity port - Off No activity
Yellow Flashing light Sending or receiving data
Installing
6.4.8 Connection examples
Connection example for converters with 1 AC line connection
/FUXPSL UPOFYUDPOWFSUFS
4UBUVTEJTQMBZ
WJB-&%
/ - 7 . 7
FYUFSOBM
.FNPSZ
PQUJPOBM
5 5 DBSE
7 .
9 . 9
7
7 &UIFSOFU
9
7 *MJN
%* 4 *
.
'VTFPS
%* 4 *
DJSDVJUCSFBLFS
.
-JOFDPOUBDUPS %* 9

PQUJPOBM
%*
'%* %* 4PVSDJOHPVUQVU
%* 4JOLJOHPVUQVU
-JOF꫼MUFS %*
%*
PQUJPOBM
9 74
- -JOF
%*
/ ꫼MUFS
%$1 #SBLJOHSFTJTUPS
7 3 JOUFSOBM
ț
3 130'*/&5 91
#SBLJOHSFTJTUPS 130'*/&5 91
FYUFSOBM PQUJPOBM
&ODPEFS 9

&ODPEFS
9 9
6
9
7 .PUPSIPMEJOHCSBLF #3
8 #3

15$
15$
0OF$BCMF$POOFDUJPO 0$$
OPGVODUJPO GPSGVUVSFVTF
&
Figure 6-31 Connection example for converters with 1 AC line connection
Installing
Connection example for converters with 3 AC line connection
/FUXPSL UPOFYUDPOWFSUFS
4UBUVTEJTQMBZ
WJB-&%
7
- - - 7 . FYUFSOBM
.FNPSZ
PQUJPOBM
5 5 DBSE
'VTFTPSDJSDVJU 7 .
CSFBLFST 9 .
7 9
7 &UIFSOFU
9
7 *
MJN
%* 4 *
. -JOFDPOUBDUPS .
PQUJPOBM

%* 4 *
-JOF꫼MUFS .
PQUJPOBM
9
- %* 9
-JOF %*
- ꫼MUFS '%* %* 4PVSDJOHPVUQVU
-
%* 4JOLJOHPVUQVU
%*
%*
UPOFYU 74
$POWFSUFS %*
9
%$1 3FMBZ #SBLJOHSFTJTUPS
7 3 JOUFSOBM
ț
#SBLJOHSFTJTUPS 3
130'*/&5 91
FYUFSOBM PQUJPOBM
130'*/&5 91
9
6 &ODPEFS 9
7

8 &ODPEFS 9
9
.PUPSIPMEJOHCSBLF #3
#3
& . %$-JOL
15$
%$1 %$/ 15$
9
PQUJPOBM
UPOFYU
$POWFSUFS
0$$
0OF$BCMF$POOFDUJPO
OPGVODUJPO GPSGVUVSFVTF
Figure 6-32 Connection example for converters with 3 AC line connection
Installing
6.4.9 Connection examples of the fail-safe digital input
Interconnection for an EMERGENCY STOP button with 24 V internal
9

%*
.

%*
.
9
%*
%*
'%*
%*
%*
74
%*
Figure 6-33 Interconnection for an EMERGENCY STOP button with 24 V internal
Uses of the interconnection:

• Self-test using dark pulses entered via terminal VS+
• Category 4 according to ISO 13849‑1 can be achieved (local use, e.g. EMERGENCY STOP)
• Short-circuit detection (with respect to ground and 24 V)
Interconnection for an EMERGENCY STOP button with 24 V DC external
9
7
%*
.
7
%*
.
9
%*
%*
'%*
%*
%*
74
%*
. 7
Figure 6-34 Interconnection for an EMERGENCY STOP button with 24 V DC external

• Self-test using internal test signals
Installing
Interconnection of the failsafe digital input with a failsafe digital output
9 9

%* %*
. .

%* %*
'%2 '%2
. .
7
9 9
%* %* 7
%* %*
'%* '%*
%* %*
%* %*
74 74
%* %*
. .
Figure 6-35 Interconnection of the failsafe digital input with a failsafe digital output

• Self-test using externally entered dark pulses
Commissioning (web server) 7
7.1 Introduction
Description
The web server commissioning tool is integrated in the converter.
The web server supports you throughout the service life of the application:
• Online commissioning
• Diagnostics
• Operator control and monitoring
• Service and maintenance
• Support
The settings made are applied after commissioning has been completed and transferred to
the converter.
The web server has multi-level security functionality.
More information
Detailed information about security settings in the web server is provided in the Configuration
Manual SINAMICS Industrial Security (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109810578).
7.2 Requirements for commissioning
Description
• You have correctly installed the converter and the motor.
• You have mounted the motor including encoder to the mechanical system.
• You have connected the motor to the converter.
• You have connected the converter to the operating unit via the service interface (X127).
• You have switched on the converter supply voltage.
• The converter has ramped up.
Commissioning (web server)
7.3 Fundamentals
7.3 Fundamentals
7.3.1 Supported operating units
Description
The following operating units are supported for the connection with the web server:
• Programming device, PC, notebook
• Tablet, smartphone
Mobile end devices are connected to the converter via SINAMICS Smart Adapter.
More information about the SINAMICS Smart Adapter can be found in Chapter "SINAMICS
Smart Adapter (Page 590)".
As a result of the responsive design, content is adapted to the display size of the operating
unit.
7.3.2 Supported browsers
Description
The web server supports the following browsers:
Browser1) Version
Apple Safari ≥ Version 15.0
Google Chrome ≥ Version 83
Microsoft Edge ≥ Version 88
Mozilla Firefox ≥ Version 91
1)
Whichever browser you use, we recommend using the most up-to-date version.
7.3 Fundamentals
7.3.3 Communication interfaces
Description
The following interfaces are available for accessing the converter:
Interface Information
Service interface X127 The default access to the web server is via the service interface X127.
Ethernet interface X127 is intended for commissioning and diagnostics,
which means that it must always be accessible.
Defaults:
• IP address: 169.254.11.22
• Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
• Connection type: HTTPS
Restrictions:
• Only local access is allowed.
• No networking or only local networking in a closed and locked electrical
cabinet is permissible.
• For remote access to the electrical cabinet, you must apply additional se‐
curity measures to prevent misuse through sabotage, data manipulation
by unqualified persons and interception of confidential data.
Access using mobile end devices:
• If you carry out commissioning or diagnostics using a mobile end device
such as a smartphone or tablet, you may temporarily connect the service
interface X127 to an external WLAN access point.
• The SINAMICS Smart Adapter establishes a point-to-point connection to
the mobile end device via WLAN.
PROFINET interface The IP addresses of the service interface X127 and the PROFINET interface
X150 X150 must not be in the same subnet.
7.3.4 Making the operating instructions available for the web server information
system
Overview
For selected topics, you can use the information system of the web server to access the
operating instructions directly. To do this, you must make the operating instructions available on
a prepared memory card (SD card).
Requirement
• You have an empty SD card with a maximum storage capacity of 32 GB (e.g.
6SL5970-0AA00-0AA0) onto which you can load the operating instructions.
• You have connected a suitable SD card reader to your PC.
7.3 Fundamentals
Procedure
To make the operating instructions available for the web server information system, proceed as
follows:
1. Load the web server information system to your PC.
The operating instructions for the web server information system are available to download
at this address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109815715).
The operating instructions are provided as a zipped file
"S210_S-1FK2_S-1FT2_op_instr_0223_Webserver.zip" under "Annex to this entry".
2. Unzip the file that you downloaded "S210_S-1FK2_S-1FT2_op_instr_0223_Webserver.zip".
The annex contains all available language versions as an individually zipped language-
dependent file.
3. Unzip the relevant language-dependent ZIP file to a folder with the name of the ZIP file (e.g.
for the English version "S210_S-1FK2_S-1FT2_op_instr_0223_en-EN").
The unzipped files are contained in this folder.
4. Insert the SD card into your PC's SD card reader.
5. In the root directory of the memory card, create a folder called "DOC".
6. Copy the unzipped folder (e.g. in the English version
"S210_S-1FK2_S-1FT2_op_instr_0223_en-EN") to the "DOC" directory on the SD card.
Depending on the available space on the SD card, you can copy all available language
versions to the SD card. To do this, repeat the unzip/copy process for each language version.
7. Eject the SD card from the PC.
8. Remove the SD card from the reader.
9. Insert the SD card into the converter.
7.3 Fundamentals
Result
You have made the operating instructions available for the web server information system.
For selected topics, you can now access the instructions via the context-sensitive information
system.
7.3.5 Using the web server information system
Overview
In the web server, you have the support of an integrated, multi-level information system.
You decide in a context-sensitive interface how much and what kind of information is displayed.
7.3 Fundamentals
Information in the current view

Information displayed in the current view of the web server:

① Display general information about the function of the current view

Click or tap on the header or on the expand icon to show general information about the function of the current
view.
Click or tap again on the header or on the collapse icon to hide the general information about the function of
the current view.
② Display a tooltip with context-sensitive short information about a setting

Point with the mouse pointer or tap on the setting you need information about.
The setting is highlighted and the assigned info icon appears.
If you hold the mouse pointer or keep the tap pressed on the setting for longer, a tooltip with the context-
sensitive short information is displayed.
7.3 Fundamentals
③ Display detailed information in a context-sensitive help window

Point with the mouse pointer or tap on the setting you need information about.
The setting is highlighted and the assigned info icon appears.
When you move the mouse pointer to the info icon, the icon and the mouse pointer change their appearance.
If you now click or tap on the info icon, a context-sensitive help window appears with detailed information.
Figure 7-1 Information in the current view
7.3 Fundamentals
Detailed information in a context-sensitive help window

Detailed information about a setting displayed in a context-sensitive help window:
① Overview
Display general information about the meaning or function of the setting.
Click or tap on "Overview" or on the associated expand icon to show general information about the meaning
or function of the setting.
Click or tap again on "Overview" or on the associated collapse icon to hide the general information about the
meaning or function of the setting.
② Parameter
Display detailed information about the parameter defined by the setting.
Click or tap on "Parameter" or on the associated expand icon to show detailed information about the parameter.
Click or tap again on "Parameter" or on the associated collapse icon to hide the detailed information about the
parameter.
7.4 Getting Started
③ Manual
For selected settings, you can use the links under "Manual" to access the operating instructions directly.
The requirements in order to do this are set out in Chapter "Making the operating instructions available for the web server
information system (Page 195)".
Click or tap on "Manual" or on the associated expand icon to show links to the operating instructions.
Click or tap again on "Manual" or on the associated collapse icon to hide the links to the operating instructions.
④ Click or tap on a link to open the web browser and display the linked information in the operating instructions.
Figure 7-2 Information in a context-sensitive help window
7.3.6 Reloading pages
Procedure
If the web server does not respond, or if buttons are inactive or are not labeled, although the
converter is not fully utilized with internal calculations, reload the web server pages as follows:
• At the PG/PC via <F5>
• At the tablet PC or smartphone via
7.4 Getting Started
7.4.1 Calling the web server
Overview
Converter commissioning takes place with the user interface of the web server.
Requirement
• You have connected the converter to the operating unit via the service interface X127.
Procedure
To access the web server, enter the IP address of the converter, e.g. https://169.254.11.22, in the
browser.
More information
When you call the web server for the first time, you are prompted to define the basic settings.
7.4 Getting Started
If you have already made the basic settings, then the web server starts and opens the home
page. You can commission the converter, troubleshoot it, operate it, monitor it or call up
support through the support pages.
7.4.2 Settings for brand-new converters
Overview
The basis settings are required before performing first commissioning for a brand-new converter.
Requirement
• The operating unit is connected to the converter via the service interface X127 or the
PROFINET interface X150.
• The web server is accessed with the IP address (default: 169.254.11.22).
If the web server was called, then you are automatically transferred to define the settings. When
doing, this several function views are run through.
The function views contain the following settings:
• Basic settings (Page 202)
• Security settings (Page 203)
7.4.3 Basic settings
Overview
Initial basic settings are defined in the function view.
Requirement
The web server is being called for the first time.
The basic settings are as follows:
• Preferred language of the user interface
• Converter date and time; either manually or via NTP
After these entries have been made, using the "Next" button, you can continue to the
Security Wizard.
7.4 Getting Started
7.4.4 Security settings
Overview
The settings for user management and access control (UMAC) are defined using the Security
Wizard.
Requirement
NOTICE
Converter damage due to data manipulation
Inadequate protection of drive data makes it easier to gain unauthorized access to the
converter. Unauthorized data manipulation can change the converter settings. Changed
settings can stop the converter working properly or damage the converter.
• Only deploy low protection in exceptional cases and only when no outsider can access the
converter, e.g. if the converter is not yet connected to a network.
• Protect the interfaces of the converter against unauthorized access, e.g. with a locking
control cabinet.
• Create a higher level of security as soon as possible.
One of the following options can be selected:
• "Configure security settings"
We recommend this setting for comprehensive protection.
• "Continue with low security settings"
With this setting, UMAC is deactivated.
You can configure the security settings at a later time, see Chapter "Protection & Security
(Page 240)".
7.4 Getting Started
Select "Configure security settings"

Define the settings for UMAC:
• "Activate User Management & Access Control":
Activation is preset.
If UMAC is activated, it can only be deactivated by a full reset of the converter to factory
settings. This causes all security settings to be lost.
You can find more information about the full reset to factory settings in Chapter "Manual
reset to factory settings with memory card (Page 356)".
• "Administrator setup":
Specify the user name and password of the drive administrator.
The drive administrator is permanently assigned the runtime role "Drive Administrator". This
assignment cannot be changed.
• "Read access configuration":
Specify whether the user has read rights without logging in and whether the user is allowed
to acknowledge results without logging in.
The option is deactivated in the factory setting. If read access is not permitted, then the login
page is displayed when the web server is called.
Define the settings to access the web server:
• "Web server activation":
Factory settings to access the web server:
– Via service interface X127 with the HTTPS protocol
– Via PROFINET interface X150 with the HTTPS protocol
If both factory settings are deactivated, then it is not possible to access the web server.
Check the selected security settings:
• "Summary":
The summary provides an overview of the selected settings.
Finish and continue

The security settings are checked by clicking on "Finish". If there is no error, the settings are
applied.
After finishing, you can continue with one of the following options:
• Continue with quick setup
• Continue with the web server home page
7.5 Functions and menus
7.5.1 Home page
Description
The following figure shows the basic structure of the web server pages.

① Navigation bar
② Status bar
③ Main window
Access to the function views depends on the access rights of the logged-in user.
④ Action bar
Note: The action bar may also contain a save button if manual saving (factory setting) is activated in the menu "System"
> "Settings". However, if automatic saving is activated there is no save button .
Figure 7-3 Structure of the web server (example)
7.5.2 Commissioning
7.5.2.1 Complete commissioning workflow
Overview
The web server guides users step-by-step through the drive commissioning.
4UBSU꫼STUDPNNJTTJPOJOH 4UBSUOFXDPNNJTTJPOJOH
#BTJDTFUUJOHT
1FSGPSN
DPNNJTTJPOJOH /P
:FT
2VJDLTFUVQ 2VJDLTFUVQ
*GSFRVJSFE3FTFU
UPGBDUPSZTFUUJOH
-JNJUWBMVFTEF꫼OF*0
DPO꫼HVSBUJPO
'JOJTIRVJDLTFUVQ
1FSGPSN 0QUJNJ[FNPUPS
PQUJNJ[BUJPO :FT
0OF#VUUPO5VOJOH
/P
5FTU 5FTUNPUPSPQFSBUJPO
:FT NPUPSPQFSBUJPO
0QFSBUJPOXJUIDPOUSPMQBOFM
.PUPS /P
/P PQFSBUJPOBT :FT
TQFDJ꫼FE
4BGFUZ*OUFHSBUFE
4BGFUZ
'VODUJPOTSFRVJSFE :FT
4BGFUZDPNNJTTJPOJOH
/P
#BDLVQ #BDLVQ
EBUB :FT
$SFBUFCBDLVQ
/P
&OEPGDPNNJTTJPOJOH
Figure 7-4 Procedure for commissioning with web server
Commissioning involves the following steps:

• Basic settings:
If the converter has already been commissioned, then the web server jumps to the basic
settings.
The following settings are required for a brand-new converter:
– Language, date, time
– Configuring security settings
The Security Wizard can be called again at any time from the menu "System".
• Quick setup:
Menu "Commissioning" > "Quick setup"
The converter identifies the motor and encoder data via the DRIVE-CLiQ connection after the
supply voltage has been switched on.
Optionally, you can define the limit values to be respected and the I/O configuration.
• Optimize motor:
Menu "Commissioning" > "Optimization"
With the One Button Tuning (OBT) function, the mechanical drive train is measured using
short test signals.
In this way, the controller parameters are optimally adapted to the existing mechanical
system.
• Test motor operation:
Action bar > "Control panel"
The closed-loop speed control of the motor can be tested by moving the motor from the web
server control panel in jog or continuous motion.
• Safety Integrated commissioning:
Menu "Commissioning" > "Safety Integrated"
If Safety Integrated Functions are required, you must set the Safety Integrated Functions and
test using an acceptance test.
• Backup:
Menu "Backup and restore"
We recommend a backup of the drive settings.
More information
More detailed information on user management and security settings is provided in the
Configuration Manual SINAMICS Industrial Security (https://
7.5.2.2 Quick setup
Overview
The converter can generally be operated without making additional settings using quick setup.
We recommend that quick setup is performed to set the limit values and the I/O configuration
to optimally address the target application.
Requirement
• The drive system has been configured. The components are wired.
• Web server access is active.
① Menu and navigation for quick setup

② Display of the individual quick setup steps
③ Navigation
Figure 7-5 Quick setup using the web server
Only the most important properties of the converter are configured in the quick setup.
Motor and encoder are directly detected during ramp-up as a result of the DRIVE-CLiQ
connection. The data are accepted and shown in steps "Motor" and "Encoder". These data
are for information only and cannot be changed during quick setup.
The converter creates a restore point when quick setup is started. The converter saves the
changes after every commissioning step. The converter is reset to the restore point if quick
setup is canceled.
For fast navigation through the quick setup, for example to check the set configuration data,
the web server has a read-only mode.
The commissioning Wizard of the web server guides users through the following quick setup
steps.
Drive information
The step provides information about the converter, motor, encoder and motor holding brake
being used.
The following data can be changed:
• Drive name
A specific drive name can be assigned.
Motor
The data of the motor being used are displayed. It is not possible to configure another motor.
The direction of rotation of the motor can be selected:
• Right
• Left
Encoder
The data of the encoder being used are displayed.
Configuration is not possible.
Limit values
The converter limit values are shown graphically and in a tabular form.
The following data can be configured:
• Limit values by making an entry in the table
From the content perspective, table and diagram are linked with one another.
• Device supply voltage
I/O configuration
The configuration of the digital converter inputs is shown graphically and in a tabular form.
Configuration options:
• In the table, a function can be assigned to each digital input of the terminal. Specified
functions can be selected. The selection is shown in the diagram.
• DI 2, 3 is reserved for Safety Integrated.
If DI 2,3 was configured as FDI 0 via Safety Integrated, then the yellow F-DI symbol is
displayed in the table.
• The digital input 0 or 1 can be defined as the equivalent zero mark. No equivalent zero mark
is active in the default setting. The evaluation is realized via the encoder zero mark.
7.5.2.3 Testing the converter configuration
Overview
After the quick setup, the web server allows you to test the converter configuration in jog mode
or continuous motion via the control panel.
Description
To test the configuration, the control panel must be open and the speed setpoint entered.
There are 2 ways of opening the control panel:
• Button "Finish quick setup" > Dialog query with selection option "Open control panel"
• Action bar > "Control panel"
Figure 7-6 Testing the converter configuration via the control panel
More information
You can find more information in Chapter "Control panel (Page 245)".
7.5.2.4 Optimization
Overview
Once quick setup has been completed the drive settings are optimized using the One Button
Tuning (OBT) function.
With OBT, the mechanical drive train is measured using short test signals. In this way, the
controller parameters are optimally adapted to the existing mechanical system.
Requirement
To reduce the stress on the mechanical system, before OBT, the torque limit can be reduced, and
after OBT has been completed, the previous value can be set again.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by an impermissible direction of motion of the motor
One Button Tuning runs the motor in both directions. Impermissible directions of motion can
damage the machine or installation.
• If a particular direction of motion of the motor is impermissible, do not carry out One Button
Tuning.
Figure 7-7 One Button Tuning
The optimum controller settings are determined using the following settings:
• Take over control and relinquish control:
Take over master control before starting to optimize the controller.
Relinquish master control back to the converter once the controller has been optimized.
• Select dynamic response settings:
– Dynamic
100% dynamic response; speed control with fast torque precontrol
– Conservative
60% dynamic response; speed control without torque precontrol
– Standard
80% dynamic response; speed control with torque precontrol
• Machine property:
The "Activate additional dynamic response increase" option increases the proportional gain
of the optimized speed control. The dynamic response is increased. The speed controller
becomes faster.
If the dynamic factor is increased too much, the speed controller may become unstable.
• Start optimization:
– Enter the angle of rotation (rotation limit) through which the motor and the connected
machine are permitted to turn for the required measurements (e.g. 360°) without the
mechanical system being damaged. Sensible controller parameters are obtained from an
angle > 90°.
When a negative angle is entered, then the motor moves in the opposite direction.
– The table shows how the settings have been changed by OBT.
If OBT was not successful, repeat the optimization with other settings.
7.5.2.5 Safety Integrated commissioning
Overview
Commissioning the Safety Integrated Functions of the converter includes the following:
• Selecting the functions
• Parameterizing the functions as required for the application
• Control of the functions
Requirement
• The drive system has been configured. The components are wired.
• The converter and motor are completely created in the device configuration.
• Web server access is active.
Commissioning using the web server is only possible if access to the web server via interfaces
X127 and X150 was selected in the security settings.
• The appropriate license is available for Safety Integrated Functions requiring a license.
• Function rights have been assigned with the role "Drive Safety Engineer".
① Step display of the Safety Integrated commissioning Wizards

② Control type
③ Function selection
④ Navigation
Figure 7-8 Safety Integrated commissioning using the web server (example)
Changes to Safety Integrated settings are only possible in the "Safety Integrated
commissioning" mode. The drive is in the safe state as soon as the commissioning mode
is active. Safe Torque Off (STO) is active.
Commissioning of Safety Integrated must be completely run through. No settings are applied
if an interruption occurs during commissioning.
The activated user management protects against unauthorized changes to Safety Integrated
settings. Login takes place when the web server starts. After this, only authorized users have
the necessary rights to change Safety Integrated settings. The "Safety Integrated application"
right is a component of the "Drive Safety Engineer" role.
When starting Safety Integrated commissioning, the converter creates a restore point. The
converter saves the changes after every commissioning step. The converter is reset to the
restore point if quick setup is canceled.
For fast navigation through Safety Integrated commissioning, for example to check the
settings, the web server has a read-only mode.
Safety Integrated commissioning involves the following steps:
1. Function selection
– Selecting the Safety Integrated control type
– Monitoring cycle: Value is set to 4 ms in the factory and cannot be changed.
– Actual value acquisition cycle: Value is set to 1 ms in the factory and cannot be changed.
– Selecting the axis type
When switching over the axis type, the units are also changed.
– Selecting the available Safety Integrated Functions depending on the control type
– License symbol
The license symbol shows the Safety Integrated Functions that require a Safety Extended
license. Safety Integrated can be used in the Trial License mode for test purposes.
2. Parameter assignment
Configuration of the activated Safety Integrated Functions
– Function-dependent display of the converter parameters
The function view shows a graphic of the function. The parameters of the function are
listed in the context-sensitive table.
The parameter values can be changed. When required, additional parameters are
displayed.
– Actual value acquisition/mechanical system
The actual value acquisition/mechanical system can be viewed if Safety Integrated motion
monitoring functions were activated.
The parameter values can be changed.
3. Control
Parameterizing the control type
4. Completion
The configurations are completed and applied by clicking on "Finish":
– The subsequent parameter assignments are made
– Checksums are calculated
More information
You will find detailed information in Chapter "Safety Integrated Functions (Page 105)".
7.5.3 Operator control and monitoring
7.5.3.1 Drive status
Overview
Function view "Drive status" shows the current status of the converter.
Figure 7-9 Drive status
The drive information displayed is preset in the factory setting, and when required, can be
adapted using symbol . If user management is active, the "Edit web server configuration"
right is required in order to make changes.
Values are indicated as follows:
• Factory setting: 8 values are displayed
• It is possible to display all values completely
The drive status is displayed as follows:
• : Individual values are continuously displayed
• : Individual values and trend diagrams are continuously displayed
7.5.3.2 Inputs/outputs
Overview
The function view "Inputs/outputs" shows the status of the digital inputs offered by the
converter.
Figure 7-10 Inputs/outputs
7.5.4 Diagnostics
7.5.4.1 Messages
Overview
The function view "Messages" shows active and historical messages.
Figure 7-11 Messages
Using search and filter options, the number of alarms and faults can be restricted. The
available filter options can be combined with one another and can be reset at any time.
The message history can be optionally displayed.
Selecting messages
Search Enter a keyword

Filter by date Select a date or time interval
Message types Select the message type that should be displayed:
• All
• Faults
• Alarms
Displaying messages
Type Displaying the message type:

• Alarm
• Fault
Incoming Time that the message was received
Class Assign the message to a message class according to PROFIdrive

• The class is displayed at the integrated operator panel "SINAMICS SDI
status".
• The message number is output on all operating units, e.g. PC, SIMATIC
HMI.
Message Specification of the message number with message text
Gone Time when the message went
• Faults are given the status "Outgoing" if the following are true:
– The causes have been eliminated.
– The message has been acknowledged.
Selection for more information:
• Description of the message with cause and remedy
7.5.4.2 Diagnostics buffer
Overview
Function view "Diagnostics buffer" provides information about all system-relevant operations,
e.g. commissioning, new ramp-up, generation of a certificate.
Figure 7-12 Diagnostics buffer
Reading out the diagnostic buffer facilitates converter diagnostics and supports fault analysis.
The search can be limited by searching for keywords and using the filter function according to
date.
The diagnostic buffer can only be cleared by performing a manual reset to factory settings
with a memory card. For further information, refer to the Chapter "Manual reset to factory
settings with memory card (Page 356)".
The diagnostic buffer is kept when restoring factory settings via menu "Backup and restore".
7.5.4.3 Safety Integrated
Overview
Function view "Safety Integrated" provides information about the Safety Integrated Functions
that have been enabled.
Figure 7-13 Safety Integrated
The following content is displayed:

• "Status of Safety Integrated Functions"
The status of the enabled Safety Integrated Functions is displayed.
• "Status"
"Active" is displayed if Safety Integrated Functions are active.
• "Selected"
Under "Selected" you will see the following data about the Safety Integrated commissioning:
– "Checksum"
Displays the functional checksum of the converter to track changes (safety logbook)
– "Functions"
Displays the checksum over the checksum-checked parameters to configure the converter
– "PROFIsafe"
Displays the checksum of the PROFIsafe parameterization
– "Time stamp"
The time stamp indicates when the update was made.
• "Versions"
Displays the safety-relevant software versions of the corresponding components
7.5.4.4 Connection overview
Overview
Function view "Connection overview" provides information about the connections in the drive
system.
Figure 7-14 Connection overview
The individual components with IP address and additional details are graphically displayed in
the connection overview.
7.5.4.5 Communication
Overview
Function view "Communication" provides information about the activated fieldbus interface.
Figure 7-15 Communication
The following content is displayed:

• Connection status
• Process data of the set telegram in the send and receive directions.
The values are shown in the hexadecimal format. The display of individual values is switched
between binary, decimal and hex format by clicking on the button to the right of the value.
7.5.4.6 Status word and control word
Overview
The function view "Control/status word" provides information about the current status of the
sequence control system.
Figure 7-16 Control and status word
The control and status word is indicated by all sequence control states. This also includes
states that are not available, which prevent the motor from being switched on and switched
off. Diagnostics supports fault analysis.
7.5.5 Parameters
7.5.5.1 Parameter list
Overview
The parameter list shows all the parameters of the converter. The parameter list allows specific
parameters to be changed.
Figure 7-17 Parameter list in the extended view
The parameter list offers the following options:

• Toggling between two list views
– Show as "Simple view" and "Advanced view" with parameter numbers
• Searching parameters
– Search by parameter number or text search within parameter names
• Filtering the parameter list

– Parameter groups: Only show the parameters that are assigned to a particular function.
– Parameter types: display and/or setting parameters
• Changing parameter values directly in a parameter list
– Exception: blocked parameters
p Setting parameters Are read/write.

The setting parameter can only be parameterized in the active
commissioning mode.
Depending on the parameter, changes are possible in the quick
setup or Safety Integrated commissioning.
The setting parameter can only be parameterized when the user
has the appropriate function rights.
r Display parameters Can only be read and cannot be edited.
c Display parameters Can only be read and cannot be edited.
7.5.5.2 User-defined parameter list
Overview
A user-defined parameter list is a combination of specific parameters from the standard
parameter list of the converter. These can be used to configure frequently used user functions,
for example.
With the user-defined parameter lists, the web server provides the following functions:
• Creating up to 20 user-defined parameter lists
• Configuring list properties
– Name
– Position or sequence of the tabs
– Comment
– Delete list
• Exporting and importing user-defined parameter lists
Export:
– Export one or several user-defined parameter lists.
– The web server exports the lists exclusively as a json file.
– Export files generated by the web server can be imported into a Startdrive project.
Import:
– The list import function in the web server exclusively imports json files.
– User-defined parameter lists exported via the web server or Startdrive as a json file can be
imported into another drive of the same type via the web server.
Requirement: same drive type and same firmware version
If values are changed, the data must be saved retentively.
7.5.6 Backup and restore
7.5.6.1 Overview
Overview
With "Backup and restore" you can back up parameters and other settings and restore the
settings again if necessary.
Figure 7-18 Backup and restore
The following functions are available to back up and restore data and settings:
• Back up parameters
Back up the parameter settings to a file after commissioning.
• Restore parameters from file
When replacing a device or for series commissioning, load the backed-up parameter settings
to the converter.
• Restore factory settings
Reset all converter settings to the factory values.
• Restore Safety Integrated to factory settings
The converter only sets the settings of the Safety Integrated Functions to factory settings. All
other settings remain unchanged.
More information
If you want to restore the converter to factory settings with the memory card, see the
information in Chapter "Manual reset to factory settings with memory card (Page 356)".
7.5.6.2 Save drive data to backup file
Overview
With "Save drive data to backup file" you can back up all converter settings to one file. Run the
"Save drive data to backup file" function in the following situations:
• After commissioning
• Before "Restore factory settings"
• Before a firmware update/downgrade
Requirement
There are no active converter faults.
Procedure
1. Call the "Backup and restore" menu.
2. Click on the "Save drive data to backup file" button.
A name can be optionally assigned to the backup file. Parameters are backed up. The backup
file is saved in the download folder of your operating unit.
3. Optional: If you only wish to use the backup file at a later point in time, then place the backup
file in a protected location in the operating unit.
More information
You can load backed-up data and settings of a converter to other converters. The target
converter must satisfy the following prerequisites:
• The rated power of the target converter is the same as the backed-up rated power.
• Firmware version of the target converter is ≥ firmware version of the converter from which
the backed-up data and settings originate.
7.5.6.3 Status after backing up
Overview
The "Back up parameters" function backs up all converter settings to one file.
Description
The converter backs up the following data and settings:
• Communication interface settings
• Parameters (including safety parameters)
• Security settings
• UMAC data
• Web server settings:
– Modified settings in window "Drive status" on the home page
– User-defined parameter lists
– Support settings
– Save changes manually / automatically
• Displayed parameters (display standard parameters/all parameters):
– Standard parameters
– View all parameters
– Display brightness
The converter firmware files are not backed up.
7.5.6.4 Restore drive data from backup file
Overview
When replacing a device or for series commissioning, you load the backed-up drive data to the
converter.
Requirement
• You have a backup file on your operating unit.
• The rated power of the target converter is the same as the backed-up rated power.
• Firmware version of the target converter is ≥ firmware version of the converter from which
the backed-up drive data originate.
• Function rights required for active user management (UMAC):
– Edit device configuration or drive applications
– If Safety Integrated is contained in the backup file, the "Edit Safety Integrated application"
right is required.
Procedure
2. Click on the "Restore drive data from backup file" button.
3. Select the backup file from the file system of the operating unit.
The backup file is loaded to the converter.
7.5.6.5 Restore factory settings
Overview
The reset to factory settings with the web server deletes the user-specific parameterization of the
converter, for example the motor data.
The following data are retained when the factory settings are restored:
• Language setting
• Date and time
In the following cases it may be necessary to restore the converter to factory settings:
• If the motor is changed
• If there is uncertainty regarding the previous parameterization and/or the previous use of the
converter
Requirement
If User Management & Access Control is activated, you will need the following function rights:
• Edit device configuration or drive applications
• Edit Safety Integrated application (if Safety Integrated is contained in the parameterization)
Procedure
2. Click the "Restore factory settings" button.
3. Acknowledge the confirmation prompt.
The converter is reset and then restarted. If the "RDY" and "COM" LEDs on the converter light
up green, resetting is complete.
More information
For a full reset of the converter, proceed as described in Chapter "Manual reset to factory settings
with memory card (Page 356)".
7.5.6.6 Restore Safety Integrated to factory settings
Overview
It is not always necessary to reset all of the converter settings. A separate reset function exists
for Safety Integrated settings, which exclusively restores Safety Integrated settings to factory
settings.
Requirement
• Function rights required for active user management (UMAC):
– Edit device configuration or drive applications
– Edit Safety Integrated application
Note
Perform a parameter backup before resetting so you can restore the old settings.
Procedure
2. Click on the "Reset Safety Integrated" button.
3. Acknowledge the confirmation prompt.
4. Wait: the converter resets its Safety Integrated settings.
5. Wait: the converter restarts.
6. The converter is ready for operation and the "RDY" and "COM" LEDs are on and green.
Result
The Safety Integrated settings for the converter have been reset.
7.5.7 System
7.5.7.1 Settings
Overview
The function view "Settings" offers basic settings for the web server and the converter.
Requirement
• To edit the web server settings you will need the "Edit web server configuration" right.
• To edit the drive settings you will need the "Edit device configuration or drive applications"
right.
Figure 7-19 Settings
Web server
Under "Web server", the web server offers options for saving changes and displaying
parameters.
Interfaces
Under "Interfaces", the web server provides information about the status and the settings of
the interfaces of the converter.
Drive date and time

Under "Drive date and time", the web server provides options for setting the date format and
for obtaining the date, time and time zone of the converter.
Support settings
Under "Support settings", the web server provides the option to store additional support and
hotline data. The web server displays these data in the function view "Support".
7.5.7.2 User management
Overview
In "User management" you manage users and configure their roles and rights for accessing the
converter.
Requirement
• You activated user management (UMAC) in "Configure security settings" during first
commissioning.
• You are logged into the web server and have the necessary rights to manage users.
Figure 7-20 User management
Users
Under "Users", the web server provides a summary of the created users and offers the
following functions:
• Create new user accounts
• Change existing user accounts
• Activate or deactivate user accounts
Roles are assigned to give users read or write access to certain functions.
Roles
Under "Roles", the web server provides a summary of the existing roles and the assigned
rights.
Password policy
Under "Password policy", you specify the requirements a password must meet. You define the
password complexity and the time to password expiry (if any).
More information
More detailed information on user management and security settings is provided in the
7.5.7.3 Protection & Security
Overview
In "Protection & Security", you configure basic security settings using the Security Wizard and the
tables it contains.
Requirement
• You activated the security settings during first commissioning.
• You are logged into the web server and have the necessary rights to edit drive data.
Figure 7-21 Protection & Security
Start Security Wizard

In the Security Wizard, you configure the most important security settings for the drive. They
include User Management & Access Control and web server activation.
Ports and protocols

The web server provides an overview of the available ports and protocols and their status.
This is where you activate or deactivate the communication interfaces.
User Management & Access Control

The web server provides an overview of the settings in user management.
Certificates
The web server provides an overview of the issued certificates. Digital certificates identify the
converter as a "trusted device". The web server cannot be accessed from an operating unit
without a digital certificate. When activating user management, a certificate is automatically
created and assigned to the converter.
Use "Download certificate to operating panel" to download a certificate to the operating
panel.
More information
More detailed information on configuring secure communication is provided in the
7.5.7.4 Licenses
Overview
You must purchase licenses for supplementary functions and options.
Use the function view "Licenses" to manage the licenses for drive functions and options.
Requirement
• You are logged into the web server and have the necessary rights to edit drive data.
• The operating panel is connected online with the drive.
Figure 7-22 Licenses
The function view "Licenses" offers the following functions:

• Display the installed functions requiring licenses
• Read and copy the serial number of the SD card inserted into the converter
• Load and activate purchased licenses
Load and activate licenses

Under "Trial License mode and licenses", you upload license files created with the Web
License Manager.
In Trial License mode, you can try out functions for a specified period.
Using functions/options requiring a license

The web server provides an overview of the options that require licensing and their license
status.
Certificates of License (eCoL)

Under "Certificates of License (eCoL)", you load purchased licenses directly from a memory
card into the file system of the operating unit.
More information
• You can find additional information about creating and managing license files in Chapter
"Functions that require licensing (Page 98)".
• Additional information about the licensing process or on the Trial License mode is provided
in the TIA Portal information system. There, browse for S210 drives using the keyword phrase
"Managing supplementary functions that require a license".
7.5.7.5 Firmware update
Overview
You can perform a firmware update in the web server:
• For an upgrade, the converter settings are retained.
• For a downgrade, the converter is restored to factory settings.
Requirement
You have saved the ZIP file with the firmware to a drive, which you can access using the operating
panel.
This function view "Firmware update" displays the current version of the firmware and of the web
server.
To copy a different firmware version to the converter, load the ZIP file containing the firmware
from the file system of the operating panel.
7.5.7.6 About web server
Overview
"About web server" contains information about the web server and links to additional
information.
Under "Versions" you can see the revision levels of the web server and the loaded firmware.
Under "Third-party software" there is a link to information about any third-party software
used. The license conditions are loaded to the operating panel in the file "READ_OSS.ZIP". You
can display the HTML file included in the ZIP file using your browser.
There are more links to information about:
• Cookie policies
• Industrial Security
• Privacy policy
7.5.8 Support
Overview
The footer of the web server contains a support dialog.
The support dialog contains links to additional information for the converter.
① Display of additional support and hotline data

For more information about configuration, see Chapter "Settings (Page 237)".
Figure 7-23 Support information
7.5.9 Control panel
Overview
The control panel moves the motor using the operating unit, bypassing the higher-level
controller, for example to test the converter settings after commissioning.
Requirement
WARNING
Unexpected motor movement through incorrect operation
If the control panel is active, the safety shutdowns of the higher-level controller have no
effect. The "Stop with space bar" function is not guaranteed in all operating states. Incorrect
operation by untrained personnel may result in unexpected motor movement which can cause
death or serious injuries.
• Only use the control panel for commissioning, diagnostics and service purposes.
• Only use the control panel if you are trained and authorized accordingly.
• Install an EMERGENCY STOP for the drive which is independent of the higher-level controller.
The "Take over control" dialog deactivates the signals of the higher-level controller and switches
the source for enables and the setpoint value to the control panel.
Note
Drive responds immediately
Although all enable signals are removed before returning the master control, the setpoints and
commands still come from the original parameterized sources after the master control is
returned.
The control panel offers the following operating modes to move the motor:
• Jog mode moves the motor while the direction buttons are pressed.
• Continuous motion starts the motor when a direction button is pressed.
Commissioning (Startdrive) 8
8.1 Introduction
Description
You configure devices and commission your converter in the Startdrive commissioning tool.
Further information about the Startdrive commissioning tool can be found in the information
system of the TIA Portal.
8.2 Requirements for commissioning
Description
• TIA Portal version V18 or higher is installed on your operating unit.
• Startdrive version V18 SP1 or higher is installed on your operating unit.
You will find the download page at the following link (https://
• Firmware version V6.1 or higher is installed in the converter.
• You have all of the required licenses to use the TIA Portal without any restrictions.
• Your converter is connected with a SIMATIC S7 controller. Alternatively, a SINUMERIK control
system can be used.
Commissioning (Startdrive)
8.3 Basics
8.3 Basics
8.3.1 Communication interfaces
Description
The following interfaces are available for accessing the converter:
Interface Information
Service interface X127 The default access to the web server is via the service interface X127.
Ethernet interface X127 is intended for commissioning and diagnostics,
which means that it must always be accessible.
Defaults:
• IP address: 169.254.11.22
• Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
• Connection type: HTTPS
Restrictions:
• Only local access is allowed.
• No networking or only local networking in a closed and locked electrical
cabinet is permissible.
• For remote access to the electrical cabinet, you must apply additional se‐
curity measures to prevent misuse through sabotage, data manipulation
by unqualified persons and interception of confidential data.
Access using mobile end devices:
• If you carry out commissioning or diagnostics using a mobile end device
such as a smartphone or tablet, you may temporarily connect the service
interface X127 to an external WLAN access point.
• The SINAMICS Smart Adapter establishes a point-to-point connection to
the mobile end device via WLAN.
PROFINET interface The IP addresses of the service interface X127 and the PROFINET interface
X150 X150 must not be in the same subnet.
Secure communication
If the Startdrive project and the converter are unprotected, access is possible via both interfaces.
This enables unrestricted access from the project or a higher-level controller to the drive data.
Non-authorized users can manipulate the drive data. To avoid the risk of data manipulation,
we recommend protecting access to the project and the converter.
Detailed information about security settings is provided in the Configuration
Manual SINAMICS Industrial Security (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109810578).
8.3 Basics
8.3.2 Loading data from the drive into the project
Overview
If you change the configuration of a converter in the online mode, then the configuration
deviates from the data in the Startdrive project. To update project data, load the drive data from
the converter into the project.
Requirement
• A project with a matching drive is created and is open in Startdrive.
• The converter and SIMATIC S7 controller are in offline mode.
• For activated user management (UMAC):
The function rights for editing drive data are activated for your user account.
Details on this topic are provided in the Configuration Manual SINAMICS Industrial Security
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109810578) in Chapter "Security
settings in Startdrive".
Procedure
1. Click on icon (Upload from device) in the toolbar.
The "Upload preview" dialog opens. Startdrive checks whether all requirements for loading
have been met. In the event of any obstructions, these are displayed as messages in the
dialog.
2. Check the messages. If necessary, activate the actions in column "Action".
As soon as uploading becomes possible, the "Upload from device" button is enabled.
3. Click the "Upload from device" button.
The data are loaded from the converter into the project. The drive data are saved with the
project.
8.3.3 Loading project data into the drive
Overview
Load the data from your Startdrive project into a drive.
Requirement
• A project has been created.
• A drive has been created and completely configured in the project.
8.3 Basics
• Optional: There is an active online connection between the drive and operating unit.
Procedure
1. Select a drive in the project tree.
2. Click on icon (Load to device) in the toolbar.
– If you have already established an online connection, then the "Load preview" dialog
opens.
This dialog displays alarms and proposes actions necessary for loading.
– If you have still not established an online connection, then the "Extended loading" dialog
opens.
Using this dialog, establish an online connection to the required drive.
3. Check the messages in the "Load preview" dialog.
The "Save parameterization retentively" action is enabled by default.
4. Click "Load".
The project data are downloaded into the drive.
8.3.4 Saving changes in the project
Overview
Project data that are not saved are lost when closing the project. The entire project must be saved
in order for the settings to take effect permanently.
Requirement
Procedure
In the toolbar, click on the icon .
OR
Select the "Project > Save" or "Project > Save as" menu.
8.3 Basics
8.3.5 Retentively saving changes
Overview
Parameter assignments of your drive are always volatile and are lost when the drive is switched
off. Information is subsequently provided as to how you can retentively save online data or
offline data.
Requirement
• A drive has been created and completely configured in the project.
Retentively saving online data

You are connected online with the drive; save your configuration as follows:
1. In the function view of the active Startdrive project, click on icon (retentively save data
of the complete device).
OR
2. In the project tree of your drive device, double-click on "Online & Diagnostics".
– In the secondary navigation select menu "Functions > Backup/Restore".
– In the "Retentively save RAM data" area, click "Save".
The system checks whether a memory card is available. If an appropriate memory card is
detected, then the parameter values are retentively saved to the memory card.
Retentively saving offline data

When retentively saving data, it is important that the settings made are not only saved on your
operating unit in the Startdrive project, but also permanently saved on the drive memory card
(also known as "save retentively" or "RAM to ROM"). An online connection must be established
to the drive for this purpose.
1. Establish an online connection to your drive.
2. Load the project data into your drive.
3. Click the icon in the function view of the active Startdrive project.
The current project settings are stored retentively on the memory card of the drive.
8.3 Basics
8.3.6 Using parameter lists and user-defined lists
Overview
Users configure a drive in Startdrive as standard using specific configuration views. For the
configuration, experienced users preferably take the parameter lists or user-defined lists.
Requirement
Parameter list
The following functions are available:
• Monitoring parameter values
• Editing parameter values directly from the parameter view
Only parameters with a light grey background can be directly edited in the parameter list.
Other parameters are locked in the parameter list and cannot be edited.
• Exporting parameters as CSV
• Comparing parameter settings:
– Offline - Factory setting
– Online - Offline
– Online - Factory setting
User-defined list
You compile the selected parameters in a user-defined list. This involves an excerpt with specific
parameters, from an underlying parameter list.
User-defined lists are only created and edited in the project tree.
You use user-defined lists for the following purposes:
• Compiling the most important parameters
• Assigning parameters to parameter groups with comments for users
• Carrying out series commissioning based on saved parameter values
• Documentation of the drive with listed parameters and setting values
Opening and reading parameter lists in the web server

Parameter lists are exported in the json format. You can open lists and view parameter values if
you access the converter using the web server.
8.4 Procedures for device configuration and commissioning
Example
In the following application, you create a user-defined list with the objective of accepting
parameter values for an additional drive.
1. You create a user-defined list with parameter values for a configured drive.
2. You open the list in another drive with the same hardware configuration.
3. You compare the parameter values of the drive with the saved values.
4. You apply the required parameter values for the drive.
More information
Detailed information about handling parameter lists and user-defined lists is provided in the
TIA Portal information system.
8.4.1 Overview
Note
Only in the offline mode
The drive components can only be combined and specified in the offline mode. In the online
mode, all corresponding setting ranges are marked in the device view and in the inspector
window.
Note
User management and security
SINAMICS drives of the latest generation generally have extended protection. This usually has
the effect that, as a user, you have to log in to view or edit the drive data offline as well as online.
The most important protective measures in brief:
• Project protection can be activated for Startdrive projects in the TIA Portal (offline). If project
protection is activated, corresponding rights are required for access. Once project protection
has been activated, it cannot be deactivated.
• A "Security Wizard" usually appears when creating new drives in the project. With the help of
this wizard, you can already make the most important security settings for this drive within
the project when creating the drive. After loading the project data into the drive, the
protection settings become effective there.
• To access a protected drive online, you ALWAYS need the corresponding access rights. This
also applies if no project protection is activated for the Startdrive project.
Detailed information on this topic is provided in the Configuration Manual SINAMICS Industrial
Security (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109810578) in Chapter
"Security settings in Startdrive".
Note
Editing mode required for online commissioning
If you want to make important settings online, activation of the editing mode is mandatory.
Restore points that are required as a return point following a cancellation of the current online
parameterization are automatically created by the editing mode in the "guided quick startup"
(and in the "Parameterization" area) during configuration.
No separate editing mode is necessary in the "Rotate & optimize" area.
Note
Telegram configuration offline
In the guided quick startup, telegram settings can in principle only be made offline.
8.4.2 Simple basic parameterization (offline)
Overview
The following workflow represents the simplest form of commissioning.
Procedure
1. Create or open project with Startdrive.
2. Create device configuration in Startdrive offline.
– Insert the SINAMICS drive into the project and specify it
– Create and specify SINAMICS components
– Make detailed settings for drive and components
– Optional: Configure user management and make protection settings for the drive
3. Make basic settings offline via the guided quick startup.
4. Load project data into the target device.
5. Establish an online connection between Startdrive and the target device.
6. Optimize commissioning.
Result
The motor turns.
More information
Detailed information can be found in the information system of the TIA Portal in Chapter
"Configuring SINAMICS S210 drives".
8.4.3 Simple basic parameterization (online)
Overview
The basic parameterization can also be carried out in online mode as an alternative to offline
mode.
Procedure
– Insert and specify the SINAMICS drive in the project.
– Create and specify SINAMICS components.
– Make detailed settings for the drive and components.
– Optional: Configure user management and make protection settings for the drive.
3. Load project data to the target device.

5. Make basic settings online via the guided quick startup in the editing mode.
– Make basic settings in the quick startup steps.
– Optimize commissioning.
Result
The motor turns.
More information
8.4.4 Basic parameterization together with a SIMATIC controller
Overview
SINAMICS drives are frequently operated with SIMATIC or SINUMERIK controls. To speed up
commissioning the individual components, the drive and control can be commissioned together
in a Startdrive project.
Procedure
– Insert and specify the SINAMICS drive in the project.
– Create and specify SINAMICS components and make detailed settings.
– Insert and specify the SIMATIC controller in the project.
– Network the SIMATIC controller and drive.
– Optional: Configure user management and protection settings for the drive and control
system.
– Insert a technology object into the SIMATIC controller.
– Interconnect the technology object with the drive.
3. Load project data to the target devices.
5. Make basic settings online via the guided quick startup in the editing mode.
– Make basic settings in the quick startup steps.
– Optimize commissioning.
8.5 Combining and configuring devices in the project
Result
The motor turns.
More information
8.5.1 Converter
8.5.1.1 Inserting a converter into the project
Overview
You either add a new converter to the project view or to the portal view. For the latest generation
of SINAMICS converters, you can define the security settings for access to the drive data at the
time of setup.
Note
Firmware versions
The description in these operating instructions refers exclusively to S210 drives with firmware
version V6.1 or higher, which are configured with a Startdrive version V18 SP1 or higher.
① "Device name" input field (default: drive unit_x)

② "Drives" button
③ Enable/disable the "Open device view" option
④ Firmware version drop-down list
Requirement
• A new project has been created.
OR
An existing project is open.
Procedure
1. Double-click "Add new device" in the project tree.
The corresponding dialog opens.
2. Click the "Drives" button ② to display the available S210 converters.
3. Expand the "SINAMICS S210" entry in the displayed list.
A list of all available SINAMICS S210 converters is displayed.
4. Expand the entry (e.g. 200‑240 V 1AC, 0.1 kW) for the relevant S210 converter.
The selected S210 converter is displayed with the corresponding article number.
5. Click on the desired SINAMICS S210 converter.
When a SINAMICS S210 converter is created, the latest firmware version ④ is always
suggested.
6. If the firmware version on the converter memory card deviates from the displayed firmware
version, then change the firmware version via the drop-down list "Version" ④.
It will not be possible to go online later if the firmware versions do not match.
OR
Install the corresponding firmware version on your converter.
7. Assign a different device name in the input field ① if required.
8. Click "OK".
If the "Open device view" option ③ is activated, the converter is automatically created and
displayed in the device view.
Result
The inserted converter is displayed in the device view and can be configured.
8.5.1.2 Optional: Replacing a converter
Overview
In the device configuration and the project tree of an S210 drive, at any time, you can replace the
current device by a device with another power rating. When replacing the drive, previous
configurations of the motor and/or the encoder are kept if both devices are compatible with one
another.
Requirement
• An S210 Control Unit has been inserted in the device configuration.
Replacing a device via the project tree

1. In the project tree, select the drive to be replaced. Open context menu "Change device".
Dialog "Change device - S210" opens:
Figure 8-1 Changing the device using the project tree
The data of the current drive are displayed on the top left. At the top right, the replacement
devices that are applicable are displayed in a hardware catalog.
2. In the hardware catalog of dialog "Change device", select the replacement device required.
Now, only the most important data of the new device are displayed at the center of the dialog
in the field "New device". You can compare these data with the data of the current device (left-
hand side).
If both drives are not fully compatible, then the corresponding information is displayed in the
"Compatibility information" field. This can mean that you must possibly assign another motor
if you still go ahead and accept the required replacement device.
3. Click on "OK" to accept the new drive.
Replacing a device using the hardware catalog

1. In the hardware catalog, select the new S210 drive. In the device view, drag the drive to the
placeholder for the current drive.
The "Change device" dialog opens:
Figure 8-2 Changing the device using the hardware catalog
In the dialog, the most important data of the existing drive and the new drive are compared.
If both drives are not fully compatible, then the corresponding information is displayed in the
"Compatibility information" field. This can mean that you must possibly assign another motor
if you still go ahead and accept the required replacement device.
2. Click on "OK" to accept the new drive.
Result
The current drive is replaced by the required replacement device.
If the two drives are not completely compatible with one another, then in the device
navigation, the placeholder for the motor is displayed unspecified. You must reassign an
appropriate motor power.
8.5.1.3 Making detailed converter settings
Overview
You can configure the following details for the SINAMICS S210 drive:
Group Settings
General • Product information
Name data
• Catalog information
Brief description, description of the components included, firmware version used
• Identification & Maintenance
Information and data to identify and localize a drive within a plant or system.
PROFINET interface [X150] • General
• Ethernet addresses
Subnet, IP address, subnet mask, PROFINET names
• Telegram configuration
– Telegrams of the closed-loop drive control: Send, receive, Safety Integrated
Details are contained in Chapter "Configuring telegrams (Page 307)"
• Advanced options
– Interface options
– Media redundancy
– Clock cycle synchronization for local modules (isochronous mode)
– Real time settings
– Port [X150 P1] and port [X150 P2]
Module parameters • Activation of channel diagnostics
Protection & Security • Wizard for security settings
• User Management & Access Control
• Ports and protocols
• Encryption of drive data
Note: Information about these protection settings is provided in the Configuration Manual
"SINAMICS Industrial Security" or in the information system of the TIA Portal.
Ethernet commissioning in‐ • General
terface [X127] • Ethernet addresses:
– Subnet, IP address, subnet mask
Group Settings
Time synchronization/Time • Option "Synchronize with NTP server"
If the drive is connected to a controller in the device configuration, the option "Use PLC as
NTP server" is activated automatically.
If the drive is connected to a PLC, the IP address of the PLC is displayed. In this case, the IP
address and the time zone of the NTP server can be changed.
• Option "No synchronization"
In this case, NTP synchronization is not managed in the project. You can configure this
synchronization separately for the drive in online mode with the Online & Diagnostics
function "Set time".
Hardware settings • Output voltage
Web server • Enabling access to the PROFINET interface [X150] and/or the service interface [X127] via
HTTP or HTTPS.
Requirement
OR
• A SINAMICS S210 drive has been created in the project.
Procedure
1. Select the S210 drive in the device view and open the inspector window.
2. In the secondary navigation of the inspector window, select the desired detail menu (see list
in the summary).
3. Make the required detail settings in the white fields. Default settings are usually available in
most detail menus.
The gray fields are corrected automatically in accordance with their setting. Fields with a gray
background cannot be edited directly.
Result
You have made the detailed settings for the drive in your device configuration.
8.5.1.4 Specifying a motor
Overview
The drive that has just been inserted in the project has a placeholder for the required motor
(standard motor type: "1FK2"). You must specify this placeholder in the configuration.
Note
Different motor types
If your converter has a motor, type "1FT2" or "1FS2", before specifying the motor, the motor
placeholder must first be exchanged. Proceed as described in the following chapter: "Optional:
Replacing the motor (Page 265)".
Requirement
• An S210 drive is inserted in the device configuration.
The function rights for editing drive data and configuring in the inspector window are
activated for your user account.
Procedure
1. Double-click on the white motor placeholder (MOT) in the drive. The inspector window is
displayed.
2. If required, select the "Motor - Selection 1Fxx" entry in the secondary navigation in the
inspector window.
3. In the list, select the motor power rating and an associated encoder based on the article
number. Then specify whether the motor should be equipped with a holding brake - or not.
A DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is automatically assigned to all motors in the list.
Result
The motor placeholder is assigned the data of the selected motor. The white area turns gray.
The motor has been added. The assigned encoder and the encoder evaluation are
automatically also added and specified.
You can then carry out the basic parameterization, or alternatively, you can carry out the
guided quick startup.
See also
Carry out the basic parameterization (Page 290)
Carrying out guided quick startup (Page 277)
8.5.1.5 Optional: Replacing the motor
Overview
When creating an S210 drive in the device configuration, a motor placeholder is always used for
motor type "1FK2". If you want to use another motor type, e.g. "1FS2", from the motor list, you
can replace the motor placeholder before specifying.
Requirement
• The drive is offline.
• An S210 drive is inserted in the device configuration.
The function rights for editing drive data and configuring in the inspector window are
Replacing a motor using the hardware catalog

1. In the hardware catalog, select the required motor type. Drag the corresponding placeholder
in the device view onto the placeholder for the currently used motor type.
Dialog "Change device - XYZ motor" opens:
Figure 8-3 Replacing the motor placeholder using hardware selection
In the dialog, the most important data of the used motor type and the new motor type are
compared.
If the two types of motors are not fully compatible, the corresponding information is
displayed in the "Compatibility information" field.
2. To accept the new motor type, click "OK".
3. Click on the unspecified motor in the device view.
4. If required, select the "Motor - Selection" entry in the secondary navigation in the inspector
window.
5. In the list, select your motor based on the article number.
If you have selected a motor with encoder, the encoder and the encoder evaluation are also
added automatically.
Replacing a motor using the context menu

1. In the device configuration, select the motor placeholder of the drive. Open context menu
"Change device".
Dialog "Change device - XYZ motor" opens:
Figure 8-4 Manually changing the motor placeholder
The data of the current motor type are displayed at the top left. The motor types that are
applicable are displayed in a hardware catalog at the top right.
2. In the hardware catalog, select the motor placeholder of the required motor type.
The most important data of the new motor type are displayed at the center of the dialog in
the field "New device". You can compare these data with the data of the current motor type
(left-hand side).
If both motor types are not fully compatible, then the corresponding information is displayed
in the "Compatibility information" field.
3. Click on "OK" to accept the motor type.
4. Click on the unspecified motor in the device view.
5. If required, select the "Motor - Selection" entry in the secondary navigation in the inspector
window.
6. In the list, select your motor based on the article number.
If you have selected a motor with encoder, the encoder and the encoder evaluation are also
added automatically.
Result
The motor has been added. If you had already inserted and specified an encoder before replacing
the motor, you must do this again at this point. When replacing the motor, the encoder is deleted
from the device configuration, since the encoder settings always refer to the motor used.
8.5.2 Control and technology object
8.5.2.1 Inserting a SIMATIC S7 controller into the project
Overview
If, in addition to the SINAMICS drive, you also wish to use a SIMATIC S7 controller in the device
configuration, then create an appropriate PLC in your project.
Note
Other control systems
As an alternative to a SIMATIC S7 controller, a SINUMERIK ONE or a SINUMERIK MC can be used.
The procedure remains the same.
Requirement
OR
The function rights for editing drive and control system data are activated for your user
account.
Procedure
1. Double-click "Add new device" in the project tree.
① "Device name" input field (default: PLC_xx)

② "Controller" button
③ Enable/disable the "Open device view" option
④ Firmware version drop-down list
2. Click the "Controllers" button ② to show the available controllers.

3. Expand the desired controller type (e.g. SIMATIC S7-1500) and select the desired CPU (e.g.
CPU 1511TF‑1 PN) in the list.
When the CPU is expanded, the component is displayed with its article number.
The current firmware version ④ is always suggested when creating a SIMATIC S7 controller.
4. If the firmware version on the memory card of your SIMATIC S7 controller deviates from the
displayed firmware version, then change the firmware version via the drop-down list
"Version" ④.
It will not be possible to go online later if the firmware versions do not match.
5. Assign a different device name in the input field ① if required.

6. Click "OK".
If the "Open device view" option ③ is activated, the SIMATIC S7 controller is automatically
created in the project and then displayed in the device view.
Result
The inserted SIMATIC S7 controller is displayed in the device view and can be configured.
8.5.2.2 Networking the SIMATIC S7 controller and converter
Overview
After inserting a SIMATIC S7 controller and a converter into the project, network the components
in the network and topology view.
Requirement
• A project is open.
• The project includes at least one drive and one control system.
account.
Procedure
1. Open the network view by double-clicking on "Devices & networks" in the project tree.
2. Draw a connection between the PROFINET interface of the controller and the PROFINET
interface X150 of the converter.
The PROFINET connection is established, and the converter is assigned to the controller.

3. Click on the PROFINET interface_1 [X1].
4. Open menu "Advanced options".

The menu item is in the secondary navigation, in tab "General".
5. Open menu "Realtime settings".
6. Open menu "Synchronization" with a double-click.
7. Select the "Sync master" setting ③ from the "Synchronization role" drop-down list.
8. Switch to the topology view.
9. Draw a connection between Port_1 [X1.P1] of the controller and Port_1 [X150.P1] of the
converter.

Result
The SIMATIC S7 controller and the SINAMICS S210 converter are networked with one another in
the network and topology view.
8.5.2.3 Inserting a technology object into the SIMATIC S7 controller
Overview
Through the technology object, Motion Control functions such as positioning and synchronous
axes are available to you. For this reason, insert a new technology object (TO) in the SIMATIC S7
controller. In the "Configuration" function view, you can directly assign the inserted SINAMICS
drive and go to the drive configuration.
Positioning is the most frequent application for SINAMICS drives. To be able to perform
positioning tasks in the SIMATIC S7 controller, you need to insert the Motion Control
function "TO_PositioningAxis". Inserting a TO is described below based on the example of
the Motion Control function "TO_PositioningAxis".
Requirement
• A SINAMICS drive is created and specified.
• A control system (e.g. SIMATIC S7-1500) is created and networked with the drive.
account.
Procedure
1. In the project tree, open the menu for the SIMATIC S7 controller.
2. Open menu "Technology objects".
3. Open menu "Add new object" with a double-click.

① "Object name" input field

② "Motion Control" button
③ Enable/disable "Add new and open" option
4. Click on "Motion Control" ②.
5. Select object "TO_PositioningAxis".
6. If required, assign another name for the object in input field ①.
7. Click "OK".
Result
The "TO_PositioningAxis" technology object has been inserted and can be configured.
8.5.2.4 Interconnecting the technology object and drive
Overview
The inserted technology object "TO_PositioningAxis", must be interconnected with the
SINAMICS drive.
Requirement
• A SINAMICS drive is created and specified.
• A control system (e.g. SIMATIC S7-1500) is created and networked with the drive.
account.
Procedure
1. In the project tree, double-click the "Configuration" entry under the created technology
object.
2. In the secondary navigation, select menu "Hardware interface" ①.
The corresponding function view opens.
3. Open the selection list in the "Drive" selection box ②.

4. Expand the "PROFINET IO system (100)" entry ③.
5. Click on the displayed converter (in this case: "Drive unit_1").
Telegram 105 is automatically preset.
8.6 Carrying out guided quick startup
6. Click on the checkmark icon to confirm the selection.

The "Device configuration" setting option is enabled. In addition, the "Drive configuration"
setting option is displayed and enabled.
7. To get to the basic parameter assignment of the converter, click the green arrow icon .
8.6.1 Overview
Overview
Using the "guided quick startup", you perform the basic settings for the drive in Startdrive that
are used to avoid the following detailed settings as far as possible. All drive settings are pre-
assigned according to the required application use via these basic settings.
Requirement
• The drive has been completely created and specified in the device configuration.
Without a complete specification, the guided quick startup cannot be used and a message
appears.
• If a control is also used, it must be connected to the drive in the topology view and in the
network view. The connection between the devices must also be configured.
• Optional: The operating unit is connected to the drive via LAN (physically online).
The function rights for configuring in the quick startup are activated for your user role.
Quick startup areas

You can define the following basic settings in the steps with the same name:
• Connection to PLC
Here you define whether you want to configure the drive in the project together with a
control and which of the two components then has master control.
• Limits
Here, you define the minimum and maximum values of the motor used: Current, speed,
running times.
• I/O configuration
This is where you configure the function of individual inputs and outputs of the converter.
• Telegrams
Telegrams are proposed here based on previous presettings. You can define different
telegrams and/or make detailed settings. Telegram settings can only be made offline.
• Rotate & Optimize
Here, you optimize the motor in the online mode. The control panel or One Button Tuning
(OBT) is available for this purpose.
• Overview
Here you will find a compilation of all settings made after completing the configuration in the
– Offline mode: When required, you can load these settings directly to the drive.
– Online mode: When required, you can load these settings directly to the Startdrive project.
More information
Detailed information on the topic of "Guided quick startup" can be found in the information
system of the TIA Portal.
8.6.2 User interface
Overview
The "Guided quick startup" is a commissioning wizard that you can use to set the most important
basic settings of the S210 drive centrally.
Structure

① Icon: Saves data retentively (in the online mode)

② Icon: Restores the factory settings (in online mode)
③ Buttons: Start or exit the editing mode (in the online mode)
④ Buttons: Jump to the next or previous step.
⑤ Detailed setting of active quick startup step.
⑥ Active quick startup step: Button is brightened
⑦ Inactive quick startup step: One of several possible steps
⑧ Quick startup buttons:
• Back/Next: are always displayed.
• Cancel/finish: only displayed in online mode.
Figure 8-5 Example: Guided quick startup in offline mode
Status display after changes

Changes to individual settings can also affect settings in the guided quick startup. Status
symbols indicate the change state of the particular step:
Icon Meaning
The system defaults in this step are valid.
The settings made in this step are valid.
The settings were made directly in this step, or are the consequences of settings in
another step.
The program changed the settings in this step. Possible causes are:
• Subsequent changes were made in other steps, which are not automatically valid.
• The device configuration was subsequently changed. The changes influence the
original settings.
Check the settings of this step.
Status indicator in the quick startup steps

Settings of individual steps can also impact settings in previous steps. In this case, an appropriate
note with the following icon appears for the active quick startup step. Check and, if necessary,
correct the corresponding settings.
Further identifications:
The icon designates information or a context-sensitive note for users.
The icon identifies an area of the step where an entry is urgently required.
8.6.3 Editing mode (only online)
Overview
If you want to work with the guided quick startup in online mode, you need restore points in case
commissioning is aborted. Restore points are stored retentively on the memory card of the
converter.
Restore points are automatically created when activating or exiting the editing mode and
also when switching from one step into the next step of the quick startup.
Note
Behavior when the online connection is terminated
If the connection to the drive is re-established after the online connection has been terminated,
the program reverts to the stored data of the last restore point.
Requirement
• If a control is also used, it must be connected to the drive in the topology view and in the
network view. The connection between the devices must also be configured.
• There is an active online connection between the drive and the operating unit.
• No other access from another operating unit to the selected drive is active.
Activating/exiting the editing mode

Settings in the guided quick startup can be made online only in an "editing mode".
Display Status Description

The editing mode is not yet activa‐ Proceed as follows to activate editing mode:
ted. • In the toolbar of the step, click on the button .
OR
• Click in the step below the button .
You can configure the settings.
The editing mode is active. To exit the editing mode, proceed as follows:
• In the toolbar of the step, click on the button .
OR
• Click in the step below the button .
Editing has been finished. A new restore point is assigned automati‐
cally. The current configuration is saved retentively.
Note
Message in case of multiple access
The editing mode can only be activated if the drive is not simultaneously accessed by another PC
via Startdrive or the web server.
If another access is active, activation of the editing mode will be denied. An appropriate message
is displayed.
Note
Message when editing factory settings in the online mode
A message is displayed if a drive still has the factory settings, and the editing mode of the guided
quick startup is started. This states that the motor data are based on the rated power of a
standard motor.
Therefore, check the motor data online in dialog "Show motor data". When required, correct the
motor data and close the dialog.
Completing online commissioning

1. To complete online commissioning in the guided quick startup, click on
button .
All settings made in the quick startup are then saved retentively. You are provided with an
overview of all of the settings made in the last "Overview" step.
Canceling online commissioning

1. If you want to cancel online commissioning via the guided quick startup, click on the "Cancel"
button.
A confirmation prompt appears.
2. If you really want to cancel, click on "OK".
All settings made in the quick startup are then discarded. Then the previous settings are
restored via the last restore point.
8.6.4 Connection to PLC
Overview
In the quick startup step "Connection to the PLC", you define whether you wish to commission
and/or operate the drive together with a control system, and whether you also wish to use Safety
Startdrive then makes default settings to speed up commissioning.
Requirement
• Optionally, a controller (PLC) also can be created in the device configuration and networked
with the drive.
Procedure
1. Specify whether the drive is connected to a controller (PLC). Click on the white part of the
switch ( ).
Note
This setting is automatically set to "Yes" and locked against change if a PROFIsafe telegram
has been activated at another point in the program for the active drive:
• Quick startup step "Telegrams"
• "Telegram configuration" inspector window menu
The lock at this point can only be removed if the telegram setting at the setting location is
undone.
The activated area of the switch is marked blue ( ).
2. If you wish to use Safety Integrated Functions with PROFIsafe, also activate option "Safety
Integrated Functions via PROFIsafe".
This option automatically activates PROFIsafe telegram 901 in the telegram configuring.
3. Click on "Next" to display the next quick startup step.
Result
Startdrive defines the default settings of the setup based on your specifications.
8.6.5 Limits
Overview
You define the basic properties of the closed-loop drive control using the "Limits" quick startup
step.
Designation Number Description

Upper speed limit p1083 Maximum speed for the positive direction.
The set value must be less than or equal to the maximum speed
(p1082).
Lower speed limit p1086 Maximum speed for the negative direction. The set value must be
less than or equal to the maximum speed (p1082).
Torque limit up‐ p1520 Defines the upper torque limit or torque limit when motoring.
per
Torque limit low‐ p1521 Defines the lower torque limit or the torque limit when generating
er
Quick stop p1135 The OFF3 ramp-down time is effective from the maximum speed
Ramp-down time down to the motor standstill.
(OFF3)
The limits can be defined online as well as offline.
Note
Displaying the actual motor data
Using button "Display motor data", you can open a dialog window with the same name that
displays the actual motor data of your drive.
Requirement
• The motor used in the device configuration of the drive has been completely specified and
configured.
Procedure
1. When required, adapt the specified default values (see the table above).
8.6.6 I/O configuration
Overview
In quick startup step "I/O configuration", make the basic settings for the digital inputs of the drive:
• Digital inputs DI 2 and DI 3
• 2 fast digital inputs (DI 0 and DI 1) as measuring probes for evaluation in the control
• Digital input DI 4 for monitoring the temperature of an optional external braking resistor
The function of the digital inputs DI 0 (≙ activate measuring probe 1) and DI 1 (≙ activate
measuring probe 2) is already pre-configured and activated.
Requirement
configured.
• You do not want to manage the digital inputs via a technology object of the control system.
Procedure
If you are not using any measuring probes, then you can deactivate them manually using the
corresponding drop-down lists. However, measuring probes are generally available. The default
setting is correct in these cases.
1. Optional: For DI 0 or DI 1, deactivate the measuring probe.
2. In the drop-down list "Activate equivalent zero mark", select whether you wish to use an
external zero mark and whether this external zero mark should apply for DI 0 or DI 1.
3. In the drop-down list on the right for DI4, select whether the temperature monitoring of the
external braking resistor should be activated or not. Temperature monitoring is deactivated
as default setting.
4. Click on the button to the right of "F-DI" if you wish to configure the failsafe digital input.
The Safety Function view "Control" then opens. For additional settings, refer to Chapter
"Safety Integrated control (Page 131)".
8.6.7 Telegrams (only offline)
Overview
The telegrams of the drive were preconfigured by the specifications previously defined in the
In quick startup step "Telegrams", you can optimize these default settings if this is necessary
for your drive.
Requirement
configured.
• Optionally, a controller (PLC) also can be created in the device configuration and networked
with the drive.
• There is no active online connection between the drive and operating unit.
Telegrams can only be configured offline.
Procedure
The default telegrams are displayed in the "Telegrams" quick startup area.
1. Select the desired standard telegram from the "Telegram" drop-down list.
2. If you have not yet activated a PROFIsafe telegram in the quick startup area "Connection to
PLC", then you can activate a PROFIsafe telegram here. For this purpose, activate the option
"Use Safety Integrated Functions via PROFIsafe".
This option automatically activates PROFIsafe telegram 901 in the telegram configuring.
3. If, instead of the suggested PROFIsafe telegram 901, you wish to use PROFIsafe telegram 30,
then select the telegram in the "PROFIsafe Telegram" drop-down list.
4. Correct the preset reference speed (p2000) in the field with the same name.
5. Click on icon "Extended settings" if you wish to optimize the settings of the telegrams
used in the telegram configuration.
The properties of the PROFINET interface are displayed in the inspector window. Make the
required settings under "Telegram settings (Page 307)".
6. Switch back to the quick startup step "Telegrams".
Result
The telegrams for communication are configured.
8.6.8 Rotating & optimizing
Overview
Optimize the converter online in quick startup step "Rotate & Optimize". To do this, use either the
control panel or One Button Tuning (OBT).
Offline, no settings can be made. After an optimization, you can view the corresponding data
offline.
Note
Alternatively: Operate the drive from the control panel
If you wish to traverse the drive, click on the "Use control panel" button. Instead of One Button
Tuning, the control panel is now displayed in the quick startup step. Proceed as described in the
following chapter: "Traversing the drive from the control panel with speed setpoint (Page 311)".
Requirement
configured.
• Direct optimization required:
– There is an active online connection between the drive and the operating unit.
– The editing mode (Page 280) is activated.
The function rights for configuring in the quick startup and using the control panel are
Procedure
You can carry out the optimization settings both offline as well as online. Proceed as follows:
1. Choose the dynamic response setting for the OBT based on the mechanical system of your
machine.
The OBT optimizes the drive based on the selected dynamic response setting.
– Conservative
Slow closed-loop speed control – low mechanical load.
– Standard
Best compromise between fast closed-loop speed control and low mechanical load.
– Dynamic
Fast speed control – high mechanical load.
2. In the "Distance limit" field, enter the angle through which the motor and the connected
machine are permitted to turn for the required measurements (e.g. 360°) without the
mechanical system being damaged.
The angle should be at least 60° in order to determine useful controller parameters. Longer
traversing distances result in better optimization results.
3. If you want to perform extended settings, click on the "Extended settings" button.
The "Machine property" dialog opens. You obtain information about the conditions under
which you can increase the speed control dynamic performance. If you wish to increase the
dynamic response, activate option "Set the current setpoint filter with loop compensation".
4. Establish an online connection to the drive if up until now you had worked in the offline mode.
– Then activate master control.
– Start the OBT.
– Check the optimization results.
– Deactivate the master control.
The individual steps are described in detail in Chapter "Perform One Button Tuning
(Page 312)".
Result
The result of the optimization is displayed in the "Status" area. If optimization was successful, the
appropriate LED lights up green. The "Optimization result" list compares the settings changed by
the optimization with the earlier settings prior to optimization.
If optimization was not successful, repeat the optimization, possibly with modified data.
8.6.9 Overview (offline)
Overview
After completing the commissioning steps in the guided quick startup, here, you will find a
compilation of all settings that were made offline.
If necessary, you can load the settings made offline from the overview into the device.
Requirement
The function rights for configuring in the quick startup are activated for your user account.
Optional: Downloading project data to the device

1. In function view "Overview", click on "Download".
To transfer the protected project data, you must log into the device with your user data.
2. Proceed as described in Chapter "Loading project data into the drive (Page 249)".
8.7 Configuring the converter
8.6.10 (Online) overview
Overview
After completing the commissioning steps in the guided quick startup, here, you will find a
compilation of all settings that were made online. You can sort and export the corresponding
information or also compare it with the factory settings.
Requirement
• The online configuration was completed.
The function rights for configuring in the quick startup are activated for your user account.
Optional: Uploading project data from the device

1. After the online commissioning has been completed, if you want to transfer the current
project data into the TIA project of your operating unit, click on "Finish".
Icon (Upload from device) is subsequently displayed in function view "Overview".
2. Click on icon (Upload from device).
3. Proceed as described in the following chapter: "Loading data from the drive into the project
(Page 249)".
8.7.1 Fundamentals
Overview
After carrying out the basic configuration of devices in the project, make the extended settings
for commissioning.
The following areas are provided in display area "Parameterization":

• Basic parameter assignment
Here you can view the preassigned basic parameters of the converter, and if necessary you
can change individual values. If the motor brake is available, then you can also set that this
brake is forced open.
• Inputs/outputs
Here you can configure the digital inputs of the converter.
• Safety Integrated
Here, you can activate and configure the available safety functions.
Note
Guided quick startup
You can also easily configure the settings of the basic parameterization and the digital inputs
using the guided quick startup.
Details are contained in Chapter "Carrying out guided quick startup (Page 277)".
Note
Telegram configuration
You configure the telegrams used in the drive configuration in the inspector window in the
telegram configuration. The most important settings are listed in Chapter "Configuring
telegrams (Page 307)".
8.7.2 Carry out the basic parameterization
Overview
You can parameterize the most important operating parameters in the basic setting.
These include:
• Device supply voltage
• Direction of rotation
• Speed limit
• Torque limit
• Ramp-down times
After an OFF1 command, and for a quick stop OFF3.
• Forced opening of the brake
Only if the motor being used is equipped with a holding brake.
Requirement
• The drive has been completely created and completely specified in the device configuration.
The function rights required to read the drive data are activated for your user account.
Procedure
1. Change the default settings of this function view.
2. Optionally, if the motor being used is equipped with a "Standard holding brake", and you wish
to permanently open this brake:
Click on button "Force open brake".
3. Save the project to apply the settings.
8.7.3 Configuring digital inputs via technology object
Pre-assignment of the digital inputs DI 0, DI 1 and DI 4

The function of the digital inputs DI 0 (≙ activate measuring probe 1) and DI 1 (≙ activate
measuring probe 2) is already pre-configured and activated.
Requirement
• The drive has been completely created and completely specified in the device configuration.
The function rights required to edit the drive data are activated for your user role.
Procedure
If you are not using any measuring probes, then you can deactivate them manually using the
corresponding drop-down lists. However, measuring probes are generally available. The default
setting is correct in these cases.
1. In the drop-down list "Activate equivalent zero mark", select whether you wish to use an
external zero mark and whether this external zero mark should apply for DI 0 or DI 1.
2. In drop-down list "Activate overtemperature monitoring for external braking resistor", select
whether the temperature monitoring of the external braking resistor should be activated or
not.
3. Click on the button to the right of "F-DI" if you wish to configure the failsafe digital input.
The safety interconnection screen form "Control" then opens. For additional settings, refer to
Chapter "Safety Integrated control (Page 131)".
4. Then save the project to apply the settings.
8.7.3.1 Configuring a measuring probe using the technology object
Requirement
• The project includes a control system, and is connected to the converter.
• A technology object "PositioningAxis_1" is created for the control system and is active.
Procedure
If you want to configure the measuring probes for the digital inputs of the drive using technology
objects, proceed as follows:
1. In the project tree, expand the follow entries in the order specified below:
– Technology objects
– PositioningAxis_1
– Measuring probes
The "Add new measuring probe" entry is displayed.
2. Double-click the "Add new measuring probe" entry ①.
A new measuring probe is created and additional functions are displayed.

3. Double-click the "Configuration" entry ②.

The corresponding function view opens in the device view.
4. Click the "Hardware interface" option ③ in the secondary navigation.
The corresponding function view is displayed.
5. Select the measuring probe type "Measuring using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external
encoder)" ④.
A measuring probe of the type "Measuring using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external
encoder)" is created.
You can configure a maximum of 2 measuring probes to an actual value or an encoder. For
the measurement, only one measuring probe can be active.
6. To correct the measuring time point, set a correction time.
Result
A measuring probe of the type "Measuring using PROFIdrive telegram (drive or external
encoder)" is created and can be used.
8.7.4 Safety Integrated
8.7.4.1 Fundamentals for Safety Integrated commissioning
Overview
Commissioning the Safety Integrated Functions of the converter includes the following
configurations:
• Function selection
• Parameterizing the functions as required for the application
• Control of the functions
Requirement
The converter is completely created in the device configuration.
You have the function rights necessary for changing Safety Integrated settings.

① Editing mode
② Secondary navigation
③ Function view / Parameter view
④ Function selection
⑤ Axis type
⑥ Function selection
Figure 8-6 Overview of Safety Integrated commissioning (example)
Changes to Safety Integrated settings are only possible in the Safety Integrated editing mode.
The activated user management protects against unauthorized changes to Safety Integrated
settings. When starting the editing mode, Startdrive checks whether the security rights
required are available.
Commissioning steps
• Function selection:
– Selecting the Safety Integrated control type
– Selecting the axis type
When switching over the axis type, the units are changed.
– Selecting the available Safety Integrated Functions depending on the control type
The stop responses (STO and SS1) shown in the function selection must always be
parameterized. The reason is that the stop responses must stop the motor in the case of
a fault and for a limit value violation. If you also want the functions to be controlled via
PROFIsafe and/or F-DI, then an additional enable is required through appropriate
selection.
The selection enables the function. The enabled function then appears in the secondary
navigation as a subpoint of the function selection.
– License symbol
The license symbol shows the Safety Integrated Functions that require a Safety Extended
license. For test purposes, there is a Trial License mode for Safety Integrated.
• Parameterization of the enabled Safety Integrated Functions
– Function-dependent display of the converter parameters
A function view is offered for every enabled Safety Integrated Function. The function view
of the particular function is available in the drop‑down list for function selection in the
secondary navigation. The function view shows a graphic and the important setting
parameters. If additional parameters must be set/observed for the particular function, it
is necessary to switch to parameter view. Parameter view has two views: "Standard" and
"Extended". Different parameters appear depending on whether the "Standard" view or
"Extended" view is selected.
Changes in the parameter view become effective after the editing mode is ended in the
function view.
– Actual value acquisition/mechanical system
The actual value acquisition/mechanical system can be viewed if Safety Integrated motion
monitoring functions were activated.
• Parameterization of the selected control type

The parameterization of the control type determines the settings for PROFIsafe and the
failsafe digital input (F-DI).
• Function status
The function status shows the following values:
– Function status of the enabled functions
Display Function status

Function is active
Function is not active
Safety Integrated Function status of an enabled function

– Status of Safety Integrated in the device
– Checksums
Offline: Shows the checksums calculated when Safety Integrated commissioning was
completed.
Online: Shows the current status of all configured Safety Integrated Functions as well as
the checksums calculated when Safety Integrated commissioning was completed.
– Software versions in the converter
Navigation tips
The secondary navigation of the parameterization can be used to navigate between the
various commissioning steps.
Alternatively, "Next" and "Back" buttons are available at the lower edge of the screen form.
More information
For detailed information, see Chapter "Safety Integrated Functions (Page 105)".
8.7.4.2 Starting/exiting Safety Integrated editing mode
Overview
You must start the editing mode in order to make changes to the Safety Integrated settings. This
applies to both offline and online configurations.
The system behaves differently depending on whether you are working online or offline.
Requirement
The converter is completely created in the device configuration.
Procedure
1. Click on to activate editing mode.
If you are working online: If the current Safety Integrated settings deviate from the factory
settings, you will be prompted to select which basis you want to use for the configuration:
– Based on the current settings
– Based on the factory settings
If you are working offline, this prompt does not appear.
2. Click on to exit the editing mode.
If you are working online: The checksums are calculated for the parameterization carried out,
and saved directly in the converter. This activates the parameterization, and can be executed
at the machine.
If you are working offline: The checksums are calculated for the parameterization carried out,
and saved in the project.
Note
Loss of settings if commissioning is canceled in the online configuration
If you do not close editing mode with "Finish editing", the following applies:
You can discard the Safety Integrated settings made using the "Cancel" button. As a result, the
Safety Integrated settings from before editing mode was started are restored.
8.7.4.3 Permanently saving Safety Integrated parameterization
Requirement
You have configured the Safety Integrated commissioning or made changes to the
parameterization.
You are in the online configuration.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to permanently save the Safety Integrated parameterization:
1. Exit the editing mode.
2. To save the Safety Integrated parameters permanently in the drive, retentive saving is
necessary.
In the toolbar of the function view, click on the icon .
3. Observe the messages in the diagnostics window.
4. Restart the system if necessary.

5. Then establish consistency between the drive and Startdrive project:
– Load the settings from the drive into the Startdrive project. To do this, click the icon .
– Disconnect the online connection .
– Save the Startdrive project.
8.7.4.4 Security for Safety Integrated
Overview
Only authorized and authenticated personnel may change Safety Integrated settings. You
protect these settings using the project protection and the user management (UMAC) of the
Totally Integrated Automation Portal (TIA Portal).
It is possible to create specific users and roles in the user management of the TIA Portal. Based
on the assigned function rights, users are authorized to make changes to the settings in Safety
The following roles can make changes in Safety Integrated without the need to modify other
settings:
• Drive Safety Engineer
• Engineering Standard
The system checks the UMAC status before each change to the Safety Integrated settings. An
fault message is displayed if function rights are not available or authentication is not possible.
More information
More detailed information is provided in the Configuration Manual "SINAMICS Industrial Security
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109810578)" in Chapter "Security
8.7.4.5 Carrying out an acceptance test.
Acceptance test - notes
Note
Conditions for the acceptance test
As far as possible, the acceptance tests are to be carried out at the maximum possible machine
speed and acceleration rates to determine the maximum braking distances and braking times
that can be expected.
Note
Acceptance test for Safety Integrated Functions
In the function selection, the Safety Integrated acceptance test offers you the testable functions
for selection, depending on the device type and its settings.
Note
Trace recordings
Trace recordings are used to analyze the machine response during a test run. Based on the signal
characteristics, a check can be made as to whether the machine response corresponds to the
expectations of the test engineer. The recorded signals can be used to evaluate delay times and
over-travel distances, for example. The trace recordings are automatically parameterized and
performed by the tool.
Note
Non-critical alarms
When evaluating the alarm buffer you can tolerate the following alarms:
• A01699 SI: Test brake output necessary
This alarm occurs after the time in p9659 has expired.
You do not need to include these alarms in the acceptance report.
Note
No acceptance test with alarm A01796
If the alarm A01796 is active, the pulses are safely canceled, and an acceptance test is not
possible.
Note
Consistency between the offline project and drive
The acceptance test is performed after commissioning has been completed. After this, it is no
longer permissible that any parameters are changed in the drive.
Before the acceptance test, upload the drive to establish consistency between the offline project
and the drive. This means that all checksums are consistent.
The results of the acceptance test are saved in the project.
Without additional changes to the project or to the drive parameterization, all checksums are
kept unchanged.
A change to the checksums should be taken into consideration in the following cases:
• If the drive parameterization (offline or online) is changed after performing the acceptance
test, then the functional checksums are changed.
• If drive components are replaced, then the hardware-specific checksums are changed.
After any changes, the acceptance test (complete or partial) must be performed again.
Recommendations are described in the drive documentation.
The Safety Integrated acceptance test report can be exported at any time. When doing this, a
check is not made as to whether the project is consistent between offline and online.
For the final documentation of the acceptance report, ensure that there are no inconsistencies
in the system.
Note
Startdrive supports the consistency check
The consistency check in Startdrive is performed automatically and permanently online. The
result of the consistency check is shown as an icon next to the acceptance test in the secondary
navigation.
The following states are displayed:
: The online and offline comparison values are identical.
: The online and offline comparison values are different. The consistency between the offline
project and the drive must be established using "Download to device" or "Upload from device".
: An error occurred during the consistency check.
Acceptance test - overview
Overview
The Safety Integrated acceptance test wizard supports you when running through the
acceptance test.
The wizard provides the following support:
• The wizard guides you step-by-step through the acceptance tests for the individual Safety
• The wizard explicitly asks you for the entries and actions that you must go through.
• The wizard creates the trace recordings needed for analyzing the machine behavior during
the tests.
• The wizard creates the required acceptance report.
Preparing the acceptance test
Requirement
• The drives to be tested are fully configured and operational.
A subsequent change means that a new acceptance test must be performed.
• For active user management (UMAC): You have the required function rights for Safety
Integrated.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to prepare for the acceptance test:
1. Click "Acceptance test" in the project tree.
2. Select all Safety Integrated Functions to be tested for the desired drive in the secondary
navigation.
The active functions are automatically preselected. Depending on the specific requirement,
change this preselection and either select or deselect functions.
3. To define the function selection for the Safety Integrated acceptance test, click "Apply".
Entries are displayed in the secondary navigation for the functions to be tested. Navigate
with these settings to the individual tests.
Optional: Resetting test results

1. To delete all tests performed for this drive so far, click the "Reset test results" button.
As a consequence, the initial state is restored. New acceptance tests are possible before the
initial state.
Performing the acceptance test (example)
Overview
After accepting the function selection in step "Prepare acceptance test", the functions to be
tested are displayed in the secondary navigation. Work through the tests from top to bottom or
in any order.
The status of the individual tests is shown as follows:

• Blue: The test for this function has still not been performed.
• Green: The test was successfully performed.
• Red: The test was canceled with an error. The test can be repeated by preselecting the
function.
The guided wizards have the same distribution for each acceptance test. The workflow,
which represents the individual test steps and their state, is located in the upper area.
These states have the following meaning:
• Blue: Active test step
• Green: Test step completed
The instructions for the various steps of the acceptance test are displayed in the area below
the workflow.
Requirement
• The Safety Integrated Functions of the selected drive have been completely configured.
• There is an active online connection between the drive and operating unit. The project data
in the project and drive are consistent.
• For active user management (UMAC): You have the required function rights for Safety
Integrated.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to execute each acceptance test:
1. Click on a Safety Integrated Function to be tested.
2. Enter a test designation. This designation also appears later in the acceptance report.
3. Change the trace settings for this test or use the default settings.
The preassignment is appropriate for the majority of applications. By changing the trace
settings, you adapt the test to the mechanical conditions of the machine. Example: The
mechanical system of the axis has a very high moment of inertia. As a consequence, longer
ramp times are required for accelerating and braking.
4. Once you have completed all the preparations, click on "Start test".
The wizard for the selected test opens.
5. Comply with the safety instructions and notes on the pages of the function view of the
acceptance test wizard until the test has been (successfully) completed.
6. Follow the instructions and click on "Next".
7. Exit the acceptance test via "Finish".
Result
You can see the test status in the secondary navigation.
Note
Acceptance test canceled
If you open another window during the acceptance test, the acceptance test is canceled and is
marked as "failed" in the acceptance report.
Remedy:
• Open the other window with function "Unpin" as separate window. Using "Embed", you
reintegrate the separate window at a later point in time.
See also
Preparing the acceptance test (Page 301)
Completing the acceptance test with report
Overview
The overview under "Create report" lists all drives and their current test status.
You have the option of creating the acceptance report at any time. For example, intermediate
states can be documented, even though some tests are still open or were ended with errors.
Requirement
• For active user management (UMAC): You have the required function rights.
• For a final acceptance report: You have successfully completed all acceptance tests. All tests
are marked positive with a green checkmark.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to create an acceptance report:
1. In the "Completion" screen form, select the drives for which you wish to create a report.
The drive instances to which the results were transferred are also displayed in the list as
subentries that can be opened. These drive instances are always included in the acceptance
report with the selection of the respective main drive.
2. Click on "Create".
The "Save As..." dialog is displayed.
– When selecting a drive, the file name of the acceptance report is preassigned the drive
designation as default setting.
– When selecting several drives, a dialog is displayed to select the directory where the
report is saved. For each selected drive, a report is saved with the name of the drive.
3. Depending on the specific requirement, enter the file name of the report.
4. Click on "Save".
Optional: Creating a function table

You can use the function table to create a user-defined overview that is documented in the
acceptance report in addition to the results of the acceptance test.
Table 8-1 Function table
Column Explanation
Operating mode Select one of the specified operating modes from the drop-down list to map the
required scenario.
Description Enter an explanatory comment for the selected operating mode.
Protective device Select the applied protection mechanism from the drop-down list.
Version Enter an explanatory comment on the protective device being used.
Axis Select the relevant drive from the drop-down list.
Monitoring Select the safety function being used from the drop-down list.
Result
The acceptance report is created as table in the "xlsx" format. You can open the report in
Microsoft Excel as well as in other spreadsheet programs (e.g. LibreOffice).
The report is in the form of several individual tables:
• Cover page: Introduction with the machine description
• Drive_x - overview: Documentation of parameters for this drive
• Drive_x - function test: Documentation of all test data and traces for this drive
Test status color coding:
– Red: Failed
– Yellow: Not tested
– Green: Test successful
• Completion: Summary and signatures
Note
Correct display of the acceptance report
How the acceptance report is actually displayed, depends on Microsoft Windows and the
spreadsheet program used.
• Microsoft Excel
If the following is configured in the display settings of Microsoft Windows, then the display
of the report is correct:
Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Display > Make text and other items larger
or smaller > Option "Smaller – 100%"
• LibreOffice
The display of the acceptance report is independent of Microsoft Windows and is always
correct.
Transferring acceptance test results
Overview
To simplify additional acceptance tests, transfer the results of successfully performed tests to
drives with the same functionality.
Requirement
• You have successfully performed the acceptance tests.
• For active user management (UMAC): You have the required function rights.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to transfer the results of an acceptance test:
1. Open the page of function view "Result transfer" for a drive for which you have successfully
completed the acceptance test.
2. Click on "Determine" to determine suitable drives.
– After initial determination, the button changes to "Refresh".
– The acceptance test wizard lists all of the drives that could be involved.
3. Select the drives to which you want to transfer the results.
The selected drives become instances of the tested drive.
4. Click on "Apply".
The transfer status is displayed in the function view.
5. You disconnect instances from the tested drive using "Deselect" and "Apply".
Optional acceptance test functions
Overview
Startdrive provides additional functions for the acceptance test. More details on these functions
can be found in the TIA Portal information system.
Safety Activation Test

You test the control signals in the automation topology using the "Safety Activation Test".
The "Safety Activation Test" tests the following:
• Is the defined signal path correctly run through from the sensor through the evaluation up to
the drive and/or actuator?
• Are there wiring errors or other errors present?
You can use the acceptance test to test the Safety Integrated Functions in the SINAMICS drive
for proper parameterization.
Test cases that define the input conditions (system states) and the expected system
responses are defined for this purpose. Wizards are available for the tests. The results of
the acceptance test are included in the acceptance report.
User-defined texts
You describe the instructions of the individual test steps together with the terminology using
user-defined texts. Align the operating instructions to address the specific operation of your
machine. A screen form shows the instruction texts for the individual steps of all test cases.
These are marked with the "System" description.
Depending on the specific requirement, either filter the test cases of the current drive or the
sum of all test cases for the drives in the project.
Multiuser Engineering
The acceptance test is possible in the multi-user engineering. The following individual
functions are available:
• The acceptance test for an axis is performed in a local session, and is checked into the test
results of the server session.
In the server session, the potentially available test results of this axis are overwritten with the
results from the local session.
• The "Safety Activation Test" for a drive is performed in a local session and is checked into the
test results of the server session.
In the server session, test results potentially available for this drive are overwritten with the
results from the local session.
8.7.5 Configuring telegrams
8.7.5.1 Calling the telegram configuration
Overview
The "Telegram configuration" function is part of the device configuration, and is displayed in the
inspector window.
You can either call this function via the project tree or for Startdrive S drives, also via direct
links from the communication screen forms.
Information about the telegrams used in the converter is provided in Chapter
"Communication telegrams (Page 869)".
Requirement
The function rights required to configure telegrams in the inspector window are activated for
your user role.
Procedure
1. Open the drive in the project tree and double-click on entry "Device configuration".
The device configuration opens.
2. Select the S210 drive in the device configuration.
3. Select the entry "Telegram configuration" in the "Properties" tab of the inspector window.
The settings for the telegram configuration are displayed below the respective fieldbus
interface.
8.7.5.2 Telegram settings
Overview
The dialog box for the telegram configuration is structured as follows:

$ % &
Figure 8-7 Telegram configuration
Number Description
A Area for drive objects (setpoints, actual values and safety components)
B Area for the interfaces
C Area for the communication partners of the drive (e.g. controller or another drive)
① Drive object display
② Link to the communication screen forms of the particular drive object
③ Drop-down list with the available telegrams
④ Length of the telegram
⑤ Telegram extension
⑥ Communication direction (send direction /receive direction )
⑦ Type of communication
CD = Controller - Device for PROFINET IO
F_ = PROFIsafe-specific extension (safety telegram)
⑧ Name of the partner (controller)
⑨ Partner data area
More information
Detailed information on configuring telegrams is also provided in the TIA Portal information
system.
8.7.5.3 Adding telegrams
Overview
You can add the following telegrams once, as long as they are still not available in the telegram
list of the drive object:
• PROFIsafe telegram
• Supplementary telegram 700
• Torque telegram 750
Requirement
• A drive and a partner are created in the project, and connected via a fieldbus. The drive is
selected and the parameter editor is open.
The function rights required to configure telegrams in the inspector window are activated for
your user role.
Procedure
To add a telegram, proceed as follows:
1. Open the following menu path from the secondary navigation of the inspector window:
"Properties > PROFINET interface > Telegram configuration".
2. Click on entry "Add telegram" (at the required drive object).
A drop-down list opens. All telegram types that have not been assigned yet can be used.
3. Select the required telegram type.
The entries for the telegram are created.
4. If required, now change the telegram type, e.g. from telegram 30 to telegram 901.
5. Save the project.
Result
Telegram is added.
8.8 Optimizing commissioning
8.8.1 Establishing online connection
Overview
Before you traverse your drive from the control panel or optimize the axis, you need to establish
an online connection to the drive.
Requirement
• The configuration is loaded into the SIMATIC S7 controller.
The drive can therefore be accessed in the PROFINET network via the SIMATIC S7 controller
and your operating unit is connected to the corresponding PROFINET interface of the
controller (e.g. X1).
The function rights required to edit the drive data are activated for your user account.
Procedure
1. Double-click the entry in the project tree under the S210 drive.
The "Online access" function view is displayed.
2. Select the PROFINET network in the "Connection with interface/subnet" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Go online" button.
Result
The online connection to the drive is established.
8.8.2 Traversing the drive from the control panel with speed setpoint
Overview
Traverse the drive from the control panel and test the settings made. The control panel can only
be activated for one drive.
By activating the control panel, you assume master control of the drive. Although all enable
signals are removed before returning the master control, the setpoints and commands still
come from the original parameterized sources after the master control is returned.
WARNING
Risk of death if the safety instructions for the control panel are not carefully complied
with
The safety shutdowns from the higher-level controller have no effect with this function.
The Stop with space bar function is not guaranteed in all operating states. Incorrect operation
by untrained personnel – without taking into account the appropriate safety instructions – can
therefore result in death or severe injury.
• Make sure that this function is only used for commissioning, diagnostic and service
purposes.
• Make sure that this function is only used by trained and authorized skilled personnel.
• Ensure that EMERGENCY OFF circuit is always implemented as hardware circuit.
Note
Drive responds immediately
Although all enable signals are removed before returning the master control, the setpoints and
commands still come from the original parameterized sources after the master control is
returned.
Requirement
• Display area "Rotate & Optimize" was opened via the project tree.
The function rights required to edit the drive data and to use the control panel are activated
for your user account.
Procedure
You can traverse the drive using both the control panel of the technology object and the control
panel of the drive itself.
Proceed as follows to traverse the drive from the control panel of the drive:
1. Select the "Control panel" function in the secondary navigation.
2. Click the "Activate" button to enable master control for the drive.
The "Activate master control" message window is displayed.
3. Read the alarms carefully and check the value for the monitoring time.
The monitoring time specifies the time during which the connection from your operating
unit to the drive is cyclically monitored. The monitoring time is preset to 2000 ms and should
only be changed if required.
4. Confirm the monitoring time with "OK".
The message window closes and the control panel is enabled. The drive enables are set
automatically.
5. In the "Speed" input field, enter a value ≤ the maximum speed.
6. Traverse the drive in the desired direction using the controller buttons.
7. Click the "Deactivate" button to disable master control.
The "Deactivate master control" dialog window is displayed.
8. Confirm deactivation of master control with "Yes".
Result
The current values of various parameters are displayed under "Actual values". Enables and faults
are displayed under "Drive status". In addition to "Active fault", the currently pending fault is
displayed.
8.8.3 Perform One Button Tuning
Overview
For One Button Tuning (OBT), the mechanical drive train is measured using short test signals.
This means that you optimally adapt the controller parameters to the mechanical system being
used. Using this optimization routine, you can determine the optimum controller settings with
just a few entries.
Requirement
• Display area "Rotate & Optimize" was opened via the project tree.
The function rights required to edit the drive data and to use the control panel are activated
Procedure
1. Select the "One Button Tuning" function in the secondary navigation.
2. Select the desired setting (e.g. "Conservative") in the "Dynamic settings" area.
The "Standard" setting is selected by default.
3. Enter a value (e.g. 360) in the input field "Path limit from 0° to".
Sensible controller parameters are obtained from an angle > 90°.
4. Confirm the entry with "Enter".
The error icon is then hidden.
5. Click the "Activate" button to enable master control for the drive.
The "Activate master control" message window is displayed.
6. Read the alarms carefully and check the value for the monitoring time.
The monitoring time specifies the time during which the connection from your operating
unit to the drive is cyclically monitored. The monitoring time is preset to 2000 ms and should
only be changed if required.
7. Confirm the monitoring time with "OK".
The message window is closed and One Button Tuning is activated.
8. Click the "Start" button to start the optimization.
Optimization of the drive is performed. After optimization is completed successfully, the
green status icon appears and the changed values are shown in the "Current value"
column in the "Result of optimization" area.
NOTICE
Unpredictable drive response when making manual changes after One Button Tuning
Manual changes of the calculated values can lead to unpredictable behavior of the drive.
This can damage the drive.
• After the One Button Tuning, carefully check that the optimized values are not
subsequently changed manually.
• Always first restore the factory settings if you do not want to use the values optimized
using One Button Tuning.
9. Click the "Deactivate" button to disable master control.

The "Deactivate master control" dialog window is displayed.
10.Confirm deactivation of master control with "Yes".
11.Click the memory card icon to store the result of the optimization permanently in your
drive.
8.9 Using online diagnostic functions
12.To load the data from your drive into the project, first select the drive unit in the project tree
and then click the icon (Upload from device) in the toolbar.
13.Click the icon (Save project) to store the result of the optimization permanently in your
drive.
Result
You have performed the optimization routine and saved the result of the optimization
permanently in your drive and project.
8.8.4 Terminating the online connection
Overview
After you traverse your drive from the control panel or optimize the axis, you need to disconnect
the online connection to the drive.
Requirement
Procedure
1. Click on the S210 drive in the project tree.
2. Click on "Disconnect online connection" in the menu bar.
Result
The online connection to the drive is disconnected.
8.9.1 Diagnostics icons
Overview
Faults, alarms and any maintenance that is required are indicated using diagnostic icons.
The icons are displayed in the following areas of the TIA Portal:
• Project tree
• Device view
• Device overview
The icons are displayed in both the line as well as topology views.
Icon Meaning
No fault or maintenance required
Maintenance required
Maintenance requirement for a subordinate component
Maintenance request
Maintenance request for a subordinate component

Fault/error
Fault/error on a subordinate component
Connection error to the device
Establish a connection
The diagnostic status is determined
The configured device and the actual device have incompatible types.
The device is only available in the offline configured device configuration and has been
deactivated.
8.9.2 Display messages
Overview
The diagnostic icons, which are displayed in the network and topology views, are assigned to
specific messages.
Requirement
Procedure
1. Double-click on a diagnostics icon, for example .
The inspector window opens.
2. Click the "Message display" tab.
All current messages are displayed.
8.9.3 Calling Online & Diagnostics
Overview
In the diagnostics view, you can see important information about the drive or make important
basic settings.
① "Diagnostics" (information on the condition of the drive)

② "Functions" (configuration of the physical interfaces)
③ "Backup / Restore"
④ Overview of licenses
Figure 8-8 Overview: Diagnostic functions
Requirement
Procedure
1. In the project tree, double-click on menu "Online & 'Diagnostics".
Diagnostics and diagnostic functions are displayed in the secondary navigation and can be
called from here.
2. Select the "Online access" entry in the secondary navigation.
3. Select the network interface of your operating unit.
4. Click on "Go online".
The online connection to the drive is established.
5. Click on "Go offline" in the menu bar.
The online connection to the drive is disconnected.
8.9.4 Diagnostics
Requirement
• There is an online connection between the drive and the operating unit.
Diagnostic information can only be read out in the online mode.
You call the individual diagnostic information in the secondary navigation of the diagnostics
view.
The following information on the connected drive is provided in the diagnostics view:
• General:
Information about component, module and manufacturer is displayed.
– This means that you identify the drive, and the most important drive data are displayed.
• Security:
Information about security settings of the connected drive is displayed.
You can find more information in Chapter "Security (Page 318)".
• Active messages:
Information about active alarms and faults is displayed.
– For a fault, the status signal ZSW1.3 is sent. Faults must be acknowledged once the cause
has been resolved. To do this, use the function icon at the top of the function view ( /
).
– For an alarm, status signal ZSW1.7 is set. The alarm is also entered into the alarm buffer.
Alarms are self-acknowledging.
• Message history:
– The message history records all alarms and faults.
– Using the function icons in the function view, you can either delete the fault buffer ( )
or export to a CSV file ( ).
• Actual values:
Information about the most important parameter actual values and status bits is displayed.
• Safety Integrated Function status:
Information about the current status of Safety Integrated Functions is displayed.
You can find more information in Chapter "Fundamentals for Safety Integrated
commissioning (Page 294)", in "Function status".
• PROFINET interface (X150):
– Ethernet address:
Information about IP parameters (IP address and subnet mask) and network connection
(MAC address) is displayed.
– Communication:
Information about send and receive directions (PZDs of telegrams e.g. 105) is displayed.
More detailed information on PZDs and telegrams is provided in Section "Communication
(Page 319)".
8.9.5 Security
Requirement
Diagnostic information can only be read out in the online mode.
• The user administration (UMAC) is activated for the project and drive. The following applies:
A summary of the active security settings of the connected converter is displayed in diagnostics
view "Security".
• Logged-in user:
– The user that is logged into the drive.
OR
– No logged-in user, as UMAC is not active.
In this case, we recommend activating UMAC.
• Ports & protocols:
Displays the activation state for the interfaces of the following areas:
– Web server access
– Fieldbus and associated protocols
– S7 commissioning reports
– DHCP configuration
• UMAC settings:
Shows certain UMAC settings which are activated for the drive. Shows, for example, whether
UMAC is active and what rights the user account "Anonymous" has.
You can only change the displayed security settings offline in the inspector window of the
converter in the project.
8.9.6 Communication
8.9.6.1 Receive direction
Requirement
As standard, the components and interconnections of PROFIdrive telegrams in the receive
direction for the converter are displayed in this function view (e.g. 105, 700 or 750).
You can add additional telegrams via the telegram configuration ( ). The content of the
selected telegram is then displayed in the "PROFIsafe" or "Supplementary data" area.
Telegram structure
The process data in the receive direction are created automatically.
Only those telegrams available for the converter are offered. The following information of the
displayed telegrams is displayed:
Telegram type PZD Display of the value Format switchover Control words
The numbering and Value of the process The value of the process List of the control
arrangement of the data (PZD) data is switched to a dif‐ words that are trans‐
process data. ferent representation mitted in the tele‐
(hex, bin, dec). gram.
PROFIdrive X X X X
3, 5, 102, 105
PROFIsafe X X X X
30, 901
Supplementary data X X X X
700
Torque supplementa‐ X X X X
ry telegram
750
8.9.6.2 Send direction
Requirement
As standard, the components and interconnections of PROFIdrive telegrams in the send
direction for the converter are displayed in this function view (e.g. 105, 700 or 750).
You can add additional telegrams via the telegram configuration ( ). The content of the
selected telegram is then displayed in the "PROFIsafe" or "Supplementary data" area.
Telegram structure
The interconnections for the process data in the send direction are created automatically for
the standard and manufacturer-specific telegrams.
The following information of the displayed telegrams is displayed:
Telegram type Status words Value Format switchover PZD

List of the status words Value of the proc‐ The value of the process data Numbering and ar‐
that are transferred in ess data (PZD) is switched to a different rep‐ rangement of the
the telegram. resentation (hex, bin, dec). process data.
PROFIdrive X X X X
3, 5, 102, 105
PROFIsafe X X X X
30, 901
Supplementary da‐ X X X X
ta
700
Torque supplemen‐ X X X X
tary telegram
750
8.9.7 Functions
Overview
In the "Functions" area, you can call the following functions via the secondary navigation of the
diagnostic view and make settings within them:
• Assign IP address
• Firmware update
• Assign PROFINET device name
• Reset PROFINET interface parameters
• Set time
8.9.7.1 Resetting PROFINET interfaces
Overview
To restore the converter to the delivery state, you need to reset the PROFINET interfaces of the
converter in addition to restoring the factory settings.
If the converter is connected to a SIMATIC S7 controller while the PROFINET interfaces are
being reset, the controller assigns new interface parameters to the converter immediately
after the reset. To prevent this, switch the controller to "Stop" mode before the reset or
terminate the connection between controller and converter.
Requirement
• The connection between the converter and control system is disconnected.
Procedure
1. In the secondary navigation, open menu "Functions".
2. Click on menu "Reset of PROFINET interface parameters".
3. Select one of the following options:
– Retain I&M data
If the option "Retain I&M data" is active, the I&M1 to I&M3 data are retained.
– Delete I&M data
If the option "Delete I&M data" is active, the I&M1 to I&M3 data are deleted.
4. Click on the "Reset" button.
Result
The parameters of the PROFINET interfaces are reset. The reset data are displayed in the "Online
access" function view.
More information
More information on restoring the factory settings is provided in Chapter "Restore factory
settings (Page 326)".
Overview
The option "Synchronize with an NTP server" is activated when the "Set time" diagnostics view
is called up for the first time.
For the operation of a drive, the definition of a drive time is important. The following options are
available:
• Synchronize with NTP server
If the drive is connected to other devices and a central NTP server is to provide the time for
the connected devices. Alternatively, a controller can also act as NTP server.
• No synchronization, set time manually
if the drive is initially operated without control.
You set the drive time in the diagnostics view as a direct function. If a time has already been
set, it is displayed in the "Current drive time" area. If it is a synchronized time, the NTP server
used is also displayed in the "Time source" field.
Alternatively, you can set the time settings offline in the inspector window of the drive.
However, these settings are only transferred to the drive when the drive data are loaded.
If you differentiate the time settings between the drive and the project, this is indicated by
the icon . In this case, reload the drive data into the drive.
8.9.7.2 Setting the time with synchronization (NTP server)
Requirement
• The drive is operated with a controller.
The direct functions can only be performed in online mode.
Procedure
1. If the "Synchronize with NTP server" option is not enabled, enable this option.
By default, the "Use PLC as NTP server" option is now enabled. If the drive is connected to a
PLC, the IP address of the PLC is displayed.
2. Disable the option "Use PLC as NTP server".
The input field for the IP address is cleared.
3. Enter the IP address of the desired NTP server in the "IP address" field.
4. Select the time zone of your country in the "Time zone" area.
Example: For Central Europe, use the time zone "GMT+01:00".
5. Then click "Apply".
Result
The set time is directly transferred to the drive. The current time settings are displayed in the
"Current drive time" area.
8.9.7.3 Setting the time with synchronization (PLC as NTP server)
Requirement
• The drive is operated with a controller.
Procedure
To synchronize the time, proceed as follows:
1. If the "Synchronize with NTP server" option is not enabled, enable this option.
By default, the "Use PLC as NTP server" option is now enabled. If the drive is connected to a
PLC, the IP address of the PLC is displayed.
2. Select the time zone of your country in the "Time zone" area.
3. Then click on "Apply".
Result
8.9.7.4 Setting the time without synchronization
Overview
A time of the drive without synchronization is used if the drive is operated for test purposes
without a control unit connected.
Requirement
Procedure
1. Activate the option "No synchronization, set time manually".
You can then choose whether to copy the time from your operating unit or enter the time
manually.
2. If you want to use the time from your operating unit, activate the option "Use time from PG/
PC".
- Or -
If you want to set the time manually, proceed as follows:
– In the "Drive time" area, set the current calendar day, the current year, and the desired
time.
– Select the time zone of your country in the "Time zone" area.
3. Then click "Apply".
Result
8.9.8 Backup and restore
Overview
Perform the following actions in function view "Backup/Restore":
• Restart the drive now
• Retentively save the drive data in the converter
• Restore the drive data to factory settings
Security and interface settings are excluded.
• Restore Safety Integrated settings to factory settings
8.9.8.1 Restart the drive now
Requirement
• There is an online connection between the project and the drive (see Chapter "Establishing
online connection (Page 310)").
• The drive is switched on and has voltage.
Procedure
1. In the secondary navigation, click on menu "Backup/Restore".
2. In the "Restart the drive" field, click on "Restart".
Result
The drive is restarted. The restart is finished when the RDY and COM LEDs on the drive light up
green.
8.9.8.2 Retentively saving the drive data
Requirement
• Optional memory card is inserted (for a parameter backup).
The function rights required to edit and save the drive data are activated for your user
account.
Procedure
2. Click on the "Save" button in the "Save RAM data retentively" field.
Result
Drive data are retentively saved in the drive.
If you have inserted an SD card in the drive, the drive data are stored on the memory card in
addition.
8.9.8.3 Restore factory settings
Overview
With this function, you restore the user-specific parameterization of the converter to factory
settings.
The following data are retained when the factory settings are restored:
• Language setting
• Date and time
• Incomplete commissioning
• If the motor is changed
• If there is uncertainty regarding the previous parameterization and/or the previous use of the
converter
Requirement
• There is an online connection between the project and the drive.
You can find more information in Chapter "Establishing online connection (Page 310)".
The function rights required for "Restore factory settings" are activated for your user account.
Procedure
2. Click the "Start" button in the "Restore factory setting" field.
Result
The converter is reset and then restarted. If the "RDY" and "COM" LEDs on the converter light up
green, resetting is complete.
More information
For a full reset of the converter, proceed as described in Chapter "Manual reset to factory settings
with memory card (Page 356)".
8.9.8.4 Restoring the Safety Integrated factory settings
Overview
It is not always necessary to reset all of the converter settings. A separate reset function exists
for Safety Integrated settings, which explicitly only restores Safety Integrated settings to factory
settings.
Requirement
The function rights required to edit drive settings and Safety Integrated settings are activated
Procedure
To restore the Safety Integrated factory settings, proceed as follows:
2. In field "Restore Safety Integrated factory setting", click on "Start".
Result
The current Safety Integrated settings in the converter are reset. The converter is then restarted.
When both LEDs on the converter are lit green, the Safety Integrated settings of the converter
have been reset to factory settings.
8.9.9 Overview of licenses
Overview
In the online mode, in function view "License", you can view information about options/
functions that require licensing and also perform the following actions:
• View status of individual licenses.
• Load license file.
• Display and copy serial number of the memory card being used.
• Activate Trial License mode.
Requirement
Element Description
General license status Indicates the current license status (e.g. you do not have all of the licenses you need).
System response Displays the system response to the current license status, e.g. "Blocks the drive from being
switched on again."
Trial period Displays of the Trial License status; e.g. "Trial License mode not active".
Serial number of the memory Serial number of the memory card and button to copy the serial number
card
Activate Trial License mode Button for activating Trial License mode
Activate the license key file Button for loading a license file
Save eCoL archive Button for saving the license certificates to the file system of the operating unit
Element Description
Table columns
Status The following icons indicate the status:
License is complete.
Trial License mode is active.
License is not available or the memory card with license is not inserted (under licensed).
Function that requires licens‐ List of all used system options/functions subject to licensing
ing
Existing/required licenses The required number of licenses compared with the number of licenses included with the
license key.
For operation, the number of available licenses ≥ the number of licenses required.
License status Displays the current status of the function subject to licensing.
Remaining operating time Displays the remaining operating time of a trial period.
Trial License mode

Licenses for functions requiring licensing can either be ordered together with an SD card for an
S210 drive or, when ordered later, can be assigned to an existing SD card via the Web License
Manager. Most of the functions that require licensing can also be operated for a limited period
of time in Trial License mode.
Before you activate Trial License mode, make sure to read the information and notes in the
"About the licensing process" dialog.
More information
• More information about the license file and about extending licenses is provided in Chapter
"Functions that require licensing (Page 98)".
• Additional information about the licensing process or on the trial license mode is provided in
the TIA Portal information system. There, browse for S210 drives using the keyword phrase
"Managing supplementary functions that require a license".
8.9.10 Updating the firmware in the Startdrive project
Overview
You upgrade the converter firmware directly in the Startdrive project.
Note
Firmware version in Startdrive project and drive
Online connections between the Startdrive project and drive are only possible if the firmware
versions in the project and the drive are the same.
• Create a new project if your current project works with a firmware version that is older than
the firmware version of the drive. Set the firmware version of the project to the currently
upgraded version of the drive. Apply all of the other settings from the old project.
• If you are using an old Startdrive version, it may be necessary to install a new Startdrive
version that supports the firmware version.
Requirement
• For an update via an online connection:
A physical connection between the Ethernet interface of your operating unit and the
Ethernet or PROFINET interface of your drive.
The function rights required for the firmware update are activated for your user account.
Procedure
1. Open the entry in the project tree.
2. Select the network interface of your operating unit.
3. Double-click "Update accessible devices".
The accessible device is displayed with the IP address.
4. Call the "Online & diagnostics" function for the displayed device.
An online connection to the selected participant is established and the "Online access"
function view opens.
5. Expand the "Functions" entry in the secondary navigation.
6. Click the "Firmware update" entry.
In the "Online data" area, the article number of the drive and the firmware version currently
in use are displayed.
7. Click the "Browse" button in the "Firmware loader" area.
A selection dialog opens.
8. Select the firmware file with the required version in the file system of your operating unit.
The firmware file is displayed in the line with the same name in the "Firmware loader" area.
9. Check in the "Firmware version" field whether you have selected the required firmware
version.
10.In the "Status" field, check that the firmware can be read.
11.Optional: Activate the option "Restart drive automatically".
If this option is activated, there is no need to restart the drive manually after the firmware
update. Step 13 is omitted in this case.
12.To load the firmware to the drive, click on "OK".
– The status of the firmware update is displayed in the "Status" field.
The new firmware is installed. The installation may take up to 15 minutes or longer.
The progress is displayed at the converter LEDs.
RDY COM Explanation of LED displays

Firmware update is active:
• Do not switch off the power supply.
• Do not disconnect the motor from the converter.
- Initializing firmware
– If the firmware is loaded, then the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components are updated.
RDY Explanation of LED displays

Firmware of the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components being updated:
(0.5 Hz)
Firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ components has been updated:
• Waiting for POWER ON of the respective component.
Remedy: Switch the component off and on again.
(2 Hz)
Note
Check that the firmware has been updated
Startdrive displays an appropriate message when completing the update. After the
message has been displayed, using the LEDs, check whether the converter update has
been completed.
13.Optional: If you have not activated the option "Restart drive automatically...", switch the
converter off and on again.
14.Optional: Call the catalog information using the secondary navigation in the inspector
window. Check whether the new firmware version is installed.
8.10 Checking using the trace function
More information
Additional information about available firmware versions can be found on this website: (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109812303)
Overview
In a trace configuration, depending on the SINAMICS S drive being used, define the following:
• Signals to be recorded
• Recording duration
• Trigger conditions
Requirement
The function rights required for trace configuration are activated for your user account.
The trace configuration for S210 drives is characterized by the following special features and
device-specific default settings:
• Preset trace signals:
For the first trace that you create for an S210 drive, the first four signals are preassigned with
the following parameters, which are typical for Motion Control applications:
– r0062 (Speed setpoint after filter)
– r0061[0] (Actual speed unsmoothed: Encoder 1)
– r0080 (Torque actual value)
– r0479[0] (Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1: Encoder 1)
Figure 8-9 S210 trace called
No signals are preset for other traces you create for an S210 drive.
Note
Other lines are not preassigned. When further signals are inserted, the cycle is changed to
4 ms.
• Possible cycle times:

In the "Cycle" input field of the trace configuration, you can enter the cycle time with which
the trace should be recorded. The possible cycle times for an S210 drive depend on the
number of signals to be recorded:
– Up to four signals: 0.0625 ms minimum recording cycle
– As of five signals: 4.0 ms minimum recording cycle
• Selecting signal bits based on plain text descriptions:
By selecting a trigger variable, you can display individual signal bits based on plain text
descriptions (e.g. "Drive control.control word sequence control.ON / OFF1") in the trace
configuration and select them directly. A description of how you can select an individual
signal bit and set a trigger event is provided below using the "Drive control.control
word sequence control" trigger variable as an example.
More information
Additional information on the trace function and configuration in the TIA Portal is provided in the
TIA Portal information system.
8.10.1 Example: Selecting signal bits and setting the trigger event
Destination
You want to make the basic settings for evaluating a trace.
Requirement
The function rights required for trace configuration are activated for your user account.
Procedure
1. Define a trigger mode (e.g. "Trigger on tag") via the "Trigger mode" drop-down list.
2. To open the signal selection table, click on the icon in the "Trigger tag" input field.
The signal selection table is displayed.

3. In the signal selection table, scroll to the desired signal (e.g. "control word sequence control").
4. To open the bit selection table, click on the icon ② in the row with the desired signal.
The bit selection table shows the bits of the selected signal in plain text (e.g. "control
word sequence control.ON / OFF1").
5. Select the required bit.

The selected bit is displayed in the "Trigger tag" input field ③.

6. To show the "Event" input field, press "Enter".

The "Event" input field is displayed with a preset trigger event ④.
7. Select the desired trigger event, if necessary, using the drop-down list in the "Event" input
field.
The selected trigger event is displayed in the "Event" input field.
Series commissioning 9
Overview
In series commissioning, the backed-up data and settings of a converter are loaded to other
converters.
Requirement
The target converter must satisfy the following prerequisites:
• The rated power of the target converter is the same as the rated power of the converter from
which the backed-up data and settings originate.
• The firmware version of the target converter is higher than or equal to the firmware version
of the converter from which the backed-up data and settings originate.
• The machines that are commissioned via series commissioning are identical in terms of the
application, converter and motor.
• The target converters are all configured to factory settings.
Note
PROFINET-IP address and PROFINET device name are not transferred for series commissioning.
You must configure the PROFINET IP address and the PROFINET device names in the PLC. The
converter takes the settings from the PLC.
There are two options when carrying out series commissioning of the converter:
• Series commissioning with memory card
All settings on the memory card (including user management and access control) are
transferred to the converter.
• Series commissioning using the web server
All settings from the parameter backup (including user management and access control) are
transferred to the converter.
When performing series commissioning, also observe the fundamental principles for
working with the web server (see Chapter "Fundamentals (Page 194)").
Series commissioning
9.2 Series commissioning using the web server
9.1 Series commissioning with memory card
Series commissioning with a memory card

Proceed as follows to perform series commissioning using a memory card:
1. Insert an empty SD card with a maximum capacity of 32 GB (e.g.: 6SL5970-0AA00-0AA0)
into the card slot of the converter while it is switched off.
2. Switch on the converter and perform commissioning.
3. Save the settings retentively at the end of commissioning.
This saves the settings retentively not only on the converter but also to the memory card.
4. Switch off the converter and remove the memory card from the converter.
5. Insert the memory card into the next, switched off converter.
6. Switch on the converter and wait until it has ramped up - the RDY LED lights green.
During ramp-up, the converter takes the settings from the memory card - including user
management and access control.
7. Switch off the converter and remove the memory card from the converter.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for all converters to which you want to transfer these settings.
Series commissioning using the web server

Proceed as follows to perform series commissioning using the web server:
1. Switch on the converter supply voltage and use your operating unit, e.g. a PC, to perform
commissioning.
You can find more information in Chapter "Commissioning (web server) (Page 193)".
2. Save the settings at the end of commissioning via .
3. Select "Backup and Restore" in the navigation - and back up the parameter settings in a file
using "Back up parameters".
4. Connect your operating unit to the next converter.
5. Switch on the supply voltage to the converter.
6. Enter the IP address of the converter, e.g. https://169.254.11.22, in the browser.
7. Select the option "Exit the Security Wizard and continue with low security settings".
User management and access control (UMAC) is not activated.
(Page 240)".
8. In the navigation, select "Backup and Restore" - and load the parameter settings using
"Restore parameters via file" to the converter.
The converter accepts the parameters (including from user management and access control)
from the file and restarts.
Repeat steps 4 to 7 for all converters to which you want to transfer these settings.
Diagnostics 10
10.1 Status displays and operating elements on the converter
10.1.1 Overview of display and operating elements on the converter

The status of the converter is displayed via the three-digit display as well as by the "RDY" and
"COM" LEDs.
① LED display
② Three-digit display
③ OK button

Display and operating elements on the converter
• Status display via LEDs

The converter displays the current operating state via two LEDs.
– RDY: converter state
– COM: communication state
During ramp-up, the LEDs assume different states.
The converter is ready for operation when the "RDY" LED is permanently green.
The LEDs always operate independently of one another, except when updating the firmware.
• Status display via the three-digit display
Normally, the display is dark.
During ramp-up, "210" appears as a reference to the SINAMICS S210 converter.
Faults are shown according to the message classes defined in PROFIdrive. If PROFIdrive
diagnostics is active, the faults are simultaneously transferred to the control system.
More detailed information about alarms and faults is provided by the web server of the
converter.
• OK button
You can acknowledge the faults whose cause has been corrected with the OK button.
Diagnostics
10.1.2 Status display via LEDs
Table 10-1 Significance of the icons for the subsequent tables
Icon Meaning
LED is bright
LED is OFF
LED flashes slowly
V
LED flashes in alternating order 3 times quickly - 2 s pause - ...
V
LED is on for 3 s then flashes 3 times quickly
V
LED flashes quickly
V
LED flashes with variable frequency
Please contact Technical Support for LED states that are not subsequently described.
Table 10-2 Meaning of RDY and COM LEDs during converter ramp-up
RDY COM Meaning

POWER ON
All LEDs light up for approx. 1 s.
BIOS loaded
- Firmware has been checked. No CRC error detected.
Loading firmware: RDY LED lights up red, COM LED flashes orange with‐
out fixed frequency.
- Firmware has been loaded.
- Initializing firmware
- Converter is ready for operation.
Diagnostics
Table 10-3 Other states of RDY and COM LEDs during converter ramp-up
RDY COM Meaning

BIOS error: "An error occurred while loading the BIOS."
Firmware has been checked. CRC error detected.
File error:
• Memory card is not available or is faulty.
• Software on the memory card is not available or is faulty.
- File error during firmware update
- Project being backed up.
Manual reset to factory settings with memory card is completed.
Firmware update is active.
- Firmware update completed.

Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on
again after a firmware update.
Table 10-4 Significance of LED RDY in operation
RDY Meaning
The electronics power supply is missing or outside the permissible tolerance range.
Remedy: Check the power supply.
Temporary status after the supply voltage is switched on.
The device is ready for operation.

Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is in progress.
Writing to the memory card
Commissioning or restore factory settings via commissioning tool
Manual reset to factory settings with memory card is active.

The settings are reset.
Manual reset to factory settings with memory card is completed.
Diagnostics
10.2 Message classes in accordance with PROFIdrive
RDY Meaning
Active fault or missing license
Remedy:
• Check the converter settings/configuration.
• Activate the required license
Firmware update in progress for the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components.
DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update has been completed.
Waiting for POWER ON of the respective component.
Converter detection via DCP flashing.
RDY LED is green for 3 s and flashes red 3 times at 1 Hz
Additional flashing on the PROFINET interface (X150) or Ethernet interface (X127):
The Activity and Link LEDs flash 3 times at 1 Hz
Missing license:
There is no license, however, the Trial License Mode has been activated.
Table 10-5 Significance of LED COM in operation
COM Meaning
No bus fault is present.
Temporary status after the supply voltage is switched on.
Bus ok. cyclic communication running perfectly
Bus ok; however, no setpoints (PLC in stop)

In isochronous mode: Bus ok, no synchronization
No bus connection
Remedy: Make sure that the bus cables are connected and are not damaged.

The message classes according to PROFIdrive are shown in the converter display.
Diagnostics
Example: Message class 4: F04
Message PN1) Explanation of the message class according to PROFIdrive -

class (hex) cause and remedy.
1 9000 Hardware fault/software error
A hardware or software malfunction has been identified.
• Carry out a POWER ON for the relevant component.
• If it occurs again, replace again.
2 9001 Line fault
A line supply fault has occurred (phase failure, voltage level, ...).
• Check the line supply/fuses.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check the wiring.
3 9002 Supply voltage fault
An electronics power supply fault (24 V) has been identified.
• Check the voltage level.
4 9003 DC link overvoltage
The DC link voltage has assumed an inadmissibly high value.
• Check the dimensioning of the system (line supply, voltages).
• Check the infeed settings.
5 9004 Power electronics fault
An inadmissible operating state of the power electronics has been identified
(overcurrent, overtemperature, IGBT failure, …).
• Check compliance with the permissible load cycles.
• Check the ambient temperatures (fan).
6 9005 Electronic component overload
The temperature in the component has exceeded the highest permissible
limit.
• Check the ambient temperature / control cabinet ventilation.
7 9006 Ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit detected
A ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit has been identified in the power
cables or in the motor windings.
• Check the power cables (connection).
• Check the motor.
8 9007 Motor overload
The motor was operated outside the permissible limits (temperature, cur‐
rent, torque, …).
• Check the load cycles and set limits.
• Check the ambient temperature / motor cooling.
Diagnostics

9 9008 Communication error to the higher-level controller
The communication to the higher-level controller is faulted or interrupted.
• Check the state of the higher-level controller.
• Check the communication connection/wiring.
• Check the bus configuration / clock cycles.
10 9009 Safety monitoring channel has identified an error
A safe operation monitoring function (Safety) has detected an error.
11 900A Actual position value / actual speed value incorrect or not available
An illegal signal state was detected while evaluating the encoder signals
(track signals, zero marks, absolute values, …).
• Check the encoder / state of the encoder signals.
• Observe the maximum permissible frequencies.
12 900B Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error
The internal communication between the SINAMICS components is faulted
or interrupted.
• Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring.
• Ensure an EMC-compliant design.
13 900C Infeed fault
The infeed is faulted or has failed.
• Check the infeed and its environment (line supply, filters, fuses, …).
• Check the infeed control.
14 900D Braking controller / Braking Module faulted
The internal or external Braking Module is faulted or overloaded (tempera‐
ture).
• Check the connection/state of the Braking Module.
• Comply with the permissible number of braking operations and their
duration.
15 900E Line filter faulted
The line filter monitoring has identified an excessively high temperature or
other inadmissible state.
• Check the temperature / temperature monitoring.
• Check the configuration to ensure that it is permissible (filter type, in‐
feed, thresholds).
16 900F External measured value / signal state outside of the permissible range
A measured value / signal state read in via the input area (digital/analog/
temperature) has assumed an inadmissible value/state.
• Identify and check the relevant signal.
• Check the set thresholds.
17 9010 Application / technology function faulted
The application / technological function has exceeded a (set) limit (position,
speed, torque, …).
• Identify and check the relevant limit.
• Check the setpoint specification of the higher-level controller.
Diagnostics

18 9011 Error in the parameterization/configuration/commissioning sequence
An error in the parameter assignment or in a commissioning run was iden‐
tified, or the parameter assignment does not match the prevailing device
configuration.
• Determine the precise cause of the fault using the commissioning tool.
• Adapt the parameterization or device configuration.
19 9012 General drive fault
Group fault.
• Determine the precise cause of the fault using the commissioning tool.
1)
"Channel Error Type" of the PROFINET channel diagnostics. When channel diagnostics is activated, then
the fault texts are indicated in the PLC.
Diagnostics
10.4 Faults
10.3 Alarms
Alarms
Alarms have the following properties:
• Alarms have no direct influence on the drive.
• Alarms disappear again when the cause is eliminated.
• Alarms cannot be acknowledged.
• Alarms are displayed as follows:
– In the PLC according to the PROFIdrive message class
– On the drive via LEDs
– At the drive using the three-digit display according to the PROFIdrive message class
– In the web server
You can find more information on the display of alarms in Chapter "Messages (Page 220)".
– In Startdrive
You can find more information on the display of alarms in Chapter "Display messages
(Page 315)".
Alarm code or alarm value describe the cause of the alarm.
More information
You can find more information on alarms in Chapter "Overview of faults and alarms (Page 747)".
10.4 Faults
Faults
Faults have the following properties:
• A fault may cause the motor to switch off.
• Faults must be acknowledged.
• Faults are displayed as follows:
– In the PLC according to the PROFIdrive message class
– On the drive via LEDs
– At the drive using the three-digit display according to the PROFIdrive message class
– In the web server
You can find more information on the display of faults in Chapter "Messages (Page 220)".
– In Startdrive
You can find more information on the display of faults in Chapter "Display messages
(Page 315)".
Diagnostics
10.4 Faults
Acknowledge fault
Before you can acknowledge a fault, you must have resolved the cause of the fault.
To acknowledge, you have the following options:
• Acknowledging via the PLC
• Acknowledging via the OK button under the front cover
• Switching off the converter power supply and switch on again
• Acknowledging via the web server or Startdrive
• The Safety Integrated error is acknowledged by selecting/deselecting the STO function.
As a result of the extended message acknowledgment (p9507.0 = 1), possibly active
messages of other Safety Integrated Functions are simultaneously acknowledged. You must
also execute the standard acknowledgment mechanism.
You can only acknowledge faults detected by the internal converter monitoring of hardware
and firmware by switching the supply voltage off and on again. In the list of faults, you will
find the information on limitations when acknowledging at the corresponding fault codes.
More information
You can find more information on faults in Chapter "Overview of faults and alarms (Page 747)".
Diagnostics
10.4 Faults
Service and maintenance 11
11.1 Service and maintenance for the motor
Requirement
WARNING
Risk of injury if protective devices are removed.
Operation without functioning protective devices can cause death or severe injury.
• Operate the motor, even in test operation, only with functioning protective devices.
Service and maintenance
Procedure
If there are deviations from normal operation or if faults occur, proceed as follows.
1. Identify the fault using the following table.
You should also take account of the messages of the converter.
Fault Fault cause (see "Fault causes and remedial meas‐

ures" key table)
Motor does not start A B
Motor starts slowly A C F
Humming sound when starting C F
Humming sound in operation A C F
High temperature rise under no-load op‐ D I
eration
High temperature rise under load A C I
High temperature rise of individual wind‐ F
ing sections
Uneven running J K
Grinding sound, running noise L
Radial vibrations M N O P R
Axial vibrations O Q R
2. Rectify the fault using the following table.
No. Fault cause Remedial measures

A Overload Reduce load
B Interruption of a phase in the Check the frequency converter and supply cables, measure
supply cable / motor winding the winding resistances and insulation resistances, repair
after consultation with manufacturer
C Interrupted phase in the feeder Check the frequency converter, supply cables and the wind‐
cable after switching on ing resistances
D Converter output voltage too Check the settings on the frequency converter, perform au‐
high, frequency too low tomatic motor identification
F Winding short-circuit or phase Measure the winding resistances and insulation resistan‐
short-circuit in stator winding ces, repair after consultation with the manufacturer, if re‐
quired, replace the motor
I Heat dissipation impeded by de‐ Clean the surface of the drives and ensure that the cooling
posits air can flow in and out unimpeded
Cooling air inlet/outlet is blocked Remove the reason for the blocking and ensure that the
by foreign bodies cooling air can flow in and out unimpeded
J Insufficient shielding for motor Check the shielding and grounding
and/or encoder cable
K Excessive drive controller gain Adjust the controller
L Rotating parts are grinding Determine cause and adjust parts
Foreign bodies inside the motor Replace the motor
Bearing damage For SH20... SH50, replace the motor; for SH63 ... SH100,
replace the bearings and encoder
M Rotor not balanced Replace the motor
No. Fault cause Remedial measures

N Rotor out of true, shaft bent Consult the manufacturer
O Poor alignment Align motor set, check coupling
P Coupled machine not balanced Re-balance coupled machine
Q Shocks from coupled machine Check coupled machine
R Fault originating from the gear‐ Adjust/repair gearbox
box
If the fault still cannot be resolved after taking the measures stated above, please contact the
manufacturer or the Siemens Service Center.
11.1.1 Replacing the motor bearings

Motor bearings are wearing parts. They must be replaced after a defined number of operating
hours.
At medium loads, the motor bearings last approx. 25000 h.
The procedure for replacing the motor bearing depends on the size of the motor.
• For 1F☐2☐03 ... 1F☐2☐05 motors, it is not possible to replace the motor bearings. Replace
these motors in their entirety.
• Replacement of the motor bearings is only intended as from 1F☐2☐06.
Especially favorable ambient conditions, such as low average speed, low radial force
(transverse force) and vibration load can prolong the interval until motor replacement.
Note
Premature bearing and motor replacement
Harsh operating conditions, e.g. continuous operation at nmax, high vibration/shock loads,
frequent reversing operation reduce the bearing or motor service life by up to 50 %.
The maintenance and repair of the motor can be performed in authorized Siemens Service
Centers all over the world.
Contact your personal Siemens representative if you would like to take advantage of this
service.
11.1.2 Replacing the motor
Requirement
The new motor has the same article number as the motor to be replaced.
Note
A motor with a singleturn encoder AS22DQC (1F☐2☐☐☐_☐☐☐☐☐-☐S☐☐) can be replaced
by an otherwise identical motor with a multiturn encoder AM22DQC (1F☐2☐☐☐_☐☐☐☐☐-
☐M☐☐) without having to recommission the drive system.
• Replace the motor following steps 1 to 3 as explained below.
Replacing a motor with a motor with another article number

If the converter has already been operated with a motor, and you wish to replace this motor by
another motor with a different article number, then after replacing the motor, you must
commission the converter again.
Procedure
1. Verify absence of operating voltage to the converter.
WARNING
Danger to life due to unintentional starting of the drive unit
Unintentional starting of the drive unit can cause death or severe injury.
• Make sure that the drive unit cannot be started accidentally.
• Post a warning notice to this effect at the point where the switch is located.
2. Replace the motor.
CAUTION
Burns as a result of touching hot surfaces
In operation, the motor enclosure can reach high temperatures, which can cause burns if
touched.
• Do not touch any hot surfaces.
• Allow the motor to cool down before starting any work.
• Use the appropriate personnel protection equipment, e.g. gloves.
– Release the motor connector. You will find detailed information in Chapter "Connecting
the power cable to the motor (Page 165)".
– Release the motor mounting screws.
– Remove the motor.
– Mount and install the new motor. You will find detailed information in Chapter "Installing
the motor (Page 153)".
3. Switch the converter on.
If you are using a different motor type (a motor with a different article number), then you
must also carry out the following steps:
1. Reset the converter to factory settings.
You can find more information in Chapter "Restoring the converter to factory settings
(Page 356)".
2. Commission the converter. You can find more information in the following chapters:
– "Commissioning (web server) (Page 193)"
– "Commissioning (Startdrive) (Page 247)"
– "Series commissioning (Page 337)"
11.2 Service and maintenance for the converter
11.2.1 Restoring the converter to factory settings
11.2.1.1 Restoring factory settings via a commissioning tool
Description
The reset to factory settings with a commissioning tool (web server, Startdrive) only deletes the
user-specific parameterization of the converter, for example motor data.
The following settings are retained with the reset:
• Activation and settings of User Management & Access Control
• The "IP configuration" and "Device name" communication settings of the service interface
(X127) and PROFINET interface (X150)
• Installed firmware on the converter
The reset to factory settings with the commissioning tool is described in the following
chapters:
• Web server: Restore factory settings (Page 236)
• Startdrive: Restore factory settings (Page 326)
11.2.1.2 Manual reset to factory settings with memory card
Overview
• The available credentials do not allow the necessary configuration of the converter (no
password for example).
• Before recommissioning of the converter, for example if the application use of the converter
changes.
• Before the converter is sold or disposed of, in order to erase all user-defined settings.
The manual reset to factory settings with SD card deletes the following user-defined settings
on the converter:
• Parameterization of the converter
• Activation and settings of User Management & Access Control
• "IP configuration" and "Device name" communication settings of the service interface (X127)
and PROFINET interface (X150)
• Self-generated certificates
• User-defined parameter lists in the web server
The reset to factory settings with SD card retains the installed SINAMICS firmware on the
converter.
Requirement
• You can access the converter manually.
• The converter must be disconnected from the motor:
– Disconnect all of the electrical connections to the motor (encoder, power and brake
cables).
– Disconnect the PROFINET connection to the control system and other devices.
• You have an empty writable SD card (max. 32 GB; e.g. 6SL5970-0AA00-0AA0).
• The files necessary for the manual reset to factory settings are available from the following
address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109815742).
Procedure
Proceed as follows to manually reset the converter to factory settings with a memory card:
1. Copy the files necessary for the reset to the empty SD card.
2. Switch off the converter.
3. Insert the SD card with the copied files into the card slot of the converter.
4. Switch on the converter again.
While the settings are being reset to factory settings, the RDY LED flashes quickly.
5. Wait until the reset to factory settings is completed.

The RDY LED flashes in alternating order 3 times quickly - pause.

7. Remove the SD card with the copied files.
If the SD card with the copied files is left plugged in, the converter performs the manual reset
to factory settings every time it restarts.
Result
All user-defined converter settings are deleted.
After the manual reset to factory settings, access to the web server is possible via the service
interface (X127) and via the PROFINET interface (X150). For access via the service interface
(X127), use the secure transmission protocol HTTPS.
11.2.2 Converter firmware update
Requirement
NOTICE
Damage to equipment during firmware update due to voltage supply interruption
If the firmware is being updated, interrupting the power supply or disconnecting the motor can
result in defects or cause the devices to malfunction.
• Do not switch off the converter's supply voltage while the firmware update is running.
Description
Firmware updates change the settings in the converter according to the relative firmware
version:
• If the converter is upgraded to a more recent firmware version, the converter settings are
retained.
• Downgrading to an older firmware version resets the converter to the factory settings.
The following options are available for a firmware update:
• Firmware update via memory card (Page 358)
• Firmware update via web server (Page 243)
• Firmware update via Startdrive (Page 330)
11.2.3 Firmware update via memory card
Overview
If you can physically access your S210 drive, you can directly update the firmware on the S210
drive using a memory card (SD card).
Requirement
• You have an SD card with the appropriate firmware, e.g. 6SL3570-0GB00-0AA0.
• You have an empty SD card with a maximum storage capacity of 32 GB (e.g.
6SL5970-0AA00-0AA0) onto which you can load the firmware.
You can find the available firmware versions at the following link: "Firmware versions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109812303)".
Procedure
Proceed as follows to update the firmware using an SD card:
2. Insert the SD card into the converter and switch on the converter.
The new firmware is installed. The process takes approx. 2 minutes.
RDY COM Explanation of LED displays

Firmware update is active
• Do not disconnect the motor from the converter
- Firmware update is completed

4. Remove the SD card.
5. Switch on the converter again. The firmware of the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components is
updated. This may require a restart (see active alarms in the web server).
RDY Explanation of LED displays

Firmware of the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components being updated:
Firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ components has been updated:
• Waiting for POWER ON of the respective component.
6. Check whether the new version is installed. The firmware version of the converter is
displayed on the home page of the web server under the converter.
11.2.4 Replacing fans - only for converters with 3 AC line connection

The fan module is installed in the lower section of the converter.
Operating period of the fan

The average operating period of the fan is 40,000 hours. However, in practice the operating
period may be shorter. Especially a dusty environment can block up the fan.
Parameter r0277 is used to display the fan wear as a percentage of the operating period.
The alarm A30042 appears if the maximum operating period will shortly be reached or has
already been exceeded.
The alarm value is contained in r2124 (interpret as a binary value):

• Bit 0 = 1: The wear counter has reached 99%, and after the remaining 1% has elapsed, bit 0
is cleared and bit 2 is set.
• Bit 2 = 1: The wear counter has exceeded 100%.
The fan must be replaced in good time to ensure that the converter remains ready for
operation.
You can find the article number for the replacement fan in Chapter "Spare parts (Page 610)".
Replacing fans
CAUTION
Injury caused by a rotating fan
Touching a fan while it is rotating can result in injury.
• Switch off the supply voltage to the converter.
• Wait until the fan is stationary before work on it.
Proceed as follows to remove the fan module:

1. Switch off the converter power supply.
2. If necessary, remove the converter. To do so, loosen all connections at the converter.
WARNING
Electric shock as a result of a residual charge in power components
After the power supply has been switched off, it takes up to 5 min. until the capacitors in the
converter have discharged so that the residual charge is at a non-hazardous level.
• Check the voltage at the converter connections before releasing the connections at the
converter.
3. Remove the fan as shown in the diagram.
Press

Pull
Press

4. Install the new fan in the reverse order.

5. Set the wear counter (r0277) of the fan to 0 using an operating unit such as a PC with access
to the web server.
11.2.5 Forming the DC link capacitors
Requirement
If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture, the DC link capacitors
do not need to be reformed. The date of manufacture can be taken from the serial number on
the nameplate.
NOTICE
Damage caused by supply voltage after a long storage time
After being in storage for more than two years, the converter may be damaged when the supply
voltage is switched on.
• Form the DC link capacitors of the converter.
Storage period
The storage period starts from the production date and not from the date on which the
equipment was shipped.
The production date can be derived from the following assignment to the serial number (e.g.
S ZV-P4Y7M000141 for April 2022, ST-P455500113 for April 2022):
Table 11-1 Production year and month
Symbol Year of manufacture Symbol Month of manufacture

M 2020 1 to 9 January to September
N 2021 O October
P 2022 N November
R 2023 D December
S 2024
T 2025
U 2026
V 2027
W 2028
The serial number is found on the nameplate.
Forming circuit
When DC link capacitors are formed, a defined voltage is connected to them and a defined
current flows so that the appropriate capacitor characteristics are restored for them to be re-used
as DC link capacitors.
The forming circuit can be configured using resistors.
Forming circuit for converters with 1 AC line connection

Components required for forming outside the drive line-up:
• 1 fuse switch 2-pole 230 V / 10 A
• Cable 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
• 2 resistors 1 kΩ each / 100 W (e.g. GWK150J1001KLX000, Vishay company)
Line voltage
L N PE
Fuse switch
Resistors
Converter
Motor
connection
U
W
PE
Device to be formed
Figure 11-1 Forming circuit for converters with 1 AC line connection
Forming circuit for converters with 3 AC line connection

Components required for forming outside the drive line-up:
• 1 fuse switch 3-pole 400 V
• Cable 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
• 3 resistors 1 kΩ each / 100 W (e.g. GWK150J1001KLX000, Vishay company)
Line voltage
L1 L2 L3 PE
Fuse switch
Resistors
Converter
Motor
connection
U
W
PE
Device to be formed
Figure 11-2 Forming circuit for converters with 3 AC line connection
Procedure
Proceed as follows to reform DC link capacitors:
1. Ensure that the device does not receive a power-on command (e.g. from the keyboard or
terminal block).
2. Connect the forming circuit.
3. For forming using resistors, the converter must remain in the circuit for approx. 1 h. The
resistors will become very hot if there is a fault in the unit (surface temperature > 80 °C).
CAUTION
Burns resulting from high resistor surface temperatures
The resistors can reach a high temperature if there is a fault in the converter (surface
temperature > 80 °C). You can get seriously burnt when touching the surface.
• Mount the resistors so that contact is not possible. If this is not possible, attach clearly visible
and understandable warning notices at hazardous positions.
11.2.6 Replacing the converter in a spare part scenario
11.2.6.1 Overview
Requirement
The new converter must have the same converter type and power as the converter being
replaced.
Operation with memory card

If the converter being replaced was operated with a memory card, you have the following
options in a spare part scenario:
• If the memory card contains the configuration data and the firmware of the converter,
proceed as described in Chapter "Replacing a converter using a memory card with firmware
(Page 365)".
• If the memory card only contains the configuration data, proceed as described in Chapter
"Replacing a converter using a memory card without firmware (Page 366)".
Operation without memory card

If the converter being replaced was operated without a memory card, you have the following
options in a spare part scenario:
• If you have a backup file, proceed as described in Chapter "Replacing a converter using a
backup file (no memory card) (Page 368)".
• If there is no backup file, proceed as described in Chapter "Replacing a converter without data
backup (no memory card, no backup file) (Page 371)".
Operation with Safety Integrated Functions

If the converter being replaced was operated with Safety Integrated Functions, an acceptance
test must be carried out after the replacement. You can find more information in Chapter
"Information pertaining to component replacements (Page 142)".
11.2.6.2 Replacing a converter using a memory card with firmware
Overview
If you retentively saved the configuration of the converter being replaced after commissioning,
all configuration data are stored in the "USER" folder on the memory card.
Requirement
• The converter being replaced was operated with a memory card.
• The memory card contains the firmware files and the configuration data of the converter
being replaced.
• The rated power of the replacement device is the same as the rated power of the converter
being replaced.
• The replacement device is unused or has been reset to the factory setting.
Procedure
1. Switch off the supply voltage to the converter.
2. Remove the memory card from the converter.
3. Check that all parts of the device are in a no-voltage condition.
4. Release all of the connections at the converter, replace the converter and re-establish the
connections.
5. Insert the memory card into the new converter.
If the firmware version in the replacement device differs from the firmware version in the
converter being replaced, the converter performs a firmware update. Switch the supply
voltage to the converter off and on again after the update.
More information
There is more information about installation in the following chapters:
• "Installing the converter (Page 157)"
• "Connecting the converter (Page 168)"
See also
Firmware update via memory card (Page 358)
11.2.6.3 Replacing a converter using a memory card without firmware
Overview
all configuration data are stored in the "USER" folder on the memory card.
The procedure is described below using the web server as an example.
Requirement
• The converter being replaced was operated with a memory card.
• The memory card contains the configuration data of the converter being replaced.
being replaced.
Procedure
2. Remove the memory card from the converter.
connections.
6. Connect your operating unit to the converter via the service interface X127.
When the web server is called for the first time, the function view appears with the basic
settings.
8. Make the following basic settings:
– Preferred language of the user interface
– Converter date and time; either manually or via NTP
9. Click on the "Next" button.
You are taken to the Security Wizard.
10.Select the option "Exit the Security Wizard and continue with low security settings".
(Page 240)".
11.Check the installed firmware version on the home page of the web server.
– If the firmware in the replacement device < the firmware in the replaced converter,
proceed as described in the next step.
Note
Loss of configuration data
If you skip the next step, the converter will be reset to factory settings at the next ramp-
up. The configuration data will be lost.
– If the firmware in the replacement device ≥ the firmware in the replaced converter,
continue with step 13.
12.Perform a firmware update to a firmware ≥ the firmware in the replaced converter.
You can find more information on updating the firmware using the web server in Chapter
"Firmware update (Page 243)".
13.Switch off the supply voltage to the converter.

14.Insert the memory card into the converter.
15.Switch on the supply voltage to the converter.
– The converter imports the settings from the memory card during ramp-up.
– Following ramp-up, commissioning is completed.
16.Log in to the web server via the IP address of the converter, e.g. https://169.254.11.22.
17.Save the settings retentively using the Save button .
More information
• There is more information about installation in the following chapters:
– "Installing the converter (Page 157)"
– "Connecting the converter (Page 168)"
• You can find information about all options in the firmware update in Chapter "Converter
firmware update (Page 358)".
• Information about available firmware versions can be found on this website (https://
11.2.6.4 Replacing a converter using a backup file (no memory card)
Overview
and created a backup file, all configuration data are stored in the backup file.
The procedure is described below using the web server as an example.
Requirement
• The backup file was created in the web server with the function "Save drive data to backup
file".
• The backup file is in the file directory of your operating unit.
being replaced.
Procedure
connections.

5. Connect your operating unit to the converter via the service interface X127.
When the web server is called for the first time, the function view appears with the basic
settings.
7. Make the following basic settings:
– Preferred language of the user interface
– Converter date and time; either manually or via NTP
8. Click on the "Next" button.
You are taken to the Security Wizard.
9. Select the option "Exit the Security Wizard and continue with low security settings".
(Page 240)".
10.Check the installed firmware version on the home page of the web server.
– If the firmware in the replacement device < the firmware in the replaced converter,
proceed as described in the next step.
Note
Loss of configuration data
If you skip the next step, the converter will be reset to factory settings at the next ramp-
up. The configuration data will be lost.
– If the firmware in the replacement device ≥ the firmware in the replaced converter,
continue with step 12.
11.Perform a firmware update to a firmware ≥ the firmware in the replaced converter.
You can find more information on updating the firmware using the web server in Chapter
"Firmware update (Page 243)".
12.Call the function view "Backup and restore".
13.In the area "Restore drive data from backup file", click on the "Click to select file, or drag and
drop file here" button.
A dialog window opens.
14.In your file directory, select the backup file.
15.Click "Restore".
– The backup file is checked and loading begins.
– To load the settings to the converter, a ramp-up (reset) is initiated.
When the process has been completed successfully, a corresponding message is
displayed.
– The current settings are displayed after the ramp-up (reset).
16.If the UMAC settings are changed through loading of the backup file, you may be logged out
of the web server. Now log back in to the web server.
17.Save the settings retentively using the Save button .
More information
• Information about installation can be found in the following chapters:
• You can find information about all options in the firmware update in Chapter "Converter
firmware update (Page 358)".
• Information about available firmware versions can be found on this website (https://
11.2.6.5 Replacing a converter without data backup (no memory card, no backup file)
Requirement
The replacement device is unused or has been reset to the factory setting.
Procedure
connections.
5. Carry out a complete commissioning procedure with a commissioning tool.
More information
• Information about installation can be found in the following chapters:
• Information about performing commissioning can be found in the following chapters:
– "Commissioning (web server) (Page 193)"
– "Commissioning (Startdrive) (Page 247)"
Technical specifications 12
12.1 Line connection conditions for the S210 converter system with
the motors 1FK2/1FT2
Description
The drive system is designed for connection to grounded TN/TT and non-grounded IT line
systems.
Depending on the motor/converter combination and the planned installation altitude, the
following constraints must be taken into account regarding the line connection.
Motor Converter Converter input voltage Permissible line system config‐ Permissible line system config‐
urations for installation alti‐ urations for installation alti‐
tude 0 … 2000 m tude 2001 … 4000 m
240 V 1 AC 1 AC 200 ... 240 V ±10% • TN and TT line systems with Install an isolation transformer
grounding at any potential and ground the secondary side
at any potential.
• IT line systems 1)
240 V 3 AC 3 AC 200 ... 240 V ±10% • TN and TT line systems with • TN and TT line systems with
400 V grounded neutral point or grounded neutral point
line conductor • IT line systems
• IT line systems Install an isolation trans‐
Install an isolation trans‐ former and ground the sec‐
former and ground the sec‐ ondary side at the neutral
ondary side at the neutral point.
point.
400 V 3 AC 3 AC 380 ... 480 V ±10% • TN and TT line systems with Install an isolation transformer
grounded neutral point and ground the secondary side
at the neutral point.
• IT line systems
Install an isolation trans‐
former and ground the sec‐
ondary side at the neutral
point.
1)
With the grounding screw removed, see Chapter "Converters with 3 AC line connection
(Page 66)".
NOTICE
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
In the event of a ground fault in the IT supply system, the motor insulation can be damaged by
the higher voltage to ground.
• Use a ground fault monitor.
• Eliminate the ground fault as quickly as possible.
Technical specifications
12.2 Technical data and properties of the motor
12.2.1 Technical features
Property Version
Type of motor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Rotor inertia 1F☐21 - High Dynamic - motor with low rotor inertia
1F☐22 - Compact - motor with medium rotor inertia
Cooling Natural cooling
Stator winding insulation according to 1F☐2☐02, 1F☐2☐03:
EN 60034‑1 Temperature class 130 (B) for a winding temperature of ΔT = 80 K at an ambient
(IEC 60034‑1) temperature of +40 °C
1F☐2☐04, 1F☐2☐05, 1F☐2☐06, 1F☐2☐08, 1F☐2☐10:
Temperature class 155 (F) for a winding overtemperature of ΔT = 100 K at an
ambient temperature of +40 °C
Impulse voltage-insulation class according IVIC: C
to EN 60034‑18‑41(IEC 60034‑18‑41)
Operating range -15 to +40 °C, derating at higher temperatures
Installation altitude (acc. to EN 60034‑1 ≤ 1000 m above sea level, otherwise power derating
and IEC 60034‑1)
Type of construction acc. to EN 60034‑7 IM B5 (IM V1, IM V3)
(IEC 60034‑7)
Degree of protection according to IP64, optionally IP65 or IP67 (IP67 only for 1FT2, but not for frame size 20)
EN 60034‑5 (IEC 60034‑5)
Temperature monitoring Thermal motor model
Paint finish Anthracite (RAL 7016)
Shaft extension according to DIN 748-3 Plain shaft, optionally with feather key and half-key balancing,
(IEC 60072‑1)
Radial eccentricity, concentricity and axial Tolerance N (normal)
eccentricity acc. to DIN 42955
(IEC 60072‑1) 1)
Vibration severity grade according to Grade A is maintained up to rated speed
EN 60034‑14
(IEC 60034‑14)
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) according to 1F☐2102, 1F☐2☐03, 1F☐2☐04: 55 dB(A)
DIN EN ISO 1680, max. tolerance + 3 dB(A) 1F☐2☐05, 1F☐2☐06: 65dB(A)
1F☐2☐08, 1F☐2210: 70dB(A)
Encoder systems, built-in with DRIVE-CLiQ • AS22DQC, absolute encoder single-turn, 22 bit (identification letter: S)
interface • AM22DQC, absolute encoder, 22 bit + 12 bit multiturn (identification letter: M)
• AS26DQC, absolute encoder single-turn 26 bit (identification letter: B) (only
for 1FT2)
• AM26DQC, absolute encoder 26 bit + 12 bit multiturn (identification letter: C)
(only for 1FT2)
Connection One cable system (OCC), rotatable
Holding brake Optional integrated holding brake
1)
Shaft extension run-out, concentricity of centering edge, and perpendicularity of the mounting flange to the axis of the shaft
extension.
12.2.2 Permissible environmental conditions for the motor
Environmental conditions for transport in the transport packaging according to Class 2K3 to DIN EN IEC 60721‑3‑2,
except for the "air temperature" and "condensation" environmental factors
Climatic environmental con‐ ‑15 °C … +70 °C
ditions
Highest relative humidity < 95% at 40 °C, condensation not permissible
Mechanical environmental Shock and vibration permissible according to 3M8 to EN 60721‑3‑3: Single shocks (6 ms) max.
conditions 250 m/s²
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 2C2
substances
Biological environmental Suitable according to Class 2B2
conditions
Environmental conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging according to Class 1K3 to DIN EN IEC
60721‑3‑1, except for environmental variables "air temperature", "highest relative humidity" and "condensation"
Climatic environmental con‐ ‑15 °C … +55 °C
ditions
Highest relative humidity < 60%, condensation not permissible
Mechanical environmental Vibration-free storage space, vrms < 0.2 mm/s
conditions
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 1C2
substances
Biological environmental Suitable according to Class 1B2
conditions
Duration • Six months for the above-mentioned conditions.
• Special preservation measures are required for storage periods of 6 months up to a maxi‐
mum of two years. For more information, please contact your local sales partner.
Environmental conditions during operation according to 3K4 to DIN EN IEC 60721‑3‑3, except for environmental vari‐
ables "low air temperature", "condensation" and "low air pressure"
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without limitations
You can find more information in Chapter "Derating factors (Page 378)".
Climatic environmental con‐ • Temperature range: -15 °C1) … +40 °C
ditions1) • Recommended relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Permissible relative humidity from 0.25% at 20 °C, dew point: - 50 °C
• Absolute air humidity: 1 ... 29 g/m³
• Rate of temperature change2): 0.5°/min
• Atmospheric pressure: 891), 3) ... 106 kPa4)
• Solar radiation: 700 W/m² 2)
• Movement of the air: 1.0 m/s
• Water (other than rain): See protection class
Mechanical environmental • Vibration levels permissible according to Class 3M8 to EN 60721‑3‑3: Max. 50 m/s²
conditions • Shocks permissible according to Class 3M8 to EN 60721‑3‑3
Protection against chemical Protected according to 3C2 to DIN EN IEC 60721‑3‑3
substances
Biological environmental Suitable according to 3B2 to DIN EN IEC 60721‑3‑3
conditions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 acc. to IEC 61800‑5‑1
Cooling air Clean and dry air
The motors are not suitable for operation:
• In a vacuum5)
• In salt-laden or aggressive atmospheres
• Outdoors
1)
Increased ruggedness with regard to low air temperature and low atmospheric pressure better than 3K3 according to DIN
EN IEC 60721‑3‑3
2)
Averaged over a period of 5 min
3)
The limit value of 89 kPa covers applications at altitudes up to 1000 m.
4)
Conditions in mines are not considered.
5)
Operation in a vacuum is not permissible because of the low dielectric strength and poor heat dissipation.
12.2.3 Protection against electromagnetic fields (motor)
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
WARNING
Malfunction of active implants due to magnetic and electrical fields
Electric motors pose a danger to people with active medical implants, e.g. heart pacemakers,
who come close to these motors.
• If you are affected, stay a minimum distance of 30 cm away from the motors (tripping
threshold for static magnetic fields of 0.5 mT according to Directive 2013/35/EU).
12.2.4 Cooling
Description
The 1F☐2 is a non-ventilated motor.
To ensure sufficient heat dissipation when installed, the motor requires a minimum clearance
of 100 mm from adjacent components on three sides.
• Maintain theses clearances irrespective of the following mounting variants.
Non-thermally insulated mounting

Some of the motor power loss is dissipated through the flange when the motor is connected to
the mounting surface.
• Observe the following mounting conditions for the specified motor data:
Shaft height Steel plate, width x height x thickness (in mm)

1F☐2☐02 200 x 200 x 6
1F☐2☐03
1F☐2☐04 250 x 250 x 6
1F☐2☐05 300 x 300 x 12
1F☐2☐06
1F☐2☐08 450 x 370 x 30
1F☐2☐10
The data in the table refers to an ambient temperature of 40 °C and an installation altitude
up to 1000 m above sea level.
If the environmental conditions are different, derating may be required. You can find
information on this in the chapter "Derating factors (Page 378)".
For larger mounting surfaces, the heat dissipation conditions improve.
Thermally insulated mounting without additional mounted components

The following description applies only to motors with frame sizes 1F☐2☐02 ... 1F☐2☐04.
For naturally cooled motors, you must reduce the S1/characteristic as follows:
• Reduce the motor static torque by 20 % to 30 %.
• Reduce the torque at 3000 r/min by 40 % to 50 %.
Thermal motor protection

The converter monitors the motor temperature based on a thermal motor model and issues the
alarm "Motor overtemperature" before the maximum temperature is reached. If the motor
exceeds the maximum temperature, the converter switches off the motor with the fault
message "Motor overtemperature".
If the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C, you need to set the ambient temperature at the
converter so that the motor is reliably protected.
• To do this, select parameter p0613 at the converter.
• Set the maximum ambient temperature that occurs.
Parameter r0034 indicates the thermal load of the motor as a percentage. The reading is
influenced by the ambient temperature selected in parameter p0613.
You can find additional information in the parameter lists "Parameters (Page 627)".
Motor overload protection according to IEC 61800‑5‑1 Ed.3 / UL 61800‑5‑1 Ed.2

The converter complies with the motor overload protection according to IEC 61800‑5‑1 Ed.3 or
UL 61800‑5‑1 Ed.2; to achieve this, you must make the following settings after commissioning.
Procedure
Proceed as follows, to activate motor overload protection according to IEC 61800‑5‑1 Ed.3 /
UL 61800‑5‑1 Ed.2:
1. Set p5375.0 = 1
2. Set p5375.1 = 1
12.2.5 Derating factors
Description
Due to the decreasing air pressure in higher installation altitudes, the cooling of the motor
deteriorates. Therefore, reduce the power of the motor as the installation altitude increases.
Multiply the permissible torques or powers by the factors from the following table.
Reduce the torques and powers according to the values determined.
Factors for power derating depending on the installation altitude and the ambient temperature
Table 12-1 Factors for power derating depending on the installation altitude and the ambient
temperature
Installation altitude above Ambient temperature in °C

sea level in m 30 40 45 50 55
1000 1.05 1 0.95 0.89 0.84
2000 1 0.95 0.86 0.8 0.73
3000 0.95 0.89 0.76 0.69 0.62
4000 0.89 0.84 0.65 0.57 0.47
Calculate the derating factor for ambient temperatures that are not shown here and
installation altitudes below the maximum values by interpolating. For example: 40 °C at
1500 m above sea level = derating factor 0.965.
Calculating the reduced characteristic curve

MS1 red (n) = xd • MS1 (n / xd)
MS1 red Reduced motor torque for S1 operation at the required installation altitude and
ambient temperature
MS1 Motor torque for S1 operation at an ambient temperature of 40 °C and 1000 m
above sea level (see Chapter "Technical specifications and characteristics")
n Motor speed
xd Derating factor from the table "Factors for reducing the power..." above
Graphic representation of the derating factors
Figure 12-1 Example of a derating factor
Factors for reducing the DC link voltage depending on the installation altitude
The voltage strength of the motor insulation is reduced for installation altitudes exceeding 2000
m above sea level. Check whether it is necessary to limit the DC link voltage.
Reduce the permissible DC link voltage with increasing installation altitude due to the
decreasing air pressure.
Table 12-2 Limit values for the DC link voltage for motors of the 1FK2/1FS2/1FT2 series at
installation altitudes below 2000 m mean sea level
Motors with the following rated speed in the ar‐ Max. permissible converter DC link voltage in V
ticle number (part number)
1F☐2☐☐☐-☐☐X☐☐..., X =
G 375
B, C, F, H, K 720
Table 12-3 Typical DC link voltage of the SINAMICS converters
Network Infeed DC link voltage in V

1 AC 230 V Non-regulated 248
Network Infeed DC link voltage in V

As the DC link voltage is reduced, the converter output voltage also decreases. This reduces
the operating range in the M-n diagram.
The M-n diagrams are provided in the following chapters:
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V
(Page 405)"
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V
(Page 435)"
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V
(Page 463)"
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V
(Page 504)"
See also
Technical specifications of the converter (Page 547)
12.2.6 Degree of protection
Description
The degree of protection of a motor is marked, for example, using "IP64".
The motor degree of protection is classified according to EN 60034‑5 (IEC 60034‑5).
The combination of "IP" + 2 numbers means the following:
IP = International Protection
1st Number = Protection against the ingress of foreign bodies
2. Number = Protection against the ingress of water
DIN 60034‑5 is valid for water as potentially occurring medium, not for oil or other creeping
fluids.
Configure the motor in the required degree of protection.
Degrees of protection available for the 1FK2 and the 1FT2
Degree of protection 1FK2 1FT2

IP64 x x
IP65 x x
IP67 x *)
*) Not applicable for 1F☐2☐02
The degree of protection is specified on the rating plate.

Motors with degree of protection IP65 and IP67 have a radial shaft sealing ring.
1F☐2☐02 ... 1F☐2☐04 1F☐2☐05 ... 1F☐2☐10

① radial shaft seal ring
For 1F☐2☐02, 1F☐2☐03 and 1F☐2☐04, the radial shaft sealing ring shortens the length of
shaft end that can be used.
Note
It is permissible that the radial shaft sealing ring runs dry.
With degrees of protection IP65 and IP67, it is not permissible for liquid to collect on the flange.
The service life of the radial shaft sealing ring is approximately 25000 operating hours.
You can find more information in Chapter "Shaft extension (Page 384)".
12.2.7 Balancing
The motors are balanced according to EN 60034-14.
Motors with featherkey in the shaft are half-key balanced.
A mass equalization for the protruding half key must be taken into account for the output
elements.
12.2.8 Vibration response
Vibration severity grade

Motors with keyway are balanced by the manufacturer using a half-key.
The vibration response of the system at the location of use is influenced by output elements,
any built-on parts, the alignment, the installation, and external vibrations. This can change
the vibration values of the motor.
The motors conform to vibration severity grade A according to EN 60034-14 (IEC 60034-14).
The specified values refer only to the motor. The installation-dependent system vibration
behavior can increase these values at the motor.
The vibration severity grade is maintained up to the rated speed (nN)

WF꫻QFSNNNT

(SBEF"

OSNJO
Figure 12-2 Vibration severity levels
Permissible vibration in operation

In order to guarantee the proper function of the motor and not to impair the lifetime of the
bearing, the following vibration values must be observed during operation.
• Vibration velocity1) Vrms according to ISO 10816 Max. 4.5 mm/s

• Vibration acceleration apeak axial2) 50 m/s2
• Vibration acceleration apeak radial2) 50 m/s2
1)
To assess the vibration velocity, the measuring equipment must fulfill the requirements of ISO 2954.
2)
The vibration acceleration is evaluated in the frequency range of 10 Hz to 2000 Hz.
The maximum peak in the measurement time range is considered.
Select the measuring points according to ISO 10816‑1 Section 3.2. The vibration values must
not exceed the specified limits at any measuring point.
① End shield DE radial

② End shield DE radial
③ End shield DE axial

④ End shield NDE radial
⑤ End shield NDE axial
⑥ End shield NDE radial

Measuring points for vibration values
12.2.9 Shaft extension

The motors are supplied with cylindrical shaft extensions. The shaft end usually has a centering
thread according to DIN 332, form DR.
Optionally, a shaft extension with keyway and fitted key is available.
With motors 1F☐2☐02 ... 1F☐2☐04, the usable shaft end is reduced by the radial shaft
sealing ring with IP65 degree of protection.
Dimensions of shaft ends
Motor Shaft extension with Shaft extension with Feather key Centering
IP64 IP65 Width x height x thread
Diameter x length in Diameter x length in length in mm
mm mm
1F☐2☐02 8 (h6) × 25 8 (h6) × 18 2 × 2 × 10 M3
1F☐2☐03 14 (h6) × 30 14 (h6) × 21.5 5 × 5 × 16 M5
11 (k6) × 23 1) - - M4
Motor Shaft extension with Shaft extension with Feather key Centering
IP64 IP65 Width x height x thread
Diameter x length in Diameter x length in length in mm
mm mm
1F☐2☐04 19 (k6) × 40 19 (k6) × 32 6 × 6 × 22 M6
14 (k6) x 30 - - M5
1F☐2☐05 19 (k6) × 40 6 × 6 × 32 M6
1F☐2☐06 24 (k6) × 50 8 × 7 × 40 M8
1F☐2☐08 32 (k6) × 58 10 × 8 × 45 M12
1F☐2☐10 38 (k6) × 80 10 × 8 × 70 M12
1)
The optional 11 mm x 23 mm shaft extension is only available without a keyway and without a shaft
sealing ring (IP65).
12.2.10 Radial eccentricity, concentricity and axial eccentricity
Description
The shaft and flange accuracies for 1F☐2 motors are implemented according to DIN 42955
(IEC 60072‑1) as standard (Normal class).
Radial eccentricity tolerance of the shaft to the frame axis (referred to cylindrical shaft ends)
Motor Standard (Normal class)

1F☐2☐02 0.03 mm
1F☐2☐03 0.035 mm
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05 0.04 mm
1F☐2☐06
1F☐2☐08 0.05 mm
1F☐2☐10
O
O

① Motor
② Motor shaft
③ Dial gauge
Figure 12-3 Checking the radial eccentricity (diagram with example)
Concentricity and axial eccentricity tolerance of the flange surface to the shaft axis (referred to
the centering diameter of the mounting flange)
Motor Standard (Normal class)

1F☐2☐02
1F☐2☐03 0.08 mm
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05
1F☐2☐06
1F☐2☐08 0.1 mm
1F☐2☐10
$ %

PP
PP

A Check for concentricity ① Motor

B Check for axial eccentricity ② Motor shaft
③ Dial gauge
Figure 12-4 Checking the concentricity and axial eccentricity (diagram with example)
12.2.11 Axial and radial forces
Permissible axial forces
Type Axial force, static 1)

FA stat / N
1F☐2☐02 30
1F☐2☐03 75
1F☐2☐04 100
1F☐2105 120
1F☐2106 200
1F☐2205 120
1F☐2206 200
1F☐2208 300
1F☐2210 450
1)
The specified axial forces are determined by the spring loading and therefore also apply for motors with
holding brake.
Note
Applications with an angular toothed pinion directly on the motor shaft are not permitted if the
permissible axial forces are exceeded.
Permissible radial forces

As a result of the bearing arrangement, the 1F☐2 is designed for aligned forces. Forces such as
these occur for belt drives, for example.
All radial forces always refer to aligned forces.
NOTICE
Motor damage caused by circulating forces
Circulating forces can cause bearing motion, and therefore damage the motor.
• Avoid rotating forces.
Point of application of radial forces FR at the shaft extension
'3 Y
FR Point of application of the radial force

x Distance between where the radial force is applied and the shaft shoulder in mm
Figure 12-5 Force application point at the shaft extension
The following diagrams indicate the maximum permissible radial force for the corresponding
motor frame size. It depends on the force application point and the average speed for a nominal
bearing service life (L10h) of 25000 h.
Note
The radial force diagrams of the 1FK2 motors also apply to 1FT2 motors.
Radial force diagram 1F☐2☐02
Radial force diagram 1F☐2105
12.2.12 Available encoders
Encoders that can be ordered for the 1FK2
Absolute encoder single-turn, Absolute encoder,

22 bit 22 bit +12 bit multiturn
Encoder designation AS22DQC AM22DQC
Identification in the article num‐ S M
ber
Resolution 4,194,304 = 22 bit 4,194,304 = 22 bit
Absolute position Yes, one revolution Yes, 4096 revolutions (12 bit)
Angle error ± 100" ± 100"
Encoders that can be ordered for the 1FT2
Absolute encoder, single-turn Absolute encoder, multiturn

22 bit 26 bit 22 bit +12 bit 26 bit +12 bit
Encoder designa‐ AS22DQC AS26DQC AM22DQC AM26DQC
tion
Identification in S B M C
the article number
Absolute encoder, single-turn Absolute encoder, multiturn

22 bit 26 bit 22 bit +12 bit 26 bit +12 bit
Resolution 4,194,304 = 22 bit 67,108,864 4,194,304 = 22 bit 67,108,864
= 26 bit = 26 bit
Absolute position Yes, one revolution Yes, 4096 revolutions (12 bit)
Angle error ± 100" ± 40" ± 100" ± 40"
12.2.13 Holding brake data

The holding brake is used to clamp the motor shaft when the motor is at a standstill. The holding
brake is not a working brake for braking the rotating motor. When the motor is at a standstill, the
holding brake is designed for at least 5 million switching cycles.
Limited EMERGENCY STOP operation is permissible. Take into account the maximum
permissible single operating energy as well as service life, total operating energy of the
brake.
WARNING
Unintentional movements through inadequate braking effect
If you use the holding brake incorrectly, e.g. as an operating brake or you ignore the permissible
operating energy of the brake, then the brake will be subject to excessive and impermissible
wear. As a consequence, there may be no brake effect. Unintentional movements of the
machine or system can result in death or serious injury.
• Observe the permissible number of operating cycles and EMERGENCY STOP properties.
• Operate the motor only in conjunction with an intact brake.
• Avoid repeated brief acceleration of the motor against a holding brake that is still closed.
The holding brakes of the 1F☐2 have a torsional backlash of less than 1.5°.
Description
The following table lists technical data regarding the holding brakes for operation with a
SINAMICS S210 converter.
Motor ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ 1) ⑦ ⑧ ⑨
type M4 / Nm M1m / Nm M1max / topen_f / tclose_f / Wmax / J WTot / kJ Ih / A Io_n / A toex / ms
Nm ms ms
For spring-loaded brake
1F☐2☐02 0.32 0.32 1 25 20 7.4 1.75 0.1 0.6 50
1F☐2☐03 1.3 1.3 3.9 40 30 62 17.5 0.15 0.8 60
1F☐2☐04 3.3 3.3 9 50 40 270 120 0.2 1.2 80
For permanent-magnet brake
1F☐2☐05 8 5 18 35 20 568 284 0.3
1F☐2206 13 6.5 1548
1F☐2106 16 9 35 1065 774 0.35 1.1 120
1F☐2☐08- 19 12 37 35 2000 1800 0.4 1.2
3
70

Motor ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ 1) ⑦ ⑧ ⑨
type M4 / Nm M1m / Nm M1max / topen_f / tclose_f / Wmax / J WTot / kJ Ih / A Io_n / A toex / ms
Nm ms ms
1F☐2☐08- 40 4800
4 32 17 70 120 2400 0.5 1.4 180
1F☐2☐08-
5
1F☐2☐10- 6658
3
1F☐2☐10- 55 26 100 130 65 8700 3800 0.5 1.5 200
4
1F☐2☐10-
5
Higher performance brake for 1FT22☐☐-☐☐☐2☐-☐☐☐☐
1FT2208- 32 17 70 120 40 4800 2400 0.5 1.4 180
☐☐☐2☐
1FT2208-
☐☐☐3☐
1FT2210- 55 26 100 130 65 8700 3800 0.5 1.5 200
☐☐☐2☐
1FT2210-
☐☐☐3☐
1)
Maximum of three consecutive EMERGENCY STOP procedures. Maximum 25% of all EMERGENCY STOP procedures as high-
energy stops with Wmax.
① Holding torque M4
The holding torque M4 is the highest permissible torque for the closed brake in steady-state
operation without slip (holding function when motor is at standstill). The data applies for the
state at operating temperature (120 °C).
② Dynamic braking torque M1m
The dynamic braking torque M1m is the smallest mean dynamic braking torque that can occur
for an EMERGENCY STOP.
③ Maximum dynamic braking torque M1max
The maximum dynamic braking torque M1max is the greatest dynamic braking torque that can
occur for an EMERGENCY STOP.
Based on M1max, you can assess whether mounted mechanical elements, e.g. a gearbox, can
withstand the maximum possible peak torques occurring on EMERGENCY STOP.
④ Opening time t0 and ⑤ closing time tc1
The delay times that occur when switching the brake to and tc1 are saved in the motor and are
automatically taken into consideration.
After activation of the holding brake (opening), the speed/velocity setpoint remains at "Zero"
during the opening time to. The speed/velocity setpoint is only enabled after the opening
time t0 has elapsed.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and activation of the holding brake (closing), the drive still remains in
closed-loop control with speed/velocity setpoint "Zero" during closing time tc1. The pulses are
only canceled after this.
⑥ Maximum permissible single operating energy Wmax

The maximum permissible single operating energy of an individual EMERGENCY STOP
operation.
After an EMERGENCY STOP with the maximum single operating energy, allow a cooling time
of at least 3 minutes before you operate the motor again.
⑦ Total operating energy (service life) Wtotal
The total operating energy is the sum of the single operating energy (operating energy for
each EMERGENCY STOP procedure). If you exceed the total operating energy, problem-free
functioning of the brake can no longer be guaranteed.
• Refurbish the motor.
⑧ Holding current Ih
The holding current Ih keeps the holding brake open. The holding current Ih continues to load
the 24-V power supply of the converter after time toex until the brake is released.
⑨ Typical opening current Io for overexcitation time toex
After activation of the holding brake (opening), the break-induced current I0 places a load
on the 24 V power supply of the converter for the specified overexcitation time toex. This
break-induced current applies to a brake temperature of approx. 20 °C.
At a brake temperature of -15 °C, the break-induced current can increase by up to 30%.
Formula to calculate the operating energy per braking operation

W BR = (J Mot Br + J load ) • nmot² / 182.4
W Br / J Operating energy per braking operation

n Mot / r/min Speed at which the brake is engaged
J Mot Br / kgm2 Rotor moment of inertia of the motor with brake
You can find this information in these chapters:
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3
AC 240 V (Page 405)"
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3
AC 480 V (Page 435)"
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3
AC 240 V (Page 463)"
• "Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3
AC 480 V (Page 504)"
J load / kgm2 Load moment of inertia of the mounting part on the motor with brake (kgm2)
182.4 Constant for calculating the circular frequency and SI units
12.2.14 Options
Description
The following options are available for the 1FT2.
The selected options are noted on the rating plate as order codes.
Option Order code

Acceptance test certificate B02
Coaxial planetary gearboxes and right angle planetary gearboxes A☐☐, B☐☐ or C☐☐
Increased chemical resistance N16
Pressure compensation connector Q20
Metal rating plate Q31
Paint finish X0☐
Customer data on the rating plate Y84
SIMOTICS 1P 1FT2104-4AK10-1SA0
3 ~ Mot. S YF JO662 2670 01 002
Z: Q31
M0 1,27 Nm I0 2,4 A nmax7400 /min
MN 1,27 Nm IN 2,4 A nn 3000 /min
EN6003
m: 3 kg IP 64 IC410
Encoder AS22DQC G95 +
Brake 24 VDC
RN 000
① Order codes for the selected options

Figure 12-6 Rating plate 1FT2 with options (diagram showing an example)
12.2.14.1 Option: Planetary gearbox (Axx, Bxx or Cxx)
Overview of planetary gearboxes for S-1FK2 and S-1FT2 servomotors

You can optionally combine the servomotors SIMOTICS S-1FK2 or S-1FT2, collectively referred to
as "1F☐2" below, with various planetary gearboxes to form compact servo planetary geared
motors.
The coaxial planetary gearboxes NRB, NRK and NLC and the right angle planetary gearboxes
NRBW, NRKW and NLCW can be used.
Right angle planetary gearboxes are planetary gearboxes with an output shaft arranged at an
angle with a bevel gear stage.
The coaxial planetary gearboxes are available for the 1FK2 and the 1FT2.
The right angle planetary gearboxes are only available for the 1FT2 and are identified with an
extra "W".
The following table shows the possible combinations of planetary gearboxes with
servomotors.
Coaxial planetary gearbox for 1F☐2 Right angle planetary gearbox for 1FT2
NRB NRBW
NRK NRKW
NLC NLCW
1F☐2 geared motors are specified and delivered as complete units. All outstanding
performance data are matched to the motor-gearbox combination.
The illustrations show the planetary gearboxes mounted on the S-1FT2 servomotor:
Table 12-4 Coaxial planetary gearbox series
NRB NRK NLC
Table 12-5 Right angle planetary gearbox series
NRBW NRKW NLCW
Motor versions
Two motor versions are available for 1F☐2 geared motors.
High-Dynamic motors Compact motors

Series 1FK21☐☐-☐ 1FK22☐☐-☐
1FT21☐☐-☐ 1FT22☐☐-☐
Dimensioning • Low intrinsic moment of inertia • Average intrinsic moment of inertia
• For applications in which small masses are • For applications in which large loads are moved
moved with maximum dynamics and precision with dynamics and precision
• In connection with planetary gearboxes with
higher transmission ratios for applications with
inertia ratios which are difficult to regulate via
control technology
Planetary gearboxes
Planetary gearboxes N NRB, NRBW, NRK, NRKW, NLC and NLCW are maintenance-free due to
their lifetime lubrication and can be mounted in any mounting position without restriction.
Table 12-6 Design and technical features of planetary gearboxes
Planetary gearboxes NRB, NRBW NRK, NRKW NLC, NLCW

Illustrations of coaxial plane‐
tary gearboxes NRB, NRK and
NLC
Illustrations of right angle

planetary gearboxes
NRBW, NRKW and NLCW
Special features • For high speeds • For higher radial and axial For high radial and axial
• Lightweight gearbox forces exerted on the out‐ forces exerted by preloaded
put shaft by large ball tapered roller bearings
bearings
• Low friction for maximum
speeds
Transmission ratio i 3 ... 512 3 ... 100 3 ... 100
Gear stages z 1-, 2- and 3-stage 1- and 2-stage 1- and 2-stage
Torsional backlash φ2 of plan‐ 6 ... 22 for NRB 8 ... 20 for NRK 7 ... 10 for NLC
etary gearboxes in arcmin 11 .. 28 for NRBW 11 ... 25 for NRKW 11 ... 18 for NLCW

Gearbox type IM B14 IM B14 IM B15
Degree of protection IP64 IP64 IP65
Power density +++ ++ ++
Bearing loading capacity + ++ +++
Suitable for high speeds ++ ++ +
Degree of protection + + ++
Applications Pharmaceutical and medical Automation and assembly technology
technology
Foodstuff industry - • Foodstuff industry
• Pressure
Packaging, auxiliary axes in machine tools
Options • Plain shaft or solid shaft with feather key
• Standard lubrication or food-safe lubricant
12.2.14.2 Option: Motors with increased chemical resistance (N16)
Description
You can order 1F☐2 motors with increased chemical resistance.
The motor is classified according to corrosivity category according to DIN EN ISO 12944-2.
With this option, the motor has corrosion protection according to Class C4.
This option is available for 1FT2 for all frame sizes from 1FT2☐03.
For more information, refer to the product information for Option N16 (https://
Additional characteristics of the motor with option "Increased chemical resistance"

• 4-layer paint system (PS Premium paint system)
• Nickel-plated plug connectors
• Resistant to greases, mineral oils, aliphatic solvents (10%), caustic soda (10%)
Permissible environmental conditions when using the motor

• Indoor and outdoor installations,
when installing motors outdoor, we recommend that the motors are protected using a
suitable weather protection cover. Especially prevent solar radiation from increasing the
motor temperature.
• Chemical plants, swimming pools, wastewater treatment plants
• Electroplating facilities and boathouses above seawater
• Industrial areas and coastal areas with moderate salt levels
Motor applications
Typical applications for these versions are for plants and systems in the foodstuff industry - as
well as machine tools, for example.
The paint system for these motors is resistant to a wide range of common cleaning and
disinfecting agents.
Note
The ECOLAB Deutschland GmbH company verified the resistance to cleaning and disinfecting
agents based on a material resistance test. The certificate is provided in the product information
for Option N16 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58657336).
• Check the resistance of your complete system comprising motor, connections and cables
before use.
12.2.14.3 Option: Pressure compensation (Q20)
Description
With this option, 1FT2 motors are equipped with a pressure compensation connection.
Pressure compensation is available for 1FT2 in all frame sizes with the exception of 1FT2102-
☐☐☐☐☐.
① Pressure compensation connection (closed with a plug if not used)

Figure 12-7 Connector with pressure compensation on 1FT2
The pressure compensation connector has an M5 female thread and is located in the power
connector.
Purpose of the pressure compensation

When the motor cools down after operation, underpressure can build up in the motor. This may
result in moisture ingress.
You can prevent such moisture ingress with an air supply provided by a connected pressure
compensation tube.
NOTICE
Motor damage due to continuous overpressure
The motor must not be subjected to continuous overpressure resulting from the pressure
compensation connection.
Continuous overpressure leads to motor leaks and may cause motor damage.
• Use the pressure compensation connection only for pressure compensation.
Air quality requirements for pressure compensation
Note
The connected pressure compensation tube must supply dry and dust-free air.
Use a suitable filter if necessary.
Maximum residual water content in g/m³ 0.12

Maximum residual oil content in g/m³ 0.01
Maximum residual dust in mg/m³ 0.1
Particle size for optical encoder in µm < 3
Technical specifications of the pressure compensation connection

① M5 pressure compensation connector

② Connector nipple, e.g. Festo QSM-B-M5-4-20
③ Tube, outside diameter 4 mm, inside diameter 2.5 mm.
The connection tightening torque is 3.5 .... 5 Nm.

When supplied, the M5 thread is sealed with a treated hexagon socket head cap screw
with flat head. The screw was treated with Fluid-D. The Fluid-D remains pasty and does not
harden.
Note
If necessary, you can remove the Fluid-D using a lint-free cloth and a bit of ethanol.
If there is no other way for you to seal the pressure compensation connection, e.g. using a
flat gasket, you can also treat it with Fluid-D, e.g. TEROSON 410, known as FLUID-D.
12.2.14.4 Option: Metal rating plate on the motor (Q31)

The motor rating plate is usually an adhesive label made of plastic. You can use the order code
Q31 to order a metal rating plate made of aluminum instead. The laser engraving stays legible
even in difficult ambient conditions.
12.2.14.5 Option: Special paint finish (X0x + K23)
Description
If specific color and paint/coating data are not specified when ordering, 1F☐2 motors are painted
in the standard anthracite color (RAL 7016).
1FT2 is available in various colors.

The standard paint finishes meet the requirements for environmental conditions of climate
class 3K4 according to IEC 60721‑3‑3 with the exception of the environmental variables "low
air temperature", "condensation" and "low air pressure".
The standard paint finish fulfills corrosivity category C1 according to DIN EN ISO 12944‑2
For higher corrosion protection categories, you require option "Option: Motors with increased
chemical resistance (N16) (Page 400)".
Note
You can find more information in Chapter "Permissible environmental conditions for the motor
(Page 375)".
Standard colors (option X0☐)
Designation 3-digit article designation Color pattern

RAL 9005, jet black, matte X01
RAL 9001, cream white X02
RAL 6011, reseda green X03
RAL 7032, pebble gray X04
RAL 5015, sky blue X05
RAL 1015, light ivory X06
RAL 9006, white aluminum X08
Designation 3-digit article designation Color pattern

Special paint finish corresponding to the environmental K23
conditions for the standard paint finish and for conden‐
sation on the outer motor surfaces,
primer and paint finish in RAL 7016, anthracite grey
Special paint finish as K23, but color according to color K23 + X☐☐
table
12.2.14.6 Option: Customer data on the rating plate (Y84)
Description
This option permits customer data on the rating plate of the motor. If you are ordering
electronically, you can enter the text for the rating plate when you select order code Y84.
Note
The text can be up to 20 characters long. Excess characters will be cut off. This option will have
no impact on the delivery time.
Order code Y84 is not displayed on the rating plate.
The customer data are printed on the rating plate and on the type labels for the product
packaging.
SIMOTICS 1P 1FT2104-4AK10-1SA0
3 ~ Mot. S YF JO662 2670 01 002
Z:
M0 1,27 Nm I0 2,4 A nmax7400 /min
MN 1,27 Nm IN 2,4 A nn 3000 /min
EN6003
m: 3 kg IP 64 IC410
Encoder AS22DQC G95 +
Brake 24 VDC
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX RN 000
① Field for customer data (max. 20 characters, any distribution)

Figure 12-8 Rating plate 1F☐2 with the field for customer data (diagram showing an example)
12.2.15 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3

AC 240 V
12.2.15.1 1FK2102-0AG connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V
1FK2102-0AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

Technical specifications in the SINAMICS S210 system Symbol Unit Value
Static torque M0 Nm 0.16
Stall current I0 A 0.75
Maximum permissible speed nmax r/min 8000
Maximum torque Mmax Nm 0.56
Maximum current Imax A 3.1
Thermal time constant Tth min 14
Moment of inertia Jmot kgcm 2
0.0245
Moment of inertia (with brake) Jmot br kgcm2 0.0285
Weight mmot kg 0.47
Weight (with brake) mmot br kg 0.73
Rated data for S210 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V
Rated speed nrated r/min 3000
Rated torque Mrated Nm 0.16
Rated current Irated A 0.75
Rated power Prated kW 0.05
1FK2102-1AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

Technical specifications in the SINAMICS S210 Symbol Unit Value
system
0.036
Moment of inertia (with brake) Jmot br kgcm 2
0.04
Weight mmot kg 0.6
1FK2103-2AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.093
0.112
Weight mmot kg 1.17
1FK2103-4AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.139
0.158
Weight mmot kg 1.64
12.2.15.5 1FK2104-4AF connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V
1FK2104-4AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
Rotor moment of inertia Jmot kgcm 2
0.35
Rotor moment of inertia (with brake) Jmot br kgcm 2
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
12.2.15.6 1FK2104-4AK connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC
1FK2104-4AK For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.35
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
1FK2104-5AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
12.2.15.8 1FK2104-5AK connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V
1FK2104-5AK For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
Maximum current Imax A 16
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
1FK2104-6AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
Stall current I0 A 3
Maximum torque Mmax Nm 10
0.76
0.84
Weight mmot kg 3.4
Rated current Irated A 3
12.2.15.10 1FK2105-4AF connected to 3 AC 240 V
1FK2105-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
Static torque M0 Nm 5
1.71
2.55
Weight mmot kg 5.6
Rated data for S210 connected to 3 AC 240 V
Rated torque Mrated Nm 5
1FK2105-6AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
2.65
3.5
Weight mmot kg 7.7
12.2.15.12 1FK2106-3AF connected to 240 V 3 AC
1FK2106-3AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
4.6
6.3
Weight mmot kg 7.4
Weight (with brake) mmot br kg 9
1FK2106-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
6
7.6
Weight mmot kg 9
1FK2106-6AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
8.7
10.4
Weight mmot kg 11.8
1FK2203-2AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.2
0.22
Weight mmot kg 1.15
1FK2203-4AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.35
0.37
Weight mmot kg 1.48
1FK2204-5AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
1FK2204-5AK For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
1FK2204-6AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
1.61
1.69
Weight mmot kg 3.5
1FK2205-2AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
3.15
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
1FK2205-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
5.1
6
Weight mmot kg 5.2
1FK2206-2AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
7.8
9.4
Weight mmot kg 6.3
1FK2206-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
15.1
16.8
Weight mmot kg 8.9
Figure 12-9 1FK2206-4AF_230V
12.2.15.24 1FK2208-3AC connected to 3 AC 240 V
1FK2208-3AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
29.6
32.6
Weight mmot kg 12.6
1FK2208-4AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
38.8
44.4
Weight mmot kg 14.6
1FK2208-5AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
48.1
53.6
Weight mmot kg 16.6
12.2.15.27 1FK2210-3AB connected to 240 V 3 AC
1FK2210-3AB For 3 AC 240 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
12.2.15.28 1FK2210-3AC connected to 240 V 3 AC
1FK2210-3AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
12.2.15.29 1FK2210-4AB connected to 240 V 3 AC
1FK2210-4AB For 3 AC 240 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
12.2.15.30 1FK2210-4AC connected to 240 V 3 AC
1FK2210-4AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
12.2.16 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FK2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3

AC 480 V
12.2.16.1 1FK2103-2AH connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V
1FK2103-2AH For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
Rotor moment of inertia Jmot kgcm2 0.093
Rotor moment of inertia (with brake) Jmot br kgcm2 0.112
Weight mmot kg 1.18
12.2.16.2 1FK2103-4AH connected to 3 AC 400V / 3 AC 480 V
1FK2103-4AH For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.139
0.158
Weight mmot kg 1.65
1FK2104-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.35
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
1FK2104-4AK For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.35
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
1FK2104-5AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
1FK2104-5AK For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
1FK2104-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.76
0.84
Weight mmot kg 3.4
Rated power Prated kW 1
1FK2105-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.71
2.55
Weight mmot kg 5.6
1FK2105-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
2.65
3.5
Weight mmot kg 7.7
12.2.16.10 1FK2106-3AF connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC
1FK2106-3AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
4.6
6.3
Weight mmot kg 7.4
12.2.16.11 1FK2106-4AF connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC
1FK2106-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
6
7.6
Weight mmot kg 9
12.2.16.12 1FK2106-6AF connected 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC
1FK2106-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
8.7
10.4
Weight mmot kg 11.8
1FK2203-2AK For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.2
0.22
Weight mmot kg 1.16
1FK2203-4AK For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.35
0.37
Weight mmot kg 1.49
1FK2204-5AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
1FK2204-5AK For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
1FK2204-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.61
1.69
Weight mmot kg 3.5
1FK2205-2AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
3.15
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
1FK2205-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
5.1
6
Weight mmot kg 5.2
1FK2206-2AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
7.8
9.4
Weight mmot kg 6.3
1FK2206-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
15.1
16.8
Weight mmot kg 8.9
12.2.16.22 1FK2208-3AC connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V
1FK2208-3AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
29.6
32.6
Weight mmot kg 12.6
1FK2208-4AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
38.8
44.4
Weight mmot kg 14.6
1FK2208-5AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
48.1
53.6
Weight mmot kg 16.6
12.2.16.25 1FK2210-3AB connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC
1FK2210-3AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
1FK2210-3AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
12.2.16.27 1FK2210-4AB connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC
1FK2210-4AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
1FK2210-4AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
12.2.17 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 1 AC 230 V, 3

AC 240 V
12.2.17.1 1FT2102-0AG connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC
1FT2102-0AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

Technical specifications in the SINAMICS S210 system Symbol Unit Value
0.0245
Moment of inertia (with brake) Jmot br kgcm2 0.0285
Weight mmot kg 0.47
1FT2102-1AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.036
0.04
Weight mmot kg 0.6
1FT2103-2AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.093
0.112
Weight mmot kg 1.17
1FT2103-4AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.139
0.158
Weight mmot kg 1.64
12.2.17.5 1FT2104-4AF connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC
1FT2104-4AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.35
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
12.2.17.6 1FT2104-4AK connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC
1FT2104-4AK For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.35
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
1FT2104-5AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
1FT2104-5AK For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
1FT2104-6AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.76
0.84
Weight mmot kg 3.4
1FT2105-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
1.71
2.55
Weight mmot kg 5.6
12.2.17.11 1FT2105-4AH connected to 3 AC 240 V
1FT2105-4AH For 3 AC 240 V

system
1.71
2.55
Weight mmot kg 5.6
12.2.17.12 1FT2105-6AF connected to 3 AC 240 V
1FT2105-6AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
2.65
3.5
Weight mmot kg 7.7
1FT2106-3AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
4.6
6.3
Weight mmot kg 7.4
1FT2106-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
6
7.6
Weight mmot kg 9
1FT2106-6AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
8.7
10.4
Weight mmot kg 11.8
1FT2203-2AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.2
0.22
Weight mmot kg 1.15
1FT2203-4AG For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
0.35
0.37
Weight mmot kg 1.48
1FT2204-5AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
1FT2204-5AK For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
1FT2204-6AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
1.61
1.69
Weight mmot kg 3.5
12.2.17.21 1FT2205-2AC connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V
1FT2205-2AC For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
1FT2205-2AF For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
3.15
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
12.2.17.23 1FT2205-2AH connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC
1FT2205-2AH For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
3.15
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
1FT2205-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
5.1
6
Weight mmot kg 5.2
1FT2206-2AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
7.8
9.4
Weight mmot kg 6.3
1FT2206-2AH For 3 AC 240 V

system
7.8
9.4
Weight mmot kg 6.3
12.2.17.27 1FT2206-3AB connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V
1FT2206-3AB For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
11.5
13.1
Weight mmot kg 7.4
12.2.17.28 1FT2206-3AF connected to 1 AC 230 V / 3 AC 240 V
1FT2206-3AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
11.5
13.1
Weight mmot kg 7.4
1FT2206-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
15.1
16.8
Weight mmot kg 8.9
1FT2206-4AH For 3 AC 240 V

system
15.1
16.8
Weight mmot kg 8.9
12.2.17.31 1FT2208-3AC connected to 3 AC 240 V
1FT2208-3AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
29.6
32.6
Weight mmot kg 12.6
1FT2208-3AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
29.6
32.6
Weight mmot kg 12.6
1FT2208-4AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
38.8
44.4
Weight mmot kg 14.6
1FT2208-4AF For 3 AC 240 V

system
38.8
44.4
Weight mmot kg 14.6
12.2.17.35 1FT2208-5AB connected to 3 AC 240 V
1FT2208-5AB For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
48.1
53.6
Weight mmot kg 16.6
1FT2208-5AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
48.1
53.6
Weight mmot kg 16.6
1FT2210-3AB For 3 AC 240 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
1FT2210-3AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
1FT2210-4AB For 1 AC 230 V, 3 AC 240 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
1FT2210-4AC For 3 AC 240 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
1FK2210-5AB For 3 AC 240 V

system
16.1
Weight mmot kg 32
12.2.18 Technical data and characteristics of the 1FT2 connected to 3 AC 400 V, 3

AC 480 V
12.2.18.1 1FT2103-2AH connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V
1FT2103-2AH For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
Thermal time constant Tth r/min 17
Rotor moment of inertia (with brake) Jmot br kgcm2 0.112
Weight mmot kg 1.18
12.2.18.2 1FT2103-4AH connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V
1FT2103-4AH For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.139
0.158
Weight mmot kg 1.65
1FT2104-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.35
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
12.2.18.4 1FT2104-4AK connected to 3 AC 400 V / 3 AC 480 V
1FT2104-4AK For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
Thermal time constant Tth r/min 33
0.35
0.43
Weight mmot kg 2.05
1FT2104-5AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
1FT2104-5AK For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.56
0.65
Weight mmot kg 2.85
1FT2104-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.76
0.84
Weight mmot kg 3.4
1FT2105-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.71
2.55
Weight mmot kg 5.6
1FT2105-4AH For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.71
2.55
Weight mmot kg 5.6
1FT2105-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
2.65
3.5
Weight mmot kg 7.7
1FT2106-3AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
4.6
6.3
Weight mmot kg 7.4
1FT2106-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
6
7.6
Weight mmot kg 9
1FT2106-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
8.7
10.4
Weight mmot kg 11.8
1FT2203-2AK For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.2
0.22
Weight mmot kg 1.16
1FT2203-4AK For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
0.35
0.37
Weight mmot kg 1.49
1FT2204-5AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
Figure 12-10 1FT2204-5AF_400V
1FT2204-5AK For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.23
1.31
Weight mmot kg 2.9
1FT2204-6AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
1.61
1.69
Weight mmot kg 3.5
1FT2205-2AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
1FT2205-2AF For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
3.15
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
1FT2205-2AH For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
Maximum permissible speed nmax r/min 8 300
3.15
4.05
Weight mmot kg 3.75
1FT2205-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
5.1
6
Weight mmot kg 5.2
1FT2206-2AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

Technical specifications in the S210 system Abbreviation Unit Value
Max. permissible speed nmax inv r/min 4300
Moment of inertia Jmot kg cm 2
7.8
Moment of inertia (with brake) JMot with Br kg cm 2
9.4
Weight mMot kg 6.3
Weight (with brake) mMot with Br kg 7.9
Rated data 3 AC 380 ... 480 V
1FT2206-2AF For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
7.8
9.4
Weight mmot kg 6.3
1FT2206-2AH For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
7.8
9.4
Weight mmot kg 6.3
1FT2206-3AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
11.5
13.1
Weight mmot kg 7.4
1FT2206-3AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
11.5
13.1
Weight mmot kg 7.4
1FT2206-4AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

15.1
16.8
Weight mMot kg 8.9
1FT2206-4AF For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
15.1
16.8
Weight mmot kg 8.9
1FT2206-4AH For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
15.1
16.8
Weight mmot kg 8.9
1FT2208-3AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

29.6
32.6
Weight mMot kg 12.6
12.2.18.32 1FT2208-3AC connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC
1FT2208-3AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
29.6
32.6
Weight mmot kg 12.6
1FT2208-3AF For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
29.5
32.5
Weight mmot kg 12.6
1FT2208-4AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

38.8
44.4
Weight mMot kg 14.6
1FT2208-4AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
38.8
44.4
Weight mmot kg 14.6
1FT2208-4AF For 1 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
38.8
44.4
Weight mmot kg 14.6
1FT2208-5AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
48.1
53.6
Weight mmot kg 16.6
1FT2208-5AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
48.1
53.6
Weight mmot kg 16.6
1FT2210-3AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
1FT2210-3AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
88.8
94.8
Weight mmot kg 22
12.2.18.41 1FT2210-4AB connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC
1FT2210-4AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
1FT2210-4AC For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
117
133
Weight mmot kg 27
1FK2210-5AB For 3 AC 400 V, 3 AC 480 V

system
14.5
16.1
Weight mmot kg 32
12.3 Technical specifications of the converter
12.3.1 Overload capability
Overload capability and shutdown behavior of the converter

The converter has integrated overload protection for the connected motor.
When delivered, the tripping threshold is 115% of the parameterized motor current. Brief
overloads of up to 300% of the motor current are possible.
When the load exceeds the rated motor current, the thermal protection in the converter
starts and switches off the motor in accordance with the overload characteristics shown
below.
The following diagrams show the general characteristic for the converter. The maximum
current of each converter is given in the technical data. It must not be exceeded irrespective
of the overload characteristics.
s
Time t
Overload I/IN %
Figure 12-11 Overload characteristic for shutting down the converter with 1 AC line connection
Time t
Overload I/IN %
Figure 12-12 Overload characteristic for shutting down the converter with 3 AC line connection

1FSNJTTJCMFPVUQVUDVSSFOU*/

)[
0VUQVUGSFRVFODZ
1FSNJTTJCMFPQFSBUJOHQPJOUBU)[PVUQVUGSFRVFODZ
Figure 12-13 Permitted output current at low frequencies
Note
Using the TIA Selection Tool (TST)
As a result of the combination possibilities (smaller motor connected to a larger converter and
vice verse), the response cannot be covered solely by the diagram. The TIA Selection Tool is
required for this purpose.
TIA selection tool (TST)

Use the TIA Selection Tool (TST) to configure a converter-motor combination, adapted to your
specific machine. This allows the load profile to be more precisely checked for a selected drive
configuration - even with more complex profiles.
• "TIA selection tool (https://www.siemens.com/tst)"
12.3.2 Electromagnetic compatibility according to IEC 61800-3

The intended and proper use of the converter is specified in the introduction to these operating
instructions.
The converters described there are intended for operation in the second environment. In this
environment, they meet all requirements relating to interference immunity.
For an EMC-compliant installation, observe the information provided in the Configuration
Manual: EMC installation guideline (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
60612658).
Maximum permissible cable lengths for the respective EMC categories
Table 12-7 Converters with 1 AC line connection
Converters with internal line filter Converters with additional exter‐

nal line filter
EMC category C2 10 m 25 m
Table 12-8 Converters with 3 AC line connection
Converters with internal line filter Converters with additional exter‐

nal line filter
without line/DC link coupling
EMC category C2 --- 25 m
with line or DC link coupling ≤ 6 converters1)
EMC category C2 --- 100 m
1)
The data is applicable for the complete cable length of the motors whose converters are coupled with
one another through an AC coupling or a DC link coupling.
The maximum cable length per motor is 25 m when using the internal line filter to achieve EMC
Category C3 or an external line filter to achieve EMC Category C2.
When using an external line filter to achieve EMC category C3, the maximum cable length per motor is
50 m.
Note
To be observed for devices used in Category C2
In a residential environment this product may cause radio-frequency interference, which may
make interference suppression measures necessary.
• Have qualified personnel carry out the installation and commissioning with suitable
interference suppression measures.
Note
To be observed for devices used in Category C3
In a residential environment this product may cause radio-frequency interference.
• Do not use this device in the first environment (residential area).
Note
Behavior regarding flicker
The flicker behavior can only be evaluated in a combination of the drive with an application (see
IEC 61800‑3, Section 6.2.4.2). The drive behaves passively in this regard, i.e. load fluctuations
of the application will be visible without changes on the line side.
12.3.3 Protection from electromagnetic fields
Overview
Protection of workers from electromagnetic fields is specified in the European EMF Directive
2013/35/EU. This directive is implemented in national law in the European Economic Area (EEA).
Employers are obligated to design workplaces in such a way that workers are protected from
impermissibly strong electromagnetic fields.
To this end, assessments and/or measurements must be performed for workplaces.
General conditions
The following general conditions apply for the evaluations and measurements:
1. The laws for protection from electromagnetic fields in force in individual EU member states
can go beyond the minimum requirements of the EMF Directive 2013/35/EU and always take
precedence.
2. The ICNIRP 2010 limits for the workplace are the basis for the assessment.
3. The 26th BImSchV (German Federal Emission Protection Regulation) defines 100 μT (RMS)
for the assessment of active implants.
According to Directive 2013/35/EU, 500 µT (RMS) at 50 Hz is applicable here.
4. The routing of power cables has a significant impact on the electromagnetic fields that occur.
Install and operate the components inside metallic cabinets in compliance with the
documentation and use shielded motor cables (see "EMC Installation Guideline (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60612658)").
Evaluation of the converter

The converters are normally used in machines. The assessment and testing is based on
DIN EN 12198‑1 and IEC 62311.
Compliance with the limit values was assessed for the following frequencies:
• Line frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
• 8 kHz pulse frequency
The indicated minimum distances apply to the head and complete torso of the human body.
Shorter distances are possible for extremities.
Table 12-9 Minimum distances to the converter
Individuals without active implants Individuals with active implants

Control cabinet Control cabinet Control cabinet Control cabinet
closed open closed open
0 cm Forearm length (approx. Must be separately assessed depending on the ac‐
35 cm) tive implant.
12.3.4 Permissible environmental conditions for the converter
Property Version
Ambient conditions for transport in the transport packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑40 °C … +70 °C, according to Class 2K4 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
maximum humidity 95% at 40 °C
Mechanical ambient condi‐ Shocks and vibrations permissible according to 3M2 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
tions
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 2C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
substances
Biological environmental con‐ Suitable according to Class 2B2 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
ditions
Ambient conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑25 °C … +55 °C, according to Class 1K4 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 1C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
substances
ditions
Ambient conditions in operation
Installation altitude • up to 1000 m above sea level without derating
• up to 4000 m, derating, see the following table
Climatic ambient conditions • Temperature range: 0 °C … +50 °C
• Relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Oil mist, salt mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying water, splashing
water and water jets are not permitted
Increased ruggedness regarding temperature range and relative humidity; therefore better
than 3K3 according to IEC 60721-3-3:2002
Mechanical ambient condi‐ • Vibration levels permissible according to Class 3M2 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
tions Vibration test in operation according to IEC 60068-2-6 Test Fc (sinusoidal)
– 2 Hz … 9 Hz: 1.5 mm deflection amplitude
– 9 Hz … 200 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration amplitude
– 10 frequency cycles per axis
• Shocks permissible according to Class 3M2 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
Shock test in operation according to IEC 60068‑2‑27 Test Ea (semi sinusoidal)
– 5 g peak acceleration
– 30 ms duration
– 3 shocks in all three axes in both directions
Protection against chemical • Protected according to Class 3C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
substances • Protected according to Class 3C3 for H2S and SO2 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
• Protected according to Class G3 to ANSI/ISA 71.04:2013
ditions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 acc. to IEC 61800‑5‑1
Table 12-10 Maximum permissible output current depending on the installation altitude and ambient
temperature
Ambient temperature in °C
Installation altitude 50 45 40
Output current as a %
Up to 1000 m 100
Up to 2000 m 90 100
Up to 3000 m 80 90 100
Up to 4000 m 70 80 90
A maximum of 2000 m is permissible for CSA compliance.
12.3.5 General data
Property Version
Line voltage 200 V 1 AC … 240 V 1 AC, ±10%
Line system configuration: Grounded TN/TT line systems and non-grounded IT line systems
3 AC 200 V … 240 V, ±10%
380 V … 480 V 3 AC, ±10%
Line system configuration: Grounded TN/TT line systems. Non-grounded IT line systems only with
an isolation transformer.
Mains buffering concept The converter is dimensioned so that there is no functional restriction at rated power (3 ms power
dip or interruption according to IEC 61800‑3 (2017)1)).
The specified times can be several times longer depending on the drive constellation and the
operating conditions. In particular in 3 AC devices in groups with DC link coupling in which some
converters operate in the motor mode while others operate in generator mode, the time can be
substantially longer. Based on these influencing factors, no generally valid statements can be
made about the S210 system, however, so that each drive constellation must be assessed individ‐
ually.
Output voltage 3 AC 0 V … 0.95 x input voltage
Input frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz, ±10 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz
Overvoltage category ac‐ The converter insulation is designed for surge voltages of overvoltage category III.
cording to IEC/
EN 61800‑5‑1
Pulse frequency 8 kHz
Short-circuit current rat‐ ≤ 65 kA rms
ing (SCCR) and branch Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC
protection Protective Devices for SINAMICS S210 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109815356)
Minimum prospective To prevent fire in the event of a fault, a minimum value must be ensured for the prospective short-
short-circuit current circuit current so that the upstream protective device trips quickly enough. A typical value when
dimensioning is 20 to 25 x2) the rated current of the protection device used.
Braking resistor Integrated in the device3), when required, a larger resistor can be externally connected.
Service life of fan (3 AC 40000 h
only)
Degree of protection ac‐ IP20 Must be installed in a control cabinet
cording to IEC 60529
Property Version
Electronics power supply 24 V DC, -15% … +20%, (PELV or SELV)
For PELV systems, grounding must be carried out via the external power supply.
Current requirements from electronic power supply at 24 V DC (motor without brake)
Frame size Current requirements [A]
1 AC devices FSA - FSC 0.8
3 AC devices FSA 0.9
FSB 1.0
FSC 1.2
Additional current requirements for 1F☐2 servomotor with brake (at 24 V DC)
Motor type Current when opening, Duration of the current Holding current (with
typical4) when opening open brake)
(to open the brake) After expiration of toex, the
holding current takes ef‐
fect
Io / A toex / ms Ih / A
1F☐2102 0.6 50 0.1
1F☐2☐03 0.8 60 0.15
1F☐2☐04 1.2 80 0.2
1F☐2☐05 1.1 120 0.3
1F☐2☐06 1.1 120 0.35
1F☐2208-3 1.2 120 0.4
1F☐2208-4 1.4 180 0.5
1F☐2208-5 1.4 180 0.5
1F☐2210-3 1.4 180 0.5
1F☐2210-4 1.5 200 0.5
The brake output voltage is controlled internally. Therefore, with a deviating input voltage at
terminal X124, the brake currents must be converted accordingly (constant power). It is not nec‐
essary to adjust the input voltage to the cable length.
For more information on the motor brake, refer to the technical specifications in Chapter "Holding
brake data (Page 394)".
Control mode Servo control
Switch-on frequency
minimum precharging cy‐ 120 s5)
cle
Protection functions Ground fault protection, output short-circuit protection, overvoltage/undervoltage protection, I2t
detection, IGBT overtemperature protection
1)
When operating 3 AC devices on a voltage of 3 AC 200 V ... 240 V, the 3 ms may possibly not be reached depending on the
operating conditions.
2)
To comply with permissible line harmonics, depending on the line connection conditions, different values may be required.
3)
The 1 AC 200 ... 240 V 100 W device does not have an internal braking resistor. An internal braking resistor is not required for
normal operation as a result of the available DC link capacitance.
4)
Typical value for 20 °C ambient temperature. At -15 °C, the break-induced currents can increase by up to 30%.
5)
Shorter precharging cycles may result in a shorter service life.
Table 12-11 Technical data of the digital inputs
Type High-speed digital inputs Failsafe Digital Input Digital input for monitor‐
for probe or homing marks (F-DI) ing the temperature of an
external braking resistor
Number 2 (DI 0, DI 1) 1 (DI 2 and DI 3) 1 (DI 4)
• Low level -30 V ... +5 V -30 V ... +5 V -30 V ... +5 V
and ≤ 2 mA and ≤ 2 mA and ≤ 2 mA
• High level 15 V ... 30 V 15 V ... 30 V 15 V ... 30 V
• Current consumption 6 mA 5 mA 6 mA
• Delay time, typ. L → H 5 µs 50 μs 5 µs
• Delay time, typ. H → L 50 μs 100 µs 50 μs
• Electrical isolation No Yes No
Conductor cross section, max. 1.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 1.5 mm²
The inputs correspond to Type 1 according to EN 61131-2.
12.3.6 Specific data of the converter with 1 AC line connection
Table 12-12 Frame size FSA, 1 AC
Article number 6SL5310-1BB10-1CF0 6SL5310-1BB10-2CF0

Rated output current 0.8 A 1.4 A
Maximum output current 3.1 A 4.8 A
Rated power 100 W 200 W
Rated input current 1.4 A 2.7 A
Inrush current 1)
10 A 2.6 A
Maximum braking current at connector X1 2 A 2 A
Power loss 15.7 W 23.2 W
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 801 (6 A) 3NA3 801 (6 A)
Fuse according to UL, Class J 6 A 6 A
Cooling Convection cooling without fan Convection cooling without fan
Weight 1.1 kg 1.1 kg
Table 12-13 Frame size FSB 1 AC
Article number 6SL5310-1BB10-4CF0

Rated output current 2.4 A
Maximum output current 8.7 A
Rated power 400 W
Rated input current 5 A
Inrush current 1)
3.9 A
Maximum braking current at connector X1 4 A
Power loss 38.5 W
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 803 (10 A)
Fuse according to UL, Class J 10 A
Cooling Convection cooling without fan
Weight 1.2 kg
Table 12-14 Frame size FSC 1 AC

Rated output current 4.4 A
Maximum output current 16 A
Rated power 750 W
Rated input current 9.3 A
Inrush current1)
7.9 A
Power loss 71.1 W

Cooling Convection cooling without fan
Weight 1.9 kg
1)
The inrush currents may differ significantly if external braking resistors are used: Inrush
current = (connection voltage × √2)/Rext
12.3.7 Specific data of the converter with 3 AC line connection
Article number 6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0

Rated output current 1.2 A 2.3 A
Maximum output current 4.2 A 7.6 A
Rated power 0.4 kW 0.75 kW
Inrush current 1)
4.3 A 4.3 A
Power loss 69 W 81 W
Cooling Integrated fan Integrated fan
Article number 6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0

Rated output current 3A
Maximum output current 10.9 A
Rated power 1 kW
Inrush current1)
4.3 A
Power loss 94 W
Cooling Integrated fan
Weight 2.1 kg
Table 12-17 Frame size FSB 3 AC

Rated output current 5 A 7A
Maximum output current 19 A 24 A
Rated power 1.5 kW 2 kW
Inrush current1)
8.6 A 8.6 A


Rated output current 9 A 12 A
Maximum output current 33 A 44 A
Rated power 3.5 kW 5 kW
Inrush current 1)
27.7 A 27.7 A
Weight 5 kg 5 kg
Article number 6SL5310-1BE17-0DF0

Rated output current 15 A
Maximum output current 55 A
Rated power 7 kW
Inrush current 1)
27.7 A
Power loss 204 W
Cooling Integrated fan
Weight 5 kg
1)
The inrush currents may differ significantly if external braking resistors are used: Inrush
current = (connection voltage × √2)/Rext
12.4 Technical data and properties of the connection system
MOTION-CONNECT connection cables between the motor and the converter

The following technical data applies to the MOTION-CONNECT OCC cables.
Table 12-20 MOTION-CONNECT OCC cable with SPEED-CONNECT connector
Designation and use Connector Outer diame‐ Minimum For con‐ Article number1)
size ter bending ra‐ nection to
dius, static motor
Dmax / mm R / mm
Motor connection ca‐ M12 9.7 23.5 1F☐2☐02 6FX5002-8QN04-
ble MC500 OCC for 1F☐2☐032) ☐☐☐☐4)
predominantly fixed
M17 10.5 25.5 1F☐2☐033) 6FX5002-8QN08-
installation
1F☐2☐04 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐05
M23 12.7 30.7 1F☐2☐06 6FX5002-8QN11-
1F☐2☐08 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
Motor connection ca‐ M12 9.7 27.2 1F☐2☐02 6FX8002-8QN04-
ble MC800 OCC for 1F☐2☐032) ☐☐☐☐4)
use in a cable carrier
M12 9.9 24.75 1F☐2☐02 6FX8002-8QN05-
1F☐2☐03 2) ☐☐☐☐5)
M17 10.5 30.6 1F☐2☐033) 6FX8002-8QN08-
1F☐2☐04 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐05
M23 12.7 36.9 1F☐2☐06 6FX8002-8QN11-
1F☐2☐08 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
Designation and use Connector Outer diame‐ Minimum For con‐ Article number1)
size ter bending ra‐ nection to
dius, static motor
Dmax / mm R / mm
Extension cable M12 9.7 23.5 1F☐2☐02 6FX5002-8QE04-
MC500 OCC for pre‐ 1F☐2☐03 2) ☐☐☐☐4)
dominantly fixed in‐
M17 10.5 25.5 1F☐2☐033) 6FX5002-8QE08-
stallation
1F☐2☐04 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐05
M23 12.7 30.7 1F☐2☐06 6FX5002-8QE11-
1F☐2☐08 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
Extension cable M12 9.7 27.2 1F☐2☐02 6FX8002-8QE04-
MC800 OCC for use in 1F☐2☐032) ☐☐☐☐4)
a cable carrier
M12 9.9 24.75 1F☐2☐02 6FX8002-8QE05-
1F☐2☐032) ☐☐☐☐5)
M17 10.5 30.6 1F☐2☐033) 6FX8002-8QE08-
1F☐2☐04 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐05
M23 12.7 36.9 1F☐2☐06 6FX8002-8QE11-
1F☐2☐08 ☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
1)
The last 4 positions (☐☐☐☐) define the cable length corresponding to the length code.
2)
Applicable for 1F☐2☐03 with 1 AC 230 V/3 AC 240 V
3)
Applicable for 1F☐2☐03 with 3 AC 400 V/3 AC 480 V
4)
5)
For UL applications
The length code can be found in Chapter "Determining the article number of a prefabricated
OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable (Page 624)".
Technical data and notes for cable carrier use with MC800 PLUS
Note
You require an MC800 PLUS cable to connect the motor using a cable carrier.
• When inserting prefabricated cables in the

cable carrier, do not pull the connector, as
this may damage the strain relief or cable
clamping.
Strain relief in a cable carrier
• Lay the cables loosely in the carrier. They

must be free to move. The cables must be
free to move in particular in the bending
radii of the carrier. Observe the specified
minimal bending radii.
• The cable fixings must be attached at both Cable routed in a cable carrier
ends at an appropriate distance away from
the end points of the moving parts in a dead
zone.
When laying cables, comply with the instructions given by the cable carrier manufacturer.

NTr .05*0/$0//&$51-64

"DDFMFSBUJPO

WNNJO

N
5SBWFSTJOHEJTUBODF
Figure 12-14 Permissible acceleration levels for MOTION-CONNECT 800 PLUS cables
Note
Additional fixing of the cable
If between the cable strain relief on the cable carrier and the terminal at the motor, part of the
cable is hanging loose or is not routed, we recommend that the cable is additionally fixed for
vibration load and with horizontal or vertical cable entries.
• Also fix the cable where the motor is fixed so that machine vibrations are not transferred to
the connector.
Dimension drawings 13
13.1 Dimension drawings of 1FK2 motors
13.1.1 Dimension drawings of 1FK2, frame size 20

All dimensions in mm (inches).
',¨

.

K

K

%*/%3.

LL

""

"

"
① With shaft sealing ring (IP65) ② With feather key

Figure 13-1 Dimension drawing 1FK2102
SIMOTICS S-1FK2 Dimensions

Frame size 20 Without brake With brake
DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FK2102-0A☐ 90 (3.54) 121 (4.76)
1FK2102-1A☐ 106 (4.17) 137 (5.39)
Dimension drawings


ୢ ୢ

""

H
H
"

K
K

"

ୢ

%*/%3. GPS

ୢ
%*/%3. GPS

M LL


Figure 13-2 Dimension drawing 1FK2☐03

Frame size 30 Without With Shaft 14 x Shaft 11 x
brake brake 30 mm 23 mm
DIN g1 g2 k k1 d l d l
IEC LB LB1 D L D L
1FK2☐03-2AG M12 55 99 131 14h6 30 11k6 23
(2.17) (3.9) (5.16) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
1FK2☐03-4AG 123 155 14h6 30 11k6 23

(4.84) (6.10) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
1FK2☐03-2AH M17 60 99 131 14h6 30 11k6 23

1FK2☐03-2AK (2.36) (3.9) (5.16) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
1FK2☐03-4AH 123 155 14h6 30 11k6 23

1FK2☐03-4AK (4.84) (6.10) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
Dimension drawings

All dimensions in mm (inches)
',¨

.

K
K

* LL

%*/%3. CFJ

%*/%3. CFJ

""

"

"

Figure 13-3 Dimension drawing 1FK2104
Frame size 40 Without With Shaft diam. 19 x 40 Shaft diam. 14 x 30
brake brake
DIN k k1 d l d l
IEC LB LB1 D L D L
1FK2☐04-4A☐ 98 142
(3.86) (5.59)
1FK2☐04-5A☐ 126 170 Diam. 19 k6 40 Diam. 14 k6 30
(4.96) (6.69) (diam. 0.75 k6) (1.57) (diam. (1.18)
0.55 k6)
1FK2☐04-6A☐ 144 188
(5.57) (7.40)
Dimension drawings

', ୢ ୢ

.
L
K
K
L

ୢ

PP

%*/%3.

ୢ

LL

""

"

"
① With feather key

Figure 13-4 Dimension drawing, 1FK2205

DIN k o k1 o1
IEC LB - LB1 -
1FK2205-2A☐ 145 (5.71) 188 (7.4)
1FK2205-4A☐ 177 (6.97) 28 (1.1) 220 (8.66) 34 (1.34)
Dimension drawings

',
ୢ ୢ

.
K
L
K
L

ୢ

%*/%3.

LL

""



DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FK2105-4A☐ 173 (6.81) 200 (7.87)
1FK2105-6A☐ 215 (8.46) 242 (9.53)
Dimension drawings
13.1.6 Dimension drawings 1FK2, frame size 63

',௑ ୢ ୢ

.
K
L
K
L

ୢ
%*/%3. PP

LL

""

"

"

Figure 13-6 Dimension drawing, 1FK2☐06
DIN k o k1 o1
IEC LB - LB1 -
1FK2206-2A☐ 154 (6.06) 205 (8.07)
1FK2106-3A☐ 174 (6.85) 225 (8.86)
1FK2☐06-4A☐ 193 (7.60) 41 (1.61) 244 (9.61) 53 (2.09)
1FK2106-6A☐ 232 (9.13) 283 (11.14)
Dimension drawings

', ୢ ୢ

.
L
K
K
L

ୢ

%*/%3.

LL

""

"

"


DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FK2208-3A☐ 183 (7.20) 236 (9.29)
1FK2208-4A☐ 203 (7.99) 256 (10.08)
1FK2208-5A☐ 223 (8.78) 276 (10.87)
Dimension drawings

', ୢ ୢ

.
L
K
K
L

ୢ

%*/%3.

LL

""

"

"


DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FK2210-3A☐ 198 (7.80) 257 (10.12)
1FK2210-4A☐ 223 (8.78) 282 (11.10)
Dimension drawings
13.2 Dimension drawings of 1FT2 motors
13.2.1 Dimension drawings of 1FT2, frame size 20

'5¨

.

K

K

%*/%3.

LL

""

"

"
① With shaft sealing ring (IP65 ② With feather key

and IP67)
Figure 13-9 Dimension drawing 1FT2102
SIMOTICS S-1FT2 Dimensions

DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FT2102-0A☐ 90 (3.54) 121 (4.76)
1FT2102-1A☐ 106 (4.17) 137 (5.39)
Dimension drawings

'5¨

.

K
K

%*/%3. CFJ

%*/%3. CFJ
M LL

""

"

"

and IP67)
Figure 13-10 Dimension drawing 1FT2103

Frame size 30 Without With Shaft 14 x Shaft 11 x
brake brake 30 mm 23 mm
DIN g1 g2 k k1 d l d l
IEC LB LB1 D L D L
1FT2☐03-2AG M12 55 99 131 14h6 30 11k6 23
(2.17) (3.9) (5.16) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
1FT2☐03-4AG 123 155 14h6 30 11k6 23

(4.84) (6.10) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
1FT2☐03-2AH M17 60 99 131 14h6 30 11k6 23

1FT2☐03-2AK (2.36) (3.9) (5.16) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
1FT2☐03-4AH 123 155 14h6 30 11k6 23

1FT2☐03-4AK (4.84) (6.10) (0.55h (1.18) (0.43k (0.91)
6) 6)
Dimension drawings

All dimensions in mm (inches)
'5¨

.

K
K

M LL

%*/%3. CFJ

%*/%3. CFJ

""

"

"

and IP67)
Figure 13-11 1FT2104 dimension drawing
Frame size 40 Without With Shaft diam. 19 x 40 Shaft diam. 14 x 30
brake brake
DIN k k1 d l d l
IEC LB LB1 D L D L
1FT2☐04-4A☐ 98 142
(3.86) (5.59)
1FT2☐04-5A☐ 126 170 Diam. 19 k6 40 Diam. 14 k6 30
(4.96) (6.69) (diam. 0.75 k6) (1.57) (diam. (1.18)
0.55 k6)
1FT2☐04-6A☐ 144 188
(5.57) (7.40)
Dimension drawings

'5 ୢ ୢ

.
L
K
K
L

ୢ

PP

%*/%3.

ୢ

LL

""

"

"

Figure 13-12 Dimension drawing of 1FT2205

DIN k o k1 o1
IEC LB - LB1 -
1FT2205-2A☐ 145 (5.71) 188 (7.4)
1FT2205-4A☐ 177 (6.97) 28(1.10) 220 (8.66) 34 (1.34)
Dimension drawings

',
ୢ ୢ

.
K
L
K
L

ୢ

%*/%3.

LL

""



DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FT2105-4A☐ 173 (6.81) 200 (7.87)
1FT2105-6A☐ 215 (8.46) 242 (9.53)
Dimension drawings
13.2.6 Dimension drawings 1FT2, frame size 63

'5 ୢ ୢ

.
K
L
K
L

ୢ
%*/%3. PP

LL

""

"

"

DIN k o k1 o1
IEC LB - LB1 -
1FT2206-2A☐ 154 (6.06) 205 (8.07)
1FT2☐06-3A☐ 174 (6.85) 225 (8.86)
1FT2☐06-4A☐ 193 (7.60) 41 (1.61) 244 (9.61) 53 (2.09)
1FT2106-6A☐ 232 (9.13) 283 (11.14)
Dimension drawings

'5 ୢ ୢ

.
L
K
K
L

ୢ

%*/%3.

LL

""

"

"


DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FT2208-2A☐ 168 (6.61) 221 (8.7)
1FT2208-3A☐ 183 (7.20) 236 (9.29)
1FT2208-4A☐ 203 (7.99) 256 (10.08)
1FT2208-5A☐ 223 (8.78) 276 (10.87)
Dimension drawings

'5 ୢ ୢ

.
L
K
K
L

ୢ

%*/%3.

LL

""

"

"


DIN k k1
IEC LB LB1
1FT2210-2A☐ 174 (6.85) 233 (9.17)
1FT2210-3A☐ 198 (7.80) 257 (10.12)
1FT2210-4A☐ 223 (8.78) 282 (11.10)
1FT2210-5A☐ 248 (9.76) 307 (12.09)
Dimension drawings
13.3 Dimension drawings, converter
13.3.1 FSA with 1 AC line connection
FSA with 1 AC line connection

6SL5310-1BB10-1CF0 (100 W)
6SL5310-1BB10-2CF0 (200 W)

z U

DLF
zq CSB
JOH

U
P VO
.
࢈

Figure 13-17 Dimension drawing SINAMICS S210 FSA, 1 AC, dimensions in mm (inch)
Dimension drawings
13.3.2 FSB with 1 AC line connection
FSB with 1 AC line connection

6SL5310-1BB10-4CF0 (400 W)

z U

DLF
zq CSB
JOH

U
P VO
.
࢈

Figure 13-18 Dimension drawing SINAMICS S210 FSB, 1 AC, dimensions in mm (inch)
Dimension drawings
13.3.3 FSC with 1 AC line connection
FSC with 1 AC line connection

6SL5310-1BB10-8CF0 (750 W)

z U
DLF

zq CSB
JOH

U
P VO
.
࢈ Y

Figure 13-19 Dimension drawing SINAMICS S210 FSC, 1 AC, dimensions in mm (inch)
Dimension drawings
13.3.4 FSA with 3 AC line connection
FSA with 3 AC line connection

6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 (0.4 kW)
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 (0.75 kW)
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 (1 kW)

Figure 13-20 Dimension drawing SINAMICS S210 FSA, 3 AC, dimensions in mm (inch)
Dimension drawings
13.3.5 FSB with 3 AC line connection
FSB with 3 AC line connection

6SL5310-1BE11-5DF0 (1.5 kW)
6SL5310-1BE12-0DF0 (2 kW)

Figure 13-21 Dimension drawing SINAMICS S210 FSB, 3 AC, dimensions in mm (inch)
Dimension drawings
13.3.6 FSC with 3 AC line connection
FSC with 3 AC line connection

6SL5310-1BE13-5DF0 (3.5 kW)
6SL5310-1BE15-0DF0 (5 kW)
6SL5310-1BE17-0DF0 (7 kW)

Figure 13-22 Dimension drawing SINAMICS S210 FSC, 3 AC, dimensions in mm (inch)
Decommissioning and disposal 14
WARNING
Risk of injury through falling motors or machine components
Motors and machine components can fall when being dismantled from the machine. They can
cause serious injury or property damage.
• Secure the machine components being dismantled to prevent them falling.
NOTICE
Damage caused by data misuse
If the memory card or converter is disposed of in a non-secure manner, misuse of data may
occur resulting in damage or malfunctions in the systems.
• Therefore, delete the configuration of the converter: see Chapter "Manual reset to factory
settings with memory card (Page 356)".
• Make sure you securely remove all custom certificates.
You can find more information in the "Industrial Security (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109810578)" configuration manual.
Removing the device from the machine

1. Check that all parts of the device are in a no voltage condition.
2. Let the device cool down enough so that you are not burnt.
3. Disconnect all electrical connections.
4. Remove the fixing elements.
5. Transport the device to a suitable location for disposal.
14.1 Device disposal
Description
Decommissioning and disposal
14.1 Device disposal
For environmentally-friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a company
certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment, and dispose of the old
device as prescribed in the respective country of use.
Accessories and spare parts 15
15.1 Accessories
15.1.1 Memory cards

The memory card is only required for data backup, series commissioning and for functions that
require a license. The converter can also be operated without a memory card.
Memory card for data backup and series commissioning

Use the following memory cards to back up data, for licensing and series commissioning.
If you are using functions that require a license, a memory card is absolutely necessary for
converter operation. The memory card must then be permanently inserted.
The license key can only be assigned to a SINAMICS memory card.
The integrated card reader does not support the exFAT format. Large memory cards must
therefore be formatted with FAT32.
Memory cards with up to 32 GB are supported.
Card type Article number

Empty SD card 6SL5970-0AA00-0AA0
SD card with firmware V6.1 6SL5370-0GB00-0AA0
SD card with firmware V6.1 and license for Extended Safety Func‐ 6SL5370-0GB00-0AA0-Z F01
tions
License for Extended Safety Functions "Certificate of License" with‐ 6SL5977-0AA00-2HA0
out SD card, to subsequently license an existing SD card
Accessories and spare parts
15.1 Accessories
15.1.2 SINAMICS Smart Adapter
15.1.2.1 SINAMICS Smart Adapter
Description
Figure 15-1 SINAMICS Smart Adapter
The SINAMICS Smart Adapter establishes a WLAN connection between the converter's X127
service interface and an operating unit, for example a tablet, smartphone, panel or PC.
Once plugged into the converter, the SINAMICS Smart Adapter is ready to use. No battery is
required.
The SINAMICS Smart Adapter may only be installed temporarily for commissioning and
service activities. It may not be used permanently with the converter.
The SINAMICS Smart Adapter supports WPA3 WLAN encryption.
15.1.2.2 SINAMICS Smart Adapter ordering data
Component Article number

SINAMICS Smart Adapter 6SL4950-0AJ00-0AA0
15.1 Accessories
15.1.3 Connectors and cables for the AC coupling and DC link coupling
The following packages are available for the connectors:
Article number Spare part

6SL3260-2DC00-0AA0 Connector package for AC coupling and DC link coupling
6SL3260-2DC10-0AA0 Connector kit for the AC coupling
Content 6SL3260-2DC00-0AA0 6SL3260-2DC10-0AA0

Connectors for the AC coupling 1 1
Connector for the DC link coupling 1 -
End cap 2 1
Description/data sheet 1 1
The connectors are designed so that they cannot be accidentally interchanged.

The cables required for the AC coupling and DC link coupling are standard cables, and
therefore not included in the scope of delivery. Permissible connecting cables are listed in
section "Establishing the AC coupling and the DC link coupling (Page 183)".
X1: Connectors for the AC coupling

L1 Phase L1 line system The terminals are Torx screw terminals.
L2 Phase L2 line system Permissible conductor cross-sections:
L3 Phase L3 line system • 16 mm2
• AWG: 6
Tightening torque: 3 Nm
X3: Connector for the DC link coupling

DCP DC link, positive The terminals are Torx screw terminals.
-- not assigned Permissible conductor cross-sections:
DCN DC link, negative • 16 mm2
• AWG: 6
Tightening torque: 3 Nm
End cap for AC coupling and DC link coupling
15.1 Accessories
15.1.4 PROFINET patch cable

Use the following patch cable to network converters located adjacent one another via PROFINET:
Cable type Length Article number

Industrial Ethernet TP cord, CAT 6A, 0.3 m 6XV1870-3QE30
TP cable 4 x 2 insulated conductors, 0.5 m 6XV1870-3QE50
prefabricated with 2 RJ45 connectors
15.1.5 External line filters
Line filters limit the electromagnetic interference emissions from converters to permissible limit
values according to IEC 61800‑3 or the requirements of Class A laid down in EN 55011.
The SINAMICS S210 line filters are passive components used to expand the EMC properties of
the S210 system. With them, EMC categories C2 or C3 with longer cable lengths are possible
(see Chapter "Electromagnetic compatibility according to IEC 61800-3 (Page 550)").
The following line filter is used depending on the converter:
• Converter with 1 AC line connection: 1 AC line filter
• Converter with 3 AC line connection: 3 AC line filter
Figure 15-2 3 AC line filter and converter
In a 3 AC drive line-up, the associated line filter must always be mounted to the left of the
converters.
The sum of the rated currents of the converters connected to a common AC coupling must
not exceed the rated line filter current.
15.1 Accessories
15.1.5.1 Safety instructions
NOTICE
Destruction or damage of components by incorrectly connecting the line filter
When incorrectly connecting the line filter, components can be destroyed or damaged.
• Connect the line filter in accordance with the instructions in the technical documentation.
• Do not connect any additional loads downstream of the line filter.
NOTICE
Line filter damage due to interchanged connections
The line filter might be damaged if the input and output connections are interchanged.
• Connect the incoming line supply cable to "Line" or X5.
• Connect the outgoing cable to "Load" or X6.
NOTICE
Damage to the system caused by a line filter that is not permissible
A line filter that is not permissible can damage the system.
• Only use the line filter with the components that are compatible with it.
NOTICE
Damage caused by using third party filters
According to product standard IEC 61800‑3, radio interference suppression commensurate
with the relevant rated conditions must be provided and is a legal requirement in the EU (EMC
Directive). Line filters and line reactors are required in order to comply with this standard. The
use of filters of other filter types can lead to limit value violations, resonance effects,
overvoltages, and irreparable damage to motors and other equipment.
• The machine manufacturer must provide verification that the machine equipped with the
drive products and the installed suppression elements, e.g. line filters, is EMC-compliant
before the machines are placed in the market.
NOTICE
Destruction of the line filter when used with an unsuitable protective element
Use of an incorrectly dimensioned protective element can result in thermal overload or
destruction of the line filter.
• Use the protective elements provided, (see Product Information "Protective devices for
SINAMICS S210 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109815356)").
15.1 Accessories
Note
Disconnect the line filter for a high-voltage test
If a high-voltage test is conducted with alternating voltage in the system, the existing line filters
must be disconnected in order to obtain accurate measurements.
Safety instructions for 1 AC line filter
WARNING
Electric shock caused by PEN conductor overload
In TN-C supply networks, the protective function of the PEN conductor can be adversely
affected by exposure to harmonic currents.
• Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the PEN conductor.
WARNING
Fire caused by neutral conductor (N) overload
The neutral conductor can heat up due to the load from harmonic currents and cause a fire.
• Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the neutral conductor.
Safety instructions for 3 AC line filter
NOTICE
Line filter damage by connecting to impermissible line supply
The line filters are only suitable for direct connection to line supplies with grounded neutral
point. Connecting the line filter to another line supply will damage the line filter.
• Only connect the line filter to a line supply with grounded neutral point.
15.1 Accessories
15.1.5.2 Interfaces
Line filter for converters with 1 AC line connection
-JOF
-PBE
Figure 15-3 Interfaces of the line filter for converters with 1 AC line connection
Terminals for line filters for converters with 1 AC line connection:
• Line: Line connection
• Load: Load connection
15.1 Accessories
9
9
Figure 15-4 Interfaces of the line filter for converters with 3 AC line connection, 35 A and 65 A
Terminals for line filters for converters with 3 AC line connection:
• X5: Line connection
• X6: Load connection
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacturer of the filter ① is sta‐

ted on the nameplate in the following form:
• CY: Calendar year (two digit)
• CW: Calendar week (01 ... 53)
• D: Day (Mon ... Sun)
In the example provided here, "20131" means:

2020, KW 13, Monday = March 23, 2020
15.1 Accessories
15.1.5.3 Dimension drawings

.

-*/&
1& /-

-0"%
1& /-
࢈ .
Figure 15-5 Dimension drawing for the line filter for converters with 1 AC line connection
• Tightening torque for fixing screws (M4): 1.2 ... 1.8 Nm

• Tightening torque for the protective conductor fixing bolt (M5): 2.0 ... 2.2 Nm
• Tightening torque of the line-side and load-side screw connection: 0.7 ... 0.8 Nm
15.1 Accessories

Y

࢈
;ORDG Y
1DPHSODWH

:DUQLQJQRWLFH
;OLQHVXSSO\

① Connecting terminal 10 mm2, tightening torque 1.5 ... 1.8 Nm

② Connecting terminal 16 mm2, tightening torque 2.5 ... 3 Nm
③ Protective conductor M4x6, tightening torque 1.8 Nm
Figure 15-6 Dimension drawing for the line filter for converters with 3 AC line connection, 35 A
15.1 Accessories

Y

࢈
;ORDG Y
1DPHSODWH

:DUQLQJQRWLFH
;OLQHVXSSO\

① Connecting terminal 25 mm2, tightening torque 4 ... 4.5 Nm

② Connecting terminal 16 mm2, tightening torque 2.5 ... 3 Nm
③ Protective conductor M5x8, tightening torque 3 Nm
Figure 15-7 Dimension drawing for the line filter for converters with 3 AC line connection, 65 A
15.1 Accessories
15.1.5.4 Mounting
Note
When you mount external line filters, consider the specifications for routing cables in the
electrical cabinet according to the EMC Directive.
-JOF
ࣨNN
-PBE
Figure 15-8 Mounting the line filter for converters with 1 AC line connection
Note
When installing a line filter, maintain a minimum lateral clearance of 20 mm (0.79 inches) from
the converter.

There are basically 2 ways of mounting and connecting 3 AC line filters:
Variant 1: The converter group is mounted and wired

The converter group is already mounted and the AC coupling is wired and prepared for the
line filter, i.e. insulation stripped and end sleeves attached.
15.1 Accessories
The line filter then only has to be "threaded on " from the left and screwed tight. This simpler
variant requires sufficient mounting space to the left of the converters.

① Screw the converters tight in the cabinet.

② Push the cable for the AC coupling through the AC connector and provide it with end sleeves (with
or without protective collar).
③ Screw the cable into the AC connectors.
④ Swing the line filter with load connection X6 from the side over the cable/end sleeves.
⑤ Screw the line filter tight in the cabinet.
⑥ Screw the cable into load connection X6 of the line filter.
Figure 15-9 Mounting the line filter for converters with 3 AC line connection - variant 1
Variant 2: The converter group and 3 AC line filter are mounted, but not wired
For wiring, each conductor must be individually pulled through the connector for the AC
coupling up to load connection X6 of the line filter and screwed into the control cabinet.
You can only insert end sleeves without a protective collar, as otherwise the conductor no
longer fits through the connector for the AC coupling.
15.1 Accessories

① Screw the devices tight on the cabinet wall or on the mounting plate.
② Attach end sleeves without protective collars to the cables for the AC coupling, and push them
through the AC connectors into load connection X6 of the line filter.
③ Screw the cables into the AC connectors and into load connection X6 of the line filter.
Figure 15-10 Mounting the line filter for converters with 3 AC line connection - variant 2
15.1 Accessories
15.1.5.5 Technical data
Table 15-1 Technical data
Article number 6SL3203-0BB21-8VA1

Line voltage 200 … 240 V 1 AC
Rated current A 18
Power loss W < 1.2
Type of connection Screw terminals
Conductor cross-section
- for single-conductor connec‐ mm2 0.25 ... 6 (AWG 24 ... 10)
tion mm2 0.25 ... 4 (AWG 24 ... 12)
- for flexible cables
Insulation stripping length mm 8 ... 9
Protective conductor connec‐ M5 studs
tion
Degree of protection IP20
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 62 x 155 x 53
Weight kg 0.7
Table 15-2 Technical data
Article number 6SL3203-0BE23-5HA0 6SL3203-0BE26-5HA0

Line voltage 200 … 480 V 3 AC
Rated current A 35 65
Power loss W 12 18
Type of connection Screw terminals
Conductor cross-section
- Line-side connection mm2 0.5 ... 10 (AWG 24 ... 6) 4 ... 25 (AWG 10 ... 3)
- Load-side connection mm2 16 (AWG 6) 16 (AWG 6)
Stripped length
- Line side mm 10 18
- Load side mm 16 16
Protective conductor connec‐ M4 studs M5 studs
tion
Degree of protection IP20
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 50 x 296 x 220 70 x 349 x 220
Weight kg 2.3 3.5
15.1 Accessories
15.1.6 External braking resistors for 1/3 AC 200 ... 240 V

The following Michael Koch GmbH braking resistors can be purchased directly through Siemens
with the article numbers below.
The correct product (with 1/3 AC 200 ... 240 V) can be found in the table "Examples of
suitable braking resistors from a third-party supplier (Page 89)".
• GXK:BWG250047TS-190: 100 W, 47 Ohm
• GXK:BWG600014TS-190: 240 W, 14 Ohm
For UL, the resistor has only a 240 W braking power. According to CE, 400 W braking power
is also possible.
Figure 15-11 External braking resistor (example)
The resistors have approvals for the North American market (cURus and CSA).
The temperature sensor of the resistor can by connected at digital input DI4 on the converter
for temperature monitoring. This switches the converter off when the braking resistor is
overloaded.
We recommend that sensor cables are also shielded.
15.1 Accessories
4IJFME
8)
93
(/:&
#/
9%$1
8) 7
4FOTPS
8)
9%*
4IJFME
1)
Not included in the scope of delivery of the braking resistor
Figure 15-12 Braking resistor connection
15.1 Accessories
15.1.7 Cabinet bushing via mounting flange
Mounting accessories for connection system
Accessories Diagram For connec‐ For motor Article number

tor size
Mounting flange as cabinet M12 1F☐2☐02 6FX2003-7JX00
bushing (with installation 1F☐2☐03
instructions)
M17 1F☐2☐04 6FX2003-7HX00
Packing unit: 1 item
1F☐2☐05
M23 1F☐2☐06 6FX2003-7BX00
1F☐2☐08
1F☐2☐10
The mounting flange is installed on the external wall of the control cabinet. It ensures the
degree of protection of the control cabinet.
① Wall of the control cabinet

② Mounting flange
③ Connectors
Install the mounting flange as specified in the enclosed installation instructions.
15.1 Accessories
15.1.8 Degree of protection kit IP65 for the motor
Shaft sealing ring - IP65 degree of protection kit for the motor
The shaft sealing ring can be used as spare part or for retrofitting.
Note
You can order a motor with shaft sealing ring (degree of protection IP65) directly.
More information about ordering degree of protection IP65 can be found in Chapter
"Ordering data of the motor (Page 619)".
The motor satisfies degree of protection IP65 when the shaft sealing ring is installed.
Motor article number Figure of the shaft sealing ring Article number of the degree of pro‐
tection kit
1F☐2☐02 1FY2902-0GC00
1F☐2☐03 1FY2903-0GC00
1F☐2☐04 1FY2904-0GC00
15.1.9 Extensions for connecting cables between the motor and the converter
OCC MOTION-CONNECT cables can only be ordered as prefabricated cables.
Note
A maximum of three separating points are allowed without reducing the total permitted length.
15.1 Accessories
OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable with SPEED-CONNECT connector
Designation and use For connection Connector size Article number1)

to motor
Extension for motor connec‐ 1F☐2☐02 M12 6FX5002-8QE04-☐☐☐☐
tion cable OCC MC 500 for 1F☐2☐03
predominantly fixed instal‐
1F☐2☐03 M17 6FX5002-8QE08-☐☐☐☐
lation
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05
1F☐2☐06 M23 1.5 mm²:
1F☐2☐08 6FX5002-8QE11-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10 2.5 mm²:
6FX5002-8QE21-☐☐☐☐
Extension for motor connec‐ 1F☐2☐02 M12 6FX8002-8QE04-☐☐☐☐2)
tion cable OCC MC 800PLUS 1F☐2☐03 6FX8002-8QE05-☐☐☐☐3)
for use in cable carriers
1F☐2☐03 M17 6FX8002-8QE08-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05
1F☐2☐06 M23 1.5 mm²:
1F☐2☐08 6FX8002-8QE11-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10 2.5 mm²:
6FX8002-8QE21-☐☐☐☐
1)
The last 4 digits (☐☐☐☐) define the cable length corresponding to the length code
2)
3)
For UL applications
Determining the article number of a prefabricated OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable
M

Figure 15-13 Lengths of an OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable
Procedure
1. Determine the required cable length l **. Consider having cable in reserve for strain-free
routing.
2. Determine the length code for the required length l ** corresponding to the following
overview. The stretched lengths (*) are added automatically for the prefabricated cables.
15.1 Accessories
3. Also select the cable type, the desired cable version, and the required connectors for the
article number.
'9௑2௑௑௑௑௑௑௑
0$$.05*0/$0//&$5
$BCMFUZQF $PEF
.$
.$1-64
$BCMFWFSTJPO $PEF
$POOFDUPSTJ[F $PEF
.PUPSDPOOFDUJPODBCMFT /
. NNr

&YUFOTJPODBCMF &
. NNr

. NNr

. NNr

&YBNQMFPGBMFOHUIDPEF
. NNr

N "#
N "$ -FOHUI $PEF
N %( N
NBYN '" -FOHUI $PEF

N "
N #
N $
`N %
N &
N '
-FOHUI $PEF
N "
N #
N $
N %
N &
N '
N (
N )
N +
N ,
-FOHUI $PEF
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

'PS*&$BQQMJDBUJPOT N

'PS6-BQQMJDBUJPOT
N
Figure 15-14 Structure of the article number with length code for an OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable
4. Order the required cable with the article number thus determined.
15.2 Spare parts
15.2 Spare parts
Spare parts for the converter

The following components are available as spare parts for the converter:
• Connector set for converters with 1 AC line connection 6SL3260-2DB00-0AA0

• Connector set for converters with 3 AC line connection 6SL3260-2DB10-0AA0
• Siemens IX connector for the encoder connection 6FX2003-0DE01
for converters with 1 AC / 3 AC line connection
• Fan for converters with 3 AC line connection, FSA 6SL3260-0AA00-0AA0
• Fan for converters with 3 AC line connection, FSB 6SL3260-0AB00-0AA0
• Fan for converters with 3 AC line connection, FSC 6SL3260-0AC00-0AA0
15.2.1 Connector set for converters with 1 AC line connection -

6SL3260-2DB00-0AA0
Under this article number, you will receive a spare parts package for the frame sizes FSA, FSB and
FSC with the following content:
• Connectors
– X1: Connector for the line connection and the external braking resistor
(jumper for using the internal braking resistor is provided)
– X2: Connector for the motor connection
– X107: Connector for the motor holding brake
– X124: Connector for the external 24 V DC power supply
– X130: Connector for the digital inputs
• Shield plate for FSA, FSB and FSC
X1: Connector for the line connection and the external braking resistor

L1 Phase L1 line system
N Neutral conductor
DCP Braking resistor, external • If you are using the internal braking resistor, DCP
Braking resistor, internal and R2 must be jumpered.
R2 Internal braking resistor • If you are using an external braking resistor, then
R1 External braking resistor do not insert the jumper between DCP and R2.
Connect the external braking resistor via the DCP
and R1 terminals.
Weidmüller: BLF 5.08HC/05/180F SN BK BX, article number 1012670000
As daisy chain: BLDF 5.08/05/180F SN BK BX, article number 1000970000
15.2 Spare parts

• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 26 … 12
X2: Connector for the motor connection
Pin Pin assignment Color coding for Siemens OCC cables

U Motor phase U Brown
V Motor phase V Black
W Motor phase W Gray
PE Protective ground Green-yellow
Weidmüller: BLF 5.08HC/04/180F SN BK BX, article number 1012660000

• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 26 … 12
X107: Connector for the motor holding brake (PTC has no function, for use in the future)
Pin Pin assignment Pin assignment Pin

BR+ B+: Voltage for motor holding Reserved, do not use PTC+
brake, 24 V (black-turquoise)
BR- B-: Voltage for motor holding Reserved, do not use PTC-
brake, 0 V (white-turquoise)
Phoenix DFMC 1.5/ 2-ST-3.81 BK, Article number 1864707

• For single-core cables or for flexible cable with end sleeves without protective collars or long
end sleeves with protective collars:
– 0.25 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 0.75 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 19
15.2 Spare parts
X124: Connector for the external 24 V DC control voltage

0V 0 V Power supply for the converter electronics
0V 0 V Maximum current for looping through via the inter‐
24 V +24 V nal jumper (blue-blue, red-red): 24 A
24 V +24 V
Dinkle article number 2ESS-6621-04P

• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 24 … 12
X130: Connector for the digital inputs

+ +24 V output DI2+
DI0 High-speed DI, measuring probe DI2-
M Ground Failsafe digital input DI3+
+ +24 V output DI3-
DI1 High-speed DI, measuring probe +24 V output VS+
M Ground Digital input DI4
Phoenix DFMC 1.5/ 6-ST-3.5, Article No. 1790140

For more information about the digital inputs, see Chapter "Connecting digital inputs and the
external 24 V supply (Page 186)".
15.2 Spare parts

– 0.2 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 0.75 mm2
– AWG: 24 ... 19
15.2 Spare parts
15.2.2 Connector set for converters with 3 AC line connection -

6SL3260-2DB10-0AA0
Under this article number, you will receive a spare parts package for the frame sizes FSA, FSB and
FSC with the following content:
• Connectors
– X1: Standard connector for the line connection
– X2: Connector for the motor connection
– X4: Connector for the external braking resistor
(jumper for using the internal braking resistor is provided)
– X107: Connector for the motor holding brake
– X124: Connector for the external 24 V DC power supply
– X130: Connector for the digital inputs
• Shield plate with two fixing screws M4 x 10 for FSA
X1: Connector for the line connection
Standard connector

Phoenix, article number 1060224

• 0.75 mm2 … 6 mm2
• AWG: 18 … 8
15.2 Spare parts
X2: Connector for the motor connection
Pin Pin assignment Color coding for Siemens OCC cables

U Motor phase U Brown
V Motor phase V Black
W Motor phase W Gray
PE Protective ground Green-yellow

• 0.75 mm2 … 6 mm2
• AWG: 18 … 8
X4: Connector for the external braking resistor

DCP External braking resistor • If you are using the internal braking resistor,
Internal braking resistor DCP and R2 must be jumpered.
R1 Internal braking resistor • If you are using an external braking resistor,
R2 External braking resistor then do not insert the jumper between DCP
and R2.
Connect the external braking resistor via the
DCP and R1 terminals.

• 0.75 mm2 … 6 mm2
• AWG: 18 … 8
15.2 Spare parts
X107: Connector for the motor holding brake (PTC has no function, for use in the future)

BR+ B+: Voltage for motor holding Reserved, do not use PTC+
brake, 24 V (black-turquoise)
BR- B-: Voltage for motor holding Reserved, do not use PTC-
brake, 0 V (white-turquoise)
Phoenix DFMC 1.5/ 2-ST-3.81 BK, Article number 1864707

• For single-core cables or for flexible cable with end sleeves without protective collars or long
end sleeves with protective collars:
– 0.25 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 0.75 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 19
X124: Connector for the external 24 V DC control voltage

24 V +24 V Power supply for the converter electronics
24 V +24 V Maximum current for looping through via the internal
0V 0 V jumper (blue-blue, red-red): 24 A
0V 0 V
Dinkle article number 2ESS-6621-04P

• 0.2 mm2 … 2.5 mm2
• AWG: 24 … 12
15.2 Spare parts
X130: Connector for the digital inputs

+ +24 V output DI2+
DI0 High-speed DI, measuring DI2-
probe Failsafe digital input
M Ground DI3+
+ +24 V output DI3-
DI1 High-speed DI, measuring +24 V output VS+
probe
M Ground Digital input DI4
Phoenix DFMC 1.5/ 6-ST-3.5, Article No. 1790140

For more information about the digital inputs, see Chapter "Connecting digital inputs and the
external 24 V supply (Page 186)".
– 0.2 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 1.5 mm2
– AWG: 24 … 16
– 0.25 mm2 … 0.75 mm2
– AWG: 24 ... 19
15.2 Spare parts
Ordering data 16
16.1 Ordering data of the motor
The article number comprises a combination of digits and letters. It is divided into three
hyphenated blocks.
',"'.";
.PUPSUZQF 0SEFSDPEFGPSPQUJPOT
.PNFOUPGJOFSUJB 7FSTJPOOVNCFS
'SBNFTJ[F $POOFDUJPOUZQF
-FOHUI &ODPEFS
$PPMJOHNFUIPE 4IBGUHFPNFUSZ
8JOEJOH %FHSFFPGQSPUFDUJPO
)PMEJOHCSBLF
Note that not every theoretical combination is possible in practice.

Permissible combinations can be found in Chapter "Motor-converter combinations for 1FK2 (Page 50)",
Motor-converter combinations for 1FT2 (Page 53), in the catalog "D 32 SINAMICS S210 and SIMOTICS
S-1F☐2" or SIEMENS Product Configurator (www.siemens.com/SPC).
Ordering data
16.1 Ordering data of the motor
Description of the structure of the article number
Description Position of the article number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
SIMOTICS S-1F☐2 synchronous servomotors 1 F ☐ 2
Moment of inertia High Dynamic 1
Compact 2
High Inertia 3
Frame size 20 0 2
30 0 3
40 0 4
48 (Compact) 0 5
52 (High Dynamic)
63 0 6
80 0 8
100 1 0
Total length 0 ... 8 0
Cooling method Natural cooling A
Winding, rated speed max. 1 AC 240 V
3000 r/min @ 230 V G
max. 3 AC 480 V
1500 r/min @ 400 V 750 r/min @ 230 V B
2000 r/min @ 400 V 1000 r/min @ 230 V C
3000 r/min @ 400 V 1500 r/min @ 230 V F
4500 r/min @ 400 V / 2500 r/min @ 230 V H
6000 r/min @ 400 V 3000 r/min @ 230 V K
Holding brake Without 0
With 1
Higher performance brake 2
Degree of protection IP64 0
IP65 with radial shaft sealing ring 1
IP67 with radial shaft sealing ring 2
Shaft geometry Plain shaft 0
Shaft with feather key 1
Plain shaft, alternative shaft geometry 0 3 0 2
(11 mm x 23 mm), only SH 30
Plain shaft, alternative shaft geometry 0 4 0 2
(14 mm x 30 mm), only SH 40
Encoder Absolute encoder single-turn, 22 bit (encoder AS22DQC) S
Absolute encoder single-turn, 26 bit (encoder AS26DQC) B
Absolute encoder multiturn, 22 bit + 12 bit (encoder AM22DQC) M
Absolute encoder multiturn, 26 bit + 12 bit (encoder AM26DQC) C
Connection type OCC (one cable connection) for S210 A
Version number Start 0
Ordering data
16.2 Ordering data of the converter
Description of order codes for options
Options for motor 1FT2 Order codes on the rating plate

(-Z)
Motor with increased chemical resistance N16
Pressure compensation connector Q20
Metal rating plate Q31
Paint finish Unpainted X00
RAL 9005, jet black, matte X01
RAL 9001, cream white X02
RAL 6011, reseda green X03
RAL 7032, pebble gray X04
RAL 5015, sky blue X05
RAL 1015, light ivory X06
RAL 9006, white aluminum X08
Special paint finish corresponding to the environ‐ K23
mental conditions for the standard paint finish
and for condensation on the outer motor surfa‐
ces,
primer and paint finish in RAL 7016, anthracite
grey
Special paint finish as for K23, but standard color K23 + X☐☐
according to color table
K23 in combination with option N16: K23 + X☐☐
Primer and paint finish in RAL 7016, anthracite
gray or optional
Primer K23, paint finish with standard color ac‐
cording to color table
Customer data on the rating plate Y84
You can find more information in Chapter "Options (Page 397)".

For motors with planetary gearbox, the options are separately listed in the associated
Operating Instructions as well as in the Configuration Manual.
16.2 Ordering data of the converter
16.2.1 Order data for converters with 1 AC line connection
Converters with 1 AC line connection

Article number Frame size Rated power
6SL5310-1BB10-1CF0 FSA 100 W
6SL5310-1BB10-2CF0 FSA 200 W
Ordering data
16.3 Ordering data of the connection system

6SL5310-1BB10-4CF0 FSB 400 W
6SL5310-1BB10-8CF0 FSC 750 W
16.2.2 Order data for converters with 3 AC line connection

6SL5310-1BE10-4DF0 FSA 0.4 kW
6SL5310-1BE10-8DF0 FSA 0.75 kW
6SL5310-1BE11-0DF0 FSA 1 kW
6SL5310-1BE11-5DF0 FSB 1.5 kW
6SL5310-1BE12-0DF0 FSB 2 kW
6SL5310-1BE13-5DF0 FSC 3.5 kW
6SL5310-1BE15-0DF0 FSC 5 kW
6SL5310-1BE17-0DF0 FSC 7 kW
16.3.1 Order data for OCC MOTION-CONNECT cables

You can only order OCC MOTION-CONNECT cables as prefabricated cables.
Ordering data
A maximum of 3 disconnection points are allowed without reducing the total permitted
length.
OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable with SPEED-CONNECT connector

Designation and use For connection Connector Article number1)
to motor size
Motor connection ca‐ 1F☐2☐02 M12 6FX5002-8QN04-☐☐☐☐2)
ble OCC MC 500 for pre‐ 1F☐2☐03
dominantly fixed instal‐
1F☐2☐03 M17 6FX5002-8QN08-☐☐☐☐
lation
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05
1F☐2☐06 M23 1.5 mm²: 6FX5002-8QN11-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐08 2.5 mm²: 6FX5002-8QN21-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
Motor connection ca‐ 1F☐2☐02 M12 0.38 mm²: 6FX8002-8QN04-☐☐☐☐2)
ble OCC MC 800PLUS 1F☐2☐03 0.82 mm²: 6FX8002-8QN05-☐☐☐☐3)
for use in cable carriers
1F☐2☐03 M17 6FX8002-8QN08-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05
1F☐2☐06 M23 1.5 mm²: 6FX8002-8QN11-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐08 2.5 mm²: 6FX8002-8QN21-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
Extension for motor 1F☐2☐02 M12 6FX5002-8QE04-☐☐☐☐2)
connection cable OCC 1F☐2☐03
MC 500 for predomi‐
1F☐2☐03 M17 6FX5002-8QE08-☐☐☐☐
nantly fixed installation
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05
1F☐2☐06 M23 1.5 mm²: 6FX5002-8QE11-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐08 2.5 mm²: 6FX5002-8QE21-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
Extension for motor 1F☐2☐02 M12 0.38 mm²: 6FX8002-8QE04-☐☐☐☐2)
connection cable OCC 1F☐2☐03 0.82 mm²: 6FX8002-8QE05-☐☐☐☐3)
MC 800PLUS for use in
1F☐2☐03 M17 6FX8002-8QE08-☐☐☐☐
cable carriers
1F☐2☐04
1F☐2☐05
1F☐2☐06 M23 1.5 mm²: 6FX8002-8QE11-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐08 2.5 mm²: 6FX8002-8QE21-☐☐☐☐
1F☐2☐10
1)
The last 4 digits (☐☐☐☐) define the cable length corresponding to the length code
2)
3)
For UL applications
Ordering data
16.3.2 Determining the article number of a prefabricated OCC MOTION-CONNECT

cable
Overview
M

Figure 16-1 Lengths of an OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable
Procedure
1. Determine the required cable length l **. Consider having cable in reserve for strain-free
routing.
2. Determine the length code for the required length l ** corresponding to the following
overview. The stretched lengths (*) are added automatically for the prefabricated cables.
Ordering data
3. Also select the cable type, the desired cable version, and the required connectors for the
article number.
'9௑2௑௑௑௑௑௑௑
0$$.05*0/$0//&$5
$BCMFUZQF $PEF
.$
.$1-64
$BCMFWFSTJPO $PEF
$POOFDUPSTJ[F $PEF
.PUPSDPOOFDUJPODBCMFT /
. NNr

&YUFOTJPODBCMF &
. NNr

. NNr

. NNr

&YBNQMFPGBMFOHUIDPEF
. NNr

N "#
N "$ -FOHUI $PEF
N %( N
NBYN '" -FOHUI $PEF

N "
N #
N $
`N %
N &
N '
-FOHUI $PEF
N "
N #
N $
N %
N &
N '
N (
N )
N +
N ,
-FOHUI $PEF
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

'PS*&$BQQMJDBUJPOT N

'PS6-BQQMJDBUJPOT
N
Figure 16-2 Structure of the article number with length code for an OCC MOTION-CONNECT cable
4. Order the required cable with the article number thus determined.
Ordering data
Parameters 17
17.1 Explanation of the list of parameters
Description
The parameters are displayed according to the following pattern.
SYYYY 1BSBNFUFSOBNFTIPSUQBSBNFUFSOBNF
7BSJBOU %BUBUZQF*OUFHFS 7JTJCMFJO4UBOEBSEEJTQMBZ
3FBESJHIUT 3FBEESJWFEBUBPSBDLOPXMFEHFNFTTBHFT
8SJUFQFSNJTTJPO &EJUEFWJDFDPO꫼HVSBUJPOPSESJWFBQQMJDBUJPOT
$BOCFDIBOHFEJOPQFSBUJOHTUBUF 3FBEZGPSPQFSBUJPO
1BSBNFUFSHSPVQ /BNFPGUIFHSPVQ T
6OJU
.JO .BY 'BDUPSZTFUUJOH

%FTDSJQUJPO 5FYU
7BMVF /BNFPGWBMVF
/BNFPGWBMVF
3FDPNNFOEBUJPO 5FYU
*OEFY <>/BNFBOENFBOJOHPGJOEFY
<>/BNFBOENFBOJOHPGJOEFY
#JUBSSBZ #JU 4JHOBMOBNF TJHOBM TJHOBM
/BNFPGCJU :FT /P
/BNFPGCJU :FT /P
%FQFOEFODZ 5FYU
4FFBMTP QYYY SYYY
4FFBMTP 'YYYYY "YYYYY $YYYYY
%BOHFS$BVUJPO 4BGFUZSFMBUFEOPUFDPSSFTQPOEJOHUPUIFXBSOJOHOPUFDPODFQU
8BSOJOH/PUJDF
/PUF 5FYU
Parameters
The representation of a parameter includes as a maximum the information listed below.

Depending on the specific parameter, some of the listed information is not applicable.
• Parameter number (rxxxx)
The parameter number is made up of a "p", "r" or "c", followed by several numbers and
optionally an index and bit array.
The parameter number has the following syntax: pxxxx[0...n], rxxxx[0...n], cxxxx[0...n],
pxxxx.0...15 or rxxxx.0...15, cxxxx.0...15, pxxxx[0...n].0...15 or rxxxx[0...n].0...15,
cxxxx[0...n].0...15.
Examples of representation in the parameter list:
• p... Setting parameters (read and write)

• r... Display parameters (read-only)
• c... Display parameters (read-only)
• p0972 Setting parameter 972
• p0489[0...2] Setting parameter 489 index 0 to 2
• r0945 Display parameter 945
• r0196[0...255].4...15 Display parameter with index 0 to 255 and bit array, bit 4 to bit 15
• r5613.0...1 Display parameter 5613 with bit array from bit 0 to bit 1
• c8997[0...2] Display parameter 8997 index 0 to 2
Other examples of the notation in the documentation:
• p9563[1] Setting parameter 9563, index 1
• r0196[1].5 Display parameter 196, index 1, bit 5
• r0964[2] Display parameter 964, index 2
• p5611.1 Setting parameter 5611, bit 1
• Parameter name / short parameter name

Shows the parameter name in the long form and separated by a slash in the short form.
• Variant
Specifies the product variant for which the parameter is valid. This information is not
applicable if a parameter is the same for all product variants used in the parameter list.
• Data type
Each parameter is assigned one of the following data types:
• Integer8 I8 8-bit integer

• Unsigned8 U8 8-bit without sign
• FloatingPoint32 Float 32-bit floating-point number
Parameters
• Visible in
You change the number of parameters displayed in the commissioning tool via:
– Standard display
Only the basic parameters are displayed.
– Extended display
The full scope of parameters is displayed.
• Rights
The user and rights management (UMAC) controls access to the parameters.
You require runtime function rights to read and set parameters.
The following read rights are available:
– Read drive data or acknowledge messages
The following write permissions are available:
– Control drive in manual mode
– Perform drive diagnostics
– Perform firmware update
– Create backup or load drive data to Startdrive
– Edit device settings or drive application
– Edit Safety Integrated application
– Edit web server settings
– Manage users and roles
Runtime function rights depend on user roles, which are assigned in the commissioning tool
being used (Startdrive, web server). As a consequence, setting parameters can be write-
protected.
The commissioning tool provides additional support.
• Can be changed in operating state
A parameter can only be changed in this operating state. The change only becomes active
after exiting the state.
The following states exist:
– Operation
The pulses have been enabled.
– Ready for operation
The pulses are not enabled and state "Commissioning" is not active.
– Commissioning
Commissioning takes place.
The pulses cannot be enabled.
• Parameter group
A parameter group contains parameters that are functionally associated with one another.
• Unit
Shows the default unit of the parameter. For setting parameters, the unit is additionally
specified according to the values (Min, Max, Factory setting) in square brackets.
Parameters
• Min, Max, Factory setting

The parameter value "when shipped" is specified under "Factory setting" with the relevant
unit in square parentheses.
The value can be adjusted within the range defined by "Min" and "Max".
This information is not applicable for display parameters.
Min Minimum value of the parameter [unit]

Max Maximum value of the parameter [unit]
Factory setting Value when delivered [unit]
• Description
Explanation of the function of a parameter.
• Values
List of the possible values of a parameter.
• Recommendation
Information about recommended settings.
• Index
Indexed parameters represent the name and its significance for each individual index.
The following applies to the values (Min, Max, Factory setting) of indexed setting parameters:
– Min, Max:
The adjustment range and the unit apply to all indices.
– Factory setting:
When all indices have the same factory setting, index 0 is specified with the unit to
represent all indices.
When the indices have different factory settings, they are all listed individually with the
unit.
• Bit array
For parameters with bit arrays, the following information is provided for each bit:
– Bit number and signal name
– Meaning for signal states 0 and 1
– Function diagram (optional)
The signal is shown in this function diagram.
• Dependency
Specification of interactions that this parameter can potentially have:
– Effect on other parameters
– Dependent on other parameter settings (dependent on the selected functions)
– List of other parameters to be considered
– List of faults and alarms to be considered
Parameters
• Danger / Caution / Warning / Notice

The safety-relevant notes correspond to the warning notice concept and contain the
following information:
– Important information that must be observed to avoid the risk of physical injury or
material damage.
– Information that must be observed to avoid any problems.
– Information that the user may find useful.
• Note
Additional explanations about parameters
Parameters
17.2 List of parameters
Parameters
The following list contains parameters of the S210 product.
Product: SINAMICS S210, Version: 601122000, Language: eng
Objects: S210
r0002 Operating display

Data type: Integer16 Visible in: Standard display
Read permission: Read drive data or acknowledge messages
Write permission: Edit device configuration or drive applications
Parameter group: Status parameters, Diagnostics general, Drive enable signals
Unit: -
Description: Operating display for the drive.
Value: 0: Operation - everything enabled
10: Operation - Set "Enable setpoint" = "1"
11: Operation - Set "Enable speed controller" = "1"
12: Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1"
13: Operation - Set "Enable ramp-function generator" = "1"
14: Operation - speed setpoint not enabled
15: Operation - open brake (p1215)
16: Operation - Withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1"
17: Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
18: Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge
21: Ready for operation - Set "Enable operation" = "1"
31: Ready for switching on - Set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1"
35: Switching on inhibited - Commissioning not possible, check motor
41: Switching on inhibited - Set "ON/OFF1" = "0"
42: Switching on inhibited - Set "Operating condition/OFF2" = "1"
43: Switching on inhibited - Set "Operating condition/OFF3" = "1"
44: Switching on inhibited - Supply STO terminal w/ 24 V (hardware)
45: Switching on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO
46: Switching on inhibited - exit commissioning mode
60: Drive deactivated/not operational
70: Initialization
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
250: Device signals a topology error
Dependency: See also: r0046
NOTICE
For a display not equal to 0, the drive is either powering up or an enable signal is missing. The control sends these enable
signals.
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Parameters
Note
The drive only controls the motor speed in the "Operation" state (r0002 = 0).
OC: Operating condition
EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)
RFG: Ramp-function generator
COM: Commissioning
MotID: Motor data identification
SS2: Safe Stop 2
STO: Safe Torque Off
r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed

Data type: FloatingPoint32 Visible in: Standard display
Parameter group: Mode signals / displays
Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the smoothed speed setpoint at the speed controller input.
r0021 Speed actual value smoothed

Parameter group: Diagnostics, Mode signals / displays
Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
r0026 DC link voltage smoothed

Parameter group: Brake control, Mode signals / displays
Unit: V
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
r0027 Absolute actual current smoothed

Unit: Arms
Description: Displays the smoothed absolute current actual value.
Parameters
r0031 Actual torque smoothed

Parameter group: Brake control, Mode signals / displays
Unit: Nm
Description: Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
r0032 Active power actual value smoothed

Unit: kW
Description: Display for the smoothed actual value of the active power.
r0034 Motor utilization thermal

Parameter group: Motor temperature, Mode signals / displays
Unit: %
Description: Displays the thermal motor utilization taking into account the ambient temperature set in p0613.
Dependency: See also: p0613
See also: F07011, A07012
NOTICE
After the drive is switched on, the system starts to determine the motor temperature with an assumed model value. This
means that the value for the motor utilization is only valid after a stabilization time.
r0037[0...10] Drive temperatures

Data type: FloatingPoint32 Visible in: Extended display
Unit: °C
Description: Displays the temperatures of the drive components.
Index: [0] = Inverter maximum value
[1] = Depletion layer maximum value
[2] = Rectifier maximum value
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Cooling unit liquid intake
[6] = Capacitor air discharge
[7] = Depletion layer maximum value 1
Parameters
Note
The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
For index [0]:
Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
For index [1]:
Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter or depletion layer.
In the case of a fault, the particular shutdown threshold depends on the power unit, and cannot be read out.
r0039[0...2] Energy display

Parameter group: Mode signals / displays, Power loss optimization
Unit: kWh
Description: Display for the energy values at the drive output terminals.
Index: [0] = Energy balance (sum)
[1] = Energy drawn
[2] = Energy fed back
Note
For index [0]:
Difference between the energy drawn and energy that is fed back.
r0044 Thermal converter utilization

Parameter group: Mode signals / displays, Power unit
Unit: %
Description: Displays the thermal converter utilization as a percentage.
With this value, various thermal monitoring functions are taken into account.
Note
The thermal motor utilization is displayed in parameter r0034.
r0046.0...30 Missing enable signal

Data type: Unsigned32 Visible in: Standard display
Parameter group: Control/status words, Drive enable signals
Unit: -
Description: Displays the missing enable signals.
All enable signals are required to operate the drive. The enable signals are set by the control.
Bit array: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal
00 OFF1 enable missing Yes No
03 Operation enable missing Yes No
08 Safety enable missing Yes No
Parameters
10 Ramp-function generator enable missing Yes No

12 Setpoint enable missing Yes No
16 OFF1 enable internal missing Yes No
19 Pulse enable internal missing Yes No
21 STOP2 enable internal missing Yes No
26 Drive inactive or not operational Yes No
28 Brake open missing Yes No
30 Speed controller inhibited Yes No
Parameters
Note
The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- OFF1 from the PROFINET interface missing.
- There is a "switching on inhibited".



- "Enable operation" from the PROFINET interface missing.

- Safety functions have been enabled and STO is active.
- A safety-relevant message with STO as response is active.
STO enabled via terminals:
- Pulse enable via the STO terminals has a 0 signal.
STO enabled via PROFIsafe:
- STO is selected via PROFIsafe.
- Additional details relating to the reason that STO was selected, see parameter r10352.

- "Enable ramp-function generator" from the PROFINET interface missing.

- "Enable setpoint" from the PROFINET interface missing.

- There is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the
"switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.

- The commissioning mode is selected.
- There is an OFF2 fault response.
- The drive is inactive or not capable of operation.

- OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:

- Synchronization is running between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle.

The pulses have been enabled and the speed setpoint has still not been enabled, because:
- The holding brake opening time (r1216) has still not elapsed.
- The motor has still not been magnetized (induction motor).
- The encoder has not been calibrated (U/f vector and synchronous motor)

- The drive is inactive or not capable of operation.
- The drive device is in the "PROFIenergy energy-saving mode" (r5600, CU-specific).

- The holding brake is closed or has still not been opened.
Parameters
Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present:

- Pulse enable missing
- The function generator with current input is active.
- The measuring function "current controller reference frequency characteristic" is active.
- The pole position identification is active.
- Motor data identification is active (only certain steps).
r0061[0...1] Actual speed unsmoothed

Parameter group: Motor encoder, Mode signals / displays
Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the unsmoothed speed actual value sensed by the encoder.
Index: [0] = Motor encoder
[1] = Reserved
r0062 Speed setpoint after the filter

Unit: rpm
Description: Display for the speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.
r0063 Speed actual value smoothed

Unit: rpm
Description: Display for the speed actual value.
Dependency: See also: r0021, r0061, p1441
r0068 Absolute current actual value

Unit: Arms
Description: Displays actual absolute current.
NOTICE
The value is updated with a sampling time of 1 ms.
Note
Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).
Parameters
r0070 Actual DC link voltage

Unit: V
Description: Display for the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
Note
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0076 Current actual value field-generating

Unit: Arms
Description: Display for the actual value of the field-generating current Id.
r0077 Current setpoint torque-generating

Parameter group: Current controller, Mode signals / displays
Unit: Arms
Description: Displays the torque/force-generating current setpoint.
r0078[0...1] Current actual value torque-generating

Unit: Arms
Description: Display for the actual value of the torque-generating current Iq.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
r0079[0...1] Torque setpoint total

Parameter group: Torque limiting, Mode signals / displays
Unit: Nm
Description: Display for the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller.
[1] = Smoothed
Parameters
r0080 Torque actual value

Unit: Nm
Description: Display for the actual torque.
Note
The value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).
r0082[0...3] Active power actual value

Unit: kW
Description: Displays the actual active power.
[1] = Smoothed
[2] = Power drawn
[3] = Power drawn smoothed
Note
The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with 1 ms) and unsmoothed
(r0082[0]).
For index [3]:
Smoothing time constant = 0.25 ms
r0196[0...255].4...15 Topology component status

Data type: Unsigned32 Visible in: Extended display
Parameter group: Diagnostics general
Unit: -
Description: Displays the status of the components.
r0196[0]: Group status of all components
r0196[1]: Status of component with component number 1
...
r0196[255]: Status of component with component number 255
04 Component state Active Inactive/parking
06 Topology problem active Yes No
07 Part of the target topology Yes No only act topo
08 Alarm present Yes No
10 Fault present Yes No
13 Maintenance required Yes No
14 Maintenance urgently required Yes No
15 Fault gone/can be acknowledged Yes No
Parameters
Note
For bits 12 ... 11:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes only
on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.
p0201[0] Power unit code number

Can be changed in the operating Commissioning
state:
Parameter group: Power unit
Unit: -
Min: Max: Factory setting:
0 65535 0
Description: Sets the actual code number of the power unit being used.
r0208 Rated power unit line supply voltage

Parameter group: System identification, Power unit
Unit: Vrms
Description: Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit.
r0208 = 230: 200 - 240 V (line voltage tolerance: +/-10 %)
r0208 = 400: 380 - 480 V (line voltage tolerance: +/-10 %)
p0210 Device supply voltage

Can be changed in the operating Ready for operation
state:
Parameter group: Power unit, Quick commissioning
Unit: V
1 [V] 63000 [V] 400 [V]
Description: Sets the device supply voltage.
The voltage between two phases should be entered as the device supply voltage.
This setting is important for operating with voltages that are less than the voltage range for which the drive is designed.
Note
Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage:
U_rated = 230 V:
- p0210 = 200 ... 240 V
U_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V (wide voltage range, in addition to 200 ... 240 V)
Parameters
p0251[0] Power unit heat sink fan operating hours counter

state:
Parameter group: System identification, Power unit
Unit: h
0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Displays the operating hours of the heat sink fan in the power unit.
The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced).
See also: A30042
Note
This parameter is only available/included in the customer interface for compatibility reasons.
In the future, use parameter r0277 (power unit heat sink-fan wear counter).
r0277[0] Power unit heat sink fan wear counter

Parameter group: Power unit
Unit: %
Description: Displays the wear counter of the heat sink fan in the power unit.
After a fan has been replaced, using an appropriate button, the value can be reset in the commissioning tool to 0.
Dependency: See also: A30042
p0300[0] Motor type selection

state:
Parameter group: Motor data, Quick commissioning
Unit: -
0 10000 0
Description: Selects the motor type or start to read in the motor parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ (p0300 = 10000).
For p0300 < 10000 the following applies:
The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party motor
belonging to a motor list:
2 = rotating synchronous motor
Value: 0: No motor
2: Synchronous motor
203: 1FT2 synchronous motor
237: 1FK7 synchronous motor
295: 1FS2 synchronous motor
Parameters
2030: 1FT2 synchronous motor

2032: 1FS2 synchronous motor
10000: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ
p0301[0] Motor code number selection

state:
Unit: -
0 99999999 0
Description: Code number of the connected motor, whose data was accepted when commissioning.
Dependency: Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300.
See also: p0300
Note
For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0301 cannot be changed. p0301 is automatically written to the code number of the motor
parameter read in (r0302) if p0300 is set to 10000. For other values, the commissioning routine cannot be exited.
r0302[0] Motor code (identified)

Unit: -
Description: Displays the identified motor code number.
When the drive powers up, the motor code is read out the motor. For r0302 = 0, the motor data were not identified.
r0304[0] Rated motor voltage

Unit: Vrms
Description: Displays the rated motor voltage.
r0305[0] Rated motor current

Unit: Arms
Description: Displays the rated motor current.
Parameters
r0307[0] Rated motor power

Unit: kW
Description: Displays the rated motor power.
r0311[0] Rated motor speed

Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the rated motor speed.
r0312[0] Rated motor torque

Parameter group: Motor data
Unit: Nm
Description: Displays the rated motor torque.
r0316[0] Motor torque constant

Unit: Nm/A
Description: Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor.
r0316 = 0:
The torque constant is calculated from the motor data.
r0316 > 0:
The selected value is used as torque constant.
r0318[0] Motor stall current

Unit: Arms
Description: Displays the rated motor stall current.
Parameters
r0319[0] Motor stall torque

Unit: Nm
Description: Displays the motor standstill/stall torque.
r0322[0] Maximum motor speed

Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the maximum motor speed.
r0323[0] Maximum motor current

Unit: Arms
Description: Displays the maximum permissible motor current.
r0341[0] Motor moment of inertia

Parameter group: Motor data, Speed controller
Unit: kgm²
Description: Displays the motor moment of inertia (without load).
p0400[0] Encoder type selection

state:
Parameter group: Motor encoder, Quick commissioning
Unit: -
0 10100 0
Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Value: 0: No encoder
202: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS20, singleturn
204: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM20, multiturn 4096
Parameters

10100: Identify encoder (waiting)
NOTICE
An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list.
When selecting a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed
(write protection).
Note
The connected encoder can be identified using p0400 = 10100. This means that the encoder must support this, and is
possible in the following cases:
- Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ
- Encoder with EnDat interface
- DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
For p0400 = 10100 the following applies:
The connected encoder is identified. If identification is not possible, then p0400 remains set = 10100, and the system
waits until identification is possible.
p0404[0].1...10 Encoder configuration effective

state:
Parameter group: Motor encoder
Unit: -
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Settings for the basic encoder properties.
01 Absolute encoder Yes No
02 Multiturn encoder Yes No
10 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Yes No
NOTICE
This parameter is automatically pre-assigned for encoders from the encoder list and for identify encoder (p0400).
When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note
For bit 01, 02 (absolute encoder, multiturn encoder):
These bits can only be selected for a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
For bit 10 (DRIVE-CLiQ encoder):
This bit is only used for the large-scale integrated DRIVE-CLiQ encoders that provide their encoder data directly in DRIVE-
CLiQ format without converting this data. This bit is not, therefore, set for first-generation DRIVE-CLiQ encoders.
Parameters
p0408[0] Rotary encoder pulse number

state:
Unit: -
0 16777215 2048
Description: Sets the number of pulses for a rotary encoder.
In conjunction with the fine resolution, the pulse number defines the transfer format for position actual values
Gn_XIST1 (r0479).
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection).
Note
The smallest permissible value is 1 pulse.
This value does not always correspond to the pulse number of the measuring device. For a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, a value
is entered here that facilitates optimum transfer of the resolution (p0423).
p0421[0] Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution

state:
Unit: -
0 4294967295 4096
Description: Maximum number of revolutions that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder to determine the position.
The value of p0421 is read out when the drive powers up and cannot be changed.
p0423[0] Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution

state:
Unit: -
0 1073741823 8192
Description: Sets the number of measuring steps per revolution for a rotary absolute encoder.
The resolution refers to the absolute position.
NOTICE
When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Parameters
r0479[0...2] Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1

Unit: -
Description: Display for the encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
The value of r0479 is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
[1] = Reserved
[2] = Reserved
p0488[0...2] Activate measuring probe 1

Can be changed in the operating Operation, Ready for operation
state:
Parameter group: Measuring probe
Unit: -
0 210 210
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate measuring probe 1.
The inversion of probe 1 is set in p0490.0.
Value: 0: No measuring probe
210: DI 0 (X130 / 1.2)
[1] = Reserved
[2] = Reserved
Dependency: See also: p0489, p0490
CAUTION
In order to prevent incorrect measurement values, these parameters may not be written during an active measurement.
Note
DI: Digital Input
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
p0489[0...2] Activate measuring probe 2

state:
Unit: -
0 211 211
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate measuring probe 2.
The inversion of probe 2 is set in p0490.1.
Value: 0: No measuring probe
Parameters
211: DI 1 (X130 / 1.5)

[1] = Reserved
[2] = Reserved
CAUTION
Note
DI: Digital Input
p0490.0...1 Invert measuring probe

state:
Unit: -
- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert digital input 0 or 1 (probe 1, 2).
00 DI 0 (X130 / 1.2) Inverted Not inverted
01 DI 1 (X130 / 1.5) Inverted Not inverted
Note
DI: Digital Input
The inversion has no effect on the status display of the digital inputs (r0722).
p0494[0] Equivalent zero mark input terminal

state:
Unit: -
0 211 0
Description: Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Value: 0: No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)
210: DI 0 (X130 / 1.2)
211: DI 1 (X130 / 1.5)
CAUTION
Parameters
Note
r0550[0] Brake status

Data type: Integer16 Visible in: Extended display
Parameter group: Motor holding brake, Quick commissioning
Unit: -
Description: Displays the status of the brake.
The value of r0550 is read when the drive runs up.
Value: 0: No data
1: Holding brake
2: High performance holding brake
Dependency: See also: p1215, r1216, r1217
Note
For value = 1:
The default value for opening time/closing time applies.
For value = 2:
A shorter opening time/closing time is realized if the drive satisfies the preconditions.
p0551[0] Brake code number

state:
Parameter group: Motor holding brake, Quick commissioning
Unit: -
0 4294967295 1
Description: Display and setting the code number for the brake.
0 = No data
1 = Manual entry
> 1 = valid code number
For value = 0:
- Parameters listed under Dependent are set to a value of zero and are write protected.
- Parameters r1216, r1217 are set to a value of zero.
For value = 1:
- Write protection for the parameters listed under Dependent is withdrawn.
For value > 1:
- Parameters listed under Dependent are automatically pre-assigned and are write protected.
- Parameters r1216, r1217 are automatically appropriately pre-assigned.
Note
Only code numbers can be set that are permitted for the selected motor code (p0301).
Parameters
p0613[0] Motor temperature model ambient temperature

state:
Parameter group: Motor temperature
Unit: °C
-40 [°C] 100 [°C] 40 [°C]
Description: Sets the motor ambient temperature.
Based on this value, the motor temperature model calculates the thermal motor utilization (r0034).
See also: F07011, A07012
Note
If the thermal motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0613 is incorporated in the model
calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used.
r0722.0...4 Digital inputs status

Parameter group: Digital inputs
Unit: -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
00 DI 0 (X130 / 1.2) High Low
01 DI 1 (X130 / 1.5) High Low
02 DI 2 (X130 / 2.1-2) High Low
03 DI 3 (X130 / 2.3-4) High Low
04 DI 4 (X130 / 2.6) High Low
Note
DI: Digital Input
For bit 00, 01:
DI 0 and DI 1 are fast digital inputs and can be used to connect a measuring probe (p0488, p0489).
For bits 02, 03:
DI 2 and DI 3 form a failsafe digital input.
For bit 04:
DI 4 is intended to monitor the temperature of the external brake resistor.
r0898.0...14 Control word sequence control

Parameter group: Control/status words
Unit: -
Description: Display for the control word of the sequence control.
The higher-level control cyclically sends the control word to the drive.
Parameters
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No
01 Operating condition / OFF2 Yes No
02 Operating condition / OFF3 Yes No
03 Enable operation Yes No
04 Enable ramp-function generator Yes No
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No
06 Enable speed setpoint Yes No
07 Command open brake Yes No
08 Jog 1 Yes No
09 Jog 2 Yes No
10 Master control by PLC Yes No
12 Speed controller enable Yes No
14 Command close brake Yes No
r0899.0...13 Status word sequence control

Parameter group: Control/status words
Unit: -
Description: Display for the status word of the sequence control.
The status word is cyclically sent from the drive to the higher-level control.
00 Ready for switching on Yes No
01 Ready Yes No
02 Operation enabled Yes No
03 Jog active Yes No
04 No coasting active OFF2 inactive OFF2 active
05 No Quick Stop active OFF3 inactive OFF3 active
06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No
07 Drive ready Yes No
08 Controller enable Yes No
09 Control request Yes No
11 Pulses enabled Yes No
12 Open holding brake Yes No
13 Command close holding brake Yes No
Note
For bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09:
For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.
For bit 13:
When function "SBC (Safe Brake Control)" is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled using this signal.
r0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection

Parameter group: Quick commissioning, Configuration
Unit: -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive telegram.
Parameters
Value: 3: Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9

5: Standard telegram 5, PZD-9/9
102: SIEMENS telegram 102, PZD-6/10
105: SIEMENS telegram 105, PZD-10/10
Note
The telegram is set in the commissioning tool or by the control.
r0924[0...1] ZSW bit pulses enabled

Parameter group: Configuration
Unit: -
Description: Displays the position of the "Pulses enabled" status signal in the PROFIdrive telegram.
Index: [0] = Signal number
[1] = Bit position
p0925 PROFIdrive clock synchronous sign-of-life tolerance

state:
Unit: -
0 65535 1
Description: Sets the number of tolerated consecutive sign-of-life errors of the isochronous controller.
The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the controller.
Dependency: See also: F01912
Note
The sign-of-life monitoring is disabled for p0925 = 65535.
r0930 PROFIdrive operating mode

Unit: -
Description: Displays the operating mode.
3: Closed-loop speed controlled operation without ramp-function generator
r0944 Fault buffer counter

Parameter group: Faults / alarms
Unit: -
Parameters
Description: Display for the fault buffer counter

This counter is incremented every time that a fault occurs.
Recommendation: This is used to check whether an additional fault has occurred while reading out the fault buffer.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109
r0945[0...63] Fault code

Unit: -
Description: Displays the codes of faults that have occurred.
Dependency: See also: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
NOTICE
The properties of the fault buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated (states are indicated in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0] or r2133[0], r2130[0], r0948[0], r2136[0], r2109[0] --> fault 1 (oldest active fault) of the active
incident
...
r0945[7], r0949[7] or r2133[7], r2130[7], r0948[7], r2136[7], r2109[7] --> fault 8 (latest active fault) of the active
incident
For more than 8 active faults, only the entries are overwritten at the eighth position (index 7).
History of acknowledged faults:

If a fault incident is acknowledged, then all alarms of the 1st fault incident are transferred into the 2nd fault incident,
this becomes the 1st acknowledged fault incident.
The 2nd incident is transferred into the 3rd, the 3rd into the 4th etc. The last incident is rejected.
r0945[8], r0949[8] or r2133[8], r2130[0], r0948[8], r2136[8], r2109[8] --> fault 1 of the 1st acknowledged incident
...
r0945[16], r0949[16] or r2133[16], r2130[16], r0948[16], r2136[16], r2109[16] --> fault 1 of the 2nd acknowledged
incident
...
r0945[56], r0949[56] or r2133[56], r2130[56], r0948[56], r2136[56], r2109[56] --> fault 1 of the 7th acknowledged
incident
...
r0945[63], r0949[63] or r2133[63], r2130[63], r0948[63], r2136[63], r2109[63] --> fault 8 (oldest fault that has gone)
of the 7th acknowledged incident
r0947[0...63] Fault number

Unit: -
Description: Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.
NOTICE
The properties of the fault buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Parameters
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated (states are indicated in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0] or r2133[0], r2130[0], r0948[0], r2136[0], r2109[0] --> fault 1 (oldest active fault) of the active
incident
...
r0945[7], r0949[7] or r2133[7], r2130[7], r0948[7], r2136[7], r2109[7] --> fault 8 (latest active fault) of the active
incident
For more than 8 active faults, only the entries are overwritten at the eighth position (index 7).
History of acknowledged faults:

If a fault incident is acknowledged, then all alarms of the 1st fault incident are transferred into the 2nd fault incident,
this becomes the 1st acknowledged fault incident.
The 2nd incident is transferred into the 3rd, the 3rd into the 4th etc. The last incident is rejected.
r0945[8], r0949[8] or r2133[8], r2130[0], r0948[8], r2136[8], r2109[8] --> fault 1 of the 1st acknowledged incident
...
r0945[16], r0949[16] or r2133[16], r2130[16], r0948[16], r2136[16], r2109[16] --> fault 1 of the 2nd acknowledged
incident
...
r0945[56], r0949[56] or r2133[56], r2130[56], r0948[56], r2136[56], r2109[56] --> fault 1 of the 7th acknowledged
incident
...
r0945[63], r0949[63] or r2133[63], r2130[63], r0948[63], r2136[63], r2109[63] --> fault 8 (oldest fault that has gone)
of the 7th acknowledged incident
r0948[0...63] Fault received in milliseconds

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds referred to the day that the fault occurred.
Dependency: See also: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136
NOTICE
The time comprises r2130 (complete days) and r0948 (milliseconds, incomplete day).
r0949[0...63] Fault value

Unit: -
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
The fault causes can be found under the fault values of the particular fault number.
Note
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background.
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
Parameters
p0952 Fault cases counter

state:
Unit: -
0 65535 0
Description: Number of fault situations since the last reset.
Dependency: The counter is reset with p0952 = 0.
See also: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
r0964[0...6] Device identification

Parameter group: System identification
Unit: -
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note
Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = device type, see below
r0964[2] = 601 --> first part firmware version V06.01 (second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2020 --> year 2020
r0964[4] = 1706 --> June 17
r0964[5] = 1 --> 1 drive object
r0964[6] = 0 --> second part firmware version (complete version: V06.01.00.00)
r0965 PROFIdrive profile number profile version

Unit: -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.
Constant value = 032A hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile
Byte 2: profile version = 2A hex = 42 dec = version 4.2
Note
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.
Parameters
p0972 Drive unit reset

state:
Parameter group: Save & reset
Unit: -
0 3 0
Description: Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Hardware-Reset immediate
2: Hardware reset preparation
3: Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed
DANGER
It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition.
The memory card/device memory of the converter must not be accessed.
Note
For value = 1:
Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
This value cannot be set in operation.
For value = 2:
Help to check the reset operation.
Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no longer
acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted.
For value = 3:
The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized reset by
a control for several drive units.
If cyclic communication is not active, then the reset is immediately executed.
To check the reset operation:
After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the following:
p0972 = 0 --> the reset was successfully executed.
p0972 > 0 --> the reset was not executed.
r0975[0...10] Drive object identification

Unit: -
Description: Displays the identification of the drive object.
The drive internally comprises components, device and drive object. Both components require their own identification
parameters according to PROFIdrive.
Parameters
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)

[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = PROFIdrive drive object type class
[6] = PROFIdrive drive object subtype class
[7] = Drive object number
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note
Example:
r0975[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0975[1] = 312 --> drive object type VECTOR
r0975[2] = 601 --> first part firmware version V06.01 (second part refer to index 10)
r0975[3] = 2023 --> year 2023
r0975[4] = 1706 --> 17th of June
r0975[5] = 1 --> PROFIdrive type class = 1 (axis)
r0975[6] = 9 --> PROFIdrive subtype class = 1 and 4 (application classes)
r0975[7] = 1 -> drive object number = 1
r0975[8] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[9] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[10] = 0 --> second part firmware version (complete version: V06.01.00.00)
p0976 Reset all parameters

state:
Unit: -
0 1 0
Description: Resets all parameters of the drive system.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start to reset all parameters
NOTICE
Writing to parameters is inhibited during the reset operation.
p0977 Save all parameters

state:
Unit: -
Parameters

0 1 0
Description: Saves all parameters of the drive system to the non-volatile memory.
When saving, only the adjustable parameters intended to be saved are taken into account.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save in non-volatile memory - Loaded at POWER ON
NOTICE
The drive power supply may only be switched off after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been started, wait
until the parameter again has the value 0).
Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
r0979[0...30] PROFIdrive encoder format

Parameter group: System identification, Configuration
Unit: -
Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Header
[1] = Motor encoder type
[2] = Motor encoder resolution
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions motor encoder
[6...30] = Reserved
Note
Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
r0981[0...299] List of existing parameters 2

Unit: -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a long
list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning tool. However, they can be read from
a higher-level control system.
Parameters
r0989[0...299] List of existing parameters 10

Unit: -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Note
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the parameter lists of the commissioning tool. However, they can be read
from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
p1082[0] Maximum speed

Can be changed in the operating Commissioning, Ready for operation
state:
Parameter group: Speed controller, Quick commissioning
Unit: rpm
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 1500.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed of the motor to a value less than or equal to the maximum motor speed (r0322).
The set value is valid for both directions of rotation.
p1083[0] Speed limit positive

state:
Parameter group: Speed controller
Unit: rpm
0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
The set value must be less than or equal to the maximum speed (p1082).
p1086[0] Speed limit negative

state:
Unit: rpm
Parameters

-210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm] -210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed for the negative direction.
The set value must be less than or equal to the maximum speed (p1082).
p1121[0] OFF1 ramp-down time

Can be changed in the operating Commissioning, Operation, Ready for operation
state:
Parameter group: Quick commissioning
Unit: s
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time after an OFF1 command.
The value is referred to the maximum speed (p1082).
After an OFF1 command, within this time, the speed setpoint is ramped down from the maximum speed (p1082) to
standstill.
p1135[0] OFF3 ramp-down time

Can be changed in the operating Commissioning, Operation, Ready for operation
state:
Parameter group: Shutdown functions, Safety Integrated, Quick commissioning
Unit: s
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for Quick Stop.
In this time, after an OFF3, the speed setpoint is reduced from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill.
Note
This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.
r1196 DSC position setpoint

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Displays the position setpoint of Dynamic Servo Control in fine pulses.
Note
DSC: Dynamic Servo Control
Parameters
p1215[0] Motor holding brake configuration

state:
Parameter group: Motor holding brake
Unit: -
0 2 0
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor holding brake.
For value 2:
This setting allows the motor shaft to be rotated for installation purposes.
Value: 0: No motor holding brake available
1: Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control
2: Motor holding brake always open
Dependency: See also: r1216, r1217, p1226, p1227, p1228, p1278
CAUTION
For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.
Setting p1215 = 2 is not permissible if the brake is used to hold loads.
r1216[0] Motor holding brake opening time

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the opening time for the motor holding brake.
The speed setpoint is kept at 0 for this time. The speed setpoint is then enabled.
Dependency: See also: p1215, r1217
r1217[0] Motor holding brake closing time

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the time to close the motor holding brake.
If the drive signals that the motor is at a standstill, if the holding brake is activated, after the closing time has expired,
the pulses are canceled. This prevents the load from sagging, for example.
Dependency: See also: p1215, r1216
Parameters
p1226[0] Threshold for zero speed detection

state:
Parameter group: Motor holding brake, Shutdown functions
Unit: rpm
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.
The following applies when the motor holding brake is activated:
The motor is shut down and held by the brake after the closing time for the brake in r1217 has elapsed.
The following applies when the motor holding brake is not activated:
The motor is shut down and it then coasts down.
Dependency: See also: p1215, r1216, r1217, p1227
Note
In order that standstill is identified, the speed threshold in p1226 must be somewhat higher than the noise on the speed
actual value signal.
p1227[0] Zero speed detection monitoring time

state:
Unit: s
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 4.000 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is detected after the monitoring time has expired, after the setpoint speed
has fallen below p1226.
After this, the brake control is started, the system waits for the closing time in r1217 and then the pulses are canceled.
Dependency: See also: p1215, r1216, r1217, p1226
Note
Standstill is detected if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
- The speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- The speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
For p1227 = 300.000 s the following applies:

Monitoring is deactivated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts" down.
Parameters
p1228[0] Pulse cancellation delay time

state:
Unit: s
0.000 [s] 299.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for pulse cancellation.
After OFF1 or OFF3, the pulses are canceled, if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
- The speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired.
- The speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
p1278[0] Brake control diagnostics evaluation

state:
Unit: -
0 1 0
Description: Sets the brake control type (with or without diagnostics evaluation).
Example for brake control with diagnostics evaluation.
- brake control in the Motor Modules in booksize format
- Safe Brake Relay for AC Drive
Example for brake control without diagnostics evaluation.
- Brake Relay for AC Drive
Value: 0: Brake control with diagnostics evaluation
1: Brake control without diagnostics evaluation
Note
If the configuration of the motor holding brake (p1215) is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then an
automatic identification of the motor holding brake will be carried out. If a brake control is detected without diagnostics
evaluation (e.g. Brake Relay for AC Drive), then the parameter is set to "brake control without diagnostics evaluation".
It is not permissible to parameterize "Brake control without diagnostic evaluation" and enable "SBC (Safe Brake Control)"
(p1278 = 1, p9603 > 0, p9604 bit1 = 1).
p1414[0].0...1 Speed setpoint filter activation

state:
Parameter group: Speed setpoint filter
Unit: -
Parameters

- - 0001 bin
Description: Setting for activating/deactivating the speed setpoint filter.
Recommendation: If only one filter is required, filter 1 should be activated and filter 2 deactivated, to avoid excessive processing time.
00 Activate filter 1 Yes No
01 Activate filter 2 Yes No
Dependency: The individual speed setpoint filters are parameterized from p1415.
p1415[0] Speed setpoint filter 1 type

state:
Unit: -
0 2 0
Description: Sets the type for speed setpoint filter 1.
Value: 0: Low pass: PT1
1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd order filter
Dependency: PT1 low pass: p1416
PT2 low pass: p1417, p1418
General filter: p1417 ... p1420
p1416[0] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter (PT1).
Note
The speed setpoint filter is activated with a time constant greater than zero.
Parameters
p1417[0] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Note
This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.
p1418[0] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator damping

state:
Unit: -
0.001 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the denominator damping for speed setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Note
p1419[0] Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Note
This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.
Parameters
p1420[0] Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator damping

state:
Unit: -
0.000 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the numerator damping for speed setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Note
p1421[0] Speed setpoint filter 2 type

state:
Unit: -
0 2 0
Description: Sets the type for speed setpoint filter 2.
Value: 0: Low pass: PT1
1: Low pass: PT2
Dependency: PT1 low pass: p1422
PT2 low pass: p1423, p1424
General filter: p1423 ... p1426
p1422[0] Speed setpoint filter 2 time constant

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 2 (PT1).
Note
This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a PT1 low pass.
Parameters
p1423[0] Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Note
p1424[0] Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator damping

state:
Unit: -
0.001 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the denominator damping for speed setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Note
p1425[0] Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Note
Parameters
p1426[0] Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator damping

state:
Unit: -
0.000 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the numerator damping for speed setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Note
p1433[0] Speed controller reference model natural frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.0 [Hz] 8000.0 [Hz] 0.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the natural frequency of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed controller.
Recommendation: The reference model is finely set using p1433.
r1438 Speed controller speed setpoint

Parameter group: U/f control, Speed controller
Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller.
p1441[0] Actual speed smoothing time

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 50.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the speed actual value.
Parameters
p1460[0] Speed controller P gain

state:
Unit: Nms/rad
0.0000 [Nms/rad] 500000000.0000 [Nms/rad] 0.3000 [Nms/rad]
Description: Sets the P gain of the speed controller.
The drive determines the P gain for One Button Tuning and writes the value to p1460.
The value can be changed.
Note
The higher the set P gain, the faster and more unstable the control.
p1462[0] Speed controller integral time

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 10.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the speed controller
The drive determines the integral time for One Button Tuning - and writes the value to p1462.
Note
The shorter the integral time, the faster and more unstable the control.
p1498[0] Load moment of inertia

state:
Unit: kgm²
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Description: Sets the load moment of inertia.
The setting is made during commissioning while the One Button Tuning is being performed.
Parameters
p1520[0] Torque limit upper

state:
Parameter group: Torque limiting
Unit: Nm
-1000000.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Setting the upper torque limit.
This setting is made as part of the basic commissioning.
Dependency: See also: p1521, p1532, r1538, r1539
p1521[0] Torque limit lower

state:
Unit: Nm
-20000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the lower torque limit
This setting is made as part of the basic commissioning.
Dependency: See also: p1520, p1532, r1538, r1539
p1532[0] Torque limit offset

state:
Unit: Nm
-100000.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the offset for the torque limit.
The setting allows electronic weight equalization to be used for vertical axes.
Parameters p1520 and p1521 are offset by the set value in the same direction.
DANGER
If the offset is set higher/lower than the lower/upper torque limit, then the unloaded drive can accelerate up to the
maximum speed.
Parameters
r1538 Upper effective torque limit

Unit: Nm
Description: Displays the currently effective upper torque limit.
Note
The value in r1538 may not exceed the value in p1520.
r1539 Lower effective torque limit

Unit: Nm
Description: Displays the currently effective lower torque limit.
Note
The value in r1539 may not exceed the value in p1521.
p1558 Measure/precontrol hanging/suspended axis force due to weight

state:
Parameter group: Motor data identification routine
Unit: -
-1 1 0
Description: Setting to start/reset the measurement of the force due to weight for a hanging/suspended axis.
The measurement can be started when the pulses are inhibited or the pulses are enabled (p1558 = 1). If it was started
when the pulses were inhibited, then it is only executed after the pulses have been enabled. In both cases, alarm
A07991 is output after starting.
For the measurement, the torque to hold the axis is determined and entered into p1532.
Further, this value is used internally for the precontrol.
Value: -1: Reset values
0: Inactive
1: Start measurement and activate precontrol
Dependency: The pulse enable is withdrawn at the end of the measurement.
See also: p1532
Note
For master control with speed setpoint input from the commissioning tool, the torque precontrol channels are
deactivated, so that the weight equalization entered here is not active.
Parameters
r1651 Torque setpoint function generator

Parameter group: Current setpoint filter
Unit: Nm
Description: Displays the torque setpoint of the function generator.
p1656[0].0...3 Activates current setpoint filter

state:
Unit: -
- - 0001 bin
Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the current setpoint filter.
00 Filter 1 Active Inactive
Dependency: The individual current setpoint filters are parameterized as of p1657.
Note
If not all of the filters are required, then the filters should be used consecutively starting from filter 1.
p1657[0] Current setpoint filter 1 type

state:
Unit: -
1 2 1
Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 1 as low pass (PT2) or general 2nd-order filter.
Value: 1: PT2 low pass
Dependency: The current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661.
Note
For a general 2nd order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the denominator,
i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is selected, the bandstop
frequency is completely suppressed.
The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth:
f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency
Parameters
p1658[0] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
p1659[0] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping

state:
Unit: -
0.001 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1.
p1660[0] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
p1661[0] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping

state:
Unit: -
0.000 10.000 0.700
Parameters
Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 1.


state:
Unit: -
1 2 1
Description: Sets current setpoint filter 2 as lowpass filter (PT2) or general 2nd order filter.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666.
Note
For a general 2nd order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the denominator,
i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is selected, the bandstop
frequency is completely suppressed.
The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth:
f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

state:
Unit: -
0.001 10.000 0.700
Parameters

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

state:
Unit: -
0.000 10.000 0.700

state:
Unit: -
1 2 1

state:
Unit: Hz
Parameters

0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

state:
Unit: -
0.001 10.000 0.700

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

state:
Unit: -
0.000 10.000 0.700
Parameters

state:
Unit: -
1 2 1

state:
Unit: Hz
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

state:
Unit: -
0.001 10.000 0.700

state:
Unit: Hz
Parameters

0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

state:
Unit: -
0.000 10.000 0.700
p1703[0] Isq current controller precontrol scaling

state:
Parameter group: Current controller
Unit: %
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller precontrol for the torque-generating current component Isq.
p1821[0] Direction of rotation

state:
Unit: -
0 1 0
Description: Setting to change the direction of rotation.
If the parameter is changed, it reverses the direction of rotation of the motor and the encoder actual value without
changing the setpoint.
Value: 0: Clockwise
1: Counterclockwise
NOTICE
After changing parameter p1821, the direction of rotation is not automatically adapted in the safety area.
Parameters
p2000 Reference speed

state:
Parameter group: Reference variables
Unit: rpm
6.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the speed values.
All speeds specified as relative values refer to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word).
p2002 Reference current

state:
Unit: Arms
0.10 [Arms] 100000.00 [Arms] 100.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for currents.
All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
Note
Default value is 2 * r0305 or the motor current limit.
p2003 Reference torque

state:
Unit: Nm
0.01 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 1.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the torque values.
All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
Parameters
r2043.0...2 PROFIdrive PZD state

Unit: -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state.
00 Setpoint failure Yes No
01 Isochronous operation active Yes No
02 Fieldbus running Yes No
Note
When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered when
the setpoint fails.
r2050[0...21] PROFIdrive PZD receive word

Parameter group: Receive direction
Unit: -
Description: Displays the PZD (setpoints) in the word format received from the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
Parameters
r2053[0...27] PROFIdrive PZD send word

Parameter group: Send direction
Unit: -
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) in the word format that are sent to the fieldbus controller.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
r2060[0...20] PROFIdrive PZD receive double word

Parameter group: Receive direction
Unit: -
Description: Displays the PZD (setpoints) in the double word format received from the fieldbus controller.
Parameters
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2

[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
r2063[0...26] PROFIdrive PZD send double word

Parameter group: Send direction
Unit: -
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) in the double word format that are sent to the fieldbus controller.
Parameters
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2

[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
[21] = PZD 22 + 23
[22] = PZD 23 + 24
[23] = PZD 24 + 25
[24] = PZD 25 + 26
[25] = PZD 26 + 27
[26] = PZD 27 + 28
NOTICE
A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
r2109[0...63] Fault removed in milliseconds

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the time in milliseconds referred to the day that the fault was removed.
NOTICE
The time comprises r2136 (days) and r2109 (milliseconds).
Note
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
Parameters
r2111 Alarm counter

Unit: -
Description: Number of alarms that have occurred.
Dependency: See also: r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Note
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
r2114[0...1] System runtime total

Unit: -
Description: Displays the total system runtime of the converter.
The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days).
After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented.
Index: [0] = Milliseconds
[1] = Days
Note
The counter values are saved when the power supply is switched off.
After the converter is switched on, the counter continues to run with the last value that was saved.
r2121 Counter alarm buffer changes

Unit: -
Description: This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes.
Dependency: See also: r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
r2122[0...63] Alarm number

Unit: -
Description: Displays the numbers of the last 64 alarms.
Dependency: See also: r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146
NOTICE
The properties of the alarm buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Parameters
Note
Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
Currently active alarms (not gone):
r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest)
...
r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest)
History of alarms that have gone:

r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest)
...
r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest)
r2123[0...63] Alarm received in milliseconds

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the time in milliseconds referred to the day that the alarm occurred.
NOTICE
Note
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
r2124[0...63] Alarm value

Unit: -
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
Note
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices are shown in r2122.
r2125[0...63] Alarm removed in milliseconds

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the time in milliseconds referred to the day that the alarm was removed.
NOTICE
Parameters
Note
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
r2130[0...63] Fault received in days

Unit: -
Description: Displays the time in days referred to the day that the fault occurred.
NOTICE
Note
r2131 Actual fault number

Unit: -
Description: Displays the number of the active fault that last occurred.
Note
0: No fault present.
r2132 Actual alarm number

Unit: -
Description: Displays the number of the alarm that last occurred.
Note
0: No alarm present.
r2133[0...63] Fault value for float values

Unit: -
Description: Displays the additional information about the fault that occurred for float values.
Refer to the fault for the interpretation of the fault value.
Parameters
Note
r2134[0...63] Alarm value for float values

Unit: -
Description: Displays the additional information about the alarm that occurred for float values.
Refer to the alarm for an interpretation of the alarm value.
Note
r2136[0...63] Fault removed in days

Unit: -
Description: Displays the time in days referred to the day when the fault was removed.
NOTICE
Note
r2139.0...15 Status word faults/alarms

Unit: -
Description: Display and signal source for status word 1 of faults and alarms.
00 Being acknowledged Yes No
01 Acknowledgment required Yes No
03 Fault present Yes No
05 Safety message present Yes No
07 Alarm present Yes No
11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low
12 Alarm class bit 1 High Low
13 Maintenance required Yes No
14 Maintenance urgently required Yes No
15 Fault gone/can be acknowledged Yes No
Parameters
Note
For bit 03, 05, 07:
These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm or safety message occurs. The entry in the fault/alarm buffer or safety
message buffer is delayed. This is the reason that the fault/alarm buffer or safety message buffer should only be read if,
after "Fault active", "Alarm active" or "Safety message active" occurs, a change is also identified in the buffer (r0944,
r2121, r60044).
For bits 11, 12:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes only
on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.
r2145[0...63] Alarm received in days

Unit: -
Description: Displays the time in days referred to the day that the alarm occurred.
NOTICE
Note
r2146[0...63] Alarm removed in days

Unit: -
Description: Displays the time in days referred to the day when the alarm was removed.
NOTICE
Note
p2175[0] Motor blocked speed threshold

state:
Parameter group: Speed messages
Unit: rpm
0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 120.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for message "Motor blocked".
Monitoring is deactivated with p2175 = 0.
Parameters
Note
If the motor speed is less than the threshold value set in p2175 - and the motor is operated for longer than 200 ms at
the torque limit - then the motor is shut down and a fault is output.
p3117 Change safety message type

Can be changed in the operating Commissioning state, device
state:
Parameter group: Safety Integrated, Faults / alarms
Unit: -
0 1 0
Description: Sets the re-parameterization of all safety messages for faults and alarms.
The relevant message type during changeover is selected by the firmware.
0: Safety messages are not reparameterized (safety message buffer)
1: Safety messages are reparameterized (no safety message buffer)
Note
When online safety commissioning has been completed, a change results in an automatic restart.
p3941[0] Motor code number 2

state:
Unit: -
0 99999999 0
Description: Second motor code number.
r3988 Final boot state

Unit: -
Description: Displays the final boot states.
001 - Software error
200 - Carry out first commissioning
250 - topology error (check the connected hardware)
800 - Ready
The following options are available to reach the "Ready" state:
- Check the project and load again.
- Restore factory setting.
- Check the hardware.
- Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
Parameters
p5271[0].3...7 One Button Tuning configuration 1

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: -
- - 0001 1100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for One Button Tuning.
03 Setting the speed precontrol Yes No
04 Setting the torque precontrol Yes No
07 Setting the voltage precontrol Yes No
Note
For bit 03:
Activation of speed precontrol.
For bit 04:
Activation of speed/torque precontrol in the drive.
For bit 07:
Activation of the voltage precontrol.
r5274 One Button Tuning dynamic response estimated

Parameter group:
Unit: ms
Description: Displays the estimated dynamic response of the speed control loop as PT1 time constant for One Button Tuning.
The lower the time constant, the higher the dynamic performance.
r5276[0] One Button Tuning Kv factor estimated

Parameter group:
Unit: 1000 rpm
Description: Displays the estimated position controller gain (Kv factor) for One Button Tuning.
Note
The value for the closed-loop position control is required by a higher-level control system.
Parameters
r5277[0] One Button Tuning precontrol symmetrizing time estimated

Parameter group:
Unit: ms
Description: Displays the estimated precontrol symmetrizing time for One Button Tuning.
This is required to symmetrize the position controller if the closed-loop position control is in an external control system.
p5291.0...16 FFT tuning configuration

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: -
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0011
1001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the "FFT tuning" function.
This function is used for One Button Tuning (p5300 = 1).
00 Noise excitation after pulse enable Yes No
01 Set current setpoint filter (HF) Yes No
02 Set speed controller gain (HF) Yes No
03 Length of FFT window bit 0 (LF, HF) Yes No
04 Length of FFT window bit 1 (LF, HF) Yes No
05 Windowing the time signals using a Hamming window (LF, HF) Yes No
06 Measure current controller Yes No
07 Bandwidth bit 0 (LF) Yes No
10 Measuring periods bit 0 Yes No
11 Measuring periods bit 1 Yes No
12 Inject noise onto speed setpoint Yes No
13 Do not reduce Kp for measurement Yes No
14 Set the current setpoint filter with loop compensation Yes No
16 Torque in front of the current setpoint filter Yes No
Dependency: See also: r5293, p5296
Parameters
Note
HF: high frequency
LF: low frequency
For bit 00:
A PRBS signal (pseudo random binary signal) is superimposed on the current setpoint to be able to better identify the
mechanical controlled system.
For bit 01:
The identified mechanical resonance points are suppressed using current setpoint filters.
For bit 02:
The maximum speed controller gain is determined from the identified mechanical controlled system.
For bits 03, 04:
The measured value buffer length is set using these bits:
Bit 04 = 0 and bit 03 = 0 -> buffer length = 256
For bit 05:
A Hamming window is used to filter the measured time signals.
For bit 06:
The measurement checks the current controller frequency response and this is taken into account in the speed controller
loop.
For bits 07, 08, 09:
The measurement bandwidth is set using these bits:
Bit 09 = 0, bit 08 = 0, bit 07 = 0 -> bandwidth = 50 Hz
For bits 10, 11:
Number of measuring periods.
Bit 11 = 0 and bit 10 = 0 -> number of measurements = 1
For bit 12:
The PRBS signal is switched to the speed setpoint (in front of the filter).
For bit 13:
The input signal for the torque actual value is taken from in front of the current setpoints filters.
For bit 14:
When the bit is set, a current setpoint filter is used to partially compensate the mechanical system.
This is recommended for the following machine attributes:
- The load moment of inertia is significantly higher than the motor moment of inertia (e.g. > 6x).
- The coupling between the machine elements has almost no backlash (no play).
- The stiffness of the mechanical transmission elements does not change significantly in the traversing range.
p5292 Controller optimization dynamic factor

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: %
Parameters

25.0 [%] 125.0 [%] 80.0 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for optimizing the speed controller when One Button Tuning is activated (p5300 = 1).
Dependency: The higher the value in p5292, the lower the value in r5274.
See also: p5291
Note
The higher the dynamic factor, the faster and more unstable the control.
r5293 FFT tuning speed controller P gain identified

Parameter group:
Unit: Nms/rad
Description: Displays the determined proportional gain Kp of the speed controller before FFT tuning.
This function is used for One Button Tuning (p5300 = 1).
p5296[0...2] Controller optimization noise amplitude

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: %
1.0 [%] 300.0 [%] [0] 10.0 [%]
[1] 30.0 [%]
[2] 5.0 [%]
Description: The drive determines the noise amplitude for One Button Tuning and writes the value to p5296.
p5300[0] One Button Tuning selection

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: -
-1 1 0
Description: Setting to activate/deactivate the One Button Tuning function.
For p5300 = 1:
The One Button Tuning function is configured using p5271 and p5301.
Value: -1: Reset controller parameters
0: Inactive
1: One Button Tuning
Parameters
Dependency: The motor must have already been commissioned so that One Button Tuning functions perfectly.
The One Button Tuning function is configured using p5271 and p5301.
The required dynamic performance of the control loop is set in p5292.
The traversing path for the test signal is parameterized in p5308.
See also: p5271, r5274, p5292, r5293, p5296, p5301, p5308, p5309
Note
For p5300 = -1:
One Button Tuning is deactivated and p5300 is automatically set = 0. Further, the presetting values for the speed
controller are restored.
For p5300 = 0:
To permanently save the values for the speed controller that have been determined, the parameters must be saved in
a non-volatile memory.
For p5300 = 1:
One Button Tuning is active.
The moment of inertia is determined once using a test signal. The controller parameters and current setpoint filters are
additionally determined once using a noise signal as excitation source. The steps to be executed can be configured using
p5301.
p5301[0].0...8 One Button Tuning configuration 2

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: -
- - 0000 0000 0000 0111 bin
Description: Setting the functions for One Button Tuning (p5300 = 1).
A test signal is required for some functions. To do this, observe parameters p5308 and p5309.
00 Setting the proportional gain Kp Yes No
01 Setting current setpoint filter Yes No
02 Estimate moment of inertia Yes No
08 Moment of inertia determination from frequency response Yes No
Dependency: It is only possible to change the configuration if One Button Tuning is not active (p5300 = 0).
See also: p5292, r5293, p5296, p5300, p5308, p5309
Note
For bit 00:
The speed controller gain is determined and set using a noise signal.
For bit 01:
Possibly required current setpoint filters are determined and set using a noise signal.
As a consequence, a higher dynamic performance can be achieved in the speed control loop.
For bit 02:
Using this bit, the moment of inertia is determined using a test signal. If this bit is not set, then the load moment of inertia
must be manually set using parameter p1498. The test signal must have been previously set using parameters p5308
and p5309.
For bit 08:
Using this bit, the moment of inertia is determined from the frequency characteristic using a test signal, and is
transferred to p1498. The traversing path must first be set using parameter p5308.
Parameters
r5306[0].0...14 One Button Tuning status

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Displays the status of the functions performed using One Button Tuning.
00 Proportional gain Kp set Yes No
01 Current setpoint filter set Yes No
02 Moment of inertia estimation carried out Yes No
07 EPOS set Yes No
13 One Button Tuning successfully completed Yes No
14 Controller parameters reset due to fault Yes No
Note
For bit 00 = 1: The speed controller gain was set using One Button Tuning.
For bit 01 = 1: The current setpoint filter was set using One Button Tuning
For bit 02 = 1: The moment of inertia was determined.
p5308[0] One Button Tuning distance limiting

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: °
-30000 [°] 30000 [°] 0 [°]
Description: Setting the distance limiting (permissible traversing range of the motor).
The traversing range is limited in the positive and negative directions.
Note
A value of 360 degrees corresponds to one motor revolution.
The position before the pulse enable is used as zero point.
p5309[0] One Button Tuning duration

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: ms
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 2000 [ms]
Description: Sets the duration for One Button Tuning (several acceleration operations)
This function is used for One Button Tuning (p5300 = 1) to identify the total moment of inertia of the drive train.
Parameters
Note
If, within this time, no setting values can be determined, then the drive is shut down with the corresponding fault.
p5375[0].0...1 Additional motor overload protection configuration

state:
Parameter group: Motor temperature
Unit: -
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for additional motor overload protection.
00 Activation of monitoring Yes No
01 Activation of speed dependency Yes No
Note
To comply with standard UL 61800-5-1 Ed. 2, bit 0 and bit 1 must be set.
These bits activate electronic motor overload protection according to IEC 61800-5-1 Ed. 3 / UL 61800-5-1 Ed. 2, with the
emulation of an electronic overload relay, Class 20 and the speed sensitivity.
For bit 00:
This bit activates electronic motor overload protection with emulation of an electronic overload relay, Class 20.
For bit 01:
This bit activates the speed dependency of the electronic motor overload protection. Not active, if bit 00 is also set.
r5600 PROFIenergy energy-saving mode ID

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Displays the PROFIenergy mode ID of the effective energy-saving mode.
Value: 0: POWER OFF
2: Energy-saving mode
240: Operation
255: Ready
p5611.0...2 PROFIenergy energy-saving properties general

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: -
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the general properties for energy-saving.
Parameters
00 Inhibit PROFIenergy control commands Yes No

01 Drive initiates OFF1 when transitioning to energy-saving mode Yes No
02 Trans to energy-saving mode from PROFIdrive state S3/4 poss Yes No
Note
PROFIenergy is a profile for energy management in production systems.
PROFIdrive state S3: ready
PROFIdrive state S4: operation
r5613.0...1 PROFIenergy energy saving active/inactive

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Display and binary signal source for the state display PROFIenergy energy saving active or inactive.
00 PROFIenergy active Yes No
01 PROFIenergy inactive Yes No
Note
Bit 0 and bit 1 are inverse of one another.
r8400[0...2] Date
Unit: -
Description: Displays the actual date in year, month and day.
Index: [0] = Year (YYYY)
[1] = Month (1 ... 12)
[2] = Day (1 ... 31)
Note
The time in r8400 and r8401 is used to display the fault and alarm times.
Possible date/time setting:
- Web server (manually)
- NTP (Network Time Protocol)
When the converter is switched off, date/time are not updated. After power on the instant of the previous power off is
valid.
r8401[0...2] Time
Unit: -
Description: Displays the current time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Index: [0] = Hour (0 ... 23)
[1] = Minute (0 ... 59)
[2] = Second (0 ... 59)
Parameters
Note
The time in r8400 and r8401 is used to display the fault and alarm times.
The time is displayed in the 24-hour format.
Possible date/time setting:
- Web server (manually)
- NTP (Network Time Protocol)
When the converter is switched off, date/time are not updated. After power on the instant of the previous power off is
valid.
r8936[0...1] PN cyclic connection state

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Displays the status of the cyclic PROFINET connection.
Value: 0: Interrupted
1: Not connected
2: Connection starts to be established
3: Module information expected
4: Module information received
5: Module address expected
6: Module address received
7: Parameterization data expected
8: Parameterization data received
9: Evaluate parameterization data
10: Connection being established completion expected
11: Reserved
12: Configured controller STOP
13: Configured controller RUN
Index: [0] = Controller 1
[1] = Controller 2
Note
The parameter is active when the "PROFINET Device" protocol is selected.
For two connections (shared device) the display in the index depends on the sequence in which the connections are
established.
For value = 10:
If the connection remains in this state, then when using PROFINET IRT the following can apply:
- topology error (incorrect port assignment).
- Synchronization missing.
r8937[0...5] PN cyclic connection diagnostics

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Display to diagnose the cyclic PROFINET connection.
Parameters
Index: [0] = Number of cyclic connections

[1] = Number of send subslots of all connections
[2] = Number of send net data (bytes) of all connections
[3] = Number of receive subslots of all connections
[4] = Number of receive net data (bytes) of all connections
[5] = Connection type (RT, IRT)
Note
For index [5]:
Bit 0 = 1: there is at least one RT connection.
Bit 1 = 1: there is an IRT connection.
r8961[0...3] PN controller IP address

Unit: -
Description: Displays the IP address of the PROFINET controller.
Note
For a shared device, the IP address of the automation controller is displayed.
c8995[0...3] Ethernet X127 enable

Unit: -
Description: Signal to enable the Ethernet interface X127 for applications.
Index: [0] = Secure S7 Protocol Startdrive
[1] = Web server HTTPS
[2] = S7 Protocol PCS 7
[3] = Web server HTTP
Note
The parameter influences the access from applications.
1 signal:
Ethernet interface X127 is enabled for access.
0 signal:
Ethernet interface X127 is blocked and cannot be accessed.
The signal is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
c8997[0...2] PROFINET X150 enable

Unit: -
Description: Signal to enable PROFINET interface X150 for applications.
Index: [0] = Secure S7 Protocol Startdrive
[1] = Web server HTTPS
[2] = S7 Protocol PCS 7
Parameters
Note
The parameter influences the access from applications.
1 signal:
PROFINET interface X150 is enabled for access.
0 signal:
PROFINET interface X150 is inhibited for access.
The signal is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
p9500 SI monitoring clock cycle

Write permission: Edit Safety Integrated application
state:
Parameter group: Extended functions
Unit: ms
4.00000 [ms] 4.00000 [ms] 4.00000 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring.
See also: C01652
Note
The monitoring cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing cycle (p9511).
r9502 SI axis type

Unit: -
Description: Displays the axis type (linear axis or rotary axis/spindle).
Value: 0: Linear axis
1: Rotary axis/spindle
Note
The axis type is set in the commissioning tool.
Safety parameters with units that are dependent on the axis type change after switching over the axis type.
p9511 SI actual value sensing cycle

state:
Unit: ms
1.00000 [ms] 1.00000 [ms] 1.00000 [ms]
Parameters
Description: Sets the clock cycle time of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring.
Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed with an encoder.
- A slower cycle time reduces the maximum permissible speed; however, it ensures a lower system utilization level.
- The maximum permissible velocity which, when exceeded, can mean that errors occur during safe actual value
sensing, is displayed in r9730.
Dependency: See also: C01652
Note
The monitoring clock cycle from p9500 must be an integer multiple of this parameter.
For motion monitoring functions with encoder, the cycle time of the actual value sensing must be an integer multiple
of the current controller cycle.
p9520 SI leadscrew pitch

Can be changed in the operating Commissioning (Safety Integrated)
state:
Unit: mm
0.1000 [mm] 8388.0000 [mm] 10.0000 [mm]
Description: Sets the gear ratio between SI encoder 1 and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder.
NOTICE
The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from 3 places before the
decimal point).
p9521[0...7] SI gearbox encoder (motor)/load denominator

state:
Unit: -
1 2147000000 1
Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the SI encoder 1 and the load.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1...7] = Reserved
p9522[0...7] SI gearbox encoder (motor)/load numerator

state:
Unit: -
Parameters

1 2147000000 1
Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the SI encoder 1 and the load.
[1...7] = Reserved
p9531[0...3] SI SLS limit values

state:
Unit: mm/min
0.00 [mm/min] 1000000.00 [mm/min] 2000.00 [mm/min]
Description: Sets the limit values for function SLS (Safely-Limited Speed).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
See also: C01714
p9531[0...3] SI SLS limit values

S210 (Safety rot) Data type: FloatingPoint32 Visible in: Standard display
state:
Unit: rpm
0.00 [rpm] 1000000.00 [rpm] 2000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the limit values for function SLS (Safely-Limited Speed).
See also: C01714
Parameters
p9533 SI SLS setpoint speed limiting

state:
Unit: %
0.000 [%] 100.000 [%] 80.000 [%]
Description: This is an evaluation factor to define the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed limit.
The active SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) limit value is evaluated with this factor and is made available as setpoint limit in
r9733.
A value of 0 signifies that the setpoint speed limiting is not active.
Dependency: r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the encoder side)
r9733[1] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the encoder side)
[x] = Selected SLS stage
Conversion factor from the encoder side to the load side:
- Motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520)
- Otherwise: p9522 / p9521
See also: p9531
Note
The active actual speed limit is selected via safety-relevant inputs (SGE).
When selecting a safety function, where standstill is reached or required (e.g. STO, SS1), then setpoint 0 is entered in
r9733.
p9539[0...7] SI gearbox rotation reversal

state:
Unit: -
0 1 0
Description: Sets the direction of rotation reversal for the gearbox.
0: No direction of rotation reversal
1: Direction of rotation reversal
Value: 0: No direction of rotation reversal
1: Direction of rotation reversal
[1...7] = Reserved
Parameters
p9545 SI SSM filter time

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note
The filter time is only active if the function is enabled (p9604.12 = 1).
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the speed monitoring)
p9546 SI SSM speed limit

state:
Unit: mm/min
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
Note
p9546 SI SSM speed limit

state:
Unit: rpm
0.002 [rpm] 1000000.000 [rpm] 60.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
Note
Parameters
p9547 SI SSM speed hysteresis

state:
Unit: mm/min
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Note
The velocity hysteresis is active only if the function is enabled (p9604.12 = 1).
The following applies when parameterizing the hysteresis:

- Set parameters p9546 and p9547 according to the following rule: p9546 * 0.75 >= p9547
p9547 SI SSM speed hysteresis

state:
Unit: rpm
0.0010 [rpm] 500.0000 [rpm] 30.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Note
The velocity hysteresis is active only if the function is enabled (p9604.12 = 1).
The following applies when parameterizing the hysteresis:

- Set parameters p9546 and p9547 according to the following rule: p9546 * 0.75 >= p9547
p9548 SI SAM speed tolerance

state:
Unit: mm/min
Parameters
Description: Sets the speed tolerance for function "SAM (Safe Acceleration Monitor)".
If the drive velocity increases during the down ramp by more than this tolerance, then SAM identifies this and STO (Safe
Torque Off) is initiated.
p9548 SI SAM speed tolerance

state:
Unit: rpm
0.00 [rpm] 120000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed tolerance for function "SAM (Safe Acceleration Monitor)".
If the drive velocity increases during the down ramp by more than this tolerance, then SAM identifies this and STO (Safe
Torque Off) is initiated.
p9551 SI SLS delay time for limit value change

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the limit value change for function SLS (Safely-Limited Speed).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage, within this delay time, the "old" velocity
stage remains active.
Even if SLS is activated from the state "SLS inactive", then this delay time is still applied.
Note
The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
p9555 SI transition time SCF to SS1

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the transition time from SCF (Safety Channel Failure) to SS1 (Safe Stop 1).
Parameters
Note
p9556 SI transition time SS1 to STO

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 3600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the transition time from SS1 (Safe Stop 1) to STO (Safe Torque Off).
The parameter has no effect for motion monitoring functions with safe brake ramp monitoring (p9606 = 2).
See also: C01701
Note
p9560 SI STO shutdown velocity

state:
Unit: mm/min
Description: Sets the shutdown velocity for activating STO (Safe Torque Off).
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed, and for SS1 (Safe Stop 1) STO is initiated.
For motion monitoring functions with safe brake ramp monitoring (p9606 = 2), the parameter must be > 0, as it is the
only cancel criterion for SBR (Safe Brake Ramp).
Note
The shutdown velocity has no effect for a value = 0.
p9560 SI STO shutdown velocity

state:
Unit: rpm
0.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Parameters
Description: Sets the shutdown velocity for activating STO (Safe Torque Off).
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed, and for SS1 (Safe Stop 1) STO is initiated.
For motion monitoring functions with safe brake ramp monitoring (p9606 = 2), the parameter must be > 0, as it is the
only cancel criterion for SBR (Safe Brake Ramp).
Note
The shutdown velocity has no effect for a value = 0.
p9563[0...3] SI SLS stop response

state:
Unit: -
0 1 1
Description: Sets the specific stop response for the SLS function.
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
Value: 0: STO (Safe Torque Off)
1: SS1 (Safe Stop 1)
Note
SI: Safety Integrated
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
SS1: Safe Stop 1
p9564 SI SDI tolerance

state:
Unit: mm
0.001 [mm] 360.000 [mm] 12.000 [mm]
Description: Sets the tolerance for function SDI (Safe Direction).
This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible without a stop response occurring and safety message
C01716 being output.
See also: C01716
Parameters
p9564 SI SDI tolerance

state:
Unit: °
0.001 [°] 360.000 [°] 12.000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for function SDI (Safe Direction).
This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible without a stop response occurring and safety message
C01716 being output.
See also: C01716
p9565 SI SDI delay time

state:
Unit: ms
0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for function SDI (Safe Direction).
After selecting the SDI function, then for a maximum of this time, motion in the monitored direction is permissible. This
time can therefore be used for braking any motion.
See also: C01716
Note
p9566 SI SDI stop response

state:
Unit: -
0 1 1
Description: Sets the limit value violation response function or stop response for function SDI (Safe Direction).
This setting applies to both directions of motion.
Value: 0: STO (Safe Torque Off)
1: SS1 (Safe Stop 1)
See also: C01716
Parameters
p9568 SI SAM velocity limit

state:
Unit: mm/min
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the "SAM (Safe Acceleration Monitor)" function.
The SAM limit value is limited downward to this value.
p9568 SI SAM velocity limit

state:
Unit: rpm
0.00 [rpm] 1000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the "SAM (Safe Acceleration Monitor)" function.
The SAM limit value is limited downward to this value.
p9581 SI SBR reference velocity

state:
Unit: mm/min
Description: Sets the reference velocity for monitoring SBR (Safe Brake Ramp).
The SBR brake ramp gradient depends on p9581 (reference velocity ) and p9583 (reference time).
p9581 SI SBR reference velocity

state:
Unit: rpm
600.0000 [rpm] 1000000.0000 [rpm] 1500.0000 [rpm]
Parameters
Description: Sets the reference velocity for monitoring SBR (Safe Brake Ramp).
p9582 SI SAM/SBR delay time

state:
Unit: ms
10.00 [ms] 99000.00 [ms] 50.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for monitoring SAM (Safe Acceleration Monitor) / SBR (Safe Brake Ramp).
The SAM/SBR monitoring is started once the delay time has expired.
Note
Internally, the set time is limited downwards (lower limit) to 2 safety monitoring clock cycles (2 * p9500).
p9583 SI SBR reference time

state:
Unit: s
0.50 [s] 3600.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the reference time for monitoring SBR (Safe Brake Ramp).
Note
p9603.0...1 SI control
state:
Parameter group: Safety Integrated
Unit: -
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the type of control for the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Parameters
00 Control via F-DI Enable Inhibit

01 Control via PROFIsafe Enable Inhibit
Note
When simultaneously controlled via terminal (bit 0 = 1) and PROFIsafe (bit 1 = 1), the following applies:
- It is only permissible that F-DI 0 is used
- Only STO / SS1 may be interconnected
p9604.0...30 SI enable
state:
Unit: -
- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signal for the safety functions integrated in the drive.
00 Enable STO Enable Inhibit
01 Enable SBC Enable Inhibit
02 Enable SS1 Enable Inhibit
08 Enable SLS Enable Inhibit
09 Enable SLS dynamic Enable Inhibit
11 Enable SDI Enable Inhibit
12 Enable SSM Enable Inhibit
30 Enable F-DI in PROFIsafe telegram Enable Inhibit
p9606 SI SS1 function specification

state:
Unit: -
0 2 0
Description: Sets the function specification of the SS1 (Safe Stop 1) safety function integrated in the drive.
Value: 0: SS1-t time-controlled
1: SS1-a acceleration-monitored
2: SS1-r ramp-monitored
Parameters
p9610 SI PROFIsafe destination address

state:
Unit: -
0 65534 0
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe destination address (F_Dest_Add).
Note
p9611 SI PROFIsafe telegram selection

state:
Unit: -
0 901 0
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe telegram number.
Value: 0: No PROFIsafe telegram selected
30: PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1
901: PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 901, PZD-3/5
p9612 SI stop response for failure or control fault

state:
Unit: -
0 1 0
Description: Sets the stop response for failure or control fault (e.g. PROFIsafe communication).
Value: 0: STO
1: SS1
Note
For p9612 = 0 (STO):
The drive safely switches off the motor, the motor coasts down.
For p9612 = 1 (SS1):
The drive brakes the motor with OFF3 ramp-down time until standstill is detected. A switchover is then made to STO.
Parameters
p9613 SI PROFIsafe source address

state:
Unit: -
0 65534 0
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe source address (F_Source_Add).
Note
p9614 SI PROFIsafe F_watchdog time

state:
Unit: ms
0 [ms] 65535 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe monitoring time (F_WD_Time).
p9630 SI safe maximum speed encoder (rotary)

state:
Unit: rpm
0 [rpm] 300000000 [rpm] 0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the safe maximum speed for the rotary encoder (encoder side).
p9631 SI safe position accuracy encoder (rotary)

state:
Unit: °
0.000 [°] 360.000 [°] 0.000 [°]
Description: Sets the safe position accuracy for the rotary encoder (encoder side).
Parameters
r9634 SI safe maximum speed encoder detected (rotary)

Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the safe maximum speed for the rotary encoder (encoder side) that was detected.
r9635 SI safe position accuracy encoder detected (rotary)

Unit: °
Description: Displays the safe position accuracy for the rotary encoder (encoder side) that was detected.
p9659 SI brake output test timer

state:
Unit: h
0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 2160.00 [h]
Description: Sets the time interval for carrying out the forced checking procedure and testing the safety brake control.
Within the parameterized time, when the SBC function is enabled, the brake must have been closed or opened at least
once. The monitoring time is reset each time the brake is opened or closed.
Note
SBC: Safe Brake Control
r9660 SI forced checking procedure remaining time

Unit: h
Description: Displays the time remaining before performing the dynamization and testing the brake output.
p9674 SI module identifier Sensor Module

state:
Unit: -
Parameters

0 4294967295 0
Description: Module identifier of the Sensor Module.
p9675 SI module identifier encoder

state:
Unit: -
0 4294967295 0
Description: Module identifier of the encoder,
Note
The value = 0 when using an encoder without its own serial number.
p9676 SI identifier encoder properties

state:
Unit: -
0 4294967295 0
Description: Identifier for the encoder properties
p9677 SI offset POS1 POS2 encoder

state:
Unit: -
-2147483648 2147483647 0
Description: Sets the offset between encoder positions POS1 and POS2.
This value is used only once to perform a check after running up.
Parameters
p9699 SI configuration alarm filtering

state:
Parameter group: Basic functions
Unit: -
0 1 1
Description: Sets the enable for the "Alarm filtering" function.
Value: 0: Deactivate alarm filtering
1: Activate alarm filtering
Note
Parameter is active after a POWER ON
r9708 SI diagnostics safe position

Unit: mm
Description: Displays the actual load-side actual value.
Note
The display of the load-side position actual value is updated in the monitoring clock cycle.
r9708 SI diagnostics safe position

Unit: °
Description: Displays the actual load-side actual value.
Note
The display of the load-side position actual value is updated in the monitoring clock cycle.
r9714[0...4] SI diagnostics velocity

Unit: mm/min
Description: Displays the velocity actual values for motion monitoring functions on the drive object.
Index: [0] = Load side velocity actual value
[1] = Actual SAM/SBR velocity limit
[2] = Actual SLS speed limit
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Load side filtered velocity actual value
Parameters
NOTICE
For index [1]:
If several SAM and/or SBR monitoring functions are simultaneously active, then the lowest of the limit values is
indicated here.
For index [2]:
This SLS velocity limit can, as a result of conversion into the internal monitoring format, deviate from the specified SLS
velocity limit (see r9732).
Note
The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle.
r9714[0...4] SI diagnostics velocity

Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the velocity actual values for motion monitoring functions on the drive object.
Index: [0] = Load side velocity actual value
[1] = Actual SAM/SBR velocity limit
[2] = Actual SLS speed limit
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Load side filtered velocity actual value
NOTICE
For index [1]:
If several SAM and/or SBR monitoring functions are simultaneously active, then the lowest of the limit values is
indicated here.
For index [2]:
This SLS velocity limit can, as a result of conversion into the internal monitoring format, deviate from the specified SLS
velocity limit (see r9732).
Note
The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle.
r9720.0...15 SI control word

Unit: -
Description: Control signals for safety functions integrated in the drive.
00 Deselect STO Yes No
01 Deselect SS1 Yes No
04 Deselect SLS Yes No
07 Acknowledgment Signal edge active No
09 Select SLS bit 0 Set Not set
12 Deselect SDI positive Yes No
Parameters
13 Deselect SDI negative Yes No

15 Deselect SSM Yes No
Note
Note: only the control signals of the available and enabled functions (see p9604) are updated. All others are 1 across the
board.
r9722.0...15 SI status signals

Unit: -
Description: Display for the status signals of the safety functions (synchronized signal).
00 STO or safe pulse cancellation active Yes No
01 SS1 active Yes No
04 SLS active Yes No
07 Internal event No Yes
09 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set
12 SDI positive active Yes No
13 SDI negative active Yes No
15 SSM (speed below limit value) Yes No
NOTICE
For bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a stop function is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
Note
Only the status signals of the enabled functions (see p9604) are updated, all others are 0 across the board.
r9725[0...2] SI diagnostics data cross-check

Unit: -
Description: Displays the diagnostics of the data cross-check.
For index [0]
Number of the data, which, for the data cross-check between the two monitoring channels, led to the SCF (Safety
Channel Failure) on the drive.
For index [1]:
Displays the value from channel A for a KDV error.
For index [2]:
Displays the value from channel B for a KDV error.
Index: [0] = Message value for KDV
[1] = KDV actual value channel A
[2] = KDV actual value channel B
Parameters
Note
KDV: Data cross-check
r9728 SI actual checksum configuration of the safety functions

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked parameters used to configure safety functions (actual checksum).
p9729 SI reference checksum configuration of the safety functions

state:
Unit: -
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex A1A1 A1A1 hex
Description: Sets the checksum over the checked parameters used to configure safety functions (reference checksum).
r9730 SI Safe maximum velocity

Unit: mm/min
Description: Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions as
a result of the actual value sensing.
This parameter indicates up to which load velocity the safe encoder actual values (redundant encoder coarse position)
can still be correctly detected as a result of the particular encoder parameterization.
This parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0").
r9730 SI Safe maximum velocity

Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions as
a result of the actual value sensing.
This parameter indicates up to which load velocity the safe encoder actual values (redundant encoder coarse position)
can still be correctly detected as a result of the particular encoder parameterization.
This parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0").
Parameters
r9731 SI safe position accuracy

Unit: mm
Description: Displays the safe position accuracy (load side).
As a result of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring functions, this accuracy can be achieved as the
maximum.
Note
The parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0").
r9731 SI safe position accuracy

Unit: °
Description: Displays the safe position accuracy (load side).
As a result of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring functions, this accuracy can be achieved as the
maximum.
Note
The parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0").
r9732[0...1] SI velocity resolution

Unit: mm/min
Description: Displays the velocity resolution for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
For index [0]:
Displays the safe velocity resolution (load side). Setpoints for velocity limits or parameter changes for velocities below
this threshold have no effect.
For index [1]:
Displays the safe velocity accuracy based on the safe encoder accuracy
Index: [0] = Actual velocity resolution
[1] = Minimum velocity resolution
Note
For index [0]:
This parameter does not provide any information about the actual accuracy of the velocity sensing. This depends on the
type of actual value sensing, the gear factors as well as the quality of the encoder being used.
Conversion of:
(internal fixed value / Tsi) to mm/min (linear) or rpm (rotary) with Tsi = p9500 (SI monitoring cycle).
Example:
For Tsi = 4 ms, r9732[0] = 15 mm/min (linear) or 1/24 rpm (rotary) is obtained.
For index [1]:

- Only takes into account the coarse encoder resolution and is an internal calculation, which also incorporates the factor
for the motor-load side conversion, the gear ratio and the safety monitoring clock cycle.
Parameters
r9732[0...1] SI velocity resolution

Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the velocity resolution for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
For index [0]:
Displays the safe velocity resolution (load side). Setpoints for velocity limits or parameter changes for velocities below
this threshold have no effect.
For index [1]:
Displays the safe velocity accuracy based on the safe encoder accuracy
Index: [0] = Actual velocity resolution
[1] = Minimum velocity resolution
Note
For index [0]:
This parameter does not provide any information about the actual accuracy of the velocity sensing. This depends on the
type of actual value sensing, the gear factors as well as the quality of the encoder being used.
Conversion of:
(internal fixed value / Tsi) to mm/min (linear) or rpm (rotary) with Tsi = p9500 (SI monitoring cycle).
Example:
For Tsi = 4 ms, r9732[0] = 15 mm/min (linear) or 1/24 rpm (rotary) is obtained.
For index [1]:

- Only takes into account the coarse encoder resolution and is an internal calculation, which also incorporates the factor
for the motor-load side conversion, the gear ratio and the safety monitoring clock cycle.
r9733[0...2] SI effective setpoint velocity limiting

Unit: rpm
Description: Displays the necessary setpoint velocity limit as a result of the selected motion monitoring functions.
Contrary to the parameterization of the SI limit values, this parameter specifies the motor-side limit value and not the
load-side limit value.
Index: [0] = Setpoint limiting positive
[1] = Setpoint limiting negative
[2] = Setpoint limit absolute
Dependency: For SLS: r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
For SDI negative: r9733[0] = 0
For SLS: r9733[1] = - p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
For SDI positive: r9733[1] = 0
[x] = Selected SLS stage
Conversion factor from the load side to the motor side:
- Motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520)
- Otherwise: p9522 / p9521
See also: p9531, p9533
NOTICE
If only the absolute value of the setpoint velocity limiting is required, r9733[2] must be interconnected.
Parameters
Note
The unit changeover between linear and rotary axis is not implemented via the safety changeover (r9502) but by the
linear motor changeover.
If the "SLS" or "SDI" function is not selected, r9733[0] shows p1082 and r9733[1] shows -p1082.
The display in r9733 can be delayed by up to one safety monitoring clock cycle as compared to the display in r9720 and
r9722.
When selecting a safety function, where standstill is reached or required (e.g. STO, SS1), then setpoint 0 is entered in
r9733.
r9734.0...15 SI Safety Information Channel status word S_ZSW1B

Unit: -
Description: Display for status word S_ZSW1B of the Safety Information Channel.
00 STO selected or active Yes No
06 SLS selected Yes No
07 Internal event Yes No
09 Select SLS bit0 Yes No
10 Select SLS bit1 Yes No
12 SDI positive selected Yes No
13 SDI negative selected Yes No
14 ESR retract requested Yes No
15 Safety message present Yes No
Note
SIC: Safety Information Channel
For bit 07:
r9753[0...63] SI message value for float values

Unit: -
Description: Displays additional information about the safety message that has occurred for float values.
Dependency: See also: r9754, r9755, r9756, r60044, r60045, r60048, r60049, p60052
r9754[0...63] SI message time received in days

Unit: -
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message occurred.
Parameters
r9755[0...63] SI message time removed in milliseconds

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message was removed.
r9756[0...63] SI message time removed in days

Unit: -
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message was removed.
r9768[0...8] Receive SI PROFIsafe control words

Unit: -
Description: Displays the received PROFIsafe telegram.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
Note
The PROFIsafe trailer at the end of the telegram is also displayed (5 bytes).
r9769[0...8] Send SI PROFIsafe status words

Unit: -
Description: Displays the PROFIsafe telegram to be sent.
Parameters
Index: [0] = PZD 1

[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
Note
The PROFIsafe trailer at the end of the telegram is also displayed (5 bytes).
r9770[0...7] SI PROFIsafe configuration of the F-PLC

Unit: -
Description: Displays the configuration data received from the F-PLC (when control via PROFIsafe is enabled).
Index: [0] = Telegram number
[1] = Control telegram length from the F-PLC in bytes
[2] = Status telegram length to the F-PLC in bytes
[3] = F_PRM_FLAG1, F_PRM_FLAG2
[4] = F_Source_Add
[5] = F_Dest_Add
[6] = F_WD_Time
[7] = F_Par_CRC
r9771[0...43] SI PROFIsafe diagnostics information CRC error

Unit: -
Description: Diagnostics data for CRC error in the cyclic PROFIsafe communication. The information regarding the last signaled CRC
error is always displayed.

Structure of the diagnostic information:
Bytes 0 to 1: diagnostic data structure version
Bytes 2 to 9: IncNo_1: used in the V2.6.1 mode
Bytes 10 to 17: IncNo_2: used in the V2.6.1 mode
Bytes 18 to 21: received telegram CRC
Bytes 22 to 25: expected telegram CRC
Bytes 26 to 29: VirtualConsecutiveNo: used in the V2.4 mode
Bytes 30 to 33: Code name: used in the V2.6.1 mode
Bytes 34 to 37: Modifier: used in the V2.6.1 mode
Bytes 38 to 41: CRC of the iParameters (not used)
Bytes 42 to 43: CRC of the F-parameters
Parameters
r9776.0...4 SI diagnostics
Unit: -
Description: Displays the operating state, referred to the safety functions. The parameter is used for diagnostics.
00 Safety parameter changed Yes No
01 Safety functions enabled Yes No
02 Safety component replaced and data save required Yes No
04 Safety commissioning mode active Yes No
Note
For bit 00 = 1:
At least one safety parameter was changed. The change only becomes effective after a restart, which is automatically
performed after exiting safety commissioning.
For bit 01 = 1:
Safety functions have been enabled and are active.
For bit 02 = 1:
A safety-relevant component has been replaced. Saving required (p0977 = 1 or retentively save).
For bit 04 = 1:
The safety commissioning mode is selected.
r9780[0...1] SI checksum to check changes

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum to track changes for Safety Integrated.
These are additional checksums that are created to track changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) to
safety parameters (that are relevant for checksums).
Index: [0] = SI checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI checksum to track hardware-specific changes
r9781[0...1] SI change control time stamp days

Unit: -
Description: Displays the time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes for Safety Integrated. The time stamps for the
checksums for tracking changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) made to safety parameters are saved
in parameters r9780[0] and r9780[1].
Index: [0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency: See also: p9729, p9797, p9799
See also: C01690
Parameters
NOTICE
r9782[0...1] SI change control time stamp milliseconds

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
The time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) made to
safety parameters are saved in parameters r9780[0] and r9780[1].
Index: [0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency: See also: p9729, p9797, p9799
See also: C01690
NOTICE
r9794 SI actual checksum safety enable

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the parameters to enable the safety functions (actual checksum).
p9795 SI reference checksum safety enable

state:
Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the parameters to enable the safety functions (reference checksum).
r9796 SI actual checksum PROFIsafe addresses

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the parameters for the PROFIsafe addresses (actual checksum).
Parameters
p9797 SI reference checksum PROFIsafe addresses

state:
Unit: -
Description: Sets the checksum over the parameters for the PROFIsafe addresses (reference checksum).
r9798 SI actual checksum over the configuration of the drive object

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checksum-checked parameters to configure the drive object (actual checksum).
p9799 SI reference checksum over the configuration of the drive object

state:
Unit: -
Description: Sets the checksum over the checksum-checked parameters to configure the drive object (reference checksum).
r9828 SI actual checksum configuration of safety functions channel B

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checksum-checked parameters to configure safety functions (actual checksum)
channel B.
Parameters
p9829 SI reference checksum configuration of safety functions chan. B

state:
Unit: -
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex B2B2 B2B2 hex
Description: Sets the checksum over the checked parameters used to configure safety functions (reference checksum).
r9894 SI actual checksum safety enable channel B

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the parameters to enable the safety functions (actual checksum) channel B.
p9895 SI reference checksum safety enable channel B

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the parameters to enable the safety functions (reference checksum) channel B.
r9896 SI actual checksum PROFIsafe addresses channel B

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the parameters for the PROFIsafe addresses (act checksum) chan B.
Parameters
p9897 SI reference checksum PROFIsafe addresses channel B

state:
Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Sets the checksum over the parameters for the PROFIsafe addresses (reference checksum) channel B
r9898 SI actual checksum configuration of the drive object, channel B

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checksum-checked parameters to configure the drive object (actual checksum) channel
B.
p9899 SI reference checksum over configuration of drive object chan B

state:
Unit: -
Description: Sets the checksum over the checksum-checked parameters to configure the drive object (reference checksum) channel
B.
p10000.0 SI F-DI enable

state:
Unit: -
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signal for the failsafe digital inputs.
00 F-DI 0 (X130/2.1, X130/2.3) Enabled Not enabled
Parameters
Note
- Digital inputs of F-DI that have not been enabled can be used as binary signal sources for non-safety-related functions.
- Only F-DI that have been enabled are monitored in a safety-relevant way. It is neither permissible that the associated
DI are set to simulation nor used as non-safety relevant functions, as they can be subject to test pulses.
p10002 SI F-DI changeover discrepancy time

state:
Unit: ms
1.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the discrepancy time for digital inputs.
The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this discrepancy time.
Note
The time must be set longer than the safety monitoring clock cycle (p9500).
p10017[0...2] SI digital inputs input filter

state:
Unit: ms
1.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Setting of the input filter for the digital inputs.
The input filter is rounded off to whole milliseconds and accepted.
The input filter acts on the following digital inputs:
- Failsafe digital inputs (F-DI).

Example:
Input filter = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
Input filter = 3 ms: Fault pulses of 3 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 4 ms are processed.
The input filtering result can be read in r10051 and r10151.
The set input filter impacts the response time of the safety function.
Index: [0] = F-DI 0
[1] = Reserved
[2] = Reserved
NOTICE
If the cable connected at the digital input is longer than 30 m, to maintain the functional safety, the minimum debounce
time must be set to 20 ms.
Note
If the self-test is enabled using an externally entered dark pulse (p10041) for at least one F-DI, then p10017 must be set
longer than the maximum duration of the dark pulse + 2 ms. If the test pulses are entered using the switchable power
supply, then this means p10017 > p10018 + 2 ms.
Parameters
p10018 SI F-DI self-test dark pulse length VS+

state:
Unit: ms
0 [ms] 50 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the dark pulse length of the switchable power supply for the self-test (p10041) of the F-DI.
Value = 0: switchable power supply, permanently switched on.
Value > 0: dark pulse length for the switchable power supply. The test cycle is fixed at 5 s.
Note
This switchable power supply must be permanently switched on if the self test using internal test pulses was selected
(p10041),
p10019 SI F-DI self test external dark pulse wait time

state:
Unit: s
10 [s] 3600 [s] 1020 [s]
Description: Sets the maximum wait time for the dark pulse for the F-DI self test using an externally entered test pulse.
Note
This parameter is only active for F-DIs that are tested using external test pulses (p10041[x] = 2).
c10022 SI STO input terminal

Unit: -
Description: Signal for the axis-specific selection of function "STO (Safe Torque Off)" (control via F-DI).
Note
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
c10023 SI SS1 input terminal

Unit: -
Description: Signal for selecting function "SS1 (Safe Stop 1)".
Parameters
Note
p10040.0 SI F-DI input mode

state:
Unit: -
- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the input mode for the safety digital inputs (F-DI).
00 F-DI 0, DI 3+ (X130/2.3) NO contact NC contact
Note
Only an NC contact can be connected for the safety digital inputs not listed.
p10041[0...2] SI F-DI self test mode selection

state:
Unit: -
0 3 0
Description: Enable for the F-DI self test.
Value: 0: Self test using internal test signals
1: Self-test using entered dark pulses (VS+)
3: Self test using externally entered dark pulses
Index: [0] = F-DI 0
[1] = Reserved
[2] = Reserved
Note
Mode 0:
The power supply must be permanently switched on.
Mode 1:
A check is made whether p10017 is > p10018 + 2 ms and whether p10018 is set > 0.
c10050[0...2] SI status F-DI via PROFIsafe

Unit: -
Description: The state of the selected failsafe digital inputs F-DIs is transferred to the F-control via PROFIsafe.
Parameters
Index: [0] = F-DI via Profisafe status 1

[1] = Reserved
[2] = Reserved
Note
r10051.0 SI digital inputs status channel A

Unit: -
Description: Display for the single-channel, logical and debounced status of the failsafe digital inputs of channel A.
00 Status of DI 2+ (X130/2.1) Logical 1 Logical 0
Note
The relationship between the logic level and the external voltage level at the input is intended for the use of a safety
function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization for 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI leads to a status of the F-DI equal
to "0" (safety function selected), for 24 V at both inputs of the F-DI, to a status of the F-DI equal to "1" (safety function
deselected).
NC contact:
24V at the input -> logical "1"
0V at the input -> logical "0"
r10071.0 SI F-DI status

Unit: -
Description: Display for the status of the failsafe digital inputs.
00 Status of the F-DI 0 Logical 1 Logical 0
Note
The following applies:
- Logical "0": Safety function is selected
- Logical "1": safety function is deselected
r10075.0...15 SI PROFIsafe control word

Unit: -
Parameters
Description: Displays the control signals for safety functions integrated in the drive only via PROFIsafe.
r10076 SI PROFIsafe SLS-LIMIT

Unit: -
Description: Dynamic limit value input for SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) via PROFIsafe.
r10080.0...15 SI status signals channel A

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Status signals (channel A) for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
NOTICE
For bit 07:
Note
Only the status signals of the available and enabled functions (see p9604) are updated. All others are 0 across the board.
Parameters
r10098 SI actual checksum across device-specific parameters

Unit: -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checksum-checked parameters for the device-specific parameters of the drive system
(actual checksum).
p10099 SI reference checksum across device-specific parameters

state:
Unit: -
(reference checksum).
r10151.0 SI digital inputs status channel B

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Display for the single-channel, logical and debounced status of the failsafe digital inputs of channel B.
00 Status of the DI 3+ (X130/2.3) Logical 1 Logical 0
Note
The relationship between the logic level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the parameterization (see
p10040) of the input as NC contact or NO contact, and is aligned to the use of a safety function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI leads to a status of the F-DI equal
to "0" (safety function selected), for 24 V at both inputs of the F-DI, to a status of the F-DI equal to "1" (safety function
deselected).
With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level. This means that for
an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V leads to a status of the F-DI equal to "0" (safety function selected),
the level 24 V/0 V leads to status of the F-DI equal to "1" (safety function deselected).
Parameters
r10171.0 SI F-DI status channel B

Unit: -
Description: Display for the status of the failsafe digital inputs.
00 Status of the F-DI 0 Logical 1 Logical 0
Note
If a safety function (e.g. via c10022) is controlled via an F-DI, then the following applies:
- Logical "0": Safety function is selected
- Logical "1": safety function is deselected
r10175.0...15 SI PROFIsafe control word channel B

Unit: -
Description: Displays the control signals for safety-related motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive via PROFIsafe.
r10176 SI PROFIsafe S_SLS_LIMIT_A channel B

Unit: -
Description: Dynamic limit value input for SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) via PROFIsafe.
r10180.0...15 SI status signals channel B

Parameter group:
Unit: -
Description: Status signals (channel B) for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Parameters

NOTICE
For bit 07:
Note
Only the function status signals of the available and enabled functions (see p9604) are updated. All others are 0 across
the board.
r10198 SI actual checksum across device-specific parameters channel B

Unit: -
(actual checksum) channel B.
p10199 SI reference checksum across device-specific parameters chan B

state:
Unit: -
(reference checksum) channel B.
r10352.0...17 SI STO select cause

Unit: -
Description: Reason that STO (Safe Torque Off) function was selected.
Parameters

00 Selection via F-DI High Low
01 Selection via PROFIsafe High Low
04 Safety commissioning mode active High Low
05 Axis parking active / missing actual value High Low
07 Response to SS1 High Low
12 Stop response High Low
14 Response to parameterizing error High Low
15 Response to internal software error High Low
17 No communication via PROFIsafe High Low
r10353.0...17 SI SS1 select cause

Unit: -
Description: Reason for the selection of function SS1 (Safe Stop 1).
13 Selection when transitioning to following function High Low
17 No communication via PROFIsafe High Low
r10356.0...1 SI SLS select cause

Unit: -
Description: Reason for the selection of function SLS (Safely-Limited Speed).
r10360.0...1 SI SDI positive select cause

Unit: -
Description: Displays the reason why SDI (Safe Direction) positive was selected.
Parameters
r10361.0...1 SI SDI negative select cause

Unit: -
Description: Displays the reason why SDI (Safe Direction) negative was selected.
r10365.0...1 SI SSM select cause

Unit: -
Description: Displays the reason why function SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) was selected.
r10369.6 SI SBC selection cause

Unit: -
Description: Reason for the selection of function SBC (Safe Brake Control)
06 Response to STO High Low
r10452.0...15 SI STO select cause channel B

Unit: -
Description: Reason for the selection of function STO (Safe Torque Off) on channel B.
04 Safety commissioning mode active High Low
05 Axis parking active / missing actual value High Low
07 Response to SS1 High Low
14 Response to parameterizing error High Low
15 Response to internal software error High Low
Parameters
r10453.0...13 SI SS1 select cause channel B

Unit: -
Description: Reason for the selection of function SS1 (Safe Stop 1) on channel B.
13 Selection when transitioning to following function High Low
r10456.0...1 SI SLS select cause channel B

Unit: -
Description: Reason for the selection of function SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) on channel B.
r10460.0...1 SI SDI positive select cause channel B

Unit: -
Description: Displays the reason why SDI (Safe Direction) positive was selected on channel B.
r10461.0...1 SI SDI negative select cause channel B

Unit: -
Description: Displays the reason why SDI (Safe Direction) negative was selected on channel B.
Parameters
r10465.0...1 SI SSM select cause channel B

Unit: -
Description: Displays the reason why SI function SSM (Safe Speed Monitor) was selected on channel B.
r10469.6 SI SBC selection cause channel B

Unit: -
Description: Reason for the selection of function SBC (Safe Brake Control) on Channel B.
06 Response to STO High Low
r60000 PROFIdrive reference speed

Parameter group:
Unit: rpm
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the speed values.
All speeds specified as relative values refer to this reference quantity.
Note
Parameter r60000 is an image of parameter p2000 in conformance with PROFIdrive.
r60022 PROFIsafe telegram

Parameter group: Safety Integrated, Configuration
Unit: -
Description: Displays the PROFIsafe telegram.
Value: 0: No PROFIsafe telegram selected
30: PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1
901: PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 901, PZD-3/5
Parameters
r60044 SI message buffer counter changes

Unit: -
Description: Displays the changes of the safety message buffer.
This counter is incremented every time that the safety message buffer changes.
Recommendation: This is used to check whether the safety message buffer has been read out consistently.
r60045[0...63] SI message code

Unit: -
Description: Displays the numbers of safety messages that have occurred.
Note
The messages type "safety message" (Cxxxxx) are entered in the message fault buffer.
Message buffer structure (principle):
r60045[0], r60048[0], r60049[0], r9753[0], r9754[0], r9755[0], r9756[0] --> safety message 1 (oldest active message)
of the actual message case.
...
r60045[7], r60048[7], r60049[7], r9753[7], r9754[7], r9755[7], r9756[7] --> safety message 8 (latest active message)
of the actual message case,
Safety messages that have gone are automatically acknowledged.

History of acknowledged messages:
r60045[8], r60048[8], r60049[8], r9753[8], r9754[8], r9755[8], r9756[8] --> safety message 1 of the 1st
acknowledged message case,
...
r60045[16], r60048[16], r60049[16], r9753[16], r9754[16], r9755[16], r9756[16] --> safety message 1 of the 2nd
...
r60045[56], r60048[56], r60049[56], r9753[56], r9754[56], r9755[56], r9756[56] --> safety message 1 of the 7th
...
r60045[63], r60048[63], r60049[63], r9753[63], r9754[63], r9755[63], r9756[63] --> safety message 8 (oldest gone
message) of the 7th acknowledged message case,
r60047[0...63] SI message number

Unit: -
Description: Displays the numbers of safety messages that have occurred.
Parameters
Note
The messages type "safety message" (Cxxxxx) are entered in the message fault buffer.
Message buffer structure (principle):
r60045[0], r60048[0], r60049[0], r9753[0], r9754[0], r9755[0], r9756[0] --> safety message 1 (oldest active message)
of the actual message case.
...
r60045[7], r60048[7], r60049[7], r9753[7], r9754[7], r9755[7], r9756[7] --> safety message 8 (latest active message)
of the actual message case,
Safety messages that have gone are automatically acknowledged.

History of acknowledged messages:
r60045[8], r60048[8], r60049[8], r9753[8], r9754[8], r9755[8], r9756[8] --> safety message 1 of the 1st
...
r60045[16], r60048[16], r60049[16], r9753[16], r9754[16], r9755[16], r9756[16] --> safety message 1 of the 2nd
...
r60045[56], r60048[56], r60049[56], r9753[56], r9754[56], r9755[56], r9756[56] --> safety message 1 of the 7th
...
r60045[63], r60048[63], r60049[63], r9753[63], r9754[63], r9755[63], r9756[63] --> safety message 8 (oldest gone
message) of the 7th acknowledged message case,
r60048[0...63] SI message time received in milliseconds

Unit: ms
Description: Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message occurred.
r60049[0...63] SI message value

Unit: -
Description: Displays the additional information about the safety message that occurred (as integer number).
p60052 SI message cases counter

state:
Unit: -
0 65535 0
Description: Number of safety message cases that have occurred since the last reset.
Parameters
Dependency: The safety message buffer is cleared by resetting the parameter to 0.

See also: r9753, r9754, r9755, r9756, r60044, r60045, r60048, r60049
r60100[0...4] PROFIdrive telegram display total

Unit: -
Description: Displays the send and receive telegrams.
Index: [0] = Subslot 1: MAP
[1] = Subslot 2: PROFIsafe
[2] = Subslot 3: standard/SIEMENS
[3] = Subslot 4: supplementary telegram
[4] = Subslot 5: supplementary telegram
Dependency: See also: r0922, r60022, r60122
Note
Value = 65534: No telegram
Value = 65535: MAP "Module Access Point"
r60122 PROFIdrive SIC/SCC telegram

Parameter group: Safety Integrated, Configuration
Unit: -
Description: Displays the telegram for the Safety Information Channel (SIC) / Safety Control Channel (SCC).
Value: 700: Supplementary telegram 700, PZD-0/3
32766: No telegram
r61000[0...239] PROFINET Name of Station

Unit: -
Description: Displays PROFINET Name of Station.
r61001[0...3] PROFINET IP of Station

Unit: -
Description: Displays PROFINET IP of Station.
Faults and alarms 18
18.1 Overview of faults and alarms
18.1.1 Display of faults/alarms (messages)
Description
In the case of a fault, the converter signals the corresponding fault(s) and/or alarm(s).
The texts about faults and alarms are displayed via the following interfaces:
• Output of messages via the fault and alarm buffer with a fieldbus connection to the higher-
level controller.
• Output of messages via the commissioning interface.
18.1.2 Differences between faults and alarms
Overview
An alarm reports an operating state which is non-critical at present. A fault means that it is
normally no longer possible to run the motor. The converter therefore responds to alarms and
faults differently.
Faults and alarms
The differences between faults and alarms are as follows:
Message type Response to a message and removal of the message

Fault How does a converter respond when a fault occurs?
• Initiate the appropriate fault response
• Set the status signal ZSW1.3
• Enter the fault into the fault buffer
How are faults eliminated?
• Remove the cause of the fault
• Acknowledge fault
Alarm How does a converter respond when an alarm occurs?
• Set the status signal ZSW1.7
• Enter the alarm into the alarm buffer
How are alarms eliminated?
• Alarms are self-acknowledging.
If the cause of the alarm is no longer present, the converter resets the alarm.
18.1.3 Explanation of the list of faults and alarms
Description
The messages are displayed according to the following pattern.
'YYYYY 'BVMUMPDBUJPO PQUJPOBM

/BNF
.FTTBHFDMBTT 5FYUPGUIFNFTTBHFDMBTT OVNCFSBDDPSEJOHUP130'*ESJWF
.FTTBHFWBMVF $PNQPOFOUOVNCFS GBVMUDBVTF

7BSJBOU 1SPEVDUWBSJBOU
$PNQPOFOU )BSEXBSFDPNQPOFOU
3FTQPOTF /0/&
"DLOPXMFEHNFOU 108&30/
&YQMBOBUJPOPGUIF 'PS
NFTTBHFWBMVF
7BMVF $BVTF 3FNFEZ
'BVMUDBVTFGPSWBMVF 3FNFEZGPSWBMVF
'BVMUDBVTFGPSWBMVF 3FNFEZGPSWBMVF
$BVTF %FTDSJQUJPOPGQPTTJCMFDBVTFT
'BVMUWBMVF S JOUFSQSFUGPSNBU
PSBMBSNWBMVF S JOUFSQSFUGPSNBU
PQUJPOBM
*OGPSNBUJPOBCPVUGBVMUBOEBMBSNWBMVFT PQUJPOBM

3FNFEZ %FTDSJQUJPOPGQPTTJCMFSFNFEJFT
Faults and alarms
The representation of a message includes as a maximum the information listed below.

Depending on the message, some information can be omitted.
• Fxxxxx
A message comprises a letter followed by the relevant number.
The meaning of the letters is as follows:
– A means "Alarm"
– F means "Fault"
– N means "No message" ("No Report")
– C means "Safety message" (dedicated message buffer)
• Fault location (optional): Name
The fault location (optional), the name of the fault or alarm and the message number are all
used to identify the message (e.g. with the commissioning software).
Faults and alarms
• Message class
Every message is assigned a message class using the following structure:
Text of the message class (number according to PROFIdrive)
The message classes are transferred at different interfaces to the higher-level controller and
their associated display and operating units.
The message classes that are available are listed in the following table. In addition to the text
of the message class and its number according to PROFIdrive – as well as a brief help text
regarding the cause and remedy – they also include information about the various diagnostic
interfaces:
– PN (hex)
Specifies the "Channel error type" of the PROFINET channel diagnostics.
When activating the channel diagnostics, using the GSDML file, the texts listed in the table
can be displayed.
– DS1 (dec)
Specifies the bit number in data set DS1 of the diagnostic alarm for SIMATIC S7.
When the diagnostic alarms are activated, the texts listed in the table can be displayed.
Text of the message class Number ac‐ Diagnostics in‐

cording to terface
PROFIdrive
Cause and remedy PN DS1
(hex) (dec)
Hardware fault/software error 1 9000 0
A hardware or software malfunction has been identified.
• Carry out a POWER ON for the relevant component.
• If it occurs again, contact the hotline.
• Replace device.
Line fault 2 9001 1
A line supply fault has occurred (phase failure, voltage level,
etc.).
• Check the line supply/fuses.
• Check the supply voltage.
Supply voltage fault 3 9002 2
An electronics supply voltage fault (48 V, 24 V, 5 V…) was de‐
tected.
• Check the voltage level.
DC link overvoltage 4 9003 3
The DC link voltage has assumed an inadmissibly high value.
• Check the dimensioning of the system (line supply, reactor,
voltages).
• Check the infeed settings.
Faults and alarms

cording to terface
PROFIdrive
(hex) (dec)
Power electronics fault 5 9004 4
An inadmissible operating state of the power electronics has
been identified (overcurrent, overtemperature, IGBT failure,
…).
• Check that the permissible duty cycles are complied with.
• Check the ambient temperatures (fan).
Electronic component overload 6 9005 5
The temperature in the component has exceeded the highest
permissible limit.
• Check the ambient temperature /control cabinet cooling.
Ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit detected 7 9006 6
A ground fault/interphase short-circuit was detected in the
power cables or in the motor windings.
• Check the power cables (connection).
• Check the motor.
Motor overload 8 9007 7
The motor was operated outside the permissible limits (tem‐
perature, current, torque, …).
• Check the duty cycles and set limits.
• Check the ambient temperature / motor cooling.
Communication error to the higher-level controller 9 9008 8
The communication to the higher-level controller (internal
coupling, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ...) is faulted or interrupted.
• Check the state of the higher-level controller.
• Check the communication connection/wiring.
• Check the bus configuration/clock cycles.
Safety monitoring channel has identified an error 10 9009 9
A safe operation monitoring function (Safety) has identified an
error.
Actual position value / actual speed value incorrect or not 11 900A 10
available
An illegal signal state was detected while evaluating the en‐
coder signals (track signals, zero marks, absolute values, …).
• Check the encoder / status of the encoder signals.
• Observe the maximum permissible frequencies.
Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error 12 900B 11
The internal communication between the SINAMICS compo‐
nents is faulted or interrupted.
• Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring.
• Ensure an EMC-compliant design.
• Observe the maximum quantity structure/cycles.
Faults and alarms

cording to terface
PROFIdrive
(hex) (dec)
Infeed fault 13 900C 12
The infeed is faulted or has failed.
• Check the infeed and its environment (line supply, filters,
reactors, fuses…).
• Check the infeed control.
Braking controller / Braking Module faulted 14 900D 13
The internal or external Braking Module is faulted or overloa‐
ded (temperature).
• Check the connection/state of the Braking Module.
• Comply with the permissible number of braking operations
and their duration.
Line filter faulted 15 900E 14
The line filter monitoring has identified an excessively high
temperature or other inadmissible state.
• Check the temperature / temperature monitoring.
• Check the configuration to ensure that it is permissible (fil‐
ter type, infeed, thresholds).
External measured value / signal state outside of the per‐ 16 900F 15
missible range
A measured value / signal state read in via the input area (dig‐
ital/analog/temperature) has assumed an inadmissible value/
state.
• Determine and check the relevant signal.
• Check the set thresholds.
Application / technology function faulted 17 9010 16
The application / technological function has exceeded a (set)
limit (position, speed, torque, …).
• Determine and check the relevant limit.
• Check the setpoint specified by the higher-level controller.
Error in the parameterization/configuration/commission‐ 18 9011 17
ing sequence
An error has been identified in the parameterization or in a
commissioning procedure, or the parameterization does not
match the existing device configuration.
• Determine the precise cause of the fault using the commis‐
sioning tool.
• Adapt the parameterization or device configuration.
General drive fault 19 9012 18
Group fault.
• Determine the precise cause of the fault using the commis‐
sioning tool.
Faults and alarms
• Message value
Provides information about the composition of the fault/alarm value.
Example:
Message value: Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
In this example, the message value contains information about the component number and
cause of the fault. Entries %1 and %2 are placeholders. If the commissioning software is
connected to the converter, then these placeholders are populated with the appropriate
values.
• Variant
Specifies the product variant in which the message exists. This information is not applicable
if an alarm is the same for all product variants.
• Component
Type of hardware component that has triggered the fault or alarm. For "None", it is not
possible to assign the message to a hardware component.
• Explanation of the message value
Explains the possible values of the variables (%n) in the message value. In this case, detailed
information can be specified regarding the cause and remedy for specific values.
• Response
Specifies the response in the event of a fault.
The following table lists all fault responses and their meanings used for the entire SINAMICS
drive family.
List PROFI‐ Response Description

drive
NONE – None No response when a fault occurs.
OFF1 ON/OFF Brake along the • The motor is braked by immediately specifying
ramp-function n_set = 0 at the ramp-function generator decelera‐
generator decel‐ tion ramp (p1121).
eration ramp fol‐
lowed by pulse • The pulses are suppressed when standstill has been
inhibit identified.
• "Switching on inhibited" is activated.
OFF2 COAST‐ Internal/exter‐ • Immediate pulse cancellation, the motor "coasts
STOP nal pulse inhibit down " to a standstill.
OFF3 QUICK‐ Braking along • The motor is braked along the OFF3 deceleration
STOP the OFF3 decel‐ ramp (p1135) by immediately entering n_set = 0.
eration ramp fol‐
• The pulses are suppressed when standstill has been
lowed by pulse
identified.
inhibit
STOP2 – STOP2 • The motor is braked along the OFF3 deceleration
ramp (p1135) by immediately entering n_set = 0.
• The drive remains in closed-loop speed control.
ENCODER – Internal/exter‐ The ENCODER fault response occurs because of a sen‐
nal pulse inhibit sor error and results in OFF2.
Faults and alarms
• Acknowledgment
A fault can only be acknowledged if the cause has been resolved.
The acknowledgment specifies when the fault can be acknowledged.
An alarm is self-acknowledging.
Acknowledg‐ Description
ment
IMMEDIATELY Acknowledgment can be immediately realized after the cause has been resolved.
PULSE INHIBIT Once the cause has been resolved, the fault can only be acknowledged when the
pulses are inhibited (r0899.11 = 0).
POWER ON The fault can only be acknowledged using POWER ON (the converter is switched-off/
switched-on).
NONE For alarms (type "A"), an acknowledgment is not required.
• Cause
Describes the possible causes of the fault or alarm. Optionally, a message value, fault value
or alarm value can be additionally specified.
• Remedy
Generally explains possible procedures to resolve the cause of this active fault or alarm.
Faults and alarms
18.2 List of faults and alarms
Faults and alarms

The following list contains the faults and alarms of the S210 product.
Product: SINAMICS S210, Version: 601122000, Language: eng
Objects: S210
F01000 Internal software error

Message class: Hardware/software error (1)
Message value: Module: %1, line: %2
Component: Control Unit (CU)
Response: OFF2
Acknowledgment POWER ON
:
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - Evaluate fault buffer (r0945).
- Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
- If required, check the data on the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
- Upgrade firmware to later version.
- Contact Technical Support.
- Replace the Control Unit.
F01001 FloatingPoint exception

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: An exception occurred for an operation with the FloatingPoint data type.
The error can be caused by the basic system or a technology function.
Remedy: - Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
Acknowledgment IMMEDIATELY
:
Faults and alarms

Remedy: - Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
F01003 Acknowledgment delay when accessing the memory

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A memory area was accessed that does not return a "READY".
N01004 Internal software error

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Remedy: - Contact Technical Support.
F01005 Firmware download for DRIVE-CLiQ component unsuccessful

Component: None
Response: NONE
Faults and alarms
:
Explanation of For %2
the message
value:
Value Cause Remedy
11 DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error. After POWER ON has been carried out again for the
DRIVE-CLiQ component, download firmware again.
15 The selected DRIVE-CLiQ component did not accept the Use a suitable firmware version
contents of the firmware file.
18 Firmware version is too old and is not accepted by the Use a suitable firmware version
component.
19 Firmware version is not suitable for the hardware release Use a suitable firmware version
of the component.
101 After several communication attempts, no response Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring.
from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
139 Initially, only one new boot loader was loaded. After POWER ON has been carried out again for the
DRIVE-CLiQ component, download firmware again.
140 Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not Use a suitable firmware version
available on the memory card.
141 An inconsistent length of the firmware file was signaled. Use a suitable firmware version
142 Component has not changed to the mode for firmware After POWER ON has been carried out again for the
download. DRIVE-CLiQ component, download firmware again.
156 Component with the specified component number is not Check the selected component number.
available (p7828).
Cause: It was not possible to download the firmware to a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
yyxxxx hex: yy = component number, xxxx = fault cause
Example: xxxx = 000B hex = 11 dec:

xxxx = 008D hex = 141 dec:
An inconsistent length of the firmware file was signaled.

The firmware download may have been caused by a loss of connection to the firmware file.
This can occur during a project download/reset in the case of a SINAMICS Integrated Control Unit, for example.

xxxx = 008F hex = 143 dec:
Component has not changed to the mode for firmware download. It was not possible to delete the existing firmware.

xxxx = 0090 hex = 144 dec:
When checking the firmware that was downloaded (checksum), the component detected a fault. It is possible that the file
on the memory card is defective.

xxxx = 0091 hex = 145 dec:
Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time.
Remedy: - Check the selected component number.
- Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring.
- Use a component with a suitable hardware version.
- After warm restart has been carried out again for the DRIVE-CLiQ component, download the firmware again.
A01006 Firmware update for DRIVE-CLiQ component required

Message class: General drive fault (19)
Message value: Component number: %1
Faults and alarms
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
the message
value:
Component in target topology
Cause: The firmware of a DRIVE-CLiQ component must be updated as there is no suitable firmware or firmware version in the
component for operation with the converter.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy: Repeat the firmware update by switching off the device and switching on again.
A01007 POWER ON for DRIVE-CLiQ component required

Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
the message
value:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ component must be switched on again (POWER ON) (e.g. due to a firmware update).
Note:
For a component number = 1, a POWER ON of the Control Unit is required.
Remedy: - Switch off the power supply of the specified DRIVE-CLiQ component and switch it on again.
- For SINUMERIK, auto commissioning is prevented. In this case, a POWER ON is required for all components and the auto
commissioning must be restarted.
A01009 CU: Control module overtemperature

Message class: Overtemperature of the electronic components (6)
Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The temperature (r0037[0]) of the control module (Control Unit) has exceeded the specified limit value.
Remedy: - Check the air intake for the Control Unit.
- Check the Control Unit fan.
Note:
The alarm is automatically withdrawn once the limit value has been fallen below.
F01011 Download interrupted

Message class: Error in the parameterization / configuration / commissioning procedure (18)
Message value: %1
Component: None
Faults and alarms
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The project download was interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
1: The user prematurely interrupted the project download.
2: The communication cable was interrupted (e.g. cable breakage, cable withdrawn).
3: The project download was prematurely exited by the commissioning tool.
100: Different versions between the firmware version and project files which were loaded by loading into the file system
"Download from memory card".
Note:
The response to an interrupted download is the state "first commissioning".
Remedy: - Check the communication cable.
- Download the project again.
- Boot from previously saved files (switch-off/switch-on or p0976).
- When loading into the file system (download from memory card), use the matching version.
A01012 Update file invalid or corrupted

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The converter has identified an invalid or corrupted update file.
Remedy: Replace update file with a valid update file provided by Siemens.

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
A01016 Firmware changed

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: At least one firmware file in the directory was illegally changed on the non-volatile memory (memory card/device memory)
with respect to the version when shipped from the factory.
0: Checksum of one file is incorrect.
1: File missing.
2: File too many.
3: Incorrect firmware version.
4: Incorrect checksum of the backup file.
Remedy: For the non-volatile memory for the firmware (memory card/device memory), restore the delivery condition.
F01018 Runup has been interrupted several times

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: Module booting was interrupted several times. As a consequence, the module boots with the factory setting.
Possible reasons for booting being interrupted:
- Power supply interrupted.
- CPU crashed.
- Parameterization invalid.
Remedy: - Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on). After switching on, the module reboots from the valid parameterization (if
available).
- Restore the valid parameterization.
Examples:
a) Carry out a first commissioning, save, carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
b) Load another valid parameter backup (e.g. from the memory card), save, carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
Note:
If the fault situation is repeated, then this fault is again output after several interrupted boots.
A01019 Writing to the removable data medium unsuccessful

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The write access to the removable data medium was unsuccessful.
Remedy: - Check the removable data medium and if required replace.
- Repeat the data backup.
A01020 Writing to RAM disk unsuccessful

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A write access to the internal RAM disk was unsuccessful.
Remedy: Adapt the file size for the system logbook to the internal RAM disk (p9930).
Faults and alarms
F01023 Software timeout (internal)

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: An internal software timeout has occurred.
F01030 Sign-of-life failure for master control

Message class: Communication error to the higher-level control system (9)
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF3
:
Cause: For active PC master control of the PC, no sign-of-life was received within the monitoring time.
The master control was returned to the drive.
Remedy: Set the monitoring time higher at the PC or, if required, completely disable the monitoring function.
The monitoring time is set as follows using the commissioning tool:
<Drive> -> Commissioning -> Control panel -> Button "Fetch master control" -> A window is displayed to set the monitoring
time in milliseconds.
Notice:
The monitoring time should be set as short as possible. A long monitoring time means a late response when the
communication fails!
F01033 Units changeover: Reference parameter value invalid

Message value: Parameter: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: When changing over the units to the referred representation type, it is not permissible for any of the required reference
parameters to be equal to 0.0
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Reference parameter whose value is 0.0.
Remedy: Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0.0.
See also: r0304 (Rated motor voltage), r0305 (Rated motor current), p2000 (Reference speed), p2002 (Reference current),
p2003 (Reference torque)
F01034 Units changeover: Calculation parameter values after reference value change unsuccessful
Component: None
Response: NONE
Faults and alarms
:
Cause: The change of a reference parameter meant that for an involved parameter the selected value was not able to be re-
calculated in the per unit representation. The change was rejected and the original parameter value restored.
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Parameter whose value was not able to be re-calculated.
See also: r0304 (Rated motor voltage), r0305 (Rated motor current), p2000 (Reference speed), p2002 (Reference current),
p2003 (Reference torque)
Remedy: - Select the value of the reference parameter such that the parameter involved can be calculated in the per unit
representation.
A01035 ACX: Parameter backup file corrupted

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: When the Control Unit is booted, no complete data set was found from the parameter backup files. The last time that the
parameterization was saved, it was not completely carried out.
It is possible that the backup was interrupted by switching off or withdrawing the memory card.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
ddccbbaa hex:
aa = 01 hex:
Power up was realized without data backup. The drive is in the factory setting.
aa = 02 hex:
The last available backup data record was loaded. The parameterization must be checked. It is recommended that the
parameterization is downloaded again.
dd, cc, bb:
See also: p0977 (Save all parameters)
Remedy: - Download the project again using the commissioning tool.
- Save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or retentively save).
See also: p0977 (Save all parameters)
F01036 Parameter backup file missing

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: When loading the device parameterization, a parameter backup file cannot be found.
Remedy: If you have saved your project data using the commissioning tool, carry-out a new download for your project.
Save parameters (p0977 = 1 or retentively save).
This means that the parameter files are again completely written into the non-volatile memory.
Note:
If the project data have not been backed up, then a new first commissioning is required.
F01039 ACX: Writing to the parameter backup file was unsuccessful

Faults and alarms
Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: Writing to at least one parameter backup file PSxxxyyy.*** in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful.
- A parameter backup file PSxxxyyy.*** has the "read only" file attribute and cannot be overwritten.
- There is not sufficient free memory space available.
- The non-volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to.
dcba hex
a = yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
a = 000 --> consistency backup file
a = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
a = 070 --> FEPROM.BIN
a = 080 --> DEL4BOOT.TXT
a = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter backup file
b = xxx in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
b = 000 --> data save started with p0977 = 1
d, c:
Remedy: - Check the file attribute of the files (PSxxxyyy.***, CAxxxyyy.***, CCxxxyyy.***) and, if required, change from "read only"
to "writeable".
- Check the free memory space in the non-volatile memory. Approx. 80 kbyte of free memory space is required for every
drive object in the system.
- Replace the memory card or Control Unit.
F01040 Save parameter settings and carry out a POWER ON

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A parameter was changed, which means that it is necessary to save the parameters and reboot.
Remedy: - Save parameters (p0977).
Then:
- Upload the data to the converter (commissioning tool).
F01041 Parameter save necessary

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: Defective or missing files were detected on the memory card when booting.
1: Source file cannot be opened.
2: Source file cannot be read.
3: Target directory cannot be set up.
4. Target file cannot be set up/opened.
5. Target file cannot be written to.
Additional values:
Remedy: - Save the parameters.
- Download the project again to the drive unit.
- Update the firmware
- If required, replace the Control Unit and/or memory card.
F01042 Parameter error during project download

Message value: Parameter: %1, index: %2, fault cause: %3
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: An error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software (e.g. incorrect parameter value). It
is possible that the parameter limits are dependent on other parameters.
The detailed cause of the fault can be determined using the fault value.
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
0: Parameter number illegal.
1: Parameter value cannot be changed.
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded.
3: Sub-index incorrect.
4: No array, no sub-index.
5: Data type incorrect.
6: Setting not permitted (only resetting).
7: Descriptive element cannot be changed.
9: Descriptive data not available.
11: No master control.
15: No text array available.
17: Task cannot be executed due to operating state.
20: Illegal value.
21: Response too long.
22: Parameter address illegal.
23: Format illegal.
24: Number of values not consistent.
25: Drive object does not exist.
101: Presently deactivated.
104: Illegal value.
107: Write access not permitted when controller enabled.
108: Unit unknown.
109: Write access only in the commissioning status, encoder.
110: Write access only in the commissioning status, motor.
111: Write access only in the commissioning status, power unit.
112: Write access only in the quick commissioning mode.
113: Write access only in the ready mode.
114: Write access only in the commissioning status, parameter reset.
115: Write access only in the Safety Integrated commissioning status.
116: Write access only in the commissioning status, technological application/units.
117: Write access only in the commissioning status.
118: Write access only in the commissioning status, download.
119: Parameter may not be written in download.
120: Write access only in the commissioning status, drive basis configuration.
121: Write access only in the commissioning status, define drive type.
122: Write access only in the commissioning status, data set basis configuration.
123: Write access only in the commissioning status, device configuration.
124: Write access only in the commissioning status, device download.
125: Write access only in the commissioning status, device parameter reset.
126: Write access only in the commissioning status, device ready.
127: Write access only in the commissioning status, device.
131: Requested signal interconnection not possible as the signal source does not supply float value.
132: Free signal interconnection via PROFIdrive telegram setting inhibited.
Faults and alarms
133: Access method not defined.

200: Below the valid values.
201: Above the valid values.
202: Cannot be accessed from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
203: Cannot be read from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
204: Write access not permitted.
Remedy: - Correct the parameterization in the commissioning tool and download the project again.
- Enter the correct value in the specified parameter.
- Identify the parameter that restricts the limits of the specified parameter.
F01043 Fatal error at project download

Message value: Fault cause: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: A fatal error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning tool.
1: Device status cannot be changed to Device Download (drive object ON?).
2: Incorrect drive object number.
3: A drive object that has already been deleted is deleted again.
4: Deleting a drive object that has already been registered for generation.
5: Deleting a drive object that does not exist.
6: Generating an undeleted drive object that already existed.
7: Regenerating a drive object already registered for generation.
8: Maximum number of drive objects that can be generated exceeded.
9: Error while generating a device drive object.
10: Error when generating the target topology parameter.
11: Error when generating a drive object (global component).
12: Error when generating a drive object (drive component).
13: Unknown drive object type.
14: Drive status cannot be changed to "ready for operation" (r0947 and r0949).
15: Drive status cannot be changed to drive download.
16: Device status cannot be changed to "ready for operation".
17: It is not possible to download the topology. The component wiring should be checked, taking into account the various
messages/signals.
18: A new download is only possible if the factory settings are restored for the drive unit.
20: The configuration is inconsistent.
21: Error when accepting the download parameters.
22: Software-internal download error.
24: Download not possible during a partial power up after inserting a component.
Additional values:
Remedy: - Use the current version of the commissioning tool.
- Modify the offline project and carry out a new download (e.g. compare the number of drive objects, motor, encoder, power
unit in the offline project and at the drive).
- Change the drive state (is a drive rotating or is there a message/signal?).
- Observe additional active messages/signals and remove their cause (e.g. correct any incorrectly set parameters).
- Automatically calculate the control parameters.
- Boot from previously saved files (switch-off/switch-on or p0976).
- Before a new download, restore the factory setting.
Faults and alarms
F01044 CU: Descriptive data error

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non-volatile memory.
Remedy: Replace the memory card or Control Unit.
A01045 CU: Configuring data invalid

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX, or CCxxxyyy.ACX
saved in the non-volatile memory. Because of this, under certain circumstances, several of the saved parameter values were
not able to be accepted.
Remedy: - Restore the factory setting (p0976 = 1) and reload the project into the converter.
Then save the parameterization using the "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1. This overwrites the incorrect parameter
files in the non-volatile memory – and this alarm is withdrawn.
A01049 CU: It is not possible to write to file

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: It is not possible to write to a write-protected parameter backup file. The write request was interrupted.
Drive object number.
Remedy: Check whether the "write protected" attribute has been set for the files in the non-volatile memory.
When required, remove write protection and repeat the save operation (e.g. set p0977 = 1).
F01050 Memory card and device incompatible

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The memory card and the device type do not match (e.g. a memory card for SINAMICS S is inserted in SINAMICS G).
Remedy: - Insert the matching memory card.
- Use the matching Control Unit or power unit.
Faults and alarms
A01069 Parameter backup and device incompatible

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The parameter backup on the memory card and the drive unit do not match.
The module boots with the factory settings.
Example:
Devices A and B. are not compatible and a memory card with the parameter backup for device A is inserted in device B.
Remedy: - Insert a memory card with compatible parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON.
- Insert a memory card without parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON.
- Save the parameters (p0977 = 1).
F01070 Project/firmware is being downloaded to the memory card

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: An upgrade (project/firmware download) was initiated on the memory card.
While this fault is active, the corresponding update takes place with plausibility and consistency checks. After this,
depending on the command option, a new boot (reset) for the Control Unit is initiated.
Caution:
It is not permissible to switch off the Control Unit during the upgrade and while this fault is active.
If the operation is interrupted, this can destroy the file system on the memory card. The memory card will then no longer
work properly and must be repaired.
Remedy: Not necessary.
The fault is automatically withdrawn after the upgrade has been completed.
F01072 Memory card restored from the backup copy

Message value: -
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The Control Unit was switched-off while writing to the memory card. This is why the visible partition became defective.
After switching on, the data from the non-visible partition (backup copy) were written to the visible partition.
Remedy: Check that the firmware and parameterization is up-to-date.
A01073 POWER ON required for backup copy on memory card

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The parameter assignment on the visible partition of the memory card has changed.
In order that the backup copy on the memory card is updated on the non-visible partition, it is necessary to carry out a
POWER ON or hardware reset (p0972) of the converter.
Note:
It is possible that a new POWER ON is requested via this alarm.
Remedy: - Carry out a POWER ON for the converter (switch off/switch on).
- Carry out a hardware reset (RESET button, p0972).
F01082 Parameter error when running up from data backup

Message value: Parameter: %1, index: %2, fault cause: %3
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: Parameterizing errors have been detected (e.g. incorrect parameter value). It is possible that the parameter limits are
dependent on other parameters.
The detailed cause of the fault can be determined using the fault value.
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
0: Parameter number illegal.
1: Parameter value cannot be changed.
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded.
3: Sub-index incorrect.
4: No array, no sub-index.
5: Data type incorrect.
6: Setting not permitted (only resetting).
7: Descriptive element cannot be changed.
9: Descriptive data not available.
11: No master control.
15: No text array available.
17: Task cannot be executed due to operating state.
20: Illegal value.
21: Response too long.
22: Parameter address illegal.
23: Format illegal.
24: Number of values not consistent.
25: Drive object does not exist.
101: Presently deactivated.
104: Illegal value.
107: Write access not permitted when controller enabled.
108: Unit unknown.
109: Write access only in the commissioning status, encoder.
110: Write access only in the commissioning status, motor.
111: Write access only in the commissioning status, power unit.
112: Write access only in the quick commissioning mode.
113: Write access only in the ready mode.
114: Write access only in the commissioning status, parameter reset.
115: Write access only in the Safety Integrated commissioning status.
116: Write access only in the commissioning status, technological application/units.
117: Write access only in the commissioning status.
118: Write access only in the commissioning status, download.
120: Write access only in the commissioning status, drive basis configuration.
121: Write access only in the commissioning status, define drive type.
122: Write access only in the commissioning status, data set basis configuration.
123: Write access only in the commissioning status, device configuration.
124: Write access only in the commissioning status, device download.
125: Write access only in the commissioning status, device parameter reset.
126: Write access only in the commissioning status, device ready.
127: Write access only in the commissioning status, device.
131: Requested signal interconnection not possible as the signal source supplies non-float value.
132: Free signal interconnection via PROFIdrive telegram setting inhibited.
Faults and alarms
133: Access method not defined.

200: Below the valid values.
201: Above the valid values.
202: Cannot be accessed from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
203: Cannot be read from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
204: Write access not permitted.
Remedy: - Correct the parameterization in the commissioning tool and download the project again.
- Enter the correct value in the specified parameter.
- Identify the parameter that restricts the limits of the specified parameter.
F01122 Frequency at the measuring probe input too high

Message class: Application/technological function faulted (17)
Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: The frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input is too high.
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
4: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
8: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
16: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
32: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
64: DI/DO 8 (X122.7)
128: DI/DO 12 (X132.7)
Remedy: Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input.
F01250 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-only data

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
A01251 EEPROM incorrect read-write data

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the converter.
Remedy: For alarm value < 256, the following applies:
- Replace the converter.
For alarm value >= 256, the following applies:
- For the drive object with this alarm, clear the fault memory (p0952 = 0).
A01304 Firmware version of DRIVE-CLiQ component is not up-to-date

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The non-volatile memory has a more recent firmware version than the one in the connected DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved.
Remedy: Repeat the firmware update by switching off the device and switching on again.
A01306 Firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ component being updated

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: Firmware update is active for at least one DRIVE-CLiQ component.
This alarm is automatically withdrawn after the firmware update has been completed.
A01330 Topology: Commissioning not possible

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: Unable to carry out commissioning. The actual topology does not fulfill the requirements.
Remedy: - Check the OCC cable between the converter and motor/encoder.
- Check that the connected hardware is supported.
Note:
OCC: One Cable Connection (one cable system)
Faults and alarms
F01357 Topology: Two converters identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line

Message value: component number: %1, connection number: %2
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: In the actual topology, 2 converters are connected with one another through DRIVE-CLiQ.
As standard, this is not permitted.
yyxx hex:
yy = connection number of the converter to which the second converter is connected
xx = component number of the converter to which the second converter is connected
Note:
Pulse enable is withdrawn and prevented.
Remedy: - Remove the connection to the second converter and restart.
A01489 Topology: motor with DRIVE-CLiQ not connected

Message value: Component: %1, to %2, %3, connection: %4
Component: None
Response: NONE
Faults and alarms
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Explanation of For %1, %3
the message
value:
the message
value:
Value Cause Remedy
0 Component unknown
1 Control Unit
2 Motor Module
3 Line Module
4 Sensor Module
5 Voltage Sensing Module
6 Terminal Module
7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
8 Controller Extension
9 Filter module
10 Hydraulic Module
49 DRIVE-CLiQ component
50 Option slot
60 Encoder
70 DRIVE-CLiQ motor
71 Hydraulic cylinder
72 Hydraulic valve
80 Motor
the message
value:
Value Cause Remedy
0 Port 0
1 Port 1
2 Port 2
3 Port 3
4 Port 4
5 Port 5
6 Port 6
7 Port 7
8 Port 8
9 Port 9
10 X100
11 X101
12 X102
13 X103
14 X104
15 X105
20 X200
21 X201
Faults and alarms
22 X202
23 X203
24 X204
25 X205
40 X400
41 X401
42 X402
50 X500
51 X501
52 X502
53 X503
54 X504
55 X505
56 X506
57 X507
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ missing in the actual topology with respect to the target
topology.
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number (%4)
cc = component number (%3)
bb = component class (% 2)
aa = component number of the component that has not been inserted (% 1)
Note:
The component is described in dd, cc and bb, where the component has not been inserted.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy: Adapting topologies:
- Insert the components involved at the right connection (correct the actual topology).
- Adapt the project/parameterizing in the commissioning tool (correct the target topology).
Check the hardware:
- Check the 24 V supply voltage.
- Check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- Check that the component is working properly.
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning tool where relevant offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g.
setpoint/actual value comparison).
A01590 Drive: Motor maintenance interval expired

Message value: Fault cause: %1 bin
Component: Motor
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The selected service/maintenance interval for this motor was reached.
Motor data set number.
Remedy: carry out service/maintenance and reset the service/maintenance interval (p0651).
Faults and alarms
C01600 SI: STO self test failed

Message class: Safety monitoring channel has identified an error (10)
Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive has identified a fault in the self-test of the switch-off signal path, and
has initiated an STO (Safe Torque Off).
1005: STO active, although STO not selected and there is no internal STO active.
1010: STO inactive, although STO is selected or an internal STO is active.
1015: The self-test was unsuccessful in operation.
1016: Error in the communication path for brake/FDI/FDO/STO
Remedy: - Select STO and then deselect again.
- Upgrade software to a later version.
- Ensure that the drive and all of its connected components are connected up in compliance with EMC regulations.
Inadequately fixed motor phases or a non-
compliant grounding concept can result in this fault.
C01603 SI: Module temperature - limit value exceeded

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A safe monitoring function has detected that the module temperature has exceeded a limit value. STO (Safe Torque Off) was
initiated to maintain the safe state.
Remedy: - Check the ambient temperature.
- Check the module fan.
- Operate the module in the permissible range.
F01604 SI: Safety EEPROM data error

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: Safety relevant EEPROM data are not correct.
This message results in an STO (Safe Torque Off).

Message value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens fault diagnostics.
Remedy: Replace the module.
A01605 SI: Checksum error has occurred

Message value: %1
Faults and alarms

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A checksum error (CRC error) has occurred in the converter program memory.
C01630 SI: Brake control error

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The "Safety Integrated" function integrated in the drive has identified a brake control fault, and has initiated an STO.
1, 2:
- Motor cable is not shielded correctly.
- Defect in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit.
- Ground fault in brake cable.
3:
Hardware is defective or does not support the brake control.
- Communication with the brake control has failed.
- SBC is enabled on a module that does not support brake control.
4:
- Brake is not connected or interrupted cable.
Remedy: - Check the motor holding brake connection.
- Check the function of the motor holding brake.
- Check whether the brake control is supported.
- Check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error, and if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults
involved.
- Check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the motor
cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are tightly screwed
to the housing).

Note:
A01631 SI: Motor holding brake/SBC configuration not practical

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: A configuration of motor holding brake and SBC was detected that is not practical.
The following configurations can result in this message:
- "No motor holding brake available" (p1215 = 0) and "SBC" enabled (p9604 bit 1 = 1 and p9603>0).
- "Motor holding brake just like the sequence control, connection via signal interconnection" (p1215 = 3) and "SBC" enabled
(p9604 Bit 1 = 1 and p9603>0).
Remedy: Check the parameterization of the motor holding brake and SBC and correct.
Note:
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration), p9603 (SI control), p9604 (SI enable)
A01637 SI: Safety configuration not protected

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: Safety configuration is not protected using UMAC (User Management and Access Control).
Remedy: Activate UMAC and assign rights for changing the safety configuration (EditDriveSafetyApplication), exclusively for a role
with a password.
A01641 SI: Component exchange identified and save necessary

Message value: Fault cause: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
the message
value:
Bit Cause Remedy
3 It was identified that OM-SMT has been replaced
4 It was identified that the Sensor Module has been
replaced
5 It was identified that the sensor has been replaced
Cause: "Safety Integrated" has identified that a component has been replaced.
No additional stop response is initiated, and therefore the operation of the specific drive is not restricted.
When safety functions are active, after a component has been replaced it is necessary to carry out a partial acceptance test.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary).
Remedy: - Save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or retentively save).
- Acknowledge fault.
See also: r9776 (SI diagnostics)
F01646 SI: Change logbook

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The saved functional safety checksum (r9780[0]) or hardware-related safety checksum (r9780[1]) differs from the safety
checksum calculated when running up or a previously calculated safety checksum was not found.
An acceptance test is required as changes have been made to a safety parameter or the safety hardware.
1: The safety logbook has identified that a functional safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test is required.
2: The safety logbook has identified that a hardware-related safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test is required.
Remedy: For fault value = 1:
- Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report.
For fault value = 2:
- Carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report.
Note:
The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided in the
following literature:
SINAMICS Function Manual Safety Integrated
C01647 SI: PROFIsafe PLC configuring not the same as the parameterization
Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive has identified a difference between the PROFIsafe configuring in the F-PLC and the parameterization in SINAMICS.
Note:
Message value (r60049, interpret decimal):
1: The PROFIsafe telegram number in the F-PLC configuration is not identical with the value in p9611.
2: The PROFIsafe monitoring time F_WD_Time in the F-PLC configuration is not identical with the value in p9614.
Remedy: - Change the configuring in the F-PLC and load to the drive.
- Adapt the parameterization in the drive to the configuration in the F-PLC.
C01648 SI: PROFIsafe communication error

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The drive has identified a PROFIsafe communication error.

Note:
This message leads to STO, if p9612 = 0 and leads to SS1, if p9612 = 1.
6000 ... 6166:
PROFIsafe message values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET).
For these message values, the failsafe control signals (Failsafe Values) are transferred to the safety functions. If "SS1 after
failure of PROFIsafe communication" is parameterized (p9612), then transfer of the Failsafe Values is delayed.
6064 ... 6076: Error when evaluating F parameters. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the expected
values.
6064: Destination address and PROFIsafe address are different (F_Dest_Add != p9610).
6065: Destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add == 0 or 0xFFFF).
6066: Source address not valid (F_Source_Add == 0 or 0xFFFF) or source address and PROFIsafe source address different
(F_Source_Add != p9613).
6067: Watchdog time not valid (F_WD_Time == 0).
6068: Incorrect SIL level (F_SIL).
6069: Incorrect F-CRC length (F_CRC_Length).
6070: Incorrect F parameter version (F_Par_Version).
6071: CRC error for the F parameters (CRC1). The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the value
calculated in the PROFIsafe driver.
6072: F parameterization is inconsistent.
6076: Incorrect F_block_ID.
6165: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram. The error can also occur if an
inconsistent or out-of-date PROFIsafe telegram was received after switching the system off and on, or after inserting the
PROFIBUS/PROFINET cable.
6166: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
>65535: A fatal PROFIsafe communication error has occurred (only for internal Siemens error diagnostics).
Faults and alarms
Remedy: For message value = 6064:

- Check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe device.
- Check the setting of the PROFIsafe address (p9610).
For message value = 6065:
- Check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe device. It is not permissible that the
destination address is 0 or FFFF.
- Check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Source_Add at the PROFIsafe device. It is not permissible that the source
address is 0 or FFFF.
- Check the setting of the PROFIsafe source address (p9613).
- Check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_WD_Time at the PROFIsafe device. It is not permissible for the watchdog
time to be 0.
- Check the setting of the value in F parameter F_SIL at the PROFIsafe device.
- Check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_CRC_Length at the PROFIsafe device.
- Check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Par_Version at the PROFIsafe device. The value for the F parameter
version is 0 in the V1 mode and 1 in the V2 mode.
- Check the setting of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at the PROFIsafe
device and update if necessary.
- Check the settings of the values for the F parameters and, if required, correct.
The following combinations are permissible for F parameters F_CRC_Length and F_Par_Version:
F_CRC_Length = 3-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 1
F_CRC_Length = 4-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 1
- Check the settings of the values for the F parameters and, if required, correct.
- If the fault occurs after powering up or after inserting the PROFIBUS/PROFINET cable, acknowledge the fault.
- Check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe device.
- Check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time at the PROFIsafe device and increase if necessary.
- Check whether all F parameters of the drive match the F parameters of the F host.
- Check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe device.
- Check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time at the PROFIsafe device and increase if necessary.
- Evaluate diagnostic information in the F host.
- Check PROFIsafe connection.
- Check whether all F parameters of the drive match the F parameters of the F host.
For message value > 65535:
- Check whether other faults are active - and when necessary, diagnose the faults involved.
- Increase the monitoring cycle clock settings (p9500, p9511).
- Replace hardware relevant for the communication.
C01649 SI: Internal software error

Faults and alarms
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: An internal error has occurred in the Safety Integrated software.
Note:
This message results in an STO (Safe Torque Off) that cannot be acknowledged.
Message value (r60049, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens fault diagnostics.
- Re-commission the "Safety Integrated" function and carry out a POWER ON.
- Replace hardware component.
F01650 SI: Acceptance test required

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" function requires an acceptance test.
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
- Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report.
The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided in the
product operating instructions.
C01652 SI: Monitoring clock cycle not permissible

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: One of the Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycles is not permissible.
- The monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring functions is not permissible (p9500).
- The actual value sensing clock cycle for safe motion monitoring functions is not permissible (p9511).
- The sampling time for the current controller cannot be supported.
When motion monitoring is enabled (p9603 > 0), the following applies:
100: No matching monitoring clock cycle was able to be found.
107: The actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) is not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller.
108: The parameterized actual value sensing clock cycle cannot be set on this component.
111: The monitoring clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller.
Faults and alarms
Remedy: When motion monitoring is enabled (p9603 > 0):

- Correct the monitoring clock cycle (p9500) and carry out POWER ON.
For message value = 107, 108:
Set the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 as an integer multiple of the current controller sampling time (p9511 = n
* current controller clock cycle), and at the same time as an integer divisor of the monitoring clock cycle (p9511 = p9500 /
m).
Set the monitoring clock cycle in p9500 as an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller.
C01653 SI: PROFINET configuration error

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: There is a PROFINET configuration error for using Safety Integrated monitoring functions with a higher-level control (F-PLC).
Note:
When the safety functions are enabled, this fault results in an STO that cannot be acknowledged.
200: A safety slot for receive data from the control has not been configured.
210, 220: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the control has an unknown format.
230: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
231: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
250: A PROFIsafe slot is configured in the higher-level F control, however PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive.
300: A safety slot for the send data to the control has not been configured.
310, 320: The configured safety slot for the send data to the control has an unknown format.
330: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
331: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
400: The telegram number in the F-PLC does not match the parameterization in the drive.
Remedy: The following generally applies:
- Check and, if necessary, correct the PROFINET configuration of the safety slot on the controller side.
- Upgrade the drive firmware to a later version.
- Remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive.
For fault value = 231, 331:
- In the drive, parameterize the appropriate PROFIsafe telegram (p9611) to be set on the F-PLC.
- Configure the PROFIsafe telegram matching the parameterization (p9611) in the F-PLC.
A01654 SI: PROFIsafe configuration different

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The configuration of a PROFIsafe telegram in the higher-level control (F-PLC) does not match the parameterization in the
drive.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
1:
A PROFIsafe telegram is configured in the higher-level control; however, PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive (p9603.1).
2:
PROFIsafe is parameterized in the drive; however, a PROFIsafe telegram has not been configured in the higher-level control.
Remedy: The following generally applies:
- Check and, if necessary, correct the PROFIsafe configuration in the higher-level control.
For alarm value = 1:
- Remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive.
- Configure the PROFIsafe telegram to match the parameterization in the higher-level F-control.
C01657 SI: PROFIsafe telegram number invalid

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The PROFIsafe telegram number set in p9611 is not valid.
When PROFIsafe is enabled (p9603.1 = 1), then a telegram number greater than zero must be entered in p9611.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
See also: p9611 (SI PROFIsafe telegram selection), r60022 (PROFIsafe telegram)
Remedy: Check the telegram number setting (p9611).
C01658 SI: PROFIsafe telegram number not equal

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The PROFIsafe telegram number is set differently in p9611 and r60022.
The telegram number must be identically set in both parameters.
Note:
See also: p9611 (SI PROFIsafe telegram selection)
Remedy: Align the telegram number in both parameters so that they are the same (p9611, r60022).
C01668 SI: Checksum error safety monitoring functions on the device

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The actual checksum calculated by the drive and entered in r10098 via the safety-relevant parameters does not match the
reference checksum saved in p10099 at the last machine acceptance.
Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present.
Note:
Message value (r60049, only for internal Siemens diagnostics)
Remedy: - Carry out safety commissioning.
- Carry out an acceptance test.
C01670 SI: invalid Sensor Module configuration

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The configuration of a Sensor Module used for Safety Integrated is not permissible.
Note:
1: The encoder data set selected for Safety Integrated is not valid or the encoder is not assigned to an encoder data set.
2: No encoder was parameterized for Safety Integrated or the encoder is not suitable for safety-related applications.
4: A communication error with the encoder has occurred.
5: Number of relevant bits in the encoder coarse position invalid.
6: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder configuration invalid.
7: Non-safety relevant component of the encoder coarse position for the linear DRIVE-CLiQ encoder not valid.
8: Safety comparison algorithm not supported.
9: Relationship between the grid division and measuring step for linear DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is not binary.
15: Pulses per revolution of a rotary encoder is not valid.
16: Grid division of a linear encoder is not valid.
17: Encoder is not compatible. The safe positioning accuracy of the encoder is not equal to the setpoint parameterized in
p9631 - or the safe maximum speed/velocity of the encoder is not equal to the setpoint parameterized in p9630.
18: Encoder has still not been configured for Safety Integrated. The safe positioning accuracy of the encoder has still not
been parameterized in p9631 - and the safe maximum velocity of the encoder has still not been parameterized in p9630
(parameter values are 0).
19: The encoder parameterization or the module identifier of the encoder/encoder module has changed or the encoder
parameterization is corrupt.
20: For a DQi encoder, the offset between POS1 and POS2 has changed since the last run up.
21: The timer for the effectivity test for a DQi encoder is not equal to 4 hours.
22: In the current firmware version, the encoder type is not permitted for Safety Integrated.
Faults and alarms

Carefully ensure that a safety-relevant encoder is connected and repeat the drive commissioning.

Use an encoder that supports safety functions.

Check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error to the Sensor Module involved and, if required, carry out a
diagnostics routine for the faults identified.

For message value =8:
Use an encoder that implements an algorithm supported by Safety Integrated.
Supported encoder types are listed in the product documentation for Safety Integrated.

For message value = 5, 6, 7, 9, 15, 16, 19, 20, 21:
Replace the encoder if it is defective.

For message value = 17, 18:
Select and deselect the safety commissioning mode (during safety commissioning, the quality of the connected encoder is
transferred into the encoder quality parameter p9630 ff.).

Use an encoder type that is supported in the current firmware version.
Supported encoder types are listed in the product documentation for Safety Integrated.
C01671 SI: Parameterization actual value acquisition incorrect

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The parameterization of the actual value sensing for Safety Integrated is incorrect.
Note:
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter
yyyy = 0:
No additional supplementary information
xxxx = 9522:
The gear stage was set too high.
Remedy: Check the parameterization of the actual value sensing for Safety Integrated and if required correct.
For message value 9522:
- Set the gearbox stage lower.
C01674 SI: Safety function not supported by PROFIsafe telegram

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
Faults and alarms
:
Cause: The monitoring function enabled in p9604 is not supported by the currently set PROFIsafe telegram (p9611).
Note:
Message value (r60049, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 3 = 1:
SS1E (Safe Stop 1 External) via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.3).
Bit 5 = 1:
SS2E (Safe Stop 2 External) via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.5).
Bit 6 = 1:
SS2ESR: (Safe Stop 2 Extended Stop and Retract) via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.6).
Bit 9 = 1:
Transfer of SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) limit value via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.9).
Bit 15 = 1:
Gearbox stage switchover via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.15).
Bit 19 = 1:
SCA via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.19).
Bit 20 = 1:
Transfer of safe position (SP) via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.20).
Bit 30 = 1:
Transfer of F-DI via PROFIsafe is not supported (p9604.30).
Remedy: - Deselect the monitoring function involved (p9604).
- Set the matching PROFIsafe telegram (p9611).
C01676 SI: Parameterization of the failsafe inputs not permissible

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: When simultaneously controlled via terminal (p9603.0 = 1) and PROFIsafe (p9603.1 = 1)
- Only the failsafe digital input F-DI 0 (r10071.0) may be selected
- Only STO (c10022) / SS1 (c10023) may be interconnected

Note:
xxxx = parameter number
Remedy: Correct parameters:
- Interconnect with a valid signal source.
- Inhibit control via terminal (p9603.0 = 0).
- Inhibit control via PROFIsafe (p9603.1 = 0).
C01677 SI: Incorrect onboard F-I/O parameter value

Message value: Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value.

Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter.
yyyy = 0:
No additional information available.
xxxx = 10000 and yyyy = F-DI number:
A non-existent F-DI was enabled.
xxxx = 10002:
The F-DI discrepancy time (p10002) is less than or equal to the SI monitoring clock cycle (p9500).
The input filter (p10017) is less than or equal to (p10018 + 2ms) when simultaneously selecting "Self test using specified
dark pulses" (p10041[y] = 1).
Setting "F-DI self test long dark pulses" (p10018) is zero when simultaneously selecting "Self test using specified dark pulses"
(p10041[y] = 1).
An invalid value was set in "F-DI self-test mode selection" (p10041[y]).
An F-DI status r10071[y], which was not enabled in p10000, has been wired.
Remedy: Correct the parameter value.
For xxxx = 10000 and yyyy = F-DI number:
- Correct p10000 "SI F-DI enable".
For xxxx = 10002:
- Set p10002 "SI F-DI switchover discrepancy time" longer than p9500 "SI monitoring clock cycle".
- Set p10017 "SI Digital inputs input filter" greater than (p10018 + 2 ms)
- Change p10041[y] "SI F-DI self-test mode selection".
- Set p10018 "SI F-DI self-test dark pulse length" greater than zero.
- Correct p10000 "SI F-DI enable".
C01680 SI: Checksum error safety monitoring functions

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The actual checksum over the safety-relevant parameters, calculated by the drive, does not match the reference checksum
last saved for the last machine acceptance test.
Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present.
Note:
Message value (r60049, only for internal Siemens diagnostics)
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct.

- Retentively save parameters.
- Perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified.
- Carry out an acceptance test.
C01681 SI: Incorrect parameter value

Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value.
Note:
This fault results in STO.
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter
yyyy = 0:
No additional information available.
xxxx = 9560:
The parameter must be > 0 when SS1 is activated (p9604.2 = 1) with SBR (p9606 = 2).
xxxx = 10006 or 10022 to 10036:
An inadmissible signal source for the control via F-DI was set
xxxx = 10050:
An inadmissible signal source for the F-DI via PROFIsafe was set. yyyy contains the incorrect index of c10050[].
Remedy: Correct parameters:
For xxxx = 9560:
- Set the parameter value not equal to 0.
For xxxx = 10006 or 10022 to 10036:
- Set a valid signal source in pxxxx.
For xxxx = 10050 and yyyy = 0, 1 or 2:
- Set a valid signal source in c10050[yyyy].
Note:
SS1: Safe Stop 1
SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring)
C01682 SI: Monitoring function not supported

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: At least one of the monitoring functions enabled in p9604 is not supported with this firmware version on this device.
Note:
The message value (r60049, interpret binary) indicates the bits of the monitoring functions, which form this firmware
version on this device, are not supported. If several, non-supported monitoring functions are simultaneously enabled, then
these are all displayed in the message value.
See also: p9604 (SI enable)
Faults and alarms
Remedy: Correct parameter p9604 so that monitoring functions only permitted for this firmware version and for this device are
enabled.
See also: p9612 (SI stop response for failure or control fault)
C01690 SI: Data backup problem for the NVRAM

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: When saving parameters r9780, r9781 and r9782 (Safety logbook) says, an error has occurred in conjunction with the
NVRAM.
Note:
1: There is no physical NVRAM in the drive.
2: There is no longer any free memory space in the NVRAM.
- Replace the hardware.
- De-select functions that are not required and that take up memory space in the NVRAM.
Note:
NVRAM: Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (non-volatile read and write memory)
A01698 SI: Commissioning mode active

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The commissioning of the "Safety Integrated" function is selected.
This message is withdrawn after the safety functions have been commissioned.
Note:
- This message does not result in a safety stop response.
- In the safety commissioning mode, function STO (Safe Torque Off) is internally selected.
C01700 SI: STO (Safe Torque Off) initiated

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive is stopped using STO (Safe Torque Off).
Possible causes:
Subsequent response, following messages: C01706, C01714, C01715, C01716.
Remedy: Carry out diagnostics for the active messages (C01706, C01714, C01715, C01716).
Faults and alarms
C01701 SI: SS1 (Safe Stop 1) initiated

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF3
:
Cause: The drive is stopped using SS1 (Safe Stop 1) (braked along the OFF3 down ramp).
As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9556 has expired, or the speed threshold parameterized in p9560
has been fallen below, STO (Safe Torque Off) is initiated.
Possible causes:
Subsequent response, following messages: C01707, C01711, C01714, C01715, C01716.
Remedy: Perform diagnostics for active messages (C01707, C01711, C01714, C01715, C01716).
C01706 SI: SAM/SBR limit exceeded

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The safety functions with parameterized motion monitoring SAM (Safe Acceleration Monitor) / SBR (Safe Brake Ramp) have
identified an error.
After initiating SS1 (Safe Stop 1) or SLS (Safely-Limited Speed), the speed has exceeded the set tolerance.
The drive is shut down by message C01700 (STO (Safe Torque Off) initiated).

0: SAM has detected a fault.
1: SBR has detected a fault.
Remedy: Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the parameterization of the SAM or SBR monitoring.
Without a POWER ON, this message can be acknowledged using a safe acknowledgment mechanism (e.g. via PROFIsafe).
See also: p9548 (SI SAM speed tolerance), p9581 (SI SBR reference velocity), p9582 (SI SAM/SBR delay time), p9583 (SI SBR
reference time)
C01711 SI: SCF (Safety Channel Failure) initiated

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The drive has detected an error in a safe monitoring function and has initiated SCF (Safety Channel Failure).
Monitoring functions are no longer reliable. Safe operation not possible.
Possible causes:
Subsequent response, following messages: C01648, C01750, C01751, C01753, C01754, C01769.

Note:
This fault results in an SS1 (Safe Stop 1), and as a consequence, after the time parameterized in p9556 has expired, or the
speed threshold parameterized in p9560 has been fallen below, STO (Safe Torque Off) is initiated.
See also: p9555 (SI transition time SCF to SS1)
Remedy: Carry out diagnostics for the active messages (C01648, C01750, C01751, C01753, C01754, C01769).
Faults and alarms
C01714 SI: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The drive has moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9531). The drive is stopped by the configured stop
response (p9563).
100: SLS1 exceeded.
200: SLS2 exceeded.
300: SLS3 exceeded.
400: SLS4 exceeded.
Remedy: - Check the traversing/motion program in the control.
- Check the limits for SLS (Safely-Limited Speed) and if required adapt accordingly (p9531).
See also: p9531 (SI SLS limit values), p9563 (SI SLS stop response)
C01716 SI: Tolerance for Safe Direction exceeded

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The tolerance for function SDI (Safe Direction) was exceeded. The drive is stopped by the configured stop response (p9566).
0: Tolerance for function "SDI positive" exceeded.
1: The tolerance for function "SDI negative" exceeded.
- Check the tolerance for function SDI and if required, adapt (p9564).
Prerequisite:
- Deselect function SDI function and if required select again.
See also: p9564 (SI SDI tolerance), p9565 (SI SDI delay time), p9566 (SI SDI stop response)
C01730 SI: Reference block for dynamic Safely-Limited Speed invalid

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The reference block transferred via PROFIsafe is negative.
A reference block is used to generate a referred velocity limit value based on the reference quantity in p9531[0].
The drive is stopped by the configured stop response (p9563[0]).
Requested, invalid reference block.
Remedy: In the PROFIsafe telegram, input data S_SLS_LIMIT_IST must be corrected.
Faults and alarms
C01750 SI: Hardware fault safety-related encoder

Message value: %1
Component: Encoder 1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The encoder that is used for the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions signals a hardware fault.
Note:
This fault results in STO (Safe Torque Off).
Encoder status word 1, encoder status word 2 that resulted in the message.
Remedy: - Check the encoder connection.
- Replace encoder.
C01751 SI: Effectivity test error safety-related encoder

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder for safe motion monitoring signals an error for the internal encoder effectivity tests; the safety
software cyclically monitors the sequence.
Note:
This message results in an SCF (Safety Channel Failure).
- Replace encoder.
C01753 SI: Fault safety-relevant encoder

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The encoder that is used for the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions signals a fault.
1012: Plausibility violation of the encoder actual value.
1021: Cyclic communication failure between the monitoring channel and Sensor Module.
1022: Sign-of-life error for DRIVE-CLiQ encoders.
1024: Sign-of-life error for HTL/TTL encoders.
1031: Data transfer error between the monitoring channel and the Sensor Module (CRC error).
1033: Fault when checking offset between POS1 and POS2
Faults and alarms

- Replace encoder.
For message value = 1021, 1024: - Check the communication connection.
- Set the monitoring clock cycle higher (p9500, p9511).
- Carry out a POWER ON (switch off/switch on) for all components.
For message value = 1035, if one of the safety encoders was replaced:
- Acknowledge hardware replacement.
- Save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or retentively save).
- Acknowledge fault.
C01754 SI: Fault safety-relevant actual value acquisition

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring signals an error.
1039: Converting the position on the load side exceeds data format.
Remedy: For message value = 1039: Check the parameterization of the gearbox (p9520, p9521, p9522).
C01755 SI: Encoder limit frequency exceeded

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: Message value (r60049, interpret decimal):
1: Motion monitoring functions with encoder: the actual velocity exceeds the encoder limit frequency of 500 kHz.
Note:
This fault results in an SS1 (Safe Stop 1).
Remedy: Without a POWER ON, this message can be acknowledged using a safe acknowledgment mechanism (e.g. via PROFIsafe).
C01769 SI: Error for data cross-check

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: When carrying out a data cross-check between the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between
parameters or results and initiated an SCF (Safety Channel Failure). One of the monitoring functions no longer functions
reliably, i.e. safe operation is no longer possible.
Safety message C01711 is also displayed as SCF (Safety Channel Failure) has been initiated.
If at least one monitoring function is active, then after the parameterized timer has expired, message C01701 is output.
Message value (r60049, interpret hexadecimal): Only for internal Siemens fault diagnostics.
Faults and alarms

C01770 SI: Fault of the failsafe inputs

Message value: Fault cause: %1, F-DI number: %2
Response: NONE
:
the message
value:
Value Cause Remedy
1 Discrepancy error (state between two monitoring Check the F-DI wiring
channels different for too long)
2 Too many switching operations Reduce the switching frequency
3 Test pulse error Check the F-DI wiring
4 Internal software error
Cause: The failsafe digital inputs (F-DI) have a fault condition.
Message value (r60049, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
xxxx: number of the failsafe digital input (F-DI).
yyyy: fault cause

Note:
If several faults occur consecutively, then this message is only signaled for the first fault that occurs.
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Check the wiring of the F-DI (contact problems).

- If the wiring is correct, and for example there is no wire breakage, then a check must be made as to whether the switching
frequency at F-DI is too high and must therefore be reduced (switching pulses must have a longer time between them). The
time interval between each signal edge at an F-DI must be at least equal to the discrepancy time before the input is switched
again.
Note:
This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe (safe acknowledgment).
Discrepancy errors of an F-DI can only be acknowledged if safe acknowledgment was carried out after the cause of the error
was resolved (acknowledgment via PROFIsafe, extended message acknowledgment, self acknowledgment). As long as
safety acknowledgment was not carried out, the corresponding F-DI stays in the safe state internally.
A self acknowledgment for an F-DI can be realized using a positive edge at the corresponding F-DI.
Sets the discrepancy time for fast switching operations at the F-DIs:
For fast switching operations at the failsafe digital inputs (F-DI), it may be necessary to adapt the discrepancy time to the
switching frequency:
- The period of a cyclic switching pulse must be less than half of the discrepancy time (if necessary, round down).
- The time between two fast switching pulses should be longer than the discrepancy time (if necessary, round up).
- The discrepancy time must be at least p9500 (it must always be rounded up or down to be an integer multiple of the SI
sampling time p9500).
If an input filter has been parameterized (p10017 > 0), then the shortest possible discrepancy time is directly specified by
the input filter.
- The period of a cyclic switching pulse must be less than half of the discrepancy time p10017 (if necessary, round down).
- The time between two fast switching pulses should be longer than the discrepancy time+p10017 (if necessary, round up).
- The discrepancy time must be at least p9500 The input filter must always be set less than the discrepancy time.
Self test with specified dark pulses (p10041 > 0) for long cable lengths:
- Increase the dark pulse length (p10018 or p10019).
- Increase the input filter (p10017).
Note:
C01793 SI: Internal safety message buffer is full

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: Too many safety messages have occurred within a short time so that some have not been able to be displayed.
Remedy: No remedy required
A01796 SI: Wait for communication

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The drive waits for communication to be established to execute the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Note:
STO is active in this state.
3: Wait for communication to be established to PROFIsafe F-Host.
Faults and alarms
Remedy: If the message is not automatically withdrawn after a longer period of time, then carry out the following checks:
- Evaluate any other active PROFIsafe communication messages/signals.
- Check the operating state of the F-Host.
- Check the communication connection to the F Host.
Note:
C01799 SI: Acceptance test mode active

Message value: -
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The acceptance test mode is active.
This means the following:
- the setpoint velocity limiting is deactivated (r9733).
The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode.
F01800 DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware/configuration error

Message class: Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error (12)
Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ connection fault has occurred.
100 ... 107:
Communication via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 ... X107 has not been switched to cyclic operation. The cause may be an
incorrect structure or a configuration that results in an impossible bus timing.
10:
Loss of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. The cause may be, for example, that the DRIVE-CLiQ cable was withdrawn from the
Control Unit or as a result of a short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic
communication.
11:
Repeated faults when detecting the connection. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
12:
A connection was detected but the node ID exchange mechanism does not function. The reason is probably that the
component is defective. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
Remedy: For fault value = 100 ... 107:
- Ensure that the DRIVE-CLiQ components have the same firmware versions.
- Avoid longer topologies for short current controller sampling times.
- Check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables at the Control Unit.
- Remove any short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ.
- Carry out a POWER ON.
- Check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance.
- Replace the component involved.
Faults and alarms
A01839 DRIVE-CLiQ diagnostics: cable fault to the component

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The fault counter to monitor the DRIVE-CLiQ connections/cables has been incremented.
Component number.
Note:
The component number specifies the component whose feeder cable from the direction of the converter is faulted.
The alarm is automatically withdrawn after 5 seconds, assuming that no other data transfer error has occurred.
Remedy: - Check the corresponding DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
A01900 PN: Configuration telegram error

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A controller attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram.
2:
Too many PZD data words for output or input. The number of possible PZD items in a drive object is determined by the
number of indices in r2050/r2053.
3:
Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
4:
Setting data for synchronization not accepted. For more information, see A01902.
211:
Unknown parameterizing block.
253:
PN Shared Device: Illegal mixed configuration of PROFIsafe and PZD.
254:
PN Shared Device: Illegal double assignment of a slot/subslot.
257:
PN Shared Device: Too many PZD data words for the output or input in the overall device.
501:
PROFIsafe parameter error (e.g. F_Source_Add, F_Dest_Add).
502:
PROFIsafe telegram does not match.
Additional values:
Remedy: Check the bus configuration on the controller and device sides.
A01902 PN: Isochronous operation parameterization not permissible

Message value: %1
Faults and alarms
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: Parameterization for isochronous operation is not permissible.
0: Bus cycle time Tdp < 0.5 ms.
1: Bus cycle time Tdp > 32 ms.
2: Bus cycle time Tdp is not an integer multiple of the current controller sampling time.
3: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti > Bus cycle time Tdp or Ti = 0.
4: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti is not an integer multiple of the current controller sampling time.
5: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To >= Bus cycle time Tdp or To = 0.
6: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To is not an integer multiple of the current controller sampling time.
7: Controller application cycle time Tmapc is not an integer multiple of the speed controller sampling time.
8: Bus reserve bus cycle time Tdp - Data exchange time Tdx less than two current controller sampling times.
10: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To <= data exchange time Tdx + current controller sampling time
11: Controller application cycle time Tmapc > 14 x Tdp or Tmapc = 0.
12: PLL tolerance window Tpll_w > Tpll_w_max
13: Bus cycle time Tdp is not a multiple of all basic clock cycles.
Remedy: - Adapt the bus parameterization Tdp, Ti, To.
- Adapt the sampling time for the current controller or speed controller.
- Reduce Tdx by using fewer bus participants or shorter telegrams.
Note:
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01904 PN: Controller setting of the PZD telegram rejected

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A controller attempts to set a PZD telegram. The setting is not applied.
3: Controllers have no function rights for making changes.
4: Telegram cannot be set as a result of the drive configuration.
See also: r0922 (PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection)
Remedy: Check and align the telegram settings in the drive project and in the controller.
A01905 PN: Controller setting to activate the channel diagnostics rejected

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: A controller attempted to change the activation of the channel diagnostics. The setting is not applied as the controller does
not have the function rights to make a change.
1: Channel diagnostics are activated. Controller attempts to deactivate them.
2: Channel diagnostics are not activated. Controller attempts to activate them.
Remedy: Activate channel diagnostics in the bus configuration and check and align function rights in the drive.
F01910 Fieldbus: setpoint timeout

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF3
:
Cause: The reception of setpoints from the fieldbus interface (PROFINET) is interrupted.
- Bus connection interrupted.
- Controller switched off.
- Controller set into the STOP state.
Remedy: Restore the bus connection and set the controller to RUN.
F01911 PN: Isochronous operation, clock cycle failure

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: The telegram to synchronize the clock cycles has failed for several bus clock cycles or in several bus clock cycles has
consecutively violated the specified time grid (see bus cycle time, Tdp and Tpllw).
Remedy: - Check the physical bus configuration (cable, connector, terminating resistor, shielding, etc.).
- Check whether communication was briefly or permanently interrupted.
- Check the utilization level of the bus and controller (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).
Note:
PN: PROFINET
F01912 PN: Isochronous operation sign-of-life missing

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: The maximum permissible number of errors in the controller sign-of-life (isochronous operation) has been exceeded in
cyclic operation.
Remedy: - Check the physical bus configuration (cables, connectors, etc.).
- Check whether the controller correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. create a trace with STW2.12 ... STW2.15 and trigger
signal ZSW1.3).
- Check the permissible telegram failure rate (p0925).
- Check the utilization level of the bus and controller (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).
Note:
PN: PROFINET
Faults and alarms
A01932 PN: Clock cycle synchronization missing for DSC

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: There is no clock synchronization or clock synchronous sign of life and DSC is selected.
Note:
DSC: Dynamic Servo Control
See also: r0922 (PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection)
Remedy: Set clock synchronization across the bus configuration and transfer clock synchronous sign-of-life.
A01940 PN: Clock cycle synchronism not reached

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing
telegram. Synchronization with the clock cycle specified by the controller was still not able to be performed.
- The controller does not send an isochronous global control telegram, although isochronous operation was selected when
configuring the bus.
- The controller uses another isochronous DP cycle than was transferred to the device in the parameterizing telegram.
- At least one drive object has a pulse enable (also not controlled from PROFINET).
Remedy: - Check the controller application and bus configuration.
- Check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the device and clock cycle setting at the controller.
- Check that no drive object has a pulse enable. Only enable the pulses after synchronizing the PROFINET drives.
Note:
PN: PROFINET
A01941 PN: Clock cycle signal missing when the bus is being established
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing
telegram. The synchronization telegram is not received.
Remedy: Check the controller application and bus configuration.
Note:
PN: PROFINET
A01943 PN: Clock cycle signal error when the bus is being established
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Faults and alarms
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing telegram.
The synchronization telegram is irregularly received.
- The controller sends an irregular synchronization telegram.
- The controller uses another isochronous bus clock cycle than was transferred to the device in the parameterizing telegram.
Remedy: - Check the controller application and bus configuration.
- Check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the device and clock cycle setting at the controller.
Note:
PN: PROFINET
A01944 PN: Sign-of-life synchronism not reached

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing telegram.
Synchronization with the controller sign-of-life (STW2.12 ... STW2.15) could not be completed because the sign-of-life
changes differently to how it was configured in the Tmapc time grid.
Remedy: - Ensure that the controller correctly increments the sign-of-life in the controller application clock cycle Tmapc.
Note:
PN: PROFINET
F01950 PN: Isochronous operation, synchronization unsuccessful

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: Synchronization of the internal clock cycle to the controller clock cycle has failed. The internal clock cycle exhibits an
unexpected shift.
Remedy: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note:
PN: PROFINET
A01980 PN: cyclic connection interrupted

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The cyclic connection to the PROFINET controller is interrupted.
See also: r8936 (PN cyclic connection state)
Remedy: Establish the PROFINET connection and activate the PROFINET controller in the cyclic mode.
Faults and alarms
A01981 PN: Maximum number of controllers exceeded

Message value: Info 1: %1, Info 2: %2
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A controller attempts to establish a connection to the drive, and as a consequence exceeds the permitted number of
PROFINET connections.
The alarm is automatically withdrawn after approx. 30 seconds.
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2
Info 1 = 0: number of RT connections exceeded
Info 1 > 0: number of IRT connections exceeded
Info 2: permitted number of connections
Remedy: Check the configuration of the PROFINET controllers.
A01989 PN: internal cyclic data transfer error

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The cyclic actual values and/or setpoints were not transferred within the specified times.
Remedy: Correctly set T_io_input or T_io_output.
A02007 Function generator: Drive not SERVO / VECTOR / DC_CTRL

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The drive object specified for connection is not a SERVO, VECTOR or DC_CTRL.
Remedy: Use a SERVO / VECTOR or DC_CTRL drive object with the corresponding number.
Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- Remove the cause of this alarm.
- Restart the function generator.
F03001 NVRAM checksum incorrect

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: A checksum error occurred when evaluating the non-volatile data (NVRAM) on the Control Unit.
The NVRAM data affected was deleted.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for all components.
F06310 Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized

Message class: Network fault (2)
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: For AC/AC drive units, the measured DC voltage lies outside the tolerance range after precharging has been completed.
The following applies for the tolerance range: 1.16 * p0210 < r0070 < 1.6 * p0210
Note:
The fault can only be acknowledged when the drive is switched off.
See also: p0210 (Device supply voltage)
Remedy: - Check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
- Check the line supply voltage.
F07011 Drive: Motor overtemperature

Message class: Motor overload (8)
Message value: %1
Component: Motor
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The calculated motor temperature is too high.
Possible causes:
- Motor overloaded.
- Motor ambient temperature too high.
- Sensor wire breakage.
200:
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t): temperature too high.
300:
Motor temperature model 3: after the monitoring time has expired, the temperature is still higher than the alarm threshold.
301:
Motor temperature model 3: temperature is too high, or the model has not been parameterized.
302:
Motor temperature model 3: Encoder temperature is not within the valid range.
400:
Additional motor overload protection: the load is too high.
Remedy: - Reduce the motor load.
- Check the ambient temperature and the motor ventilation.
- Check the wiring and temperature sensor connection.
- Check monitoring limits.
- Check activation of the additional motor overload protection (5375).
A07012 Drive: Motor temperature model overtemperature

Faults and alarms
Message value: %1
Component: Motor
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: Motor temperature model 1/3 or the additional motor overload protection identified that the alarm threshold was exceeded.
Hysteresis:2K
200:
Motor temperature model 1 (I2t): temperature too high.
300:
Motor temperature model 3: temperature too high.
400:
Additional motor overload protection: the load is too high. If the load remains at this level, the drive is shut down with fault
F07011.
See also: r0034 (Motor utilization thermal), p0613 (Motor temperature model ambient temperature)
Remedy: - Check the motor load and if required, reduce.
- Check the motor ambient temperature.
- Check activation of the additional motor overload protection (5375).
See also: r0034 (Motor utilization thermal)
F07085 Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters changed

Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters have had to be changed.
Possible causes:
1. As a result of other parameters, they have exceeded the dynamic limits.
2. They cannot be used due to the fact that the hardware detected not having certain features.
3. The value is estimated as the thermal time constant is missing.
4. Motor temperature model 1 is activated as thermal motor protection is missing.
See also: p1082 (Maximum speed)
It is not necessary to change the parameters as they have already been correctly limited.
F07090 Drive: Upper torque limit less than the lower torque limit
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The upper torque limit is lower than the lower torque limit.
Remedy: When setting the torque limits via telegram 750, the positive torque limit must be >= the negative torque.
A07091 Drive: determined current controller dynamic response invalid

Message value: %1
Faults and alarms

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: When One Button Tuning is activated (p5300 = 1), the current controller is measured after the pulses have been enabled.
Evaluation has indicated that the current control loop was not appropriately set.
Possible causes:
- Incorrectly set current controller.
- PRBS amplitude set too high (p5296).
1: Dynamic response too low.
2: Current controller unstable.
Note:
PRBS: Pseudo Random Binary Signal (binary noise)
Remedy: - The measurement can be repeated with a smaller excitation amplitude (p5296).
- If required, adapt the current controller proportional gain (p1715).
A07092 Drive: moment of inertia estimator still not ready

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The moment of inertia estimator has still not determined any valid values.
The acceleration cannot be calculated.
The moment of inertia estimator has stabilized, if the frictional values as well as the moment of inertia were determined and
the corresponding status signal is set.
Remedy: Traverse the axis until the moment of inertia estimator has stabilized.
This alarm is automatically withdrawn after the moment of inertia estimator has stabilized.
F07093 Drive: Test signal error

Message value: %1
Response: OFF3
:
Cause: An error was identified when executing the "Test signal" function.
The function was not executed or was canceled.
1: No distance limit has been defined (p5308 = 0).
2: The moment of inertia estimator has not stabilized in the parameterized time (p5309).
3: The parameterized distance (p5308) was exceeded.
4: No motor encoder parameterized (closed-loop speed control without encoder).
6: Pulse enable was withdrawn while traversing.
7: speed setpoint not equal to zero.
See also: p5308 (One Button Tuning distance limiting), p5309 (One Button Tuning duration)
Faults and alarms

- Define distance limiting (p5308).
- Increase the duration, distance limit or speed limit (p5309, p5308, p1082, p1083, p1086).
- Check distance limiting (p5308).
- Configure speed control with encoder.
- Keep the drive switched on until the "Test signal" function has been completely exited.
- Set the speed setpoint to zero. It is possible that the setpoint was entered from the control panel.
A07094 General parameter limit violation

Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: As a result of the violation of a parameter limit, the parameter value was automatically corrected.
Minimum limit violated --> parameter is set to the minimum value.
Maximum limit violated --> parameter is set to the maximum value.
Parameter number, whose value had to be adapted.
Remedy: Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
A07095 Drive: One Button Tuning activated

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The One Button Tuning function is active.
One Button Tuning is performed at the next switch-on command.
See also: p5300 (One Button Tuning selection)
The alarm is automatically withdrawn after One Button Tuning has been exited (p5300 = 0).
F07097 Drive: Test signal error distance limiting

Message value: Fault cause: %1, traversing distance: %2
Response: OFF3
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: An error was identified when executing function "Test signal" or One Button Tuning selection (p5300 = 1).
The function was not executed or was canceled.
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = error cause, xxxx = traversing distance
Fault cause = 4:
- Travel distance to the EPOS software limit switch is not sufficient.
See also: p5308 (One Button Tuning distance limiting), p5309 (One Button Tuning duration)
Remedy: - Enter the traversing path in parameter p5308 - or deselect the function involved in p5301.
- For fault cause = 1, 2, shorter traversing paths may be possible.
For fault cause = 1:
- Deselect bit 0 and bit 1 in parameter p5301.
- Deselect bit 2 in parameter p5301.
- Deselect bit 4 and bit 5 in parameter p5301.
- Change the travel direction of One Button Tuning via p5308.
- Increase the clearance to the EPOS software limit switch by manually traversing.
A07200 Drive: Master control ON command present

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The ON/OFF1 command is present (no 0 signal).
The command is either influenced via binary signal sink r0840 (actual CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control.
Remedy: Switch the signal to 0 via binary signal sink r0840 (actual CDS) or control word bit 0 via the master control.
F07220 Drive: Master control by PLC missing

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: The "master control by PLC" signal was missing in operation.
- Interconnection of the binary signal sink for "Master control by PLC" is incorrect (r0854).
- The higher-level control has withdrawn the "master control by PLC" signal.
- Data transfer via the fieldbus (controller/drive) was interrupted.
Remedy: - Check the interconnection of the binary signal sink for "Master control by PLC" (r0854).
- Check the "master control by PLC" signal and, if required, switch in.
- Check data transfer via the fieldbus (controller/drive).
Note:
If the drive should continue to operate after withdrawing "master control by PLC" then fault response must be parameterized
to NONE or the message type should be parameterized as alarm.
F07334 Function not possible

Message value: %1
Faults and alarms
Component: Motor
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: The selected function is not possible for this configuration.
0:
Function "Travel to fixed stop" (c1545) was selected via the associated binary signal source, although encoderless operation
or U/f operation is active.
- Operate the closed-loop speed control with an encoder.
- If necessary, deselect function "Travel to fixed stop".
F07410 Drive: Current controller output limited

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The condition "I_act = 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit" is present and can be caused by the following:
- Motor not connected or motor contactor open.
- No DC link voltage present.
- Power unit defective.
Remedy: - Connect the motor or check the motor contactor.
- Check the DC link voltage (r0070).
- Check the power unit.
F07412 Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (motor model)

Message class: Position/speed actual value incorrect or not available (11)
Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: An incorrect commutation angle was detected, which can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller.
Possible causes:
- The phase sequence of the output phases for the motor is incorrect (e.g. the phases are interchanged).
- The motor encoder is incorrectly adjusted with respect to the magnet position.
- The motor encoder is damaged.
- The motor encoder speed signal is faulted.
- The control loop is instable due to incorrect parameterization.
Remedy: - Check the phase sequence for the motor, and if required, correct.
- If the encoder mounting was changed - Re-adjust the encoder.
- Replace the defective motor and/or motor encoder.
F07414 Drive: Encoder serial number changed

Message value: -
Component: None
Faults and alarms
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: The serial number of the motor encoder of a synchronous motor has changed. The change was only checked for encoders
with serial number (e.g. EnDat encoders) and build-in motors (e.g. p0300 = 401) or third-party motors (p0300 = 2).

The encoder was replaced.
Remedy: The encoder must be adjusted after replacement.
Contact the service department.
F07432 Drive: Motor without overvoltage protection

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: In the case of a fault at maximum speed, the motor can generate an overvoltage that can destroy the converter.
Remedy: Limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection.
Note:
The maximum speed is calculated as follows:
p1082 <= 11.695 * DC link voltage overvoltage threshold/r0316
DC link voltage overvoltage threshold:
- Line connection 1 AC: 410 V
- Line connection 3 AC: 820 V
See also: r0316 (Motor torque constant), p1082 (Maximum speed)
F07434 Drive: It is not possible to change the direction of rotation with the pulses enabled
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: With the pulses enabled, a drive data set that has a different parameterized direction of rotation was selected (p1821).
It is only possible to change the motor direction of rotation using p1821 when the pulses are inhibited.
Remedy: - Change over the drive data set with the pulses inhibited.
- Ensure that the changeover to a drive data set does not result in the motor direction of rotation being changed (i.e. for these
drive data sets, the same value must be in p1821).
See also: p1821 (Direction of rotation)
A07440 EPOS: Jerk time is limited

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The calculation of the jerk time Tr = max(p2572, p2573) / p2574 resulted in an excessively high value so that the jerk time
is internally limited to 1000 ms.
Note:
The alarm is also output if jerk limiting is not active.
Remedy: - Increase the jerk limiting (p2574).
- Reduce maximum acceleration or maximum deceleration (p2572, p2573).
A07441 LR: Save the position offset of the absolute encoder adjustment
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The status of the absolute encoder adjustment has changed.
In order to permanently save the determined position offset (p2525) and the determined number of the drive data set
(p2733), they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Possible causes:
- Motor or encoder were replaced (applies to EQN and DQI).
- Position-relevant parameters were changed.
- An encoder that was not adjusted was adjusted (save the project in a non-volatile fashion using "Copy RAM to ROM").
Note:
This message is not output when switching-on the axis after having first moved it in the switched-off state, as long as the
parameterizable monitoring window was not exited.
Remedy: Readjust the encoder.
F07443 LR: Home position not in the permissible range

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: The home position received when adjusting the encoder via numerical signal sink r2599 lies outside the half of the encoder
range and cannot be set as actual axis position.
Maximum permissible value for the home position
Remedy: Set the home position to a lower value than specified in the fault value.
A07557 Motor encoder: Home position not in the permissible range

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The home position received when adjusting the encoder via numerical signal sink c2599 lies outside the half of the encoder
range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in the supplementary
information.
Remedy: Set the home position less than the value from the supplementary information.
Faults and alarms
A07558 Encoder 2: Home position not in the permissible range

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
information.
A07559 Encoder 3: Home position not in the permissible range

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
information.
A07565 Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 1

Message value: %1
Component: Sensor Module Encoder 1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 1 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G1_ZSW.15).
Error code from G1_XIST2.
Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G1_STW.15 = 1).
F07575 Drive: Motor encoder not ready

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The motor encoder signals that it is not ready.
- Initialization of encoder 1 (motor encoder) was unsuccessful.
- The function "parking encoder" is active (encoder control word G1_STW.14 = 1).
- The Sensor Module is defective.
Remedy: Evaluate other active faults via the motor encoder.
Faults and alarms
A07577 Motor encoder: Measuring probe evaluation not possible

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred.
6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set.
4098: Error when initializing the probe.
4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high.
4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle.
Remedy: Deactivate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489).
Check the converter hardware.
Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe.
Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple.
A07578 Encoder 2: Measuring probe evaluation not possible

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
A07579 Encoder 3: Measuring probe evaluation not possible

Message value: %1
Component: None
Faults and alarms
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
A07581 Motor encoder: Position actual value preprocessing error

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
Remedy: Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing.
A07582 Encoder 2: Position actual value preprocessing error

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
A07583 Encoder 3: Position actual value preprocessing error

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
A07587 Motor encoder: Position actual value preprocessing has no valid encoder
Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing:
- An encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400 = 0) or
invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0).
Remedy: Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets.
See also: p0400 (Encoder type selection)
A07588 Encoder 2: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
A07589 Encoder 3: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
F07801 Drive: Motor overcurrent

Message value: -
Component: Motor
Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The permissible motor limit current was exceeded.

- Active current limit too low.
- Current controller not correctly set.
- Load is too high.
- Short-circuit in the motor cable or ground fault.
- Motor current does not match the drive current.
Remedy: - Reduce the load.
- Check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
- Check the drive and motor combination.
F07802 Drive: Infeed not ready

Message class: Infeed faulted (13)
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive does not signal a ready state after an internal switch-on command.
- DC link voltage is not present.
- Defective drive.
- Supply voltage incorrectly set.
Remedy: - Check the enable signals for the drive.
- Replace the drive.
- Check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
F07815 Drive: Power unit has been changed

Component: Power Unit
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The code number of the actual power unit does not match the saved number. This occurs if a saved configuration (SD card,
backup file) of a converter with another power rating is used.
Fault value only for internal Siemens diagnostics.
See also: p0201 (Power unit code number)
Remedy: - Carry-out a reset to the factory settings, which corresponds to recommissioning the converter.
- Use an SD card or backup file with the configuration correct for the drive being used and switch-off/switch-on the drive.
- In case of doubt, before using an SD card, delete the existing configuration of the USER folder.
- For a series commissioning, only use the same converter types (order number, power class).
F07860 External braking resistor signals an overtemperature

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The temperature monitoring of the external braking resistor, connected via digital input 4 (DI 4, X130/2.6), responded.
Note:
This signal is triggered for a 1/0 edge at digital input 4.
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Check the dimensioning of the external braking resistor for the application.
- Check the external braking resistor and temperature monitoring.
- Check the temperature monitoring connection (X130/2.6).
F07900 Drive: Motor blocked/speed controller at its limit

Message value: -
Component: Motor
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The motor operates longer than 0.2 seconds at the torque limit and below the speed threshold in p2175.
This signal can also be initiated if the speed actual value is oscillating and the speed controller output repeatedly goes to its
limit.
See also: p2175 (Motor blocked speed threshold)
Remedy: - Check that the motor can freely move.
- Check the effective torque limit (r1538, r1539).
- Check the parameter of the "Motor blocked" signal and possibly correct (p2175).
F07901 Drive: Motor overspeed

Message value: -
Component: Motor
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The maximum permissible speed was either positively or negatively exceeded (p1082).
Remedy: - Check the speed controller.
- Check the maximum speed (p1082).
F07930 Drive: Brake control error

Message value: %1
Component: Motor
Response: OFF1
:
Cause: The Control Unit has detected a brake control fault.
1, 2:
- Motor cable is not shielded correctly.
- Defect in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit.
- Ground fault in brake cable.
4:
Brake is not connected or cable is interrupted.
See also: p1278 (Brake control diagnostics evaluation)
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Check the motor holding brake connection.

- Check the function of the motor holding brake.
- Check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error, and if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults
involved.
- Check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the motor
cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are tightly screwed
to the housing).
- Replace the affected Control Unit.
- Set p1278 to 1 if brake diagnostics is not required.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration), p1278 (Brake control diagnostics evaluation)
F07933 Drive: Brake voltage incorrect

Message value: -
Component: Motor
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A brake voltage fault was detected.
F07935 Drive: Incorrect motor holding brake configuration

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: An incorrect motor holding brake configuration was detected.
0:
A motor holding brake was detected where the brake control has not been configured (p1215 = 0).
1:
A motor holding brake was detected where the brake control has not been configured (p1215 = 0).
The brake control configuration was left at "No motor holding brake available" (p1215 = 0).
- No remedy required.
- If required change the motor holding brake configuration (p1215 = 1, 2).
- If this fault value unexpectedly occurs, then the motor connections should be checked in order to rule out that they have
been interchanged.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration)
F07955 Drive: Motor has been changed

Message value: -
Component: Motor
Response: NONE
Faults and alarms
:
Cause: The code number of the actual motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the saved number.
If available:
The code numbers of the bearings, gearbox and brake do not match the saved numbers.
Remedy: Connect the original motor and switch on the converter again (POWER ON) - or restore the factory settings.
Note:
The data for bearings, gearbox and brake are reloaded.
A08561 IE: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127).
0: General consistency error
1: Error in the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask or standard gateway).
2: Error in the station names.
5: Standard gateway is also set at the PROFINET interface.
6: The station name is also set at the PROFINET interface.
7: The IP address is located in the same subnet as the IP address of the PROFINET interface.
Note:
For alarm value = 0, 1, 2, 5, 7 the following applies: the configuration was not changed.
For alarm value = 6 the following applies: The new configuration was however activated.
IE: Industrial Ethernet
Remedy: Reinitialize the station using the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with Startdrive commissioning tool).
A08563 PROFINET: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration for the PROFINET interface (X150).
0: General consistency error
1: Error in the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask or standard gateway).
2: Error in the station names.
3: DHCP was not able to be activated, as a cyclic PROFINET connection already exists.
4: A cyclic PROFINET connection is not possible as DHCP is activated.
5: Standard gateway is also set at the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127).
6: Standard station name is also set at the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127).
7: IP address is located in the same subnet as the IP address of the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127).
Note:
For alarm value = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, the following applies: the configuration was not changed.
For alarm value = 6 the following applies: The new configuration was however activated.
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Faults and alarms
Remedy: Reinitialize the station using the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with Startdrive commissioning tool).
A08800 PROFIenergy energy-saving mode active

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The PROFIenergy energy-saving mode is active
Mode ID of the active PROFIenergy energy-saving mode.
See also: r5600 (PROFIenergy energy-saving mode ID)
Remedy: The alarm is automatically withdrawn when the energy-saving mode is exited.
Note:
The energy-saving mode is exited after the following events:
- The PROFIenergy command end_pause is received from the higher-level control.
- The higher-level control has changed into the STOP operating state.
- The PROFINET connection to the higher-level control has been disconnected.
F13000 License not adequate

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: - The converter uses options that require a license and the licenses are not sufficient.
- An error has occurred when checking the licensing.
0: Adequate licensing was not able to be determined as there is no licensing data available on the memory card.
1: Adequate licensing was not able to be determined as the memory card with the required licensing data was withdrawn
in operation or the memory card is defective.
2: Adequate licensing was not able to be determined as there is no licensing data available on the memory card.
3: Adequate licensing was not able to be determined as the licensing data does not match the serial number of the memory
card being used.
4, 5, 6, 7: Adequate licensing was not able to be determined as the licensing data were manipulated and are therefore
invalid.
8, 9: An internal error occurred when checking the license.
Faults and alarms

Transfer a license file with the required licenses to the converter.
Reinsert the memory card into the converter. If you have to replace a defective memory card, contact Technical Support.
Transfer a license file with the required licenses to the converter.
Compare the license file name (after "LK_" to ".ZIP") with the serial number of the memory card.
Transfer the appropriate license file to the converter.
For fault value = 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9:
Note:
An overview of the converter functions requiring a license can be displayed using a commissioning tool in the online mode.
Depending on the commissioning tool, you can also obtain the necessary licensing (serial number, license file, Trial License
Mode).
A13002 Licensing not sufficient in operation

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: - For the converter, the options that require a license are being used but the licenses are not sufficient.
- An error occurred when checking the existing licenses.
0: The existing license is not sufficient.
1: An adequate license was not able to be determined as the memory card with the required licensing data was withdrawn
in operation or the memory card has developed a defect.
2: An adequate license was not able to be determined as there is no licensing data available on the memory card.
3: An adequate license was not able to be determined as there is no licensing data available on the memory card.
4, 5, 6, 7: An adequate license was not able to be determined as the licensing data were manipulated and are therefore
invalid.
8,9: An internal error occurred when checking the license.
Remedy: For alarm value = 0:
Additional licenses are required and must be activated.
Reinsert or replace the memory card that matches the system.
Transfer the license file to the converter.
Compare the license file name (after "LK_" to ".ZIP") with the serial number of the memory card.
Transfer the appropriate license file to the converter.
For alarm value = 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9:
Note:
An overview of the converter functions requiring a license can be displayed using a commissioning tool in the online mode.
Depending on the commissioning tool, you can also obtain the necessary licensing (serial number, license file, Trial License
Mode).
Faults and alarms
A13030 Trial License activated

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The "Trial License" function was activated. One of the available periods is expiring.
The alarm is automatically withdrawn after the periods have expired.
A13031 Trial License period expired

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: One of the available periods of the "Trial License" function has expired.
Remedy: - If required, start an additional period.
- Deactivate functions requiring a license.
- Appropriately license the drive unit.
Note:
A license that is not adequate will only become evident after the next time the system runs up.
A13032 Trial License last period activated

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The "Trial License" function was activated. The last of the available periods is expiring.
The alarm is automatically withdrawn after the last period has expired.
A13033 Trial License last period expired

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The last period of the "Trial License" function has expired. No additional periods available.
Remedy: - Deactivate functions requiring a license.
- Appropriately license the drive unit.
Note:
A license that is not adequate will only become evident after the next time the system runs up.
Faults and alarms
F30001 Drive: overcurrent

Message class: Power electronics faulted (5)
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive has detected an overcurrent condition.
- Closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- Motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- The rated motor current is significantly higher than that of the drive.
- Infeed: High discharge and post-charging currents for line voltage dip.
- Infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- Infeed: Short-circuit currents at switch-on as there is no line commutating reactor.
- Power cables are not correctly connected.
- The power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- Defective drive.
- Line phase interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bit-serial):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy: - Check the motor data - If required, carry out commissioning.
- Check the assignment of the rated motor and drive currents.
- Infeed: Check the line supply quality.
- Infeed: Reduce the motor load.
- Infeed: Check the correct connection of the line filter and the line commutating reactor.
- Check the power cable connections.
- Check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- Check the length of the power cables.
- Replace drive.
- Check the line supply phases.
F30002 Drive: DC link overvoltage

Message class: DC link overvoltage (4)
Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive has detected an overvoltage condition in the DC link.
- Motor regenerates too much energy.
- Device supply voltage too high.
DC link voltage at the time of trip [0.1 V].
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Increase the ramp-down time.

- Use a braking resistor.
- Use a drive with a higher power rating.
- Check the device supply voltage (p0210).
F30003 Drive: DC link undervoltage

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The power unit has detected an undervoltage condition in the DC link.
- Line supply failure.
- Line supply voltage below the permissible value.
- Line supply infeed failed or interrupted.
Remedy: - Check the line supply voltage.
- Check the line supply infeed and observe the fault messages relating to it (if there are any).
F30004 Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink inverter

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- Insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- Overload.
- Ambient temperature too high.
- Pulse frequency too high.
Temperature [0.01 °C].
Remedy: - Check whether the fan is running.
- Check the fan elements.
- Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- Check the motor load.
- Reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A30250 has been fallen below.
F30005 Power unit: Overload I2t

Message value: %1
Faults and alarms

Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The power unit was overloaded.
- The permissible rated power unit current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time.
- The permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
I2t [100 % = 16384].
Remedy: - Reduce the continuous load.
- Adapt the load duty cycle.
- Check the motor and power unit rated currents.
See also: r0307 (Rated motor power)
F30011 Power unit: Line phase failure in main circuit

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: At the power unit, the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value.
Possible causes:
- A line phase has failed.
- The 3 line phases are inadmissibly asymmetrical.
- The capacitance of the DC link capacitor forms a resonance frequency with the line inductance and the reactor integrated
in the power unit.
- The fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured.
- A motor phase has failed.
- For power units operated on a single phase, the permissible active power was exceeded.
Remedy: - Check the main circuit fuses.
- Check whether a single-phase load is distorting the line voltages.
- Detune the resonant frequency with the line inductance by using an upstream line reactor.
- Dampen the resonant frequency with the line inductance by switching over the DC link voltage compensation in the
software or increase the smoothing. However, this can have a negative impact on the torque ripple at the motor output.
- Check the motor feeder cables.
F30015 Drive: phase failure motor cable

Message value: -
Component: Motor
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A phase failure in the motor feeder cable was detected.
The signal can also be output in the following case:
The motor is correctly connected, however the closed-speed control is instable and therefore an oscillating torque is
generated.
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Check the motor feeder cables.

- Check the speed controller settings.
A30016 Power unit: Load supply switched off

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The DC link voltage is too low.
DC link voltage at the time of the trip [V].
Remedy: - Switch on load supply.
- Check the line supply if necessary.
- If necessary, insert the jumper for the internal braking resistor.
- For a 3 AC line connection, connect an internal or external braking resistor (X4).
F30017 Power unit: Hardware current limit has responded too often
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The hardware current limitation in the relevant phase (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has responded too often. The
number of times the limit has been exceeded depends on the design and type of power unit.
- Fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- Motor load too high
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 3: phase U
Bit 4: phase V
Bit 5: phase W
Additional bits:
Note:
Fault value = 0 means that the phase with current limiting is not recognized (e.g. for blocksize device).
Remedy: - Check the motor data.
- Check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- Replace power unit.
F30020 Power unit: Configuration not supported

Message value: Fault cause: %1, additional information: %2
Faults and alarms

Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A configuration is requested that is not supported by the power unit.
yyyyxxxx hex: xxxx = fault cause, yyyy = additional information (internal Siemens)
xxxx = 1: The requested DRIVE-CLiQ timing is not permissible.
xxxx = 3: Initialization was not able to be successfully completed. It is possible that the Control Unit was withdrawn from the
Power Module before or during power up.
xxxx = 4: The combination of power unit and Control Unit or Control Unit Adapter is not supported.
xxxx = 8: The version of the ASIC installed in the power unit is no longer supported.
Remedy: For fault cause = 1:
Update the Control Unit firmware or change the DRIVE-CLiQ topology.
For fault cause = 3, 4:
Insert a Control Unit or Control Unit Adapter (CUAxx) on an appropriate Power Module and perform a POWER ON for the
Control Unit or the Control Unit Adapter.
Replace the power unit by one which has a newer ASIC version.
F30021 Drive: Ground fault

Message class: Ground fault / inter-phase short-circuit detected (7)
Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive has detected a ground fault.
Possible causes:
- Ground fault in the power cables.
- Ground fault at the motor.
- When the brake closes, this causes the hardware DC current monitoring to respond.
- Short-circuit at the braking resistor.
0:
- The hardware DC current monitoring has responded.
- Short-circuit at the braking resistor.
> 0:
Absolute value summation current amplitude.
Remedy: - Check the power cable connections.
- Check the motor.
- Check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire is possibly broken).
- Check the braking resistor.
F30024 Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model

Message value: Power semiconductor: %1, temperature: [0.01 degrees C] %2
Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The temperature difference between the power semiconductor involved and the heat sink has exceeded the permissible
fault threshold.
- Overload.

yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy= Power semiconductor, xxxx = Temperature in 0.01°C
See also: r0037 (Drive temperatures)
Remedy: - Adapt the load duty cycle.
- Check whether the fan is running.
F30025 Power unit: Chip overtemperature

Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The chip temperature of the power semiconductor involved has exceeded the permissible fault threshold.
- Overload.

Remedy: - Adapt the load duty cycle.
- Check whether the fan is running.
Note:
This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A030252 has been fallen below.
See also: r0037 (Drive temperatures)
F30027 Power unit: Precharging DC link time monitoring

Message value: Enable signals: %1, Status: %2
Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The power unit DC link was not able to be precharged within the expected time.
Possible causes:
1) There is no line supply voltage connected.
2) The line contactor/line side switch has not been closed.
3) The line supply voltage is too low.
4) Line supply voltage incorrectly set (p0210).
5) The precharging resistors are overheated as there were too many precharging operations per time unit.
6) The precharging resistors are overheated as the DC link capacitance is too high.
7) The precharging resistors have overheated as power was drawn from the DC link without the infeed being ready for
operation.
8) The precharging resistors are overheated as the line contactor was closed during the DC link fast discharge through the
Braking Module.
9) The DC link has either a ground fault or a short-circuit.
10) Connector X4 is not correctly configured.

yyyyxxxx hex:

yyyy = power unit state
0: Fault status (wait for OFF and fault acknowledgment).
1: Restart inhibit (wait for OFF).
2: Overvoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state.
3: Undervoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state.
4: Wait for bridging contactor to open -> change into the fault state.
5: Wait for bridging contactor to open -> change into restart inhibit.
6: Wait for bypass contactor to open
7: Commissioning.
8: Ready for precharging.
9: Precharging started, DC link voltage lower than the minimum switch-on voltage.
10: Precharging, DC link voltage end of precharging still not detected.
11: Wait for the end of the de-bounce time of the main contactor after precharging has been completed.
12: Precharging completed, ready for pulse enable.
13: It was detected that the STO terminal was energized at the power unit.

xxxx = Missing internal enable signals, power unit (inverted bit-coded, FFFF hex -> all internal enable signals available)
Bit 0: Power supply of the IGBT gating shut down.
Bit 1: Ground fault detected.
Bit 2: Peak current intervention.
Bit 3: I2t exceeded.
Bit 4. Thermal model overtemperature calculated.
Bit 5: (heat sink, gating module, power unit) overtemperature measured.
Bit 6: Reserved.
Bit 7: Overvoltage detected.
Bit 8: Power unit has completed precharging, ready for pulse enable.
Bit 9: STO terminal missing.
Bit 10: Overcurrent detected.
Bit 11: Armature short-circuit active.
Bit 12: DRIVE-CLiQ fault active.
Bit 13: Vce fault detected, transistor de-saturated due to overcurrent/short-circuit.
Bit 14: Undervoltage detected.
Faults and alarms
Remedy: In general:
- Check the line supply voltage at the input terminals.
For 5):
- Carefully observe the permissible precharging frequency (refer to the product documentation).
For 6):
- Check the total capacitance of the DC link and reduce in accordance with the maximum permissible DC link capacitance
if necessary (refer to the product documentation).
For 7):
- Interconnect the ready-for-operation signal from the infeed unit in the enable logic of the drives connected to this DC link.
For 8):
- Check the connections of the external line contactor. The line contactor must be open during DC link fast discharge.
For 9):
- Check the DC link for ground faults or short-circuits.
For 10):
- When using the internal braking resistor, terminals DCP and R2 of connector X4 must be bridged.
- When using an external braking resistor, this must be connected between DCP and R1 of connector X4.
A30031 Power unit: Hardware current limiting in phase U

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase U responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- Fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- Motor load too high
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if the hardware current limitation of phase U, V or W for the inverter responds.
Remedy: - Check the motor data.
- Check the motor circuit configuration (star/delta).
A30034 Power unit: Internal overtemperature

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached.
If the temperature inside the power unit increases up to the fault threshold, then fault F30036 is triggered.
- Ambient temperature might be too high.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Overtemperature in the control electronics area.
Bit 1 = 1: Overtemperature in the power electronics area.
Bit 2 = 1: Overtemperature in the processor area.
Bit 4 = 1: Overtemperature when the internal fan is defective.
Bit 5 = 1: Intake air overtemperature.
- Check the fan for the inside of the unit.
F30036 Power unit: Internal overtemperature

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The temperature inside the converter has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- Overload.
Bit 0 = 1: Overtemperature in the control electronics area.
Bit 1 = 1: Overtemperature in the power electronics area.
Bit 4 = 1: Overtemperature when the internal fan is defective.
Bit 5 = 1: Intake air overtemperature.
Remedy: - Check the internal fan.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below.
F30040 Drive: 24/48 V undervoltage

Message class: Supply voltage fault (undervoltage) (3)
Message value: Channel: %1, voltage: %2 [0.1 V]
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The undervoltage threshold of the 24 V power supply for the drive was fallen below for longer than 3 ms.
yyxxxx hex: yy = channel, xxxx = voltage [0.1 V]
yy = 0: 24 V power supply
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Check the drive power supply.

A30041 Power unit: Undervolt 24/48 V alarm

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: For the power unit power supply, the lower threshold has been violated.
Remedy: - Check the power supply of the power unit.
- Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for the component.
A30042 Power unit: Fan has reached the maximum operating hours
Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The maximum operating time of at least one fan will soon be reached, or has already been exceeded.
Bit 0 = 1:
The wear counter of the heat sink fan has reached 99 %. The remaining service life is 1 %. After this 1 % has elapsed, bit 0
is cleared and bit 2 is set in the alarm value.
Bit 2 = 1:
The wear counter of the heat sink fan has exceeded 100 %.
Bit 8 = 1:
The wear counter of the 1st internal fan has reached 99 %. The remaining service life is 1 %. After this 1 % has elapsed, bit
8 is cleared and bit 10 is set in the alarm value.
Bit 10 = 1:
The wear counter of the 1st internal fan has exceeded 100 %.
Bit 16 = 1:
The wear counter of the 2nd internal fan has reached 99 %. The remaining service life is 1 %. After this 1 % has elapsed, bit
16 is cleared and bit 18 is set in the alarm value.
Bit 18 = 1:
The wear counter of the 2nd internal fan has exceeded 100 %.
Remedy: For the fan involved, carry out the following:
- Replace the fan.
- Reset the wear counter using the appropriate button in Startdrive or the web server.
See also: p0251 (Power unit heat sink fan operating hours counter), r0277 (Power unit heat sink fan wear counter)
F30043 Power unit: Overvolt 24/48 V

Message class: Supply voltage fault (overvoltage) (3)
Faults and alarms
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: For the power unit power supply, the upper threshold has been violated.
Remedy: Check the power supply of the power unit.
A30044 Power unit: Overvolt 24/48 V alarm

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: For the power unit power supply, the upper threshold has been violated.
Remedy: Check the power supply of the power unit.
F30050 Power unit: 24 V supply overvoltage

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The voltage monitor signals an overvoltage fault on the module.
Remedy: - Check the 24 V power supply.
- Replace the module if necessary.
F30051 Power unit: Motor holding brake short-circuit detected

Message class: External measured value / signal state outside the permissible range (16)
Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A short-circuit at the motor holding brake terminals has been detected.
Remedy: - Check the motor holding brake for a short-circuit.
- Check the connection and cable for the motor holding brake.
F30052 EEPROM data error

Faults and alarms
Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The EEPROM data of the power unit module are incorrect.
Remedy: Replace the power unit module or update the EEPROM data.
F30055 Power unit: Braking chopper overcurrent

Message class: Braking Module faulted (14)
Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: An overcurrent condition has occurred in the braking chopper.
Remedy: - Check whether the braking resistor has a short-circuit.
- For an external braking resistor, check whether the resistor may have been dimensioned too small.
Note:
The braking chopper is only enabled again at pulse enable after the fault has been acknowledged.
F30062 Bypass contactor opened under current

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The bypass contactor of the precharging unit has been opened under current.
Possible causes:
- A defect at the bypass contactor
Remedy: It is urgently recommended that the components involved are replaced to prevent serious damage to the entire converter
line-up.
F30068 Power unit: undertemperature inverter heat sink

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The actual inverter heat sink temperature is below the permissible minimum value.
Possible causes:
- The power unit is being operated at an ambient temperature that lies below the permissible range.
- The temperature sensor evaluation is defective.
Inverter heat sink temperature [0.1 °C].
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Ensure that higher ambient temperatures prevail.

- Replace the power unit.
A30076 Power unit: Thermal overload braking resistor alarm

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The energy absorbed by the braking resistor has exceeded the alarm threshold of 80 %. If the power unit is still operated in
the generator mode, then this can reach the shutdown threshold. To avoid overheating of the braking resistor, use of the
braking resistor is inhibited and alarm A30077 is output.
Energy absorbed by the braking resistor [Ws].
Remedy: Reduce the power when generating.
Note:
For a DC link coupling, the generating power of all of the coupled power units must be taken into consideration.
A30077 Power unit: Thermal overload braking resistor

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The braking resistor is thermally overloaded. This is the reason that its use was inhibited.
Energy absorbed by the braking resistor [Ws].
Remedy: Reduce the power when generating.
Note:
- Once the braking resistor has thermally recovered, it is enabled for further use.
- For a DC link coupling, the generating power of all the coupled power units must be taken into consideration.
F30078 Power unit: Line reactor overheated

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The temperature monitoring of the line reactor has responded. In addition to the OFF2 response, the use of the braking
resistor was inhibited.
Note:
- An overtemperature condition of the line reactor can occur when a DC link coupling is used – and if the power when
motoring, which is fed into the DC link - Is not evenly distributed across the rectifiers of the power units.
Remedy: - Check the converter fan and replace if necessary.
- Reduce the motoring power.
A30250 Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink inverter

Faults and alarms
Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached.
Fault F30004 is initiated if the temperature of the heat sink increases by 5 K.
Remedy: Check the following:
- Is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- Have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- Has the cooling failed?
A30252 Power unit: Chip overtemperature alarm

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The chip temperature of the power semiconductor involved has exceeded the permissible alarm threshold.
Note:
- If the chip temperature of the power semiconductor involved increases by 5K, then fault F30025 is initiated.

Remedy: Check the following:
- Is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- Have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- Has the cooling failed?
- Pulse frequency too high?
A30253 Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model alarm

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The temperature difference between the power semiconductor involved and the heat sink has exceeded the permissible
alarm threshold.
The maximum output current is reduced as overload response.

The alarm is automatically withdrawn once the alarm threshold has been fallen below.
Note:
If the temperature continues to increase, this can result in fault F30024.
A30256 Power unit: Overload I2t

Faults and alarms
Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The alarm threshold for the I2t overload of the power unit has been exceeded.
The output current and therefore the output frequency is reduced. If the current reduction is not sufficient to thermally
relieve the power unit, then when the fault threshold for I2t overload is reached, the drive switches off the power unit.
Remedy: - Reduce the continuous load.
- Adapt the load duty cycle.
- Check the assignment of the motor and power unit rated currents.
F30260 Power unit: Fault in the driver supply for the power semiconductor
Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A fault has occurred in the driver supply of the power semiconductor.
Remedy: There is a hardware defect. The device must be replaced.
F30262 Power unit: Braking chopper defective

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The braking chopper is defective.
Remedy: Replace the converter.
F30263 Power unit: Braking chopper upper defective

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The upper braking chopper is defective.
Remedy: Replace the converter.
F30265 Power unit: Line voltage failure detected

Message value: -
Response: OFF3
:
Cause: Line voltage failure was detected
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Switch on the line voltage.

- To increase the degree of ruggedness, the delay time can be increased.
A30502 Power unit: DC link overvoltage

Message class: DC link overvoltage (4)
Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link on a pulse inhibit.
- Device supply voltage too high.
- Line reactor incorrectly dimensioned.
DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV].
See also: r0070 (Actual DC link voltage)
Remedy: - Check the device supply voltage (p0210).
- Check the dimensioning of the line reactor.
C30603 SI: Module temperature - limit value exceeded

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: A safe monitoring function has detected that the module temperature has exceeded a limit value. STO (Safe Torque Off) was
initiated to maintain the safe state.
- Check the module fan.
- Operate the module in the permissible range.
F30604 SI: Safety EEPROM data error

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: Safety relevant EEPROM data are not correct.

Message value (r0949, interpret decimal): Only for internal Siemens fault diagnostics.
Remedy: Replace the module
A30605 SI: Checksum error has occurred

Message value: %1
Component: None
Faults and alarms
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A checksum error (CRC error) has occurred in the converter program memory.
C30649 SI: Internal software error

Response: OFF2
:
Cause: An internal error has occurred in the Safety Integrated software.
Note:
This message results in an STO (Safe Torque Off) that cannot be acknowledged.
Message value (r60049, interpret hexadecimal):
- Upgrade the firmware of the Control Unit to a later version.
Note:
C30680 SI: Checksum error safety monitoring functions

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: Review the message on channel A for information
Remedy:
C30681 SI: Incorrect parameter value

Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Remedy:
Faults and alarms
C30700 SI Motion P2: STO initiated

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The drive is stopped using STO.
Possible causes:
- Stop request from another monitoring channel.
- STO not active after parameterized time after test stop selection.
- Subsequent response, following messages: A30706, A30714, F30701, A30716
Remedy: - Remove the cause of the fault on the first monitoring channel.
- Check the switch-off signal path of the first of monitoring channel (check DRIVE-CLiQ communication).
- Carry out diagnostics for the active messages (A30706, A30714, F30701, A30716).
- Replace drive.
Note:
SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
C30701 SI Motion P2: SS1 initiated

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: OFF3
:
Cause: The drive is stopped using SS1.
As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9556 has expired, or the speed threshold parameterized in p9560
has been fallen below, message F30700 "SI Motion P2: STO initiated" is output.
Possible causes:
- Stop request from another monitoring channel.
- Subsequent response, following messages: A30714, A30711, A30707, A30716
Remedy: - Remove the cause of the fault on the first monitoring channel.
- Carry out diagnostics for the active messages (A30714, A30711, A30707, A30716).
Note:
SS1: Safe Stop 1
C30706 SI: SAM/SBR limit exceeded

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Remedy: See also: p9548 (SI SAM speed tolerance)
Faults and alarms
C30711 SI: SCF (Safety Channel Failure) initiated

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Remedy:
C30714 SI: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The drive had moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value. The drive is stopped by the configured stop
response.
100: SLS1 exceeded.
200: SLS2 exceeded.
300: SLS3 exceeded.
400: SLS4 exceeded.
1000: Encoder limit frequency exceeded.
- Check the limits for the "SLS" function and if required adapt.
Note:
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
C30716 SI: Tolerance for Safe Direction exceeded

Message value: %1
Component: None
Response: NONE
:
Remedy:
N30800 Power unit: Group signal

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The power unit has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluate the other messages that are presently available.
Faults and alarms
F30805 Power unit: EEPROM checksum error

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted.
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
F30810 Power unit: Watchdog timer expired

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The watchdog timer has expired. This can only be caused by a fatal software error.
F30815 Power unit: Processor clock signal error

Message value: -
Response: OFF2
:
Cause: The processor clock signal monitoring has signaled an error. This can involve the signal itself or its PLL.
Remedy: - Replace the hardware.
A30853 Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data

Message value: -
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The cyclic setpoint telegrams of the power unit were not refreshed on time.
Remedy: - Check the power unit and if required replace.
F30860 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error

Faults and alarms

Response: OFF2
:
Cause: There is an internal communication error in the power unit.
Error cause:
1 (= 01 hex):
Checksum error (CRC error).
2 (= 02 hex):
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
3 (= 03 hex):
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
4 (= 04 hex):
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
5 (= 05 hex):
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
6 (= 06 hex):
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
9 (= 09 hex):
Failure of the supply voltage.
16 (= 10 hex):
The receive telegram is too early.
17 (= 11 hex):
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
18 (= 12 hex):
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
19 (= 13 hex):
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
20 (= 14 hex):
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
21 (= 15 hex):
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
22 (= 16 hex):
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early.
25 (= 19 hex):
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
Note regarding the message value:
The individual information is coded as follows in the message value (r0949/r2124):
0000yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = error cause
F30895 Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Alternating cyclic data transfer error

Response: OFF2
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved.
Error cause:
11 (= 0B hex):
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
F30899 Power unit: Unknown fault

Message value: New message: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: A fault occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - Replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version.
- Upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit.
F30950 Power unit: Internal software error

Message value: %1
Response: OFF2
:
Information about the fault source.
Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the power unit to a later version.
A30999 Power unit: Unknown alarm

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: An alarm occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - Replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version.
F31120 Motor encoder: Encoder power supply fault

Response: ENCODER
Acknowledgment PULSE INHIBIT
:
Cause: An encoder power supply fault was detected.
Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line.
Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply.
Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative.
Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive.
Bit 4: The 24 V power supply via the inverter is overloaded.
Bit 5: Overcurrent at the EnDat connection of the converter.
Bit 6: Overvoltage at the EnDat connection of the converter.
Bit 7: Hardware fault at the EnDat connection of the converter.
Note:
If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder being
destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed.
Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1:
- Correct encoder cable connected?
- Check the plug connections of the encoder cable.
- SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22).
For fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- Replace the encoder or encoder cable.
- Measuring unit correctly connected at the converter?
- Replace the measuring unit or the cable to the measuring unit.
For fault value, bit 6, 7 = 1:
- Replace the defective EnDat 2.2 converter.
F31135 Motor encoder: Fault when determining the position (singleturn)

Faults and alarms
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: The encoder has identified a position determination fault (singleturn) and supplies status information bit by bit in an internal
status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the
fault value.
Note regarding the bit designation:
The first designation is valid for DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the second for EnDat 2.2 encoders.
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display).
Bit 2: Reserved (lighting).
Bit 3: Reserved (signal amplitude).
Bit 4: Reserved (position value).
Bit 5: Reserved (overvoltage).
Bit 6: Reserved (undervoltage)/hardware fault EnDat supply (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 7: Reserved (overcurrent)/EnDat encoder withdrawn when not in the parked state (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 8: Reserved (battery)/overcurrent EnDat supply (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 9: Reserved/overvoltage EnDat supply (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 11: Reserved/internal communication error (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 15: Internal communication error (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display).
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved).
Remedy: - Determine the detailed cause of the fault using the fault value.
- Replace the encoder if necessary.
Note:
An EnDat 2.2 encoder may only be removed and inserted in the "Park" state.
If an EnDat 2.2 encoder was removed when not in the "Park" state, then after inserting the encoder, a POWER ON (switch-
off/switch-on) is necessary to acknowledge the fault.
F31136 Motor encoder: Fault when determining the position (multiturn)

Faults and alarms
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: The encoder has identified a position determination fault (multiturn) and supplies status information bit by bit in an internal
status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed in the
fault value.
Note regarding the bit designation:
The first designation is valid for DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the second for EnDat 2.2 encoders.
Bit 2: Reserved (lighting).
Bit 3: Reserved (signal amplitude).
Bit 4: Reserved (position value).
Bit 5: Reserved (overvoltage).
Bit 6: Reserved (undervoltage)/hardware fault EnDat supply (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 7: Reserved (overcurrent)/EnDat encoder withdrawn when not in the parked state (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 8: Reserved (battery)/overcurrent EnDat supply (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 9: Reserved/overvoltage EnDat supply (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 15: Internal communication error (--> F3x110, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display).
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 25: Singleturn power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3).
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved).
- Replace the encoder if necessary.
Note:
An EnDat 2.2 encoder may only be removed and inserted in the "Park" state.
If an EnDat 2.2 encoder was removed when not in the "Park" state, then after inserting the encoder, a POWER ON (switch-
off/switch-on) is necessary to acknowledge the fault.
F31137 Motor encoder: Fault when determining the position (singleturn)

Faults and alarms
Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: A position determination fault has occurred in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.

yyxxxxxx hex: yy = encoder version, xxxxxx = bit coding of the fault cause
----------
For yy = 8 (0000 1000 bin), the following applies:
Bit 1: Signal monitoring (sin/cos).
Bit 8: F1 (safety status display) error position word 1.
Bit 16: LED monitoring.
Bit 17: Fault when determining the position (multiturn).
Bit 18: Single-step capability monitoring singleturn from the Safety channel.
Bit 19: ECRC, configuration error in the safety channel.
Bit 23: Temperature outside the limit values.
----------
Bit 0: Position word 1 difference between rotation counter and software counter (XC_ERR).
Bit 1: Position word 1 track error of the incremental signals (LIS_ERR).
Bit 2: Position word 1 error when aligning between incremental track signals and absolute value (ST_ERR).
Bit 3: Maximum permissible temperature exceeded (TEMP_ERR).
Bit 4: Power supply overvoltage (MON_OVR_VOLT).
Bit 5: Power supply overcurrent (MON_OVR_CUR).
Bit 6: Power supply undervoltage (MON_UND_VOLT).
Bit 7: Rotation error counter (MT_ERR).
Bit 11: Position word 1 status bit: singleturn position OK (ADC_ready).
Bit 12: Position word 1 status bit: rotation counter OK (MT_ready).
Bit 13: Position word 1 memory error (MEM_ERR).
Bit 14: Position word 1 absolute position error (MLS_ERR).
Bit 15: position word 1 LED error, lighting unit error (LED_ERR).
----------
Bit 8: encoder fault.
Bit 10: error in the internal position data transport.
----------
Bit 0: Position word 1 temperature outside limit value.
Bit 1: Position word 1 position determination error (multiturn).
Bit 2: Position word 1 FPGA error.
Bit 3: Position word 1 velocity error.
Bit 4: Position word 1 communication error between FPGAs/error in the incremental signal.
Bit 5: Position word 1 timeout absolute value/error when determining the position (singleturn).
Bit 6: Position word 1 internal hardware fault (clock/power monitor IC/power).
Bit 7: Position word 1 internal error (FPGA communication/FPGA parameterization/self-test/software).
Faults and alarms

Bit 20: Position word 2 communication error between FPGAs.
Bit 21: Position word 2 position determination error (singleturn).
Bit 23: Position word 2 internal error (self-test/software).
----------
Note:
For an encoder version that is not described here, please contact the encoder manufacturer for more detailed information
on the bit coding.
- If required, replace the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
F31138 Motor encoder: Fault when determining the position (multiturn)

Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: A position determination fault has occurred in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.

yyxxxxxx hex: yy = encoder version, xxxxxx = bit coding of the fault cause
----------
Bit 1: Signal monitoring (sin/cos).
Bit 16: LED monitoring.
Bit 17: Fault when determining the position (multiturn).
Bit 19: ECRC, configuration error in the safety channel.
Bit 23: Temperature outside the limit values.
----------
Bit 0: Position word 1 difference between rotation counter and software counter (XC_ERR).
Bit 1: Position word 1 track error of the incremental signals (LIS_ERR).
Bit 3: Maximum permissible temperature exceeded (TEMP_ERR).
Bit 4: Power supply overvoltage (MON_OVR_VOLT).
Bit 5: Power supply overcurrent (MON_OVR_CUR).
Bit 6: Power supply undervoltage (MON_UND_VOLT).
Bit 7: Rotation error counter (MT_ERR).
Bit 11: Position word 1 status bit: singleturn position OK (ADC_ready).
Bit 12: Position word 1 status bit: rotation counter OK (MT_ready).
----------
Bit 4: Position word 1 communication error between FPGAs/error in the incremental signal.
Bit 5: Position word 1 timeout absolute value/error when determining the position (singleturn).
Bit 7: Position word 1 internal error (FPGA communication/FPGA parameterization/self-test/software).
Bit 20: Position word 2 communication error between FPGAs.
Bit 21: Position word 2 position determination error (singleturn).
Faults and alarms
Bit 23: Position word 2 internal error (self-test/software).

----------
Note:
For an encoder version that is not described here, please contact the encoder manufacturer for more detailed information
on the bit coding.
- If required, replace the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
F31405 Motor encoder: Temperature in the encoder evaluation exceeded

Message value: temperature: [0.1 degrees C] %1, temperature sensor number: %2
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: An inadmissibly high temperature was detected in the encoder electronics or the encoder evaluation.
yyxxxx hex: yy = temperature sensor number, xxxx = measured module temperature in 0.1 °C.
Remedy: When using a Sensor Module: Reduce the ambient temperature of the Sensor Module.
Otherwise: Reduce the encoder ambient temperature.
A31700 Motor encoder: Functional safety monitoring initiated

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: Functional safety was activated. Self-test of the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder has detected a fault.
Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful.
Remedy: Replace encoder.
F31801 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing

Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Error cause:
10 (= 0A hex):
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - Check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance.
Faults and alarms
F31802 Motor encoder: Time slice overflow

Message value: %1
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: A time slice overflow for the motor encoder has occurred.
yx hex: y = function involved (Siemens-internal fault diagnostics), x = time slice involved
x = 9:
Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice.
x = A:
Time slice overflow of the average time slice.
x = C:
Time slice overflow of the slow time slice.
yx = 3E7:
Timeout when waiting for SYNO (e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation).
Remedy: Increase the current controller sampling time
Note:
For a current controller sampling time = 31.25 µs, use an SMx20 with Article No. 6SL3055-0AA00-5xA3.
F31804 Motor encoder: Sensor Module checksum error

Message value: %1
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module.
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Memory area involved.
xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
- Check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
F31805 Motor encoder: EEPROM checksum error

Message value: %1
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: Data in the EEPROM corrupted .
Faults and alarms
F31806 Motor encoder: Initialization error

Message value: %1
Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: The encoder was not successfully initialized.
Bit 0, 1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder
pulses/4).
Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful.
Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful.
Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input unsuccessful.
Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful.
Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful.
Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful.
Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful.
Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful.
Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V)
Bit 16: Internal fault - Fault when reading a register (CAFE)
Bit 17: Internal fault - Fault when writing a register (CAFE)
Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available
Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error.
Bit 20: Internal error - No zero crossover found.
Bit 28: Error while initializing the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit.
Bit 29: Error when reading out the data from the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit.
Bit 30: EEPROM checksum of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit incorrect.
Bit 31: Data of the EnDat 2.2 measuring unit inconsistent.
Note:
Bit 0, 1: Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0
Bits 2 ... 20: 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher
Remedy: Acknowledge fault.
If the fault cannot be acknowledged:
Bits 2 ... 9: Check encoder power supply.
Bits 2 ... 14: Check the corresponding cable.
Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p0404.
Bit 28: Check the cable between the EnDat 2.2 converter and the measuring unit.
Bit 29 ... 31: Replace the defective measuring unit.
F31813 Motor encoder: Hardware logic unit failed

Response: ENCODER
Faults and alarms

:
Cause: The logic unit of the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder has failed.
Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded.
Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error.
Remedy: When the error reoccurs, replace the encoder.
F31820 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error

Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned.
Error cause:
1 (= 01 hex):
2 (= 02 hex):
3 (= 03 hex):
4 (= 04 hex):
5 (= 05 hex):
6 (= 06 hex):
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
7 (= 07 hex):
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
8 (= 08 hex):
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
9 (= 09 hex):
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
16 (= 10 hex):
- Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
F31835 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder concerned. The nodes do not send
and receive in synchronism.
Error cause:
33 (= 21 hex):
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
34 (= 22 hex):
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
64 (= 40 hex):
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - Carry out a POWER ON.
F31836 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data

Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able to be
sent.
Error cause:
65 (= 41 hex):
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON.
F31837 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault

Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.

0000yyxx hex:
yy = component number,
xx = fault cause

Error cause:
32 (= 20 hex):
Error in the telegram header.
35 (= 23 hex):
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
66 (= 42 hex):
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
67 (= 43 hex):
Remedy: - Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
F31845 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
Error cause:
11 (= 0B hex):
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
F31850 Motor encoder: Encoder evaluation internal software error

Message value: %1
Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of the motor encoder.
1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not correct.
10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted.
11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect.
11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect.
11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect.
12000 ... 12008: communication with analog/digital converter faulted.
16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error.
16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error.
16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error.
16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error.
16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error.
Remedy: - Replace the Sensor Module.
- If required, upgrade the firmware.
F31851 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing

Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Sensor Module (motor encoder) involved and the Control Unit.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
Error cause:
10 (= 0A hex):
Remedy: - Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
- Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on) for the component involved.
F31860 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error

Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Error cause:
1 (= 01 hex):
2 (= 02 hex):
3 (= 03 hex):
4 (= 04 hex):
5 (= 05 hex):
6 (= 06 hex):
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
9 (= 09 hex):
The DRIVE-CLiQ communication from the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved to the Control Unit signals that the supply voltage
has failed.
16 (= 10 hex):
17 (= 11 hex):
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
18 (= 12 hex):
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
19 (= 13 hex):
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
20 (= 14 hex):
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
21 (= 15 hex):
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
22 (= 16 hex):
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too early.
25 (= 19 hex):
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
F31875 Motor encoder: Supply voltage failed

Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: The component involved has signaled that the 24 V supply has failed.
Error cause:
9 (= 09 hex):
The power supply voltage for the components has failed.
Remedy: - Check the supply voltage wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- Check the dimensioning of the 24 V supply, check cable lengths.
F31885 Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the converter and motor.
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Error cause:
26 (= 1A hex):
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
33 (= 21 hex):
34 (= 22 hex):
64 (= 40 hex):
98 (= 62 hex):
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - Check the OCC cable between the converter and motor.
- Check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
Note:
OCC: One Cable Connection (one cable system)
F31886 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Response: ENCODER
:
Faults and alarms
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from the Sensor Module involved (encoder 1) to the converter.
Data were not able to be sent.

0000yyxx hex:
xx = fault cause

Error cause:
65 (= 41 hex):
F31887 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault

Response: ENCODER
:
Cause: A fault has been detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for the motor encoder). Faulty hardware
cannot be excluded.

0000yyxx hex:
xx = fault cause

Error cause:
32 (= 20 hex):
35 (= 23 hex):
66 (= 42 hex):
67 (= 43 hex):
96 (= 60 hex):
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
97 (= 61 hex):
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
F31895 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Response: ENCODER
Faults and alarms
:

0000yyxx hex:
xx = fault cause

Error cause:
11 (= 0B hex):
F31896 Motor encoder DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties

Response: OFF2
:
the message
value:
Cause: The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for the motor encoder), specified by the fault value, have
changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when running up. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-
CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Component number.
- When a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be used.
- When a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables
should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
F31950 Motor encoder: Internal software error

Message value: %1
Response: ENCODER
:
The fault value contains information regarding the fault source.
Remedy: - If necessary, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module to a later version.
F36207 Hub: Overtemperature component

Faults and alarms
Message value: %1
Component: Terminal Board (TB)
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold.
Actual temperature in 0.1 °C resolution.
Remedy: - Check ambient temperature at component installation location.
A36211 Hub: Overtemperature alarm component

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the alarm threshold.
Actual temperature in 0.1 °C resolution.
Remedy: - Check ambient temperature at component installation location.
F36214 Hub: overvoltage fault 24 V supply

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold.
Actual operating voltage in 0.1 °C resolution
Remedy: - Check the supply voltage of the component involved.
F36216 Hub: undervoltage fault 24 V supply

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the fault threshold.
Faults and alarms
A36217 Hub: undervoltage alarm 24 V supply

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the alarm threshold.
N36800 Hub: Group signal

Message value: -
Component: None
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: The DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has detected at least one fault.
Remedy: Evaluates other actual messages.
A36801 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved.
Error cause:
10 (= 0A hex):
Remedy: - Check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
A36802 Hub: Time slice overflow

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: A time slice overflow has occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
xx: Time slice number xx
Faults and alarms
Remedy: - Reduce the current controller frequency.

F36804 Hub: Checksum error has occurred

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: A checksum error occurred when reading out the program memory on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy: - Check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- Replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
F36805 Hub: EEPROM checksum incorrect

Message value: %1
Response: NONE
:
Cause: The internal parameter data on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module is incorrect.
Remedy: - Check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- Replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
F36820 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error

Response: NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Error cause:
1 (= 01 hex):
2 (= 02 hex):
3 (= 03 hex):
4 (= 04 hex):
5 (= 05 hex):
6 (= 06 hex):
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
7 (= 07 hex):
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
8 (= 08 hex):
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
9 (= 09 hex):
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
16 (= 10 hex):
F36835 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Response: NONE
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved. The nodes
do not send and receive in synchronism.
Error cause:
33 (= 21 hex):
34 (= 22 hex):
64 (= 40 hex):
Faults and alarms
F36836 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data

Response: NONE
:
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved. Data were
not able to be sent.
Error cause:
65 (= 41 hex):
F36837 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault

Response: NONE
:
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Error cause:
32 (= 20 hex):
35 (= 23 hex):
66 (= 42 hex):
67 (= 43 hex):
- If required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket.
F36845 Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Response: NONE
:
Faults and alarms
Error cause:
11 (= 0B hex):
F36899 Hub: Unknown fault

Response: NONE
:
Cause: A fault occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy: - Replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware.
A36999 Hub: Unknown alarm

Response: NONE
Acknowledgment NONE
:
Cause: An alarm has occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module, which cannot be interpreted by the converter firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the converter.
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the converter.
Remedy: - Replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware.
- Upgrade the converter firmware.
Appendix A
A.1 Communication telegrams
A.1.1 Standard telegrams
A.1.1.1 Telegram 3
Overview
The telegram is suitable for closed-loop speed control of a drive and the control of 1 position
encoder.
Process da‐ Telegram 3

ta Control → Converter Converter → Control
Signal Explanation Signal Explanation
PZD01 STW1 Control word 1 ZSW1 Status word 1
PZD02 NSOLL_B 32-bit speed setpoint NIST_B Speed actual value 32-bit
PZD03
PZD05 G1_STW Control word for encoder 1 G1_ZSW Status word from encoder 1
PZD06 --- Not assigned G1_XIST1 Position actual value 1 from
PZD07 --- encoder 1
PZD08 --- G1_XIST2 Position actual value 2 from
PZD09 --- encoder 1
A.1.1.2 Telegram 5
Overview
The telegram is suitable for the closed-loop speed control and closed-loop position control of a
drive and to control 1 position encoder.
Requirement
PROFINET with IRT (Isochronous Real-Time)
Appendix

PZD03
PZD05 G1_STW Control word for encoder 1 G1_ZSW Status word for encoder 1
PZD06 XERR Position controller deviation G1_XIST1 Position actual value 1 from
PZD07 encoder 1
PZD08 KPC Gain factor for the position G1_XIST2 Position actual value 2 from
PZD09 controller encoder 1
A.1.1.3 Telegram 102
Overview
The telegram is suitable for closed-loop speed control of a drive and the control of 1 position
encoder.

PZD03
PZD05 MOMRED Torque reduction MELDW Message word
PZD06 G1_STW Control word for encoder 1 G1_ZSW Status word from encoder 1
PZD07 --- Not assigned G1_XIST1 Position actual value 1 from
PZD08 --- encoder 1
PZD09 --- G1_XIST2 Position actual value 2 from
PZD10 --- encoder 1
Appendix
Overview
The telegram is suitable for the closed-loop speed control and closed-loop position control of a
drive and to control 1 position encoder.
Requirement
PROFINET with IRT (Isochronous Real-Time)

PZD03
PZD05 MOMRED Torque reduction MELDW Message word
PZD06 G1_STW Control word for encoder 1 G1_ZSW Status word for encoder 1
PZD07 XERR Position controller deviation G1_XIST1 Position actual value 1 from
PZD08 encoder 1
PZD09 KPC Gain factor for the position G1_XIST2 Position actual value 2 from
PZD10 controller encoder 1
A.1.2 Supplementary telegrams
Overview
Supplementary telegram 700 transfers the status of Safety Integrated Functions.
Appendix

PZDn+1 --- Not assigned S_ZSW1B Status word of the Safety In‐
tegrated Functions
PZDn+2 --- S_V_LIMIT_B Actual limitation to the set‐
PZDn+3 --- point speed
Transfer of telegram 700 is not failsafe. A PROFIsafe telegram is required for failsafe transfer.
Overview
Telegram 750 is suitable to control the drive torque, e.g. for an electronic counterweight of a
vertical axis.

PZDn+1 M_ADD1 Acceleration compensation M_ACT Current torque
PZDn+2 M_LIM‐ Positive torque limit --- Not assigned
IT_POS
PZDn+3 M_LIM‐ Negative torque limit ---
IT_NEG
A.1.3 PROFIsafe telegrams
A.1.3.1 Telegram 30
Overview
Via a PROFIsafe telegram, the higher-level failsafe control activates the Safety Integrated
Functions of the converter and receives feedback on the status of the Safety Integrated
Functions.
Appendix
The converter receives data cyclically from the higher-level failsafe control and sends its send
data cyclically back to the failsafe control.

ta Failsafe control → Converter Converter → Failsafe control
PZD01 S_STW1 Safety control word 1 S_ZSW1 Safety status word 1
Overview
Via the PROFIsafe telegram, the higher-level failsafe control activates the Safety Integrated
Functions of the converter and receives feedback on the status of the Safety Integrated
Functions.
The converter receives data cyclically from the higher-level failsafe control and sends its send
data cyclically back to the failsafe control.

ta Failsafe control → Converter Converter → Failsafe control
PZD01 S_STW2 Safety control word 2 S_ZSW2 Safety status word 2
PZD02
PZD03 S_SLS_LIM‐ Variable limit value for SLS S_SLS_LIM‐ Variable limit value for SLS
IT_A IT_A_ACTIVE
PZD04 --- Not assigned reserved ---
PZD05 --- reserved ---
A.1.4 Control words, status words and message word
A.1.4.1 Control word 1 and status word 1
Overview
Control word 1 (STW1) activates the converter drive functions.
Status word 1 (ZSW1) signals the status of the converter to the higher-level control.
Appendix
Control word 1 (STW1)

Control → Converter
Bit Drive function Explanation
00 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down
time p1121 of the ramp-function gener‐
ator. The converter switches off the mo‐
tor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state.
If, in addition, bit 3 = 1, the converter
switches on the motor.
01 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the
motor then coasts down to a standstill.
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON com‐
mand).
02 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: The motor brakes to a stand‐
still with the OFF3 ramp-down time
p1135.
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON com‐
mand).
03 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch off motor (cancel pul‐
ses).
1 = Enable operation Switch on motor (pulses can be ena‐
bled).
04 0 = Inhibit RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp-
function generator output to 0.
1 = Do not inhibit RFG The ramp-function generator can be en‐
abled.
05 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function genera‐
tor stops at the current value.
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function genera‐
tor follows the setpoint.
06 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the
ramp-down time p1121 of the ramp-
function generator.
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates to the setpoint with
the ramp-up time p1120.
07 0 → 1 = Acknowledge faults Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is
still active, the converter switches to the
"switching on inhibited" state.
08 Reserved
09 Reserved
10 0 = No control by PLC Converter ignores the process data from
the fieldbus.
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts
the process data from the fieldbus.
11 Reserved
Appendix

Bit Drive function Explanation
12 Telegrams 102, 105 Telegrams 3, 5 Unconditionally --
1 = Open holding brake Reserved open motor hold‐
ing brake
13 Reserved
14 Telegrams 102, 105 Telegrams 3, 5 Switch-over from --
1 = Torque control active Reserved speed to torque
control
0 = Closed-loop speed con‐
trol active
15 Reserved
Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Converter → Control
Bit Status Explanation
00 1 = Ready for switching on Power supply switched on; electronics in‐
itialized; pulses inhibited.
01 1 = Ready for operation Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no
fault is active. With the command "Ena‐
ble operation" (STW1.3), the converter
switches on the motor.
02 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control
word 1, bit 3.
03 1 = Fault present The converter has a fault. Acknowledge
fault using STW1.7.
04 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active.
05 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active.
06 1 = "Switching on inhibited" active It is only possible to switch on the motor
after an OFF1 followed by ON.
07 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowl‐
edgement is necessary.
08 1 = Speed deviation within the tolerance range Setpoint / actual value deviation within
the tolerance range.
09 1 = Control requested The automation system has been reques‐
ted to take over control of the converter.
10 1 = Comparison speed reached or exceeded Speed is greater than or equal to the cor‐
responding maximum speed.
11 Telegrams 102, 103 Telegrams 3, 5 Internal diagnos‐ Comparison value
1 = Alarm class bit 0 1 = Torque limit reached tics for automation for current or tor‐
systems with inte‐ que has been
grated SINAMICS reached or excee‐
functionality ded.
12 1 = Alarm class bit 1 1 = Holding brake open Signal to open and
close a motor hold‐
ing brake.
Appendix

Bit Status Explanation
13 Reserved 0 = Alarm, motor over‐ -- Motor temperature
temperature alarm threshold
reached
14 1 = Torque control active 1 = Motor rotates clock‐ Switched over Internal converter
wise from speed to tor‐ actual value > 0.
0 = Motor rotates coun‐ que control Internal converter
ter-clockwise actual value < 0.
15 Reserved 0 = Alarm, converter -- Converter tempera‐
thermal overload ture alarm thresh‐
old reached
Appendix
A.1.4.2 Control word 2 and status word 2
Overview
Control word 2 (STW2) activates the converter drive functions.
Status word 2 (ZSW2) signals the status of the converter to the higher-level control.

Bit Drive function
00 Reserved
01 Reserved
02 Reserved
03 Reserved
04 Reserved
05 Reserved
06 Telegrams 102, 105 Telegrams 3, 5
1 = Speed controller integrator disable Reserved
07 Reserved
08 1 = Travel to fixed stop
09 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Controller sign-of-life bit 0

Bit Status
00 Reserved
01 Reserved
02 Reserved
03 Reserved
04 Reserved
05 1 = Open holding brake 1 = Alarm class bit 0
06 1 = Speed controller integrator disable 1 = Alarm class bit 1
07 Reserved
08 1 = Travel to fixed stop active
09 Reserved
Appendix

Bit Status
10 Telegrams 102, 105 Telegrams 3, 5
Reserved 1 = Pulses enabled
11 Reserved
12 Device sign-of-life bit 0
A.1.4.3 Encoder-1 control word and encoder-1 status word
Overview
The encoder control word (G1_STW) activates encoder functions.
The encoder status word (G1_ZSW) signals the status of the encoder to the higher-level
control.
Control word 1 (G1_STW) Status word 1 (G1_ZSW)

Control → Converter Converter → Control
Bit Encoder function Bit Encoder status
00 Request function 1 00 Function 1 active
04 Request command bit 0 04 Value 1
07 Mode 07 Value 4
08 Reserved 08 Measuring probe 1 deflected
09 Reserved 09 Measuring probe 2 deflected
10 Reserved 10 Reserved
11 Reserved 11 Acknowledge encoder fault active
12 Reserved 12 Reserved
13 Request absolute value cyclically 13 Cyclic absolute value
14 Request parking encoder 14 Parking encoder active
15 Acknowledge encoder fault 15 Encoder fault
Appendix
A.1.4.4 Safety control word 1 and safety status word 1
Overview
The higher-level control activates the Safety Integrated Functions of the converter using safety
control word 1 (S_STW1).
The converter signals the status of the Safety Integrated Functions to the higher-level control
using safety status word 1 (S_ZSW1).
Safety control word 1 (S_STW1)

Failsafe control → Converter
Bit Safety Integrated Explanation
Function
00 STO 1 Deselect STO
0 Select STO
01 SS1 1 Deselect SS1
0 Select SS1
02, 03 Reserved
04 SLS 1 Deselect SLS
0 Select SLS
05, 06 Reserved
07 Failsafe acknowl‐ 0 -
edgment 1 → 0 Acknowledge "Internal event" for a 1 → 0 signal change
08 Reserved
09 SLS limit value bit 0 Select SLS limit value Bit 1 Bit 0
10 SLS limit value bit 1 SLS1 0 0
SLS2 0 1
SLS3 1 0
SLS4 1 1
11 Reserved
12 SDI positive 1 Deselect SDI with positive direction of rotation
0 Select SDI with positive direction of rotation
13 SDI negative 1 Deselect SDI with negative direction of rotation
0 Select SDI with negative direction of rotation
14 Reserved
15 SSM 1 Deselect SSM
0 Select SSM
Appendix
Safety status word 1 (S_ZSW1)

Converter → Failsafe control
Bit Safety status Explanation
00 STO active 1 STO is active
0 STO is not active
01 SS1 active 1 SS1 is active
0 SS1 is not active
02, 03 Reserved
04 SLS active 1 SLS is active
0 SLS is not active
05, 06 Reserved
07 Internal event 1 The converter signals an "internal event"
0 Fault-free operation
08 Reserved
09 Active SLS limit val‐ Bit 1 Bit 0
ue bit 0 SLS1 0 0
10 Active SLS limit val‐ SLS2 0 1
ue bit 1 SLS3 1 0
SLS4 1 1
11 Reserved
12 SDI positive active 1 SDI positive direction of rotation is active
0 SDI positive direction of rotation is not active
13 SDI negative active 1 SDI negative direction of rotation is active
0 SDI negative direction of rotation is not active
14 Reserved
15 Status SSM 1 The absolute value of the speed is less than the SSM limit
0 The absolute value of the speed is equal to or greater than the SSM
limit
A.1.4.5 Safety control word 2 and safety status word 2
Overview
The higher-level control activates the Safety Integrated Functions of the converter using safety
control word 2 (S_STW2).
using safety status word 2 (S_ZSW2).
Appendix
Safety control word 2 (S_STW2)

Failsafe control → Converter
Bit Safety Function Explanation
00 STO 1 Deselect STO
0 Select STO
01 SS1 1 Deselect SS1
0 Select SS1
02, 03 Reserved – –
04 SLS 1 Deselect SLS
0 Select SLS
07 Failsafe acknowl‐ 0 –
edgment 1 → 0 Acknowledge "Internal event" for a 1 → 0 signal change
08 Reserved – –
09 SLS level bit 0 Select SLS level Bit 1 Bit 0
10 SLS level bit 1 Level 1 0 0
Level 2 0 1
Level 3 1 0
Level 4 1 1
11 Reserved – –
12 SDI positive active 1 Deselect SDI with positive direction of rotation
0 Select SDI with positive direction of rotation
13 SDI negative active 1 Deselect SDI with negative direction of rotation
0 Select SDI with negative direction of rotation
14 … Reserved – –
31

00 STO active 1 STO is active
0 STO is not active
01 SS1 active 1 SS1 is active
0 SS1 is not active
04 SLS active 1 SLS is active
0 SLS is not active
07 Internal event 1 The converter signals an "internal event"
0 Fault-free operation
08 Reserved – –
Appendix

09 Active SLS level bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0
10 Active SLS level bit 1 Level 1 0 0
Level 2 0 1
Level 3 1 0
Level 4 1 1
11 Reserved – –
12 SDI positive active 1 SDI positive direction of rotation is active
0 SDI positive direction of rotation is not active
13 SDI negative active 1 SDI negative direction of rotation is active
0 SDI negative direction of rotation is not active
14 Reserved – –
15 Status SSM 1 The absolute value of the speed is less than the SSM limit
0 The absolute value of the speed is equal to or greater than the
SSM limit
16 ... Reserved – –
23
24 F-DI 0 1 F-DI 0 has 1 signal
0 F-DI 0 has 0 signal
25 … Reserved – –
31
Appendix
A.1.4.6 Safety status word 1B
Overview
using safety status word 1B (S_ZSW1B).
Safety status word 1B (S_ZSW1B)

Bit Safety status
00 STO active
01 SS1 active
02 Reserved
03 Reserved
04 SLS active
05 Reserved
06 SLS selected
07 Internal event
08 Reserved
09 Select SLS Bit 0
10 Select SLS Bit 1
11 Reserved
12 SDI positive selected
13 SDI negative selected
14 Reserved
15 Safety message active
A.1.4.7 Message word
Overview
The message word (MELDW) signals the status of the converter to the higher-level control.
Message word (MELDW)

Bit Status
00 Reserved
01 Torque utilization < threshold 2
02 |n_actual| < speed threshold 3
Appendix
A.2 Directives and standards
Message word (MELDW)

Bit Status
03 |n_actual| < speed threshold 2
04 Reserved
05 Reserved
06 No warning motor overtemperature
07 No warning converter overtemperature
08 n-target/actual deviation within tolerance
09 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Servo enable
12 Drive ready
13 "Pulses enabled"
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
A.2.1 Directives, standards and certificates for the converter
Directives and standards that are complied with

The converters comply with the following directives and standards:
European Low-Voltage Directive

The converter fulfills the requirements stipulated in the Low-Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU, if
they are covered by the field of application of this directive.
European Machinery Directive

The converter fulfills the requirements stipulated in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, if
they are covered by the field of application of this directive.
However, the use of the converter in a typical machine application has been fully assessed for
compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety.
European EMC Directive

The compliance of the converters with the regulations of the Directive 2014/30/EU has been
verified through full compliance with IEC 61800‑3.
Appendix
Safety Integrated
The converters comply with the requirements relating to functional safety/safety of
machinery.
RoHS
The converters comply with directive 2011/65/EU regarding limiting the use of certain
hazardous substances.
Underwriters Laboratories (North American market)

Converters provided with one of the test symbols on the nameplate displayed fulfill the
requirements stipulated for the North American market as a component of drive applications,
and are appropriately listed.
UL file number for converters with 1 AC and 3 AC line connection: E192450
UKCA certification
The converter complies with the requirements for the British market (England, Wales and
Scotland).
Australia and New Zealand (RCM formerly C-Tick)

The converters showing the test symbols on the nameplate fulfill the EMC requirements for
Australia and New Zealand.
Under development: EMC requirements for South Korea

The converters with the KC marking on the nameplate satisfy the EMC requirements for
South Korea.
Certificates for download

• EC Declaration of Conformity: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109755363)
• Certificates for the relevant directives, prototype test certificates, manufacturer declarations
and test certificates for functions relating to functional safety ("Safety Integrated"): (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/24672/cert)
• Certificates for UL-certified products: (https://iq.ulprospector.com)
Standards that are not relevant
China Compulsory Certification

The converter does not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory Certification (CCC).
A.2.2 Directives, standards and certificates for the motor

The chapter lists the standards and directives that are applicable for the motor and which the
motor complies with.
Appendix
Standards that are complied with
Note
The standards listed in this manual are not dated.
You can take the currently relevant and valid dates from the Declaration of Conformity.
The motors of the type series SIMOTICS S, SIMOTICS M, SIMOTICS L, SIMOTICS T, SIMOTICS A,
called "SIMOTICS motor series" below, fulfill the requirements of the following directives and
standards:
• EN 60034‑1 - Rotating electrical machines – Dimensioning and operating behavior
• EN 60204‑1 - Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines; general requirements
Where applicable, the SIMOTICS motor series are in conformance with the following parts of
EN 60034:
Feature Standard
Degree of protection EN 60034‑5
Cooling 1)
EN 60034‑6
Type of construction EN 60034‑7
Connection designations EN 60034‑8
Noise levels 1) EN 60034‑9
Temperature monitoring EN 60034‑11
Vibration severity grades 1)
EN 60034‑14
1)
Standard part, e.g. cannot be used for built-in motors.
Relevant directives
The following directives are relevant for SIMOTICS motors.
European Low-Voltage Directive

SIMOTICS motors comply with the Low-Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.
European Machinery Directive

SIMOTICS motors do not fall within the scope covered by the Machinery Directive.
However, the use of the products in a typical machine application has been fully assessed for
compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety.
European EMC Directive

SIMOTICS motors do not fall within the scope covered by the EMC Directive. The products
are not considered as devices in the sense of the directive. Installed and operated with
a converter, the motor - together with the Power Drive System - must comply with the
requirements laid down in the applicable EMC Directive.
European RoHS Directive

The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the Directive 2011/65/EU regarding limiting the use
of certain hazardous substances.
Appendix
European Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

SIMOTICS motors comply with the 2012/19/EU directive on taking back and recycling waste
electrical and electronic equipment.
European Directive 2005/32/EC defining requirements for environmentally friendly

design of electric motors
The SIMOTICS motor series is not subject to Regulation (EC) No. 640/2009 for
implementation of this directive.
European Directive 2009/125/EC defining ecodesign requirements of electric motors

and speed controls
The SIMOTICS motor series is not subject to (EU) Regulation 2019/1781 for implementation
of this directive.
Eurasian conformity
SIMOTICS motors comply with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/Kazakhstan (EAC)
customs union.
China Compulsory Certification

SIMOTICS motors do not fall within the scope covered by the China Compulsory Certification
(CCC).
CCC negative certification (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/109769143)
Underwriters Laboratories
SIMOTICS motors are generally in compliance with UL and cUL as components of motor
applications, and are appropriately listed.
Specifically developed motors and functions are the exceptions in this case. Here, it is crucial
that you carefully observe the content of the quotation and that there is a UL or cUL mark on
the rating plate!
Quality systems
Siemens employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001
and ISO 14001.
Certificates for SIMOTICS motors can be downloaded from the Internet at the following link:
Certificates for SIMOTICS motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/13347/
cert)
China RoHS
SIMOTICS motors comply with the China RoHS.
You will find more information at:
China RoHS for 1FK2 and 1FT2 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109772626)
Appendix
China Energy Label
Name of the standard Minimum allowable values for energy efficiency and energy efficiency class of perma‐
nent-magnet synchronous motors (GB30253).
Date of entry into force July 1, 2020
Affected motors Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (without incorporated brake) with a rated
power of 0.55 kW to 90 kW and a rated speed of 500 r/min to 3000 r/min driven by
frequency converter with variable frequency on a power supply below 1000 V.
Motor requirements As of the implementation date of the guideline, all motors involved must be have the
"China Energy Label".
Affected Siemens products The SIEMENS motors involved are subject to the requirements of Guideline GB30253:
SIMOTICS S-1FK2, SIMOTICS S-1FT2
Examples of the "China Energy Label" and the motor rating plate:
China Energy Label
Figure A-1 ① Article number (diagram showing a typical 1FK2)

Motor rating plate
1FK2206-2AF00-1MB0
SIMOTICS 1P 1FK2206-2AF00-1MB0
3 ~ Mot. S YF K9662 3157 01 003
Z:
M0 6 Nm I0 4,5 A nmax6000 r/min
MN 5,4 Nm IN 4,15 A nN 3000 r/min
UiN 260 V Th.Cl.155 (F)
EN60034
m: 6 kg IP 64 IC410
Encoder AM22DQC G02
RN 000
Figure A-2 ② Article number of the basic motor type (example illustration for 1FK2)
Note
The article number ① stated on the China Energy Label corresponds to the article number of the
basic motor type ② (boldface type) in the motor article number.
Appendix
A.3 UL Markings
A.3 UL Markings
For US/Canadian installations (UL/cUL): The products are cULus-listed under File E192450.
• Suitable for use in a circuit that cannot provide more than 65 kA rms (symmetrical), max.
240 V.
• Protection of the branch circuit for individual drives must be guaranteed using Class J fuses
in accordance with the technical data.
Protection of the branch circuit for the group installation must be guaranteed using fuses of
Class J with up to 30 amps.
For other protection equipment and SCCRs (Short Circuit Current Rating) for individual drives
and group installations, see:
Protective Devices for SINAMICS S210 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109815356)
• This device must be installed in an enclosure that provides an environment with degree of
pollution 2 (controlled).
• Maximum ambient air temperature 50 °C.
• The device provides overtemperature and overload protection.
• Use copper wires with a permissible temperature of 75 °C for all power cables. You can also
use cables with a higher rated temperature value. It is not permissible to reduce the
conductor cross-section.
• For US/Canadian installations (UL/cUL): The products are cULus-listed under File E192450.
• Only for use in 200 ... 240 V or 380 ... 480 V line supplies with grounded neutral point (solidly
grounded wye).
• Solid-state motor overload protection: 300% of the FLA motor.
• Suitable for use in a circuit that cannot provide more than 65 kA rms (symmetrical), max.
480 V.
• Protection of the branch circuit for individual drives must be guaranteed using Class J fuses
in accordance with the technical data.
Protection of the branch circuit for the group installation must be guaranteed using fuses of
Class J with up to 100 amps.
For other protection equipment and SCCRs (Short Circuit Current Rating) for individual drives
and group installations, see:
Protective Devices for SINAMICS S210 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109815356)
Appendix
A.4 EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP
• This device must be installed in an enclosure that provides an environment with degree of
pollution 2 (controlled).
• Maximum ambient air temperature 50 °C. Maximum height 4000 m.
• The device provides overtemperature and overload protection.
• Use copper wires with a permissible temperature of 60/75 °C for all power cables. You can
also use cables with a higher rated temperature value. It is not permissible to reduce the
conductor cross-section.
Additional requirements relating to CSA compliance:

• Maximum height for CSA: 2000 m.
Motor overload protection according to IEC 61800‑5‑1 Ed.3 / UL 61800‑5‑1 Ed.2

The settings required to activate the motor overload protection according to IEC 61800‑5‑1 Ed.3
or UL 61800‑5‑1 Ed.2, see Chapter "Cooling (Page 377)".
MOTION-CONNECT connection system (OCC cable)

The recommended assignment of motors and cables can be found in the following chapters:
• "Motor-converter combinations for 1FK2 (Page 50)"
• "Motor-converter combinations for 1FT2 (Page 53)"
Other assignments are not possible.
The technical parameters of the cables are tailored to the requirements of the motors and
verified by system tests.
The following cables should be used for UL applications.
• Cables with connector size M12 (6FX8002-8QN05-☐☐☐☐, 6FX8002-8QE05-☐☐☐☐) have
a cable conductor cross-section of 0.82 mm² (AWG18).
• Cables with connector size M17 have a cable conductor cross-section of 0.82 mm² (AWG18).
• Cables with connector size M23 have a cable conductor cross-section of 1.5 mm² (AWG16)
or 2.5 mm² (AWG14).
Overview
In plants, systems and machines a distinction must be made between EMERGENCY OFF and
EMERGENCY STOP.
The Safe Torque Off (STO) and Safe Stop 1 (SS1) Safety Integrated Functions are suitable for
implementing an EMERGENCY STOP, but are not suitable for implementing an EMERGENCY
OFF.
Appendix
IEC 60204‑1 defines EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP:
• EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP are actions taken in an emergency.
• EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP reduce different risks in a system or machine:
– EMERGENCY OFF reduces the risk of electric shock.
– EMERGENCY STOP reduces the risk of unexpected movement.
Table A-1 The distinction between EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP
Action: EMERGENCY OFF EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP

Stop category 0 according to Stop category 1 according to IEC
IEC 60204‑1 60204‑1
Risk:
Electric shock Unexpected motion Motion

Measure to mini‐ Switch off voltage Prevent movement Stop movement
mize risk: Switch off hazardous voltages Prevent any hazardous movement Stop hazardous movement and
completely or in part prevent any restart.
Classic solution: Switch off the voltage: Switch off the power supply of the
drive:
Brake the motor and switch off the

.
drive power supply
Solution with the STO and SS1 are not suitable Select STO: Select SS1:
STO or SS1 Safety In‐ for switching off an electric
tegrated Function voltage.
integrated in the
drive:
. .
It is permissible that you switch off the converter power supply as well.
However, switching off the voltage is not required as a risk-reduction
measurement.
Appendix
A.5 List of abbreviations
Note
The following list of abbreviations includes the abbreviations and meanings used.
Abbreviation Derivation of abbreviation Meaning

A… Alarm Alarm
AC Alternating Current Alternating current
C… - Safety message
eCoL Electronic Certificate of License Electronic certificate for the licensee of the soft‐
ware verifying that the licensed software can be
used
COM Communication LED Status display of the communication
COMM Commissioning Commissioning
CU Control Unit Control Unit
DC Direct Current Direct current
DI Digital Input Digital input
DO Drive Object Drive Object
DP Decentralized Peripherals Distributed I/O
DSC Dynamic Servo Control Dynamic servo control
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only
Read‑Only Memory Memory
EMV Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit Electromagnetic compatibility
EN Europäische Norm European standard
F… Fault Fault
F-DI Failsafe Digital Input Failsafe digital input
FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Frequently asked questions
GB Gigabyte Gigabyte
GSD Gerätestammdatei Generic station description file: Describes the
features of a PROFIBUS device
HW Hardware Hardware
IBN Inbetriebnahme Commissioning
ID Identifier Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Com‐ International Electrotechnical Commission
mission
IP Internet Protocol Internet protocol
Kp - Proportional gain
LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode
M Masse Reference potential for all signal and operating
voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also referred to
as GND)
MB Megabyte Megabyte
MT Messtaster Measuring probe
Appendix

N… No Report No message or internal message (only as part of
the alarm list)
NTP Network Time Protocol Synchronizes the clocks in computer systems
and networks
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory Non-volatile read/write memory
OBT One Button Tuning Function for automatic optimization of drive
settings
OCC One Cable Connection One cable technology
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer Original Equipment Manufacturer
OSS Open Source Software Software with freely available source code
p… - Setting parameters
PDS Power Drive System Drive system
PE Protective Earth Protective ground
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Safety extra-low voltage
PFH Probability of dangerous failure per Probability of dangerous failure per hour
hour
PLC Programmable Logical Controller Programmable logic controller
PN PROFINET PROFINET
PZD Prozessdaten Process data
r… - Display parameters (read-only)
RAM Random Access Memory Memory for reading and writing
RJ45 Registered Jack 45 Term for an 8-pin socket system for data trans‐
mission with shielded or non-shielded multi-
wire copper cables
ROM Read-Only Memory Read-only memory
S1 - Continuous operation
SAM Safe Acceleration Monitor Safe acceleration monitoring
SBC Safe Brake Control Safe brake control
SBR Safe Brake Ramp Safe brake ramp monitoring
SD-Card SecureDigital Card Secure digital memory card
SCC Safety Control Channel Safety Control Channel
SDI Safe Direction Safe motion direction
SI Safety Integrated Safety Integrated
SIC Safety Info Channel Safety Info Channel
SIL Safety Integrity Level Safety integrity level
SLS Safely-Limited Speed Safely-limited speed
SP Service Pack Service pack
SPS Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung Programmable logic controller
SS1 Safe Stop 1 Safe Stop 1 (time-monitored, ramp-monitored)
SSM Safe Speed Monitor Safe feedback from speed monitor
STO Safe Torque Off Safe torque off
STW Steuerwort Control word
TIA Totally Integrated Automation Totally Integrated Automation
Tn - Integral time
Appendix

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UMAC User Management and Access Control User management and access control
UTC Universal Time Coordinated Universal time coordinated
Vdc - DC link voltage
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker Association of German Electrical Engineers
ZSW Zustandswort Status word
.PSFJOGPSNBUJPO
4*/".*$4
XXXTJFNFOTDPNTJOBNJDT
4*.05*$4
XXXTJFNFOTDPNTJNPUJDT
4JFNFOT"(
%JHJUBM*OEVTUSJFT
.PUJPO$POUSPM
10#PY
&3-"/(&/ (FSNBOZ
4DBOUIF23DPEF
GPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJ
POBCPVUUIF
QSPEVDU

S210 S-1FK2 S-1FT2 Op Instr 0323 en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S210 S-1FK2 S-1FT2 Op Instr 0323 en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Valid for converters with Article No. 6SL5310-1B...

Translation of the original instructions

Siemens AG A5E52380168B AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2023.

3.6 Motor-converter combinations for 1FT2.............................................................................. 53

5.3 PFH values ....................................................................................................................... 108

5.13 Functional safety ............................................................................................................. 151

7.5 Functions and menus....................................................................................................... 205

8.4.2 Simple basic parameterization (offline) ............................................................................. 254

8.9.4 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................... 317

12.2.15.27 1FK2210-3AB connected to 240 V 3 AC ............................................................................ 431

12.2.17.19 1FT2204-5AK connected to 230 V 1 AC / 240 V 3 AC......................................................... 481

12.2.18.29 1FT2206-4AF connected to 400 V 3 AC / 480 V 3 AC ......................................................... 532

13.3.6 FSC with 3 AC line connection.......................................................................................... 586

A.1.1.1 Telegram 3 ...................................................................................................................... 869

1.2 About this manual

1.2.2 Target group

1.2.3 Standard scope

1.2.4 Websites of third-party companies

1.3 SINAMICS documentation

Figure 1-1 The SINAMICS converter family

Table 1-1 SINAMICS documentation

Information Documentation class Content

1.4 Service and Support

1.4.1 Siemens Industry Online Support on the Web

1.4.2 Siemens Industry Online Support on the road

Figure 1-2 "Siemens Industry Online Support" app

1.4.3 Getting information about the product

Figure 1-3 QR code with ID link included

1.4.4 Feedback on the technical documentation

Figure 1-4 Requests and feedback

1.4.5 mySupport documentation

The configured manual can be exported in the PDF or XML format.

1.4.6 Technical support

1.4.8 Spare parts services

1.5 Important product information

1.5.1 Proper and intended use

1.5.2 Updates and constraints

1.5.3 Open-source software (OSS)

1.5.4 Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation

2.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic

2.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

2.4 Security information

2.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters or

① Controller (PLC), e.g. SIMATICS S7-1500

① ... ⑯ Same as in the previous figure

3.2 Commissioning tools

3.3 The scope of supply for the system components

For all converters

For converters with 1 AC line connection

For converters with 3 AC line connection

MOTION-CONNECT cable (OCC cable)

Position Description / technical specifications Position Description / technical specifications

3.5 Motor-converter combinations for 1FK2

3.5.1 Motor-converter combinations for 1 AC 200 ... 240 V

Motor Converter OCC cable

3.5.2 Motor-converter combinations for 3 AC 200 ... 240 V

Motor Converter OCC cable

3.5.3 Motor-converter combinations for 3 AC 380 ... 480 V

Motor Converter OCC cable

3.6 Motor-converter combinations for 1FT2

3.6.1 Motor-converter combinations for 1 AC 200 ... 240 V

Motor Converter OCC cable

/PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE/PUFUIF 5SBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE 5SBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE

"$77 "$77 "$77

/PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE /PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE /PUSBOTGPSNFSSFRVJSFE